Home

Ithaca 9000 Programmer`s Guide

Contents

1. 310F BOPOMOFO LETTER H FE37 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT 3110 BOPOMOFO LETTER J CURLY BRACKET 3111 BOPOMOFO LETTER Q FE38 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGH 3112 BOPOMOFO LETTER X CURLV BRACKET 3113 BOPOMOFO LETTER ZH FE39 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT 3114 BOPOMOFO LETTER CH TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET 3115 BOPOMOFO LETTER SH FE3A PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGH 3116 BOPOMOFO LETTER R TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET 3117 BOPOMOFO LETTER Z FE3B PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT 3118 BOPOMOFO LETTER C BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET 3119 BOPOMOFO LETTER S FESC PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT SIA BOPOMOFOLETTERA BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET AL PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT 311B BOPOMOFO LETTER O FE3D DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET 311C BOPOMOFO LETTER E A PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGH 311D BOPOMOFO LETTER EH FE3E DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET 311E BOPOMOFO LETTER Al Ge PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT 311F BOPOMOFO LETTER EI FES
2. 00e2 Latin small letter a with circumflex accent 0139 Latin capital letter with acute accent 00e3 Latin small letter a with tilde 013a Latin small letter with acute accent 00e4 Latin small letter a with diaeresis 013b Latin capital letter with cedilla 00e5 Latin small letter a with ring above 013c Latin small letter with cedilla 00e6 Latin small letter a with e 013d Latin capital letter with hacek 00e7 Latin small letter c with cedilla 013e Latin small letter l with hacek 00e8 Latin small letter e with grave accent 013f Latin capital letter with middle dot 00e9 Latin small letter e with acute accent 0140 Latin small letter with middle dot 00ea Latin small letter e with circumflex accent 0141 Latin capital letter with stroke 00eb Latin small letter e with diaeresis 0142 Latin small letter with stroke 00ec Latin small letter i with grave accent 0143 Latin capital letter n with acute accent 00ed Latin small letter i with acute accent 0144 Latin small letter n with acute accent 00ee Latin small letter i with circumflex accent 0145 Latin capital letter n with cedilla Diet Latin small letter i with diaeresis 0146 Latin small letter n with cedilla 00fo Latin smal
3. 03A0 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PI 0445 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER HA 03A1 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER RHO 0446 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER TSE 03A3 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER SIGMA 0447 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER CHE 03A4 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER TAU 0448 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHA 03A5 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON 0449 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHCHA 03A6 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PHI 044A CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER HARD SIGN 03A7 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER CHI 044B CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YERU 03A8 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PSI 044C CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SOFT SIGN 03A9 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMEGA 044D CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER E 03B1 GREEK SMALL LETTER ALPHA 044E CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YU 03B2 GREEK SMALL LETTER BETA 044F CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YA 03B3 GREEK SMALL LETTER GAMMA 0451 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER IO 03B4 GREEK SMALL LETTER DELTA 2010 HYPHEN 03B5 GREEK SMALL LETTER EPSILON 2013 EN DASH 03B6 GREEK SMALL LETTER ZETA 2014 EM DASH 03B7 GREEK SMALL LETTER ETA 2015 HORIZONTAL BAR 03B8 GREEK SMALL LETTER THETA 2016 DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE 03B9 GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA 2018 LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK 03BA GREEK SMALL LETTER KAPPA 2019 RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK 03BB GREEK SMALL LETTER LAMDA 201C LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK 03BC GREEK SMALL LETTER MU 201D RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK 03BD GREEK SMALL LET
4. Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix 0384 Greek tonos 0411 Cyrillic capital letter be 0385 Greek dialytika tonos 0412 Cyrillic capital letter ve 0386 Greek capital letter alpha with tonos 0413 Cyrillic capital letter ghe 0387 Greek ano teleia 0414 Cyrillic capital letter de 0388 Greek capital letter epsilon with tonos 0415 Cyrillic capital letter ie 0389 Greek capital letter eta with tonos 0416 Cyrillic capital letter zhe 038a Greek capital letter iota with tonos 0417 Cyrillic capital letter ze 038c Greek capital letter omicron with tonos 0418 Cyrillic capital letter i 038e Greek capital letter upsilon with tonos 0419 Cyrillic capital letter short i 038f Greek capital letter omega with tonos 041a Cyrillic capital letter ka 0390 Greek small letter iota with dialytika and tonos 041b Cyrillic capital letter el 0391 Greek capital letter alpha 041c Cyrillic capital letter em 0392 Greek capital letter beta 041d Cyrillic capital letter en 0393 Greek capital letter gamma 041e Cyrillic capital letter o 0394 Greek capital letter delta 041f Cyrillic capital letter pe 0395 Greek capital letter epsilon 0420 Cyrillic capital letter er 0396 Greek capital letter zeta 0421 Cyrillic capital letter es 0397 Greek capital letter eta 0422 Cyrillic capital let
5. Unicode Range Use 0x0000 0x007F CO Controls and Basic Latin 0x0000 0x001F CO controls 0x0020 0x007F ASCII 0x0080 OxOOFF Ci Controls and Latin 1 Supplement 0x00A0 OxOOFF Latini 0x0100 0x017F Latin Extended A 0x0180 0x024F Latin Extended B 0x0250 OxO2AF IPA Extensions 0x02B0 Ox02FF Spacing Modifier Letters 0x0300 Ox036F Combining Diacritical Marks 0x0370 Ox03FF Greek 0x0400 0x04FF Cyrillic 0x0500 0x052F Unassigned zone 0500 052F 0x0530 0x058F Armenian 0x0590 0x05FF Hebrew 0x0600 0x06FF Arabic 0x0700 0x08FF Unassigned 0700 08FF 0x0900 0x097F Devanagari Based on ISCII 1988 0x0980 0x09FF Bengali Based on ISCII 1988 0x0A00 Ox0A7F Gurmukhi Based on ISCII 1988 0x0A80 OxOAFF Gujarati Based on ISCII 1988 0x0B00 OxOB7F Oriva Based on ISCII 1988 0x0B80 OxOBFF Tamil Based on ISCII 1988 0x0C00 OxOC7F Telugu Based on ISCII 1988 0x0C80 OxOCFF Kannada Based on ISCII 1988 0x0D00 OxOD7F Malavalam Based on ISCII 1988 0x0D80 OxODFF Unassigned zone 0D80 0DFF 0x0D80 OxODFF Sinhala Pre Unicode 2 0 0x0E00 0x0E7F Thai Based on TIS 620 2529 0x0E80 OxOEFF Lao Based on TIS 620 2529 OxOFOO OxOF7F Burmese Pre Unicode 2 0 OxOFOO OxOFBF Tibetan OxOF80 OxOFFF Khmer Pre Unicode 2 0 0x1000 0x105F Tibetan Pre Unicode 2 0 0x1060 0x109F Mongolian Pre Unicode 2 0 0x10A0 0x10FF Georgian 0x1100 Ox11FF Hangul
6. return crc 100 10937 Rev F Page 311 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix B USB Printer Class Support USB Printer Class 7 Specification The USB interface conforms to USB Printer class standard published by the USB standards organization Version 1 1 dated January 2000 See www usb org developers devclass docs usbprinti 1 pdf The Model 9000 Printer will appear to the host svstem as a USB class 7 device There are 3 class specific requests that mav be made to the printer after enumeration Label bmRequest bRequest wValue windex wLength Data Type GET_DEVICE_ID 10100001B 0 Config Interface amp Length 1284 Index Alternate Maximum Device ID Setting String GET_PORT_STATUS 10100001B 1 Zero Interface 1 BYTE SOFT_RESET 00100001B 2 Zero Interface Zero None Table 38 USB Class 7 Control pipe commands GET_DEVICE_ID bRequest 0 This class specific request returns a device ID string that is compatible with IEEE 1284 See IEEE 1284 for syntax and formatting information The wValue field is used to specify a zero based configuration index The high byte of the wIndex field is used to specify the zero based interface index The low bvte of the wIndex field is used to specify the zero based alternate setting The device ID string is returned in the following format Offset 0 n 1
7. Figure 38 GS1 128 Example Note The data for GS1 128 barcodes must be formatted using Al fields as defined by the GS 1 specification and comply with the EAN UCC format The GS 1 ISO IEC 24724 standard specifies these formats Page 148 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes 2D Barcodes The Model 9000 supports a number of 2D and Stacked barcodes The terms stacked barcode or multi row barcode code are more accurately applied to those barcodes made up of a series of one dimensional barcodes The term Matrix code generally applies to 2 D codes that code the data based on the position of black spots within a matrix Each black element is the same dimension and it is the position of the element that encodes the data Note When printing 2D barcodes HRI Human Readable Information is generally not used The Model 9000 Supports HRI when printing 2D barcodes but makes no attempt to align the text with the barcode Note Space between the barcode and any HRI if active is controlled by the printer If HRI is not active the same white spacing is used It is up to the user to enforce a quite zone between the barcode and any user data Code 49 Code 49 barcode is a stacked barcode containing between 2 and 8 rows each separated by a separator bar Each row contains 16 words or character pairs with a start and stop character The last row
8. 0x8B 0x2039 SINGLE LEFT POINTING ANGLE OxCD 0x00CD LATIN CAPITAL LETTER WITH ACUTE QUOTATION MARK OxCE 0x00CE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER WITH Ox8C 0x0152 LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE CIRCUMFLEX 0x8D 0x0000 OxCF 0x00CF LATIN CAPITAL LETTER WITH DIAERESIS Ox8E 0x017D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON OxDO 0x00D0 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH Ox8F 0x0000 OxD1 0x00D1 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH TILDE 0x90 0x0000 OxD2 0x00D2 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH GRAVE 0x91 0x2018 LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK 0xD3 0x00D3 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE 0x92 0x2019 RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK 0xD4 0x00D4 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH 0x93 0x201C LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK CIRCUMFLEX 0x94 0x201D RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK 0xD5 0x00D5 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH TILDE 0x95 0x2022 BULLET 0xD6 0x00D6 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH 0x96 0x2013 EN DASH DIAERESIS 0x97 0x2014 EM DASH 0xD7 0x00D7 MULTIPLICATION SIGN 0x98 0x02DC SMALL TILDE 0xD8 0x00D8 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE 0x99 0x2122 TRADE MARK SIGN 0xD9 0x00D9 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH GRAVE Ox9A 0x0161 LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON OxDA Ox00DA LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH ACUTE 0x9B 0x203A SINGLE RIGHT POINTING ANGLE OxDB 0x00DB LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH QUOTATION MARK CIRCUMFLEX 0x9C 0x0153 LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE OxDC 0x00DC LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH 0x9D 0x0000 DIAERESIS 0x9E 0x017E LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON OxDD 0x00DD LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE Ox9F 0x0178 LATIN
9. Small Draft cpi Large Draft cpi NLQ cpi 0 17 33 14 86 13 1 16 13 9 12 24 2 14 86 13 11 6 3 13 9 12 24 10 9 4 13 11 6 10 4 5 12 24 10 9 9 90 100 10937 Table 16 Inter character Spacing Page 81 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Character Font ESC Begin 12 x 12 draft print mode ASCII ESC H lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 23H 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 35 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp QT EPOS ESC lt n gt Description The ESC f lt 0 gt command begins 12 x 12 draft print mode Draft print is provided to maintain compatibility with other Ithaca products ESC I Set print quality mode ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 49H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 73 gt lt n gt IPCL SOOT 24 x 10 Small amp QU 24 x 14 Medium amp QL 24 x 18 Large amp QS 24 x 20 Larger EPOS ESC x lt n gt and or ESC lt n gt Description The ESC lt n gt e g capital command begins draft large draft or near letter quality print mode Where n 0 24 x 10 Small 1 24 x 14 Medium 2 24x 18 Large 3 24 x 20 Larger 4 7 repeats 0 3 Note 1 In EPOS mode ESC x lt n gt is similar to ESC lt n gt ESC lt n gt performs a similar function Page 82 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC P Begin rotated font ASCII ESC P lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 50H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 80 gt lt n gt IPCL a
10. 304F HIRAGANA LETTER KU 30AE KATAKANA LETTER Gl 3050 HIRAGANA LETTER GU 30AF KATAKANA LETTER KU 3051 HIRAGANA LETTER KE 30BO KATAKANA LETTER GU 3052 HIRAGANA LETTER GE 30B1 KATAKANA LETTER KE 3053 HIRAGANA LETTER KO 30B2 KATAKANA LETTER GE 3054 HIRAGANA LETTER GO 30B3 KATAKANA LETTER KO 3055 HIRAGANA LETTER SA 30B4 KATAKANA LETTER GO 3056 HIRAGANA LETTER ZA 30B5 KATAKANA LETTER SA 3057 HIRAGANA LETTER SI 30B6 KATAKANA LETTERZA 3058 HIRAGANA LETTER ZI 30B7 KATAKANA LETTER SI 3059 HIRAGANA LETTER SU 30B8 KATAKANA LETTERZI 305A HIRAGANA LETTER ZU 30B9 KATAKANA LETTER SU 305B HIRAGANA LETTER SE 30BA KATAKANA LETTER ZU 305C HIRAGANA LETTER ZE 30BB KATAKANA LETTER SE 305D HIRAGANA LETTER SO 30BC KATAKANA LETTER ZE 305E HIRAGANA LETTER ZO 30BD KATAKANA LETTER SO 305F HIRAGANA LETTER TA 30BE KATAKANA LETTER ZO 3060 HIRAGANA LETTER DA 30BF KATAKANA LETTER TA 3061 HIRAGANA LETTER TI 30C0 KATAKANA LETTER DA 3062 HIRAGANA LETTER DI 30C1 KATAKANA LETTER TI 3063 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL TU 30C2 KATAKANA LETTER DI 3064 HIRAGANA LETTER TU 30C3 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL TU 3065 HIRAGANA LETTER DU 30C4 KATAKANA LETTER TU 3066 HIRAGANA LETTER TE 30C5 KATAKANA LETTER DU 3067 HIRAGANA LETTER DE 30C6 KATAKANA LETTER TE 3068 HIRAGANA LETTER TO 30C7 KATAKANA LETTER DE 3069 HIRAGANA LETTER DO 30C8 KATAKANA LETTER TO 306A HIRAGANA LETTER NA 30C9 KATAKANA LETTER DO 306B HIRAGANA LETTER NI 30CA KATAKANA LETTER NA 306C HIRAGANA LETTER NU 30CB KATAKANA LETTERNI 306D H
11. rna 126 Bar CodeS A ei tt eei an 128 Barcodes and Code e EE 130 Barcodes and Uni ode iii e ge eg 130 Linear Bar odes is ii a B eens 131 Code 39 and Code 39 Extended ss 131 Code 128 Code 128 A B and CH 133 Code 128 Auto ENCOdING ec erne sses e a e E E 136 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 2 of ege deer ied k ee EE 137 UPC EE 137 le 138 Page 8 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes AN EE 139 BANED ta Mae Gt aka ra et an Ea 140 EAN TA EE 140 EE EE 141 EAN 2 and EAN 5 Addenda barcodes 2 nn 141 EE ee ATA PA ae Ane ee err A na teeter eae ne 142 GOGADAN A i aad Anes ROAM OAR Oe A BOAR et ees 142 DataBar RSS GS 1 barcodes nn 143 GS1 Databar 14 GS1 Databar Omni directional ete 144 GSi Databar Truncated EE 145 GS1 Databar 14 Stacked and GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni 145 Gio l Darabar Limijeti sa id lactis acs idi id da wd hatin ean had eae 146 GS1 Databar Expanded s skiet e a 147 GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked sis iu visti ika istiva jeu va ed en We 147 A E E EE 148 2D BarCOG TEEN 149 fa ja L I MTA SIE 149 MO h o aaa cae A EE 150 PDF 417 Truncated PDF417 and Micro PDF A1 151 PDF AM ee eege Ee Ee 151 mruteateed PDF 4172 Asatte ah ed qat b ees d dara ba a da sachs acaba dec 152 Micro PDF AI E 153 Data Matrix Bar Gedo a i ca een tect a i na 154 Data Matrix EELER ie i A EN ee 154 Data MalrixiEGG OQ instr a ta A l l 154 Data Matrix enne i gas sidu a da da B dda
12. Note In EPOS mode the command performs line feeds in n 144 inch increments ESC 0 Set line spacing to 1 8 inch ASCII ESC 0 Hexadecimal 1BH 30H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 48 gt IPCL amp ST EPOS ESC 2 Description The ESC 0 command sets the default line spacing to 1 8 inch 27 216 inch which is the standard eight lines per inch line spacing at initial power up Note In EPOS mode the command sets 1 6 inch spacing or six lines per inch Page 72 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC 1 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC A ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC 2 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 100 10937 Set line spacing to 21 216 inch or 7 72 inch ESC 1 1BH 31H lt 27 gt lt 49 gt amp SG none The ESC 1 command sets the default line spacing to 21 216 inch Use 21 216 inch line spacing for all points addressable APA graphics printing Set variable line spacing to n 72 inch ESC A lt n gt 1BH 41H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 65 gt lt n gt none none The ESC A lt n gt command sets the default line spacing to n 72 Setn 1 to 85 Variable line spacing does not take effect until enabled by the ESC 2 command The command is provided to maintain backward compatibility with the Ithaca Series 50 OKIDATA IBM and other printers It can also be used to print on p
13. k A n 203 n 8 Cut to Center of black dot 0 8 20 to first line of print m 203 m 8 Dot Width Back of Ticket Dimensions in Inches mm the Black Dot paper Option is set the black dot position specified by this Note This command interacts with the Feed to Black Dot command If command will be used for the Cover Close operation Black Dot Calibration There is a self test option that will automatically configure the black dot feature to cut on the black dot Note If you don t want to cut on the black dot you should disable the black dot position calibration feature in the configuration Page 78 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Character Pitch Character pitch commands that set specific characters per inch cpi disable any right side spacing set by the ESC V lt n gt command In addition when font changes are made the character pitch is maintained DC2 Begin 10 cpi character pitch ASCII DC2 Hexadecimal 12H Decimal lt 18 gt IPCL amp F3 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The DC2 command sets 9 905 characters per inch print pitch ESC Begin 12 cpi character pitch ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 3AH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 58 gt IPCL amp F2 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC command sets 12 235 characters per inch print pitch SI Begin 17 cpi character pitch ASCII SI Hexadecimal OFH Decimal l
14. ESC ESC 3 lt 27 gt ESC a lt l1 gt lt 201 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 187 gt CR LF lt 186 gt ITHACA PRINTERS lt 186 gt CR LF lt 186 gt lt 186 gt CR LF lt 200 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 188 gt CR LF ESC a lt 0 gt ESC 0 ESC P lt 15 gt CR LF ST 2000 OP 00067 Ef 021 0035 CR LF KLEENEX FAM D04 QTY 1 1 68 J CR LF RITZ D01 QTY 1 2 50 D CR LF CHIPS D01 QTY 1 1 50 D CR LF STORAGE BAG D04 QTY 1 1 50 J CR LF SUB TOTAL 7 18 CR LF SALES TAX 1 50 CR LF Se CR LF TOTAL 7 68 CR LF CASH TEND 20 00 CR LF CHANGE DUE 12 23 CR LF CR LF Figure 69 Example Commands for a Sample Receipt 100 10937 Rev F Page 229 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ST 2000 OP 00067 TE 021 0035 KLEENEX FAM DO04 QTY 1 1 68 J RITZ D01 QTY 1 2 50 D CHIPS DO1 QTY 1 1 50 D STORAGE BAG D04 QTY 1 1 50 J SUB TOTAL 7 18 SALES TA
15. File system Support The Model 9000 Printer supports a file system to support TransAct Technologies fonts and allow the user to load and link custom fonts The POSFile tool provides a Windows interface to the printer and will allow fonts and configuration files to be loaded into the printer This tool can read and write the POR INI file however the TransAct supplied fonts cannot be read but can be deleted from the printer TrueType and Compressed Stroke Fonts are supported by the Model 9000 Printer User defined TrueType fonts many be defined and loaded into the printer however once in the printer they cannot be extracted This protects the copyrights on the font 34 Some but not all features of Open Type fonts are supported Compressed Stroke fonts are supplied by MonoType Inc 100 10937 Rev F Page 275 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide POR INI file The PORIINI file is used to control how fonts are encoded named identified and linked as well as allowing how the font to be printed is controlled In addition the POR INI file defines how each legacy font is defined and printed It also controls several other features and functions The POR INI file is divided into sections e encoding This section defines how the printer encodes the character set It may be ASCII with code page or Unicode If ASCII is selected the default code page is selected and or defined in this section e font
16. Table 23 Invalid Al Code Associations Note It is beyond the scope of this document to define all the Al fields there meaning requirements and restrictions The Model 9000 will do minimal validation of the Al fields to assure that the barcode can be generated It will not assure that the barcode meets the GS 1 standard Refer to the GS 1General specification for additional information 100 10937 Rev F Page 179 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide GS 1 Al fields with a Check Digit Refer to the GS 1 General specification for the method used to calculate the check digit In some cases the check digit is not encoded into the barcode However the check digit is always shown in the human readable interpretation and transmitted by the decoder even though it is not explicitly encoded in RSS 14 and RSS Limited symbols The printer does not check the check digit and whatever is passed in will be printed in the HRI The printer however will format the barcode without the check digit and the barcode reader will reinsert it into the resulting data The result is that if the check digit passed in is not correct it will be printed in the HRI but may be reported as a different character by the reader To make check digit generation easier the printer will optionally automatically generate and insert a check digit in several Al fields To trigger automatic insertion the GS 1 Al check digit option should be activated and a
17. character used in the location of the check digit Al Data Content Check Digit Data Title Location 00 SSCC Serial Shipping Container Code n2 n18 n18 SSCC 01 Global Trade Item Number GTIN n2 n14 n12 n13 or n14 GTIN 02 GTIN of Contained Trade Items n2 n14 W I CONTENT 253 Global Document Type Identifier GDTI n3 n13 n 17 n13 DOC ID 402 Shipment Identification Number n3 n17 ni7 SHIPMENT NO 410 Ship to Deliver to Global Location n3 n13 n13 SHIP TOLOC Number 411 Bill to Invoice to Global Location n3 n13 n13 BILL TO Number 412 Purchased from Global Location n3 n13 n13 PURCHASE FROM Number 413 Ship for Deliver for Forward to Global n3 n13 n13 SHIP FOR LOC Location Number 414 Identification of a Phvsical Location n3 n13 n13 LOC No Global Location Number 415 Global Location Number of the Invoicing n3 n13 n13 PAY TO Party 8003 Global Returnable Asset Identifier n4 n13 an 16 n13 GRAI GRAI 8018 Global Service Relation Number n4 n18 n18 GSRN GSRN Table 24 Al s supported by automatic check digit generation Price and Five Digit Price fields are not supported by automatic check character generation Note If additional Al fields with check characters are added to the GS1 standards they will not be processed by the printer unless the printer s firmware is updated Note Automatic Check Character generation for Price Weight Four Digit Page 1
18. Color Graphics The Model 9000 has a two color option The Model 9000 has a two color and is not a full color printer A full color printer forms the various colors of an image by mixing inks of different colors on the paper The amount of each color determines the hue Typically the paper is white and no ink produces a white Mixing yellow and cyan produces a red and mixing cyan magenta and yellow in equal amounts produces a black or gray Page 230 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts The Model 9000 is a two color printer It has white the paper and two predefined colors Typically one of the colors is black and the other is a highlight color The high light color is primarily used in text printing to highlight a line and typically is red When the Model 9000 generates graphics both colors are used to generate the image Because the program that generates the graphic image data should not need to be aware of the colors available in the printer three color planes are sent to the printer The printer is aware of what colors the cartridges are that will generate the image The printer will converts the full color image information into a two color image If the Model 9000 printer is configured with a black color and a highlight color there is no point in the printers mixing the highlight color with black If however the Model 9000 printer is configured with two colors other than black the printe
19. Description IEEE 1284 device ID string including length in the first two bytes in big endian format Type Data GET_PORT_STATUS bRequest 1 This class specific request returns the printer s current status in a format which is compatible with the status register of a standard PC parallel port The following table defines the data returned 7 6 Reserved Reserved for future use device shall return these bits reset to zero 5 Paper 1 Paper Empty 0 Paper Not Empty Empty 4 Select 1 Selected 0 Not Selected 3 Not Error 1 No Error 0 Error 2 0 Reserved Reserved for future use device shall return these bits reset to zero Page 312 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix SOFT_RESET bRequest 2 This class specific request flushes all the USB buffers and resets the Bulk OUT and Bulk IN pipes to their default states This request clears all USB stall conditions This reset does NOT change the USB addressing or USB configuration or actually reset the printer Note Version 1 0 of the USB printer class specification incorrectly stated that the bmRegestType for SOFT RESET was 0010001 1B Class 7 USB Interface The Model 9000 USB interface supports all three interfaces The Get Device ID interface is configurable and may be disabled to prevent the host operating system from attempting to automatically install a Print Driver Note The Print Driver is not the USB prin
20. ESC EM P lt n gt Activate Periodic Status Back ASCII ESC EM P lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 50H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 80 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS None Description This command activates the periodic status back feature It will automatically return an ENQ lt 20 gt status See page Error Bookmark not defined on a periodic bases The value of n is the period in 100 MS intervals This command is saved through power cycles Once set it need not be set again however you can set it the same value repeatedly as it is only saved if it is changed In general it should not be changed on a regular bases Where n Interval in 100 MS increments IE 20 2 Seconds Setting the value to 0 disables the feature Note Periodic status back can also be activated with the ESC EM p command however it is not save during a power cycle ESC EM p lt n gt Activate Periodic Status Back ASCII ESC EM p lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 70H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 112 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS None Description This command temporarily disables and or enables the periodic status back feature if previously activated with the ESC EM P command Where n 0 disables PSB and n non zero Enables PSB at the interval defined by the ESC EM P command If not previously activated with the ESC EM P command this command will activate it but the setting is not saved through a power cycle
21. ESC p 5 lt n gt Enable disable paper feed 202 ESC q lt n gt Query marker 200 ESC R Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops 70 75 ESC S lt 0 gt Select superscript 96 ESC S lt 1 gt Select subscript 96 ESC T End superscript or subscript 96 ESC U lt 0 gt Begin bi directional print 111 ESC U lt 1 gt Begin unidirectional print 110 ESC V lt n gt Set intercharacter spacing 81 ESC W lt n gt Double wide double high mode 93 ESC x lt n gt Open cash drawer 201 ESC X lt n gt lt n gt Set left right print margin 199 ESC y lt n gt Set feature control 205 ESC Y ns lt n gt Print full speed double density graphics 109 ESC Z lt n gt lt n gt Print quad density graphics 109 FF Set form feed 75 77 HT Set horizontal tab 69 LF Set line feed 69 SI Begin 17 cpi 79 SO Begin one line double wide print 92 SOH lt n gt Begin multi drop control 205 VT Set vertical tab 74 10 CPI Character Pitch Beginning 79 12 CPI Character Pitch Beginning 79 12 x 12 Draft Print Mode Beginning 82 17 CPI Character Pitch Beginning 79 24 CPI Character Pitch Beginning 79 APA Graphics Printing 109 Application Development 62 Audio Alert Configuring 202 Auido alert 202 Auto cut Performing 201 Auto Line Feed Beginning 76 Back Space 70 Bar Code Print 128 131 133 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 15
22. Parallel Port Inquire In IEEE 1284 mode inquire responses are placed in an IEEE 1284 transmit queue When the IEEE 1284 reverse channel is open the responses are returned to the host It is important that after each request the reverse channel be opened Inquire responses remain in the queue until read If the ENQ lt 9 gt command is sent to the printer the IEEE 1284 buffer will be cleared and only the response to the ENQ lt 9 gt will remain Page 304 Rev F 100 10937 Communications FST 280 Programmer s Guide Display Pass Through The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the printer The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable The host sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display The printer does not provide power to the display During normal printer operation no data is passed to the display In pass through mode all received data is passed on to the display The restrictions and considerations for pass through are 1 2 3 Pass through only works on serial printers with DTR flow control XON XOFF mode does not work correctly All inquire ENQ commands are active when not in actual pass through mode If for example an ENQ command for cash drawer status is received by the printer the response is transmitted When pass through is active all data except the ENQ is passed The printer does not look for
23. e Code 93 9000 shows check digit in HRI 280 8000 do not e JAN8 9000 does not inset HRI in JAN8 barcodes e JAN13 9000 insets HRI in UPC style all other printers do not e PDF417 The iTherm 280 does not align barcodes on the right the M9000 aligns barcodes both on center and right e UPC E M9000 insets HRI in UPC style the iTherm 280 does not Graphics The M9000 supports gray scale printing through the selection of various paper types The M9000 supports monochrome 16 color 256 color and 256bit color bitmap files The iTherm 280 only supported 16 color or monochrome bitmap files Dynamic code page definition Dynamic code page definition is supported only when in ASCII mode Unicode is used internally so all source character locations are Unicode addresses Page 266 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control USB 2 0 The M9000 supports High and Full speed USB 2 0 operation The Composite USB mode where Virtual serial and USB Printer support operate concurrently is no longer supported in the standard printer The USB CDC class of operation is now supported as a configurable option Ethernet The Ethernet adapter used with the M9000 supports a UDP real time status feature that allows printer connected to the Ethernet link to report status to a single or multiple hosts without having the TCP IP link open This allows multiple printers to be tracked in real time independently of the
24. remove foreign particles or paper dust which may degrade print quality Be sure to set the paper width in the printers configuration to agree with the paper being used 40 58 or 80 mm width When using auto width adjustment be sure to specify if 80mm or 58mm paper is to be used Once narrow paper has been used some part of the print head always contacts the platen If 80 mm paper is used after setting up and running 40 or 58 mm paper the head may be affected Changing the paper width from narrow to wide 40 or 58 to 80 mm may show printing defects Once you set the paper width to narrow 40 or 58 mm you should not expect to go back to 80mm without some print defects The print head has 640 elements however typically only 576 are used with 80 mm paper 448 for 58mm paper and 288 for 40 mm paper 10 The printer is designed to use 80 mm paper Whereas the printer can be configured to use all 640 print elements there is no guarantee that all the elements will fall on the paper 100 10937 Rev F Page 25 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Media Specifications Receipt Paper Paper feed method Friction feed Paper feed pitch Default 1 8 inch Monochrome roll diameter 101 6 mm 4 0 inches Max paper thickness 0 05 to 0 09 mm 002 to 0035 inches Paper Width 57 5 5 mm 2 26 02 inches wide 79 5 5 mm 3 13 02 inches wide Core Inside diameter 445 to 635 inches Outside diam
25. 2 16 inch and 7 72 inch 73 Line Spacing Set 1 8 inch 72 Line Spacing Set n 216 inch 72 Line Spacing Variable Setting 73 Machanical Error Status Inquire 212 Macro Data Run from user Store 123 Macro Data Saving 120 Macro Data Saving in user Store 122 Macro Record Beginning 119 Macro Record Ending 122 Macro Record Ending name 119 Macro Record Start 127 Macro Record Starting 119 121 Macro Record Stop 127 Macro Record Stop and Save 127 Macro Flag on Startup 123 Microline Emulation 62 Multidrop configuration 307 Multi Drop Control Beginning 205 Multiline Mode 93 Off line active 308 One Line Double Wide Print Beginning 92 One Line Double Wide Print Canceling 93 Output Paper end Signals Selecting Paper Sensors 203 paper Feed Enable Disable 202 Paper Motion 69 Paper Out Sensor disable 199 Paper Out Sensor enabling 199 Paper Out Status Inquire 211 Paper Sensors Selecting to Stop Printing 203 100 10937 Parallel Interface Connector 38 Parallel port timing 293 PcOS Control Codes 63 PcOS Quick Reference Chart 63 Plug and Play parallel 297 Serial 302 Power Control Remote 284 285 Power Cycle Status Inquire 212 Power cycle recovery 307 Print Buffer Flow 300 Print Buffer Size 302 Print buffer control 200 Print buffers 286 Print Current Configuration 281 Print Current totals 281 Print margins setting 199 Print Quality Mode Setting 82 Print Style Setting 94
26. 410 Invalid Check Digit Calculation Field Length 411 Invalid Check Digit Calculation Field Data 412 Too many Al s to handle 25 Max Maxicode 500 Invalid Mode 501 Invalid Secondary String 502 Invalid option 503 Invalid Countrv code field 504 Invalid Service code field 505 Requires Postal Service and Countrv 506 Requires Postal Service and Countrv PDF 417 600 Securitv value out of range 601 Number of columns out of range 603 Number of code words per row too small 604 Data too long for specified number of columns 605 Internal index out of range 606 Specified width out of range 607 Specified symbol size too small for data UPC 700 Invalid UPC E data 701 Invalid ISBN 702 Incorrect ISBN check 703 UPC A input wrong length 704 UPC E input wrong length Composite 800 Invalid Al 90 data 801 2D component input data too long 802 No message in 2D composite 803 CC C only valid with GS1 128 linear component 804 EANX portion is invalid Page 198 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Miscellaneous Printer Control ESC 8 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC 9 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC X ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 100 10937 Disable paper out sensor ESC 8 1BH 38H lt 27 gt
27. AR a AR a itfa a se Gio a N 0002 U 0021 EXCLAMINATION MARK EO ad oo as H eier a a fat Bene SS a GEES CR 03 sO Deseo 20 l geg Sea ili 04 seat Da ete i A tet 05 OD d eps TE l E 06 EE Ose ee Rae aE 07 sl lg AI SE E E E d 08 e tA o ROEE N 0004 U 0023 NUMBER SIGN 09 d HI es HE erd E 0 HL eege EZE d SE e E EE 2 EE D als 00 3 esche d ae 05 00 00 4 Se OO van 06 00 00 5 ran OO xe 07 00 00 6 wate HI x cis ne 08 00 0000 SM E 09 0000000 B kt Sa Seat te 0 0000000 Q2 E 1 0000 00 20 0000 2 2 00S 0 0 cai 21 0000 3 00200 es 22 0000 4 00 0000 AS L A EVA ATA 5 0000000 DAL l spe ana a Bx aa 6 0000000 N 0003 U 0022 QUOTATION MARK 7 0000 00 GET u Na ated ete sige 8 00 00 O2A O AERA 9 00 00 03 00 00 20 00 00 04 00 00 21 Gidai Sus 05 00 00 AE i Sree te a 06 00 00 Se te drelwrie bcos ace 07 00 00 DAL Leif ki ke jek Sas e Figure 73 Bit mapped font file format The characters must be in sequential order and must be assigned Unicode character codes N 0001 is a sequence number in hex and is not used in controlling character generation or order U 0021 is the Unicode address in hex and the characters must be in ascending Unicode address order Custom Fonts The Model 9000 supports TrueType fonts There are several companies that will provide custom character sets The Model 9000 uses fonts provided by Monotype You can contract Monotype through their
28. Buffer size should not be used to control the printer when the USB interface is used The printer will automatically adjust the buffer to USB packet size Page 302 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Serial Device Identification The serial device must report its identification to the system using an identification string at 1200 baud The identification string consists of 18 fields that identify the device class of the device and other compatible devices Only five of the fields are required by all serial devices all others are optional The identification string used by the Model 9000 Printer follows 028H Start of ASCII response 0 1 PnP Rev IPR0210 Unique ID IPR plus revision level PRINTER Printer M9000 PcOS Model SC 19200 N 8 1 Serial Configuration Baud Parity Bits Stop Bits xxH Check sum 029H End PnP M9000 PcOS by special order When the identification is complete the printer returns to the baud rate specified in the configuration O Note The model field may be altered to generate PnP ID s other than Serial Port Inquire The serial port inquire is more straightforward than parallel mode The serial acknowledged ACK or not acknowledged NAK responses follow a uniform format the ACK or NAK is always followed by the command ID that requested it This makes the design of the host application easier because the response can be identified and always follows the same form
29. GS1 Composite barcode consists of a linear component that encodes the item s primary data and an adjacent 2D composite component that encodes supplementary data The linear component will be EAN GS1 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 UPC A UPC E or any barcode in the Databar group The supplementary 2D composite component will be one of the following Composite Code A barcode which is derived from the MicroPDF417 specification for EAN 8 EAN 13 UPC A UPC E GS1 DataBar barcodes or Composite Code C barcode which is derived from the PDF417 standard GS1 128 EAN 128 barcodes MicroPDF417 barcodes are assigned a specific matrix of row column combinations This matrix limits the amount of data that may be encoded in 2D composites The 2D composites can encode up to 56 numeric characters Alpha characters and certain punctuation characters may also be encoded in the composite but the maximum number of characters that can be encoded will be reduced significantly The composite component is referred to as the CC component and may be encoded as CC A CC B or CC C e CC A a variant of MicroPDF417 CC B a MicroPDF417 symbol with new encoding rules e CC C Composite Code C barcodes is only used as the composite for GS1 128 and is based on PDF417 standards can encode approximately 800 characters The composite portion is saved in the composite buffer This buffer is loaded using the composite data command and is processed as GA data as the barcode is p
30. Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts also fixed pitch however Latin character in the font are basically 1 2 the width of the typical Asian character Character Size The character generation engine used in the Model 9000 internally uses a standard point based system to specify the character size One point is 1 72 of an inch Therefore a 72 point character would form a character suitable to generate one line per inch printing The typical application might refer to a 12 point character This is the character height and not the width The character width typically varies on character by character bases for example the lower case i is much narrower than the upper case W Font selection commands for selecting character sizes in legacy applications are also supported For printers such as the Model 9000 two or three character sizes are generally predefined with a dot matrix size of 10x24 or 13x24 dots and this fixed size may then be double or tripled to provide larger characters when needed To supply legacy support the Model 9000 will automatically select the appropriate character size to support the legacy font and character scaling commands In the Model 9000 the horizontal and vertical point size may be set independently Typically this type of printer would print a tall narrow mono spaced character Tall narrow mono spaced character provides a very readable print with easy column alignment while usi
31. POSjet PowerPocket iTherm PRINT IT STICK IT POWEROLL RECEIPTS THAT REGISTER and TransAct are registered trademarks and Epic 950 Epicenteral Flex Zone imPort ithaColor KITCHENjet Momentum QDT and TicketBurst are trademarks of TransAct Technologies Inc QR Code is registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in JAPAN and other countries EPSON and ESC POS are registered trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation in Japan and other countries Page 4 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Table of Contents Change Historie i d add 2 Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference SLALSMOENE A PA 3 Regulatory Compliance Lee eke KENNEN KKK ENEE KE EE EE EE ENKEN K RRE R EEN HOME HE EN 3 DISCIAIMNGE EE 4 COP WMG ia i a Ee dee tad 4 RRE 4 Table OF COnIGING i inn ira Bel B aa Da Barat BOR dk 5 el 14 MEER GS sige bie Sed a EEN 16 About the Model 9000 Printer NEEN KEREN KEREN ERR ER KREE KREE ERR ER E NR EN 17 Who Should Read This Guide AAA 17 What Is Included in This Guide 17 WV ARRAY leen 17 Technical lee EE 18 On line Technical Support iii ie aa re tena d e e ai reb eegener 18 Telephone Technical Z2uEROEE 2 vettestugenEser SECHER NEEN eedeedeeneteerbeeeeiees 18 Return Materials Authorization and Return Policies nsnnsnnrrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnne 18 Service ee EE 18 Sales SUPPO eege aones 19 Eelere tali le IP 19 Model 9000 Specifications and Requirements
32. ASCII ESC b lt 27 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 27 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 27 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt commands do not affect Data matrix barcodes The rules governing how the barcode is printed do not allow variations in the aspect ratios There are Data Matrix control commands that will allow some control over how the barcode is printed Note The normal Select barcode Width and Select Barcode height TT hie ESC b lt 28 gt TransAct Technologies Inc 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca New York NUL Figure 44 Data Matrix Example Testing Data Matrix barcodes There is a special reference symbol that is useful for control testing It is a 16 x 16 ECC 200 symbol and can be printed which encodes the data 830Q324343430794 lt OQQ As shown in the figure below This reference symbol has a region of parallel bars and spaces which can be linearly scanned and then evaluated for print growth using the edge measurement methodologies of ISO IEC 15416 Figure 45 ECC 200 reference symbol encoding 30Q324343430794 lt O0QQ at Refer to the ISO IEC 16022 2006 standard for more information 100 10937 Rev F Page 155 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Maxicode Maxicode is 2D barcode originally created and used by United Parcel Service Suitable for tracking and managing the shipment of packages i
33. Decimal lt 27 gt lt 110 gt lt ni gt lt N2 gt IPCL amp HP lt m gt lt Ms gt lt M3 gt EPOS ESC lt n gt lt n gt Description The ESC lt n gt lt n gt lt n gt command sets the print position to lt n gt lt n gt 256 in 1 196 inches 100 10937 Rev F Page 71 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Vertical Motion Control ESC j Perform a fine line feed ASCII ESC J lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 4AH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 74 gt lt n gt IPCL amp FM lt m gt lt M2 gt lt M3 gt EPOS ESC J lt n gt Description The ESC J lt n gt command prints the contents of the buffer and performs a line feed of n 216 inch The default line spacing value is not changed The next character print position is reset to the left margin if the Auto CR mode is set Notes e In EPOS mode the command performs feeds in n 144 inch increments e Immediately after APA graphics the command is adjusted for the difference between 72 dpi graphics and 96 dpi print ESC 3 Set variable line spacing to n 216 inch ASCII ESC 3 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 33H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 51 gt lt n gt IPCL amp SV lt m1 gt lt m2 gt lt m3 gt EPOS ESC 3 lt n gt Description The ESC 3 lt n gt command sets the default line spacing to n 216 inch Setn 1 to 255 The line feed spacing used by LF is set to values other than 1 8 or 7 72 inch The command takes effect immediately
34. ESC P Set character pitch Legacy mode command PcOS ASCII ESC P lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 50H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 80 gt lt n gt IPCL amp F1 amp F2 amp F3 amp F4 amp F5 amp FE amp F7 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC P lt n gt command sets character per inch print pitch to lt n gt The printer resolution limits the exact print pitch The following table lists the exact pitch for various values on Resulting Resulting Characters Characters per Inch per Inch 1 d 2 2 00 17 17 33 amp F 1 3 3 01 18 17 33 4 4 00 19 18 91 5 4 95 20 20 80 amp F5 6 5 94 21 20 80 7 6 93 22 23 11 8 8 00 amp F7 23 23 11 9 9 04 24 23 11 amp F4 10 9 90 amp F3 25 23 11 11 10 95 26 26 00 12 12 23 amp F2 27 26 00 13 13 00 28 26 00 14 13 87 29 29 71 15 14 86 amp FE 30 29 71 Table 31 Character Pitch This command disables any right side spacing set by the ESC V command It enforces this spacing on the current font selection even if the character is too large for the spacing In addition when font changes are made the character pitch is maintained Page 258 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Unicode As computer systems started to address more and more international environments the classic ASCII standard with code pages became unworkable Several compet
35. It will produce a sound pressure level of at least 90 dBA 1 foot from the front of the printer Cover Interlock A paper cover interlock switch is provided as a standard feature When the paper cover is open the printer is off line and will not print Display Pass Through The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the printer The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable The host sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display The printer does not provide power to the display During normal printer operation no data is passed to the display In pass through mode all received data is passed on to the display 100 10937 Rev F Page 29 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Interface All Model 9000 s are equipped with a USB 2 0 interface with provisions for an optional interface adapter that will support IEEE 1284 25 pin Parallel IEEE 1284 36 pin Parallel RS232 9 pin Serial RS232 25 pin Serial Powered USB or Ethernet 10 100 Base T USB Interface The USB interface is a Version 2 0 High or Full Speed implementation The USB interface is standard on all printers and implemented through a Standard Series B Receptacle as defined in the USB Specification The printer is self powered and does not draw power from the standard type B USB interface cable The Standard USB Type B connector has the following p
36. Miscellaneous Communication Features nanna 307 Power cycle Recovery EE 307 Data Pass through EE 307 Multi drop Configuration wissa e canes a 307 ROTTS PAC UV ee i acetates ce ne haath E os eA sce hot te Se 308 Recovery from Mechanical Errors mnn nnnnnnnnnn nn nn nr nnnnnnnn nn mnn mann tn nti 309 Pro romimiet SIN UGS sce ts ia e a 310 Appendix A CRUG a a ence 311 Appendix B USB Printer Class Support nnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannunnnnmn 312 Page 12 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes USB Printer Class 7 Specification ANEN 312 GET DEVICE ID DREQWESt SO ie a a i ieat miata uaa ae 312 GET_PORT STATUS bRequest 1 il sena a bd dE Zeg 312 SOFT RESETXROQUESt 2 a bet sink ice eae be G L Mb Maas 313 Glass Ee ie inkitbet sieb kr i b d g ba l ka 313 USB Class Definitions for Communication Devices CD 314 USB Class 2 Abstract Control interface nn 314 USB Transact Virtual Serial port fcc oeatseteoeazss tne sotto ets ceeertnentaetinit geed gedroe 316 Appendix C Internal Code Pages nunnnnnnununnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnunnnannnmnnmmn 317 Appendix D ASCII Code Table snnnnnunnnannunannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunanannnnnnumn 318 Appendix E Unicode Character Addresses sssenennannennanzennenzenzenz 319 Appendix F WGL4 0 Character Addresses ssssnennannannanzenzenzenzunz 321 Appendix G GB18030 Character Addresses sssrnennanzanzennenzenzenz 325 Appendix H Wi
37. Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC HT Seta horizontal tab stop ASCII ESC HT lt T_ gt lt Ty gt Hexadecimal 1BH 09H Tue us Decimal lt 27 gt lt 09 gt lt T gt lt Ty gt IPCL none EPOS none Description With true type fonts a fixed character width is not always possible because the characters are not always a consistent size To allow better control over column alignment this command will set tab stops based on dot columns Up to 32 tab stops may be defined If lt T_ gt lt Ty gt are zero all tab stops will be removed ESC a Set Justification ASCII ESC a lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 61H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 97 gt lt n gt IPCL amp IL amp JC amp JR EPOS ESC a lt n gt Description The ESC a lt n gt command sets the horizontal justification Where lt n gt 0 Left justified amp JL 1 Center justified amp JSC 2 Right justified amp IR 8 Left justified no line feed None 9 Center justified no line feed None 10 Right justified no line feed None The print format of the printer can be right center or left justified The value of lt n gt specifies the justification The power on default is left justified Note The justify commands do not affect graphics Note For the no line feed option to function the line buffer must be empty ESC n Set horizontal position ASCII ESC n lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 6EH lt n gt lt n gt
38. X lt p gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 58H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 88 gt lt p gt selects the partition 0 System 1 User 100 10937 Rev F Page 273 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Description The ESC RS X command requests that the selected partition be reformatted Reformatting the system partition lt 0 gt is not recommended as it will erase all fonts and render the printer unusable Function De fragment the file system All ASCII ESC RS F Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 46H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 70 gt Description The ESC RS F command forces the file system to go through the file system and clean up deleted file sectors All sectors flagged for deletion are actually erased and consolidated when this command is issued be marked for deletion but still be present but inactive in the file system These sectors take up flash space Each cluster has a fixed number of sectors and if the number of deleted sectors in a cluster exceed a predefined threshold the cluster is de fragmented automatically This command forces all clusters to be de fragmented Note File space is not necessarily freed up by a file delete Sectors may Function Verify files All ASCII ESC RS V Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 56H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 86 gt Description The ESC RS V opens and reads the VERIFY CFG file This file contains a list of all files that are to be validated in the pr
39. lt Filename gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 41H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 64 gt Attbs File attributes to modify FileName File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension Each file has several attributes associated to it They include S R and H Attribute Syntax Name Use S S or S System This is a system file R Ror R ReadOnly This file cannot be erased or modified H H or H Hidden This file is hidden and not displayed in the directory listing Note Attributes can be combined however each needs to have the or as a prefix Note You cannot make True Type fonts readable by command To allow these attributes to be set and cleared the ESC RS A command can be used The format is as follows ESC RS A R S FileName lt 0 gt This command will remove the Read only and System attributes from the referenced file 100 10937 Rev F Page 271 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Return the last file command status All ASCII ESC RS 2 Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 3FH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 63 gt The ESC RS Command requests the file system to return the status of the last file operation This command returns an identifier byte followed by 2 bytes indicating the status results of the last file command The format will be as follows lt Status gt lt Details gt or 3F 47 or 42 lt Details gt Where Status G for s
40. lt 0 gt Begin 12 x 12 draft print 82 ESC Cancel user defined characters 92 ESC G Begin italics 97 ESC H End italics 97 ESC lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Set horizontal graphics mode 113 115 ESC lt m gt lt n gt lt n gt Print graphics in mode lt m gt 109 ESC lt m gt lt n gt Reassign graphic mode 110 ESC Initialize the printer 201 ESC Double wide double high italics 94 ESC C lt n gt Insert Euro character 89 ESC P lt n gt Set character pitch 80 258 ESC S Redefine character set 90 ESC L T lt np gt nis Select character code page 87 ESC BEL lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt Audio alert control 202 ESC EM B lt n gt Set bar code height 181 195 ESC EM J lt n gt Set bar code justification and HRI modes 196 ESC SI Begin 24 cpi 79 ESC US 1 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Load item process 120 ESC US b lt Name gt lt 0 gt Begin named macro record 119 121 ESC US c lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save user defined characters 120 122 ESC US d lt Name gt lt 0 gt Delete item from user store 124 ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt End name macro record 122 ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt Remove item from user store 120 ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt Stop name macro record 119 100 10937 ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt Flush user store 121 124 ESC US 1 lt Name gt lt 0 gt L
41. lt 27 gt lt 94 gt lt n gt amp CC lt m1 gt lt m2 gt lt m3 gt ESC lt n gt The ESC lt n gt command allows characters from zero to 31 codes to be printed During normal operation characters from zero to 31 are control characters The command turns off control code translation for the following character lt n gt can be from zero to 255 Print Unicode character ESC lt n gt lt ny gt 1BH 22H lt n gt lt ny gt lt 27 gt lt 34 gt lt N gt lt ny gt amp PU lt m1 gt lt m2 gt lt m3 gt lt m4 gt lt m5 gt ESC lt n gt lt ny gt The ESC lt n_ gt lt ny gt command allows any Unicode character to be directly addressed and inserted into the print data lt n gt lt ny gt can range in value from zero to 65535 Does not support Extended 24 bit addressing User Defined characters ESC ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range IPCL Define user defined characters ESC lt y gt lt C gt lt C gt lt X gt lt dy gt LL d y X X1 KXk gt lt i gt d y xxii 1BH 3DH lt y gt lt 27 gt lt 51 gt lt y gt y 2or3 32 lt C4 lt C2 lt 255 0 lt x lt 24 font character width 0 lt d d y xx lt 255 none Description The ESC lt y gt lt 1 gt lt c gt lt x gt lt d gt LL d y X X L ts d y x 100 10937 Xk command defines user defined characters from character code lt c gt to lt c gt lt y gt and
42. lt YYYY gt EPOS ESC W Description This command sets the horizontal and vertical entry position to anywhere on the page Itis only valid in page mode If the value specified is beyond the page boundary the command is ignored X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the ESC t command and is not same as the page definition of X and Y The X and Y positions are in dots Y Vu 256 Y dots from the top X Xn 256 Xi dots from the left Note You can also use the ESC J ESC M ESC d and ESC e commands to position the print on the page Function Set Page Mode Entry Position Relative ASCII ESC SUB R lt X_ gt lt Xy gt lt Y_L gt lt Yy gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 52H lt X gt lt Xy gt lt Y gt lt Yy gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 82 gt lt X gt lt Xy gt lt YL gt lt Yu gt IPCL None EPOS ESC W Description This command sets the horizontal and vertical entry position to anywhere on the page It is only valid in page mode If the value specified is beyond the page boundary the command is ignored X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the ESC t command and is not same as the page definition of X and Y The X and Y positions are in dots Y Vu 256 Vi dots from the current Y X Xn 256 Xi dots from the current X 100 10937 Rev F Page 105 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Note You can also use the ESC J ESC M ESC d and ESC e commands t
43. lt x gt are the configurations of a user defined character lt y gt specifies the number of bytes in the vertical direction lt x gt specifies the number of bytes in the horizontal direction Character code ranges from 32 20H to 255 FFH can be defined by lt c gt and CG Up to 223 user defined characters can be defined Data lt d gt specifies a bit printed to one and not printed to zero At the default user defined characters are not defined and the internal character set is printed Once the user defined characters have been defined they are available until ESC is Rev F Page 91 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide executed the user defined characters are redefined the power is turned off or the printer is reset Note User defined are bit ages and are not scalable It is intended that user defined characters be defined using a custom true type font That font may then be selected by the user s application ESC Cancel user defined characters ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 24H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 36 gt IPCL none Description The ESC command removes all user defined characters from the printer s memory After the user defined characters are canceled the internal character set is printed ESC gt Enable user defined characters ASCII ESC gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 3EH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 62 gt lt n gt Range lt 0 gt lt 1 gt 0 or 1 1 Enables the ch
44. standard The IEEE 1284 standard provides for a bidirectional link on the parallel port The Model 9000 Printer only supports Modes 0 and 4 which provide a nibble mode reverse channel for printer identification and status inquire commands It is beyond the Page 294 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications scope of this guide to describe the IEEE 1284 protocol The complete specification is available from the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc at www ieee org IEEE 1284 Response Buffer The Model 9000 printer has a 256 byte buffer that contains information to be returned by the IEEE 1284 reverse link Information is placed in the buffer in the same format as RS 232 serial information is returned Inquire commands sent to the printer in IEEE 1284 mode place responses to the commands in the IEEE 1284 reverse channel buffer The buffer is then transmitted to the host when it requests the reverse channel Mode 4 Mode 4 allows the printer to return identification information to the host system The Model 9000 printer returns xx yy length of following data 2 bytes with MSB first MANUFACTURER TransAct Technologies COMMAND SET 9O000CL IPCL MODEL M9000 COMMENT Rev X xx When a Mode 4 request is made the IEEE 1284 buffer is cleared before the ID is sent Mode 0 Mode 0 provides a reverse channel for information from the printer Normal responses to inquire commands are placed in the IEEE 1284
45. w Write w Write Append Future enhancement open a RAM file for write File Extensions are any three characters The following are predefined and reserved for internal use Partition Definition 0 System 1 User udf 1 Undefined macro type mac 1 Command Macro img 1 Graphic image Internal format bgp 1 Bitmapped internal graphic chr 1 User Character definition cfg 0 configuration ttf 0 true type font cee 0 compressed stroke font bti 0 Bitmap font definition cpom 0 code page map omp 1 bitmap graphic file gph 1 raster graphic file ini 0 System information file Mee 0 Field Configuration File upd 0 System Update file SVS 0 Load image EN 0 Compressed load image Note All other file extensions will be placed in Partition 1 user space Table 34 System file extensions 100 10937 Rev F Page 269 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Return Free space for the Open File All ASCII ESC RS S Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 53H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 83 gt Description The ESC RS S command will return an identifier byte and 4 additional bytes representing a 32 bit value LSB First representing the amount of free space in the partition containing the open file The format is as follows S lt B7 0 gt lt B15 8 gt lt B23 16 gt lt B31 24 gt Function Return Free space for this
46. when font changes are made the character pitch is maintained Page 80 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 ESC V Mode ASCII Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Set inter character spacing Global ESC V lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 56H lt n gt Decimal Description lt 2 gt lt 86 gt lt n gt none ESC SP lt n gt The ESC V lt n gt command sets inter character spacing by adding white space between characters The value of lt n gt sets the spacing in 216ths of aninch The printer can only set the spacing in 208ths of an inch and converts 216ths to the nearest 208th of an inch Each font has a basic size and the inter character spacing value is added to the basic size Therefore the affect of this command on characters per inch cpi will depend on the font selected Note 1 The ESC V lt n gt command disables any pitch settings established by pitch set commands that establish a cpi like ESC P lt n gt After a set right side spacing command is issued the pitch will vary with font selection Font selections use the current active right side spacing Note 2 With the inter character spacing command the pitch cannot be set less than the font size Therefore it is not as effective as the pitch command ESC P lt n gt The following table lists the cpi equivalent for several values of lt n gt The following table lists the cpi equivalent for several values of lt n gt
47. 0x00C8 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH GRAVE OxC9 0x00C9 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH ACUTE OxCA 0x00CA LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX OxCB 0x00CB LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS OxCC 0x00CC LATIN CAPITAL LETTER WITH GRAVE Page 334 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Index Index BEL Audio alert 201 202 BS Insert back space 70 CAN Clear print buffer 200 CR Set carriage return 69 DC2 Begin 10 cpi 79 DC4 End one line double wide print 93 ENQ lt 1 gt Inquire Cash Drawer 1 status 210 ENQ lt 10 gt Request printer reset 211 ENQ lt 11 gt Request printer power cycle status 212 ENQ lt 14 gt Inquire mechanical error status 212 ENQ lt 15 gt Inquire printer state 213 ENQ lt 20 gt Inquire all printer status 214 217 218 219 222 223 ENQ lt 21 gt Inquire printer ID 215 ENQ lt 22 gt Inquire Error Status 216 ENQ lt 23 gt Inquire user store status 207 208 217 220 221 222 ENQ lt 3 gt Inquire receipt paper low status 210 ENQ lt 4 gt Inquire receipt paper out status 211 ENQ lt 8 gt Inquire cover open status 211 ENQ lt 9 gt Inquire buffer status 211 ENQ lt n gt Inquire printer status 210 ESC lt 1 gt Begin underline 93 95 ESC lt n gt Select international character set 87 88 249 252 253 254 255 256 257 262 263 264 265 269 270 271 272 273 274 ESC
48. 1uk org web site Data is encoded as a series of number pairs where the first number usually shown in brackets is an application identifier Al See Table 21 RSS GS1 Al Codes and the second is a formatted representation of the data For example 401 6773 can be read as Consignment Number 6773 where the Al 401 signifies that the data is a consignment number Note that for the Model 9000 Al data is entered using square brackets This allows rounded brackets to be included in the data which as allowed by the specification When the barcode symbol are generated these square brackets are replaced by rounded brackets in HRI if HRI is active The command to print an RSS expanded symbol representing 98898765432106 3202 012345 15 991 Would be ESC b lt 23 gt 01 98898765432106 3202 012345 15 991231 lt 0 gt or for stacked version ESC b lt 24 gt 01 98898765432106 3202 012345 15 991231 lt 0 gt Where 01 indicates that 98898765432106 is the Global Trade Item Number 3202 Indicates that 012345 Net weight of 123 45 pounds 15 indicates 991231 is the Best Before Date YYMMDD Symbology RSS 14 RSS 14 RSS 14 RSS RSS RSS Name Truncated Stacked Stacked Limited Expanded Expanded Omni Stacked directional Omni Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Directionally Scan able Transmitted Al plus Al plus 14 Al plus Al plus 14 Al plus Primary Primary Data 14 digits digits 14 digits digits 14 digits Identification I
49. 2 USB 2 speed is allowed if the host will allow it USB 1 Only Operation at USB speeds are blacked NOTE USB 1 should only be used if the host system or other USB element has a problem with USB 2 USB Mode Printing device Only a USB Class 7 device is supported Virtual Com port Only a Virtual Com port is supported using Transacts TVS driver NOTE this is not recommended for new designs Composite Both Class 7 and Virtual com are supported Not recommended USB Enumeration Use Serial Number Each printer will be unique and more than one printer may be connected to each host Use description All printers are the same and may be interchanged Only one printer per host is supported None No serial number field is returned and the enumeration is taken from the physical USB connection Green Mode Disabled 1 to 200 seconds If the host is powered down the printer will also enter a reduced power mode after the delay specified When USB is active the input buffer must be atleast as large as the USB packet size For USB1 1 the packet size is 64 bytes For USB 2 0 the packet size is 512 bytes If the input buffer is configured for a values that is less than the packet size The input buffer will be increased Other Options There are a number of other configurable options however you should contact Transact technical support for assistance P
50. 2 of 5sometimes require that the bar ratios be altered for unconventional barcode readers ASCII ESC EM W lt 0 gt lt narrow gt lt wide gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 57H lt 0 gt lt narrow gt lt wide gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 87 gt lt 0 gt lt narrow gt lt wide gt Description The ESC EM w lt 0 gt lt narrow gt lt wide gt only affects the 2 of 5 barcode and sets the narrow bar width to lt narrow gt dots and the wide bar width to lt wide gt dots If this command is used the scale is set to 1 and the narrow and wide setting provide the scale No error checking is performed when setting these values and invalid barcodes can be generated 100 10937 Rev F Page 195 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Set bar code justification human readable interpretation HRI character print mode and print direction ASCII ESC EM J lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 4AH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 74 gt lt n gt IPCL amp BJ lt m gt lt m gt EPOS none The power on default is center justified with HRI characters not printed Description The ESC EM J lt n gt command selects the operation of the bar code justification HRI characters and print direction Where n bits n IPCL 76543210 XX Justified 0 00 00 Left 1 01 01 Center 2 02 10 Right xx HRI characters 0 00 00 Not printed 16 16 01 Printed above the bar
51. 32 bit address to access the desired character Basic UTF 32 does not define the byte order If you wish to use UTF 32 and allow the printer to determine the byte order you must send the byte order mark BOM OxOOOOFEFF before you send any characters It is difficult to prevent loss of byte order synchronization with UTF32 however sending the BOM periodically can sometimes resynchronize the 8bit byte to the 32bit address If UTF 32 is selected all data sent to the printer must be 32 bits All commands and command parameters are also 32 bit however only values between 0 and 255 are valid for command processing This makes UTF32 rather inefficient UTF 32BE uses the big endian method of sending the four bytes This method sends the high byte first and then the low byte It is not required to send the byte order mark BOM OxOOOOFEFF for the correct byte order to be initialized Sending the BOM in big endian would be as follows 0x00 0x00 OxFE OxFF 100 10937 Rev F Page 259 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide UTF 32LE uses the little endian method of sending the four bytes This method sends the low byte first and then the high byte It is not required to send the byte order mark BOM OxOOOOFEFF for the correct byte order to be initialized Sending the BOM in little endian would be as follows OxFF OxFE 0x00 0x00 UTF 16 UTF 16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255 UTF 16 ess
52. 82 THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING WITH US LK Breakfast Come into anv of our locations and present this coupon to receive a free breakfast entree when you purchase another breakfast entree of greater or equal value Coupon Exp 12 31 00 Figure 71 Receipt with graphics As with all graphics the data path to the printer must be eight bits Seven bit protocols do not work 29 Ithaca Color Image Processor is patent pending Page 232 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Universal Color Graphics The Model 9000 Printer Color firmware supports the ability to print two color graphics in all emulations This support is an enhancement to the original TM U200 ESC POS Star and Citizen printer emulations The intent of Universal Color Graphic support is to allow the Model 9000 color graphics capability to be used in existing applications that do not support color graphics There are several ways to add color graphics to an existing application The easiest for you will depend on how much control you have over your application At a minimum you should be able to change the name printed on the top of a receipt With the PUColor program you can store a named graphic into the printer an print it by changing the text name to match the stored graphic For example if your receipt has a name like Joe s Market you can save a graphic in the printer named Joe s and then chang
53. Ate eegene i e a cases i deca penned a 289 USB Problems A 290 USB Enumeration BE 290 USB Drops and disconnects TEE 290 Input UTS TES IZ serens Na 290 Ethernet TOPP a a e a E Ft ra Vaal l e A al 291 Print Server Features Standard Ethernet Connection en 291 Supported Protocols i ei di ten e a ke pn a g Sa gas ta 291 User interia e Conti ut etienne act 291 EE Ee e ng Eege E 291 Ethernet Plug and Play ii siiini ia kabini gegen een fede ip p ba Ms EENG 292 Parallel POM ikseb kie a sa EH 293 P rale Port Prottitll EH 293 Printer Butler E 294 Parallel Port Inquire and IEEE 1284 294 IEEE Ke 295 lee a rd A SA A L alata ede ala a 295 DOS O EA 295 PATEN tini ees tt ikla faqa tist i de 295 AGE SIU ie e AA unsaid thtaatied AA AE 295 IIGUIFG Ala ezje taq i L A dence a RE T adie 296 Parallel Ore FM E lee RE 297 OPTS Field DESCriptlon esc iii ie e a a E 297 lejl le TJ 298 Serial Port Eiter i ai gia gia a go ee ae sk ees 298 Piitit BUMHEOF FIOW i a eBay em Treinen nee nC Rarer E nee nt san err hart Peni ee Trent or 300 Printer Buffer SIZE vas tas ib tid ee a B B l B it za 302 Serial Mode Plug and RE 302 Using DSE E 302 Serial Device Identification sssssseeesennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnzznmrnzzzzannzznzn 303 Serial Port ele e iii e ef d a 303 Parallel Port INUIS EE 304 NIE E Lee RE 305 Remote Printer Reset eege eege a A eeh 306 Reset in Serial USB and Ethernet Mode 306 Reset in Parallel Mode 306
54. Data terminal rate in bits per second 4 bCharFormat 1 Number Stop bits 0 1 Stop bit 1 1 5 Stop bits 2 2 Stop bits 5 bParityType 1 Number Parity 0 None 1 Odd 2 Even 3 Mark 4 Space 6 bDataBits 1 Number Data bits 5 6 7 8 or 16 Note This is not actually used by the printer to control the transfer speed It is only used to support the Microsoft Driver Table 41 Line Coding Structure The set control line state command is supported but does not actually control the printer Bit position Description D15 D2 RESERVED Reset to zero D1 Carrier control for half duplex modems This signal corresponds to V 24 signal 105 and RS 232 signal RTS 0 Deactivate carrier 1 Activate carrier DO Indicates to DCE if DTE is present or not This signal corresponds to V 24 signal 108 2 and RS 232 signal DTR 0 Not Present 1 Present Note This is not actually used by the printer Table 42 Set control Line state The Serial state DSR and DCD signals reflect the ready busy state of the printer They will reflect the same state as if an actual serial port were being used on the printer Bits Field Description D15 D7 RESERVED future use D6 bOverRun Received data has been discarded due to overrun in the device D5 bParity A parity error has occurred D4 bFraming A framing error has occurred D3 bRingSignal State
55. Defined Characters Canceling 92 User Store Removing Item 120 User Defined Characters Defining 91 120 User Store Report 125 User Defined Characters Enabling 92 User Store Reporting 121 User macros 126 Using DSR 302 User store 119 Vertical Tab 74 User Store Status Inquire 207 208 217 220 221 Vertical Tab Stops Setting 75 222 Page 338 Rev F 100 10937
56. ESC US r lt Name gt lt 0 gt command loads the referenced macro into the macro buffer The macro buffer is then inserted into the data stream If the named item does not exist or is not a macro nothing happens The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function Flag item as a start up macro ASCII ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 73H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 115 gt IPCL amp US lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS GS 0 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated Description The ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt command flags the referenced item to be processed at startup Only one user character definition and one macro may be flagged to run at startup O Note If a character definition is loaded at startup it is automatically made active The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page125 100 10937 Rev F Page 123 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Delete item from user store ASCII ESC US d lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 64H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 100 gt IPCL amp UD lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS GS 1 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated Description The ESC US d lt Name
57. ESC CAN lt n gt Activate USB Watch Dog ASCII ESC CAN lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 18H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 24 gt Function The ESC CAN lt n gt command schedules a USB disconnect reconnect cycle after n seconds The scheduled disconnect can be canceled by issuing ESC CAN lt 0 gt Where n 0 disable any scheduled disconnect n 1 255 Scheduled a disconnect reconnect after n seconds from when the command is received If the disconnect occurs as a result of this command The printer will reset the USB controller which appears to the host as a disconnect Effectively the host will think the printer is off The USB controller will be held in reset for 250 milliseconds When the reset is removed the USB controller will restart and a normal enumeration process will start The printer will report not ready and not accept data for another 500 milliseconds This will allow time for the USB driver to reload and initialize The printer will then report ready and allow normal data flow NOTE This process does not actually affect the state of the print process Any print commands previously sent to the printer will still be active To keep track of the watch dog status the fact that a watch dog occurred is reported as part of the ENQ 20 status command The total number of disconnects will be reported and reset by the ENQ 35 enquire command 100 10937 Rev F Page 207 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Note that
58. H H A IK d IL O 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 IZ l SF lt G H K l Sod ASCII gt k Nj x lt Cc Ja Jom D o Jv JO z Iz Ir Jz Ie z lo n m o JO w gt 6 Code SV A lt I lt lt c JA lo IO VIO z z ir x je JO n m o o Jo Z AK AL M N O ASCII Code AWN O B gt lt A Zz J JE Jt l TH J It N P Q R S DEL KOU Figure 14 Code 39 full 128 character encoding Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Code 128 Code 128 A B and C Code 128 is an alphanumeric bar code It is a high density variable length continuous code which employs multiple element widths Code 128 has three possible start codes The start code defines the code set Code A B or C that will be used to generate the barcode The Model 9000 allows the code set to be specified or it can be select by the printer based on the information in the data field To specify code set ESC b lt 2 gt lt Code gt information NUL Function Code 128 Manual Encoding ASCII ESC b lt 2 gt lt Code gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 2 gt lt Code gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 2 gt lt Code gt information NUL If the first character in the data field lt Code gt is a start code as shown in Figure 18 below the p
59. HORIZONTAL 2496 NUMBER FIFTEEN FULL STOP 2497 NUMBER SIXTEEN FULL STOP 2538 OA DRAN has UP HEAVY AND HORIZONTAL 2498 NUMBER SEVENTEEN FULL STOP 2499 NUMBER EIGHTEEN FULL STOP 2539 BOX PRAW NE RIGHT LIGHT AND CERT UP 249A NUMBER NINETEEN FULL STOP SAB NUMBERSIWENTY FULE STOP 253A SEN NGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT UP 2500 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT HORIZONTAL 253B BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY UP AND HORIZONTAL 2501 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND 2502 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL 253C HORIZONTAL 2503 ao SE NGS A aa EE BOX DRAWINGS LEFT HEAVY AND RIGHT 2504 L VERTICAL LIGHT HORIZONTAL SE BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT HEAVY AND LEFT 2505 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVV TRIPLE DASH 53 VERTICAL LIGHT HORIZONTAL BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL LIGHT AND 2506 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT TRIPLE DASH VERTICAL 253F HORIZONTAL HEAVY Se S BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT QUADRUPLE DASH Se A OPEN 2508 HORIZONTAL LIGHT HORIZONTAL SE BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND UP 2509 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY QUADRUPLE DASH HORIZONTAL LIGHT PoR ZONTA TENTE Se BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND 250A UADRUPLE DASH HORIZONTAL LIGHT VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS LEFT UP HEAVY AND RIGHT 2508 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY QUADRUPLE DASH DOWN LIGHT VERTICAL BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT UP HEAVY AND LEFT 250C BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND RIGHT 2544 DOWN LIGHT 250D BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND RIGHT HEAVY 2545 BOX DRAWINGS LEFT DOWN HEAVV AND RIGHT 250E BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVV AND RIGHT LIGHT UP LIGHT 250F BOX DRAWINGS HEAVV DOWN AND RIGHT 100 10937 Rev F Page 32
60. IPCL EPOS Description Page 110 11 208 x 96 dpi 2 horizontal 1 vertical pass 104 x 192 dpi 1 horizontal 2 vertical passes 208 x 192 dpi 2 horizontal 2 vertical passes Note Modes 11 through 13 are designed to support horizontal graphics and not intended for APA graphics Select unidirectional print ESC U lt 1 gt 1BH 55H 01H lt 27 gt lt 85 gt lt 1 gt amp GU ESC U lt 1 gt The ESC U lt 1 gt command prints all data in unidirectional print mode to improve line to line registration for graphical data Note Unidirectional print should be canceled before normal text is printed Print time is slowed if it is not canceled Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC U lt 0 gt Select bidirectional print ASCII ESC U lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 55H 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 85 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp GB EPOS ESC U lt 0 gt Description The ESC U lt 0 gt command prints all data in bi directional logic seeking print mode This command has no affect on the printer but is provided for compatibility with impact and inkjet printers 100 10937 Rev F Page 111 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Horizontal Graphics Raster Color Gray Graphics The Model 9000 Printer supports graphics sent as horizontal scan lines Individual scan lines of graphic data are sent to the printer one line at a time Although the Model 9000 Printer only supports tw
61. LOGICAL AND 043A CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER KA 2228 LOGICAL OR 043B CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EL 2229 INTERSECTION 043C CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EM 222A UNION 043D CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EN 222B INTEGRAL 043E CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER O 222E CONTOUR INTEGRAL 043F CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER PE 2234 THEREFORE 0440 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER ER 2235 BECAUSE 0441 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER ES 2236 RATIO 0442 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER TE 2237 PROPORTION 0443 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER U 223D REVERSED TILDE LAZY S 0444 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EF 2248 ALMOST EQUAL TO Page 326 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix 224C ALL EQUAL TO 2510 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND LEFT 2252 APPROXIMATELY EQUAL TO OR THE IMAGE OF 2511 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND LEFT HEAVY 2260 NOT EQUAL TO 2512 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVV AND LEFT LIGHT 2261 IDENTICAL TO 2513 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY DOWN AND LEFT 2264 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2514 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND RIGHT 2265 GREATE
62. MANDARIN CHINESE LIGHT TONE 0060 GRAVE ACCENT l 0391 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ALPHA 0061 LATIN SMALL LETTER A 0392 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER BETA 0062 LATIN SMALL LETTER B 0393 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER GAMMA 0063 LATIN SMALL LETTER C 0394 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER DELTA 0064 LATIN SMALL LETTER D 0395 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER EPSILON 0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E T 0396 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ZETA 0066 LATIN SMALL LETTER F 0397 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ETA 0067 LATIN SMALL LETTER G 0398 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER THETA 0068 LATIN SMALL LETTER H 0399 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER IOTA 0069 LATIN SMALL LETTER 039A GREEK CAPITAL LETTER KAPPA 006A LATIN SMALL LETTER J 039B GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMDA 006B LATIN SMALL LETTER K 039C GREEK CAPITAL LETTER MU 006C LATIN SMALL LETTER L 039D GREEK CAPITAL LETTER NU 006D LATIN SMALL LETTER M 039E GREEK CAPITAL LETTER XI E EE 039F GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMICRON 006F LATIN SMALL LETTER O 100 10937 Rev F Page 325 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide
63. Pin 20 DTR Data Terminal Readv Pin 5 Pin 7 GND Signal Ground Pin 6 Pin 6 DSR Data Set Readv Pin 7 Pin 4 RTS Request to Send Pin 8 Pin 5 CTS Clear to Send Table 11 Serial interface pin out Parallel The parallel interface connection is very similar to the serial interface connection It can be a 36 pin Centronics IEEE 1284 B or a 25 Pin female D Shell IEEE 1284 A connector The pin out of both connectors are shown below 25 pin 36 pin Signal Description Weeer Pin 1 Pin 1 STROBE Clock data to printer Host to Printer Pins 2 9 Pins 2 9 DO D7 Data Host to Printer Pin 10 Pin 10 ACK Printer accepted data Printer to Host Pin 11 Pin 11 BUSY Printer busy Printer to Host Pin 12 Pin 12 PE Paper Out Status Printer to Host Pin 13 Pin 13 SLCT Printer selected Printer to Host Pin 14 Pin 14 AUTOFD Auto feed paper Host to Printer Pin 15 Pin 32 FAULT Printer error Printer to Host Pin 16 Pin 31 INIT Initialize printer Host to Printer Pin 17 Pin 36 SLIN Select printer Host to Printer Pin 17 FG Frame ground Printer to Host Pin 18 5V Peripheral logic high Printer to Host Pins 18 25 Pins 16 19 30 GND Ground USB Table 12 Parallel interface pin out The USB connector can be one of two types a standard Type B connector as in commonly used in the PC industry or a POS Powered USB connector In the case of the powered USB connector there are a number of different versions Make sure you are
64. Printer Emulation RS 232 Serial Interface baud rate Carriage Return Options How to Change Configuration Settings Entering into Configuration Mode 1 Press and hold the FEED button while powering on the printer Wait for the RED indicator to blink and then release the FEED button 2 Press and hold the FEED button until the Paper Green LED lights Then release the FEED button Repeat this process until the Operation Configuration Prompt 3 Press and Release the FEED button to enter Configuration mode 4 You are now in Configuration Mode Entering into Configuration Mode Alternate To enter hex dump mode perform the following sequence of operations Turn the printer off Press and hold the Feed button While holding the Feed button turn the printer on Hold the Feed button until the ERROR LED starts to blink Self test mode Continue to hold the Feed button until the ERROR LED starts to blink Slower Release the line feed button and the printer will enter Hex dump mode eee Using Configuration Mode After you enter Configuration Mode the printer will print the current configuration the current totals and the error logs if any Save this printout as a guide to changing the configuration and in case you wish to return the printer to the previous configuration 100 10937 Rev F Page 53 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Each emulation can have different configurable features If you are c
65. The command flow is as follows e The ENQ lt 10 gt is acknowledged During cleanup and initialization the printer is placed off line Before the printer initializes it tries to clean up its input buffer and other internal processes The printer s software is reinitialized The power cycled flag is set The print head is homed and re calibrated The printer goes back on line Reset in Parallel Mode In parallel mode driving the INIT signal on the parallel port for 100 milliseconds generates a software reset It takes about two seconds for the printer to recover from a reset The ENQ lt 10 gt command has the same effect but it is not acknowledged Page 306 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix Miscellaneous Communication Features Power cycle Recovery Sometimes the host needs to know if the printer was power cycled An example would be after the receipt tape was changed It is not necessary to turn off the printer to change the receipt However if the operator does any information sent to the printer before the power cycle will be lost The Model 9000 Printer has a flag that is set after a reset The flag stays set until the host requests a reset The ENQ lt 11 gt command reads the flag If the command returns power cycled status the power has been reset or power cycled since the last request All unprinted information has been lost If the print operation is critical it is a good idea to ch
66. This section defines how the scalable fonts are named and generated You can control the font cache size and partitions the Hinting link fonts and font abstractions e bmfont This section defines and abstracts any bitmap font definitions e Legacy This section defines how the previously defined fonts are used to generate legacy fonts for each emulation The following is an example of the POR INI file Default System Configuration PE9000 1 08 encoding mode UTF8TXT NOTE A code page is only used in ASCII mode To specify a code page use one of the following forms CodePage 437 7CPFile CP8959 1 cpm To remap Unicode characters define a UniRemap cpm file UniMapfile UniRemap cpm font Optionallv specify the Cache Partitions Fontcache 320 256 64 True Type font hinting may be disabled by setting Nohint to 1 Nohint 0 True Type font line spacing fit l Min 2 Typ 3 Max TTFit 2 Extra Character Bolding Bolding 400 200 Specify Linked fonts starting with LinkFontl LinkFonti will be searched first Xou may specify up to 8 linked fonts if Link Fonts are defined they will be Fonto m LinkFontl TactSYM ttf LinkFont2 TactAria ttf LinkFont2 TactWGL M ttf LinkFont3 TactWGL_V ttf LinkFont4 TactGB18030 ccc From 1 to 99 fonts may be defined Fontl TactSYM ttf Font2 TactWGL_M ttf Font3 TactGB18030 ccc Page 276
67. This selection allows the information saved in the electronic journal to be printed and maintained by the operator Operation of this mode will be described later in the manual under Electronic Journal Operation It the Electronic Journal is unintentionally initialized it may be deactivated by this option as well If the Electronic Journal is password protected the manual Electronic Journal option will be disabled Configuring Options The configuration option allows the configuration of the printer to be printed and if necessary changed When configuration mode is entered the current configuration the Current User store status and the current totals are printed If any printer errors have occurred a hardware and software error log may also be printed At the end of the print out are instructions on how to use configuration mode Please read these instructions carefully as they are not the same as Self Test You may exit configuration mode at any time without affecting the printer configuration by pressing the power button TEST Configuration The content of the configurable features will alter based on the hardware installed There will be at least three groups of options 1 Emulation 2 Communications 3 General Options Under emulation the instruction set or emulation of the printer may be changed Available options will depend on the model of printer however Ithaca PcOS is always available Other options may be Epson TM88 T
68. Use ENQ lt 22 gt to identify the specific error and ENQ lt 10 gt to recover bit 5 0 bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always lt I gt bit 0 5 0 always bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always Note For this status request to function the Buffer Full Only off line option should be selected 100 10937 Rev F Page 213 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ENQ lt 20 gt ASCII Inquire all printer status IENQI lt 20 gt Hexadecimal 05H 14H Decimal Function Response Where lt n gt su lt Io gt lt g gt lt Iq gt lt Is5 gt lt g gt lt I7 gt Page 214 lt 5 gt lt 20 gt The ENQ lt 20 gt command returns all status flags ACK lt 20 gt lt n gt lt I gt lt I gt lt 20 gt is the echo of command ID is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF bit 0 Cash Drawer 1 is open bit 1 Cash Drawer 2 is open bit 2 Receipt paper is out bit 3 0 bit 4 Receipt paper error occurred low or out bit 5 0 bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always bit 0 1 always bit 1 Cover is closed bit 2 Buffer is empty bit 3 Printer has been power cycled Reading this does not affect the state of the power cycled flag Use ENQ lt 11 gt to reset the power cycled bit bit 4 Printer is waiting in an error mode Use ENQ lt 22 gt to identify the specific error and ENQ lt 10 gt to recover bit5 0 bit
69. Variable Measure used with a GTIN 14 Indicator digit 9 not equal Trade Item This represents a Custom Industrial to9 Supply Item 420 Ship to postal code 421 Ship to postal code Only one ship to postal code may be single postal with ISO country applied on an item authority code 422 Country of origin of a 426 Country of full Duplication of country of origin of a trade item processing trade item covered by country of full processing 423 Country of initial 426 Country of full Duplication of country of initial processing processing processing covered by country of full processing 424 Country of 426 Country of full Duplication of country of processing processing processing covered by country of full processing 425 Country of 426 Country of full Duplication of country of disassembly processing disassembly covered by country of full processing 390n Amount pavable 391n Amount payable Only one amount payable Element single monetary area with ISO currency String may be applied on a payment code slip 392n Amount Payable for 393n Amount Payable Only one amount payable Element a Variable Measure for a Variable String may be applied on a Variable Trade Item Single Measure Trade Measure Trade Item Monetary Area Item and ISO Currency Code 8006 Component 01 Identification of a Other GTINs cannot be used with Al identification trade item 8006 The trade item is identified by a GTIN contained in the Al 8006
70. When the application writer wants complete control of what is sent to the printer The application must take the responsibility of sending the correct codes to the printer as well as detecting error conditions and graceful recovery from error situations When not to use the POSPrinter OCX When you do not want to deal with the low level commands sent to the printer Where to get more information Additional information about Driver and support programs are available for your Transact Sales representative from Transact customer support or from the TransAct Technologies Web site Page 44 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes How to Operate the Model 9000 Printer Your Model 9000 printer has a power switch one button and three LED indicator lights In addition to power control and feeding paper these two buttons can be used to perform functions like self testing clearing errors and printer configuration They are e POWER This is power off switch located on left side of the printers cabinet FEED Located on front left top corner of the printer Power Switch The power switch will turn the power off to the printer Feed Button The FEED button feeds paper through the printer By pressing the FEED button momentarily the paper will be fed one line at a time Pressing and holding the FEED button will make the printer feed paper continuously until the button is released Indicator Lights LED The thre
71. Windows PnP configuration flag is set in the printer IEEE 1284 will be active for all parallel port modes For example PnP in parallel mode forces IEEE 1284 For PnP to work the host must have an IEEE 1284 compatible port adapter and the cable used to connect to the printer must support all of the interface signals The Plug and Play response follows Device ID string Manufacturer TransAct CMD M9000CL IPCL CLS PRINTER MDL M9000 PcOS DES Ithaca M9000 REV x xx OPTS 6xyz PnP ID LPTENUM Ithaca Perph TBD Device Description Ithaca M900 Device Class Printer OPTS Field Description OPTS 6XYZ where X is a model definition X will be 3 if the printer is in the native Model 9000 emulation 5 indicates that the printer is in some other emulation Y and Z are bit fields that designate the options attached to the printer Z Color Support active O ss Undefined Periodic Status Back Supported O d RE 100 10937 Rev F Page 297 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Serial Port Serial Port Protocol The serial port supports two flow control standards XON XOFF and Ready Busy sometimes called Data Terminal Ready DTR or hardware handshake When Ready Busy flow control is selected the printer can be configured to use DTR Request to Send RTS or both for flow control If only DTR is selected for flow control RTS will indicate the cover is open or the printer has faulted The following discussion
72. Windows and change the way fonts are printed It is also possible for the host application to load fonts into the printer The printer can contain up to 99 unique and selectable fonts Any font may be selected at any time In addition up to 8 fonts may be linked or stacked together Some standard character size and character pitch commands are supported as legacy commands The appearance of the print using those commands has been optimized using the TransAct WGL4 font If you elect to use your own font or the GB18030 font you may wish to use the scalable font control commands to select the character size and spacing rather than the legacy commands TransAct Technologies provides a basic WGL4 font with the printer This may be supplemented or replaced with a GB18030 Chinese font upon request The printer will accept TrueType and compressed stroke fonts as defined by Monotype If required the customer may supplement the TransAct supplied fonts with their own custom fonts rights to that font Do not download a font to the printer if you do not have the right to use the font as a downloaded printer font WARNING If you elect to load fonts into the printer you must have proper Page 248 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Font Control Commands Function Select Font All ASCII ESC 3 lt ID gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 31H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 51 gt Description The ESC 3 com
73. You have to experiment with it until you get acceptable results with your font This value can generally be set to nominal with most fonts Nominal is 100 Page 278 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Extended Printer Control The Model 9000 printer has a number of Extended Control commands that allow an application to better track and maintain the printer These commands are in all emulations Model 9000 Internal Logs The printer maintains a log of printer activity This activity may be returned to the host with the ESC T command This command returns a T followed by four binary bits that make up a 32 bit unsigned integer The description of the command below describes the format in full The printer also contains a number of commands that will force the printer to perform specific functions to help maintain the printer or print information about the printer The functions available are 1 Print Current Configuration 2 Print current log totals functions are performed by these basic commands Do not attempt to use any undocumented version of these commands The extended diagnostics commands may affect the print quality and performance of the printer In some cases the commands may degrade the performance of the print cartridge or mechanism O Note Each of these commands follow the ESC or ESCy format Other The Star emulation does not allow the use of E
74. a bit field defined as follows bit 0 0 bit 1 Knife is installed bit 2 0 bit 3 Always 0 bit 4 Always 1 bit 5 Always 1 bit 6 Always 0 bit 7 Always 0 Rev F Page 215 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ENQ lt 22 gt ASCII Inquire Error status IENQI lt 22 gt Hexadecimal 05H 17H Decimal Function Response Where Page 216 lt 5 gt lt 22 gt The ENQ lt 22 gt command reports on the error status ACK lt 22 gt lt n gt lt r gt lt 22 gt is the echo of the command ID lt n gt isthe number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF lt r gt Bit status as follows bit 0 Cover is open bit 1 Receipt Paper is Low bit 2 Receipt paper is out bit 3 Not used bit 4 Not used bit 5 The Auto Cutter has faulted bit 6 1 always bit 7 An serious error has occurred Note 1 If bit 7 is set a serious error has occurred The printer is not able to recover from type of error without operator intervention If bit 7 is set without bit 5 Auto cutter fault then the print carriage has faulted which is probably caused by a paper jam or a component failure The host system may issue an ENQ lt 10 gt Reset Request commana to attempt to recover The Reset Request will reset the printer to an initial power up state All data will be lost Note 2 When a serious error occurs bit 7 set the printer enters a static state Status respo
75. a fixed character size however the actual character size is defined by the font designer 100 10937 Rev F Page 243 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide indicated but are always spaced in a fixed dot cell provided that the legacy commands are used Adding or subtracting space between characters achieves different character pitches with a fixed character cell size As each dot has a fixed size and position only specific pitches are possible Character spacing may also be selected by requesting a print pitch based on characters pre inch Once again the results are not exact If the requested spacing is zero the character spacing will be defined by the character definition and will result in variable spacing Line spacing The legacy commands select line spacing as lines per inch With scalable characters the lines per inch is a minimum spacing If a character is larger then the spacing between lines the line spacing will be increased to allow enough room for the characters on that line Selecting character size by points In addition to the legacy or classic method of character size selection the Model 9000 allows selection by point size Point sizes from 4 to 72 points may be selected for both the horizontal and vertical axes If a horizontal point size of zero 0 is selected for the horizontal spacing the characters are printed using variable spacing based on the character definition using the vertical p
76. also contains the number of rows in the barcode There are 2400 possible words which can be generated from each pair of characters Symbols with less than 7 rows contain 2 check digits in the final row Symbols with 7 or 8 rows contain 3 check digits in the final row Function Code 49 ASCII ESC b lt 14 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 14 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 14 gt information NUL ee ESC b lt 14 gt 12345678901234 NUL Figure 39 Code 49 Example Note There is no user control of the number of rows or columns Note The scale may be set from 2 to 6 Note GS 1 encoding may be activated for both Code16 There is an FNC1 indicator in the barcode that indicated that GS1 is active If GS 1 formatting is used it s up to the user to recognize that GS1 is active and decode the barcode as GS1 data 100 10937 Rev F Page 149 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Code 16K The Code 16K bar code is a multiple row bar code that can encode the full ASCII character set below ASCII 128 It uses existing UPC and Code 128 character set patterns Up to 77 full ASCII characters or 154 numeric characters can be encoded These characters are encoded into 2 to 16 rows Each row is divided by a separator bar The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones Like Code128 there are various ways to encode the data into the b
77. always encode 13 input digits and adds a 14 check digit Function ITF 14 ASCII ESC b lt 13 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 13 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 13 gt information NUL ESC b lt 13 gt 0500123456789 NUL MO 05001234567890 NOTE ITF 14 is generally printed with a surrounding box however it is Figure 26 ITF 14 Example not mandatory and the Model 9000 does not add it EAN 2 and EAN 5 Addenda barcodes EAN2 and EAN 5 Addenda barcodes are used to add additional information to several barcodes The Addenda field is either 2 or 5 characters The size of the Addenda will automatically be generated based on the size of the data supplied Add on data will only be accepted by barcodes that support it To add Addenda data append the linear barcode data with a and the numeric Addenda data field The top image below shows an EAN 2 added a a standard UPC A barcode and the bottom image is an EAN 5 added to the same UPC A barcode a 78901 Wi UU IM 23456 UI Figure 27 EAN 2 and EAN 5 Addendas 100 10937 Rev F Page 141 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Code 93 Code 93 is a variable length alphanumeric bar code The complete data field is printed by the printer Due to space limitations only 10 or 11 characters can be printed Function Code 93 ASCII ESC b lt 7
78. assumes the DTR is being used for flow control The Ready Busy protocol generally uses the DTR signal to indicate to the host computer that the printer is not ready to accept data The host should stop sending data to the printer as soon as possible Because the host may not notice the DTR signal until it has transmitted several bytes of data to the printer the printer continues to except up to 255 bytes of data after it indicates that it is not ready Figure 81 Serial Port Flow Control Using DTR illustrates how the Ready Busy protocol works and Figure 82 XON XOFF Serial Port Flow Control illustrates how the XON XOFF protocol works Communications Printer Control Port Software Serial Data In Serial Data Out lt lt Not Used for Flow Control ENQ Response Buffer Getting Full DTR Buffer Getting Empty Select Key RTS Request to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready Figure 81 Serial Port Flow Control Using DTR 38 The buffer always signals it is full before it overflows The size of the reserve depends on the buffer size selected It is always at least 255 bytes Page 298 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Communications Printer Control Port oftware Serial Data In Data ENQ Data Proc Serial Data Out s e ENQ Response e SC Buffer Getting Full Send i DTR e Buffer Getting Empty RTS Send Select Key XON or XOFF
79. be modified should be followed by the combining diacritical mark The Model 9000 printer will position the diacritical mark over the previous character as defined by the diacritical mark The printer does not control the positioning of the diacritical mark The diacritical mark defines the fall back amount In the case where the diacritical mark is defined as a character there is no negative motion in the diacritical marks definition so the host system must position the character entry position back to the previous character This is may be done with a set position command or a simple backspace command If backspace is used the printer will keep track of the width of the previous character and reposition the entry pointer to the end of the original character after the diacritical mark is rendered The Model 9000 printer does not handle multiple diacritical marks on the same character The printer will not shift the second diacritical mark to prevent it from interfering with the previous The Model 9000 processes the diacritical marks as defined in the font Character Cache The Model 9000 supports a high speed character cache that can cache character bitmaps outlines tiles or bands of characters The caching technique is based on a least recently used LRU algorithm The Cache contains an entry for each size of character used The amount of space in the cache used by each character is dependant on the size of the character At power up the
80. computer environment Page 286 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Data to printer ee Printer Host computer Status and flow control back Figure 77 Host to Printer Link In most cases the host computer is capable of sending information to the printer much faster than the printer can print it To prevent information from being lost a flow control mechanism is provided The mechanism is called the flow control protocol The goal of the flow control protocol is to exchange as much information as possible as fast as possible without losing any data The Model 9000 printer supports three flow control protocols two in serial mode and one in parallel From the printer s point of view four basic functions are required of communications All four are common to all three flow control protocols There must be a communication driver status inquire procedure storage buffer and print control mechanism that is using the data The communication port is either the serial port hardware or the parallel port hardware and the associated communication software driver A means for the host to bypass the buffer for status information referred to here as an inquirer processor is also required because the buffer offsets the printer in time from the host The printer is generally behind the host The storage print buffer is a software implemented first in first out FIFO circular buffer It stores information i
81. cut command will be replaced by the Coupon Cut Logo operation Configuration options are as follows Cut Command Logo Cut Logo Perform Feed to cut then cut and then print the Logo Coupon Cut Print the Coupon Feed to Cut and Cut Logo Cut Print the Logo Feed to Cut and Cut Cut Coupon Perform Feed to cut then cut and then print the Coupon Coupon Cut Logo Print the Coupon Feed to cut Cut ad then print the Logo Logo Cut Coupon Print the Logo Feed to cut Cut ad then print the Coupon Cut Logo Coupon Perform the Feed to cut Print the Logo and then the Coupon Cut Coupon Logo Perform the Feed to cut Print the Coupon and then the Logo Logo Coupon Cut Print the Logo then the Coupon feed to cut and Cut Coupon Logo Cut Print the Coupon then the Logo feed to cut and Cut Disabled Perform the Normal cut Cut Command Logo Feed 0 to 80 mm Page 240 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Scalable Fonts Your TransAct Model 9000 printer uses outline and or stroke based scalable fonts These fonts provide you with additional font options as well as improved character appearance while functioning transparently within legacy applications Such fonts represent a substantial improvement over the bitmap fonts that are traditionally used for thermal printers Bitmap characters are based on a pixel by pixel definition of the characters With a fixe
82. degeneration and skew The data must be valid before the strobe signal is asserted and remain so until the strobe is removed A 500 nanosecond setup and hold time is required by the printer The following chart illustrates parallel port timing INIT lt Raly Pin 16 Data Data DATA Pins 2 9 Pin 10 Ab gt lt Rdly Approx 2 seconds Bhld Approx 5 uS Dstu 500 nS Min Ahld Approx 5 uS Dhid 500 nS Min Sdiv 3 uS Min Tstb 1 uS Min Tcycle 200 280 uS Typ Figure 79 Parallel port Data Timing To implement flow control the busy signal is asserted by the printer outside the normal data transfer sequence The busy signal has several uses but it always indicates that the printer cannot accept information The busy signal may happen at any time and may not adhere to the above timing chart in all cases It is up to the host s parallel port driver to handle all possible busy states It is important that the host driver does not hang up if it takes some time for an acknowledged ACK response to a strobe signal Standard personal computer parallel port hardware implements an interrupt on the ACK signal to make flow control easier 100 10937 Rev F Page 293 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Some systems may wish to change the details of how the strobe busy and acknowledged signals interact The parallel port option features define how the strobe busy and acknowledged signals operate In normal mode t
83. detect when the printer is set for 40mm paper The printer will adjust to the 40 mm paper setting when the 40mm insert is installed The 58mm position is not sensed so the printer cannot automatically switch between 80mm and 58mm paper but can automatically switch between 58 and 40mm paper 100 10937 Rev F Page 39 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Printer Drivers and Printer Controls Definitions for terms you will see in this guide OS The Operating System which is the operating software underlying a computer system Examples of OS s include Microsoft Windows 9x Me 2000 XP W7 Linux Unix and OS2 Application A software program that a person uses to perform a function such as a point of sale POS application Also referred to as a program Driver Software that makes hardware do something something useful we hope A driver translates or converts a software command to a command that specific hardware can understand Types of drivers include printer drivers port drivers OPOS drivers and USB drivers OCX ActiveX a software component that utilizes Microsofts OLE Object linking and embedding API Application Programming Interface or the language used to develop applications for devices such as printers In the generic sense the term the API refers to the Windows Operating System API Types of APIs include Windows API Visual Basic API Delphi API and MFC API Windows Drivers In
84. digit item number The check Note Note that the data to be encoded does not include the GS1 format 01 digit will be generated by the printer GS1 Databar 14 Stacked and GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni GS1 Databar 14 Stacked and GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni directional are RSS 14 barcodes printed in a stacked format The ratios between the top and bottom of this symbol are fixed and are not adjustable There is also a separator between the barcodes that has a specific relationship to the top and bottom bars This barcode must be printed within a controlled aspect ratio GS1 Databar Stacked symbols are typically printed without HRI To allow HRI to be printed if required the Stacked HRI may be enabled with a special configuration command Function GS 1 Databar 14 Stacked ASCII ESC b 2212 information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 21 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 21 gt information NUL Vum ESC b lt 21 gt 1234567890123 NUL Figure 33 GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Example 100 10937 Rev F Page 145 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni directional is spececfied to be printer with a greater height than the GS1 Databar 14 Stacked by a factor of 3 As the height of the symbol may be specified by command the GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni directional symbol will be printed 3 times the GS1 Databar 14 Stacked symbol Function GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni ASCII ESC b l
85. encoding even for non print commands 100 10937 Rev F Page 263 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Initiate Unicode UTF 16LE Encoding All ASCII ESC L Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 4CH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 76 gt Description The ESC L command will put the printer into UTF 16LE character encoding mode of operation If you wish to access characters above 255 You must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF 16LE UTF 16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255 sending two 8 bit bytes that form a 16 bit address to access the desired character UTF 16LE uses the little endian method of sending the two bytes This method sends the low byte first and then the high byte Note Once selected all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding even for non print commands Function Initiate Unicode UTF 8 Encoding MBCS All ASCII ESC M Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 4DH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 77 gt Description The ESC M command will put the printer into UTF 8 character encoding mode of operation If you wish to access characters above 255 You must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF 8 UTF 8 uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence MBCS to identify the desired Unicode character This encoding method is less straightforward This method uses unique bit sequences at the MSBs of a byte to determine its location and meaning within the MBCS encodi
86. font definition if a bitmap font is selected Legacy font definitions define the Size spacing font quality and spot size to be used to generate a legacy font For example the PcOS esc l 02 font select command will select PcOSI font Note that the font select and the Font ID are offset by one The font size is defined in 1 8 point units This gives a lot of control of the size Because the Model 9000 printer prints discreet dots that are relatively large from a font point of view changes in character size will appear to jump That is small changes in size will not appear to alter the character and them an 1 8 point change will make a dramatic change If you wish to change the font and or the character size select a size in the middle of the step Even though small changes don t appear to have an effect small changes do occur in the font generation and a value in the middle works best The X and Y Spot size effects how the characters are generated The spot size is equivalent to selecting a paint brush A small spot is a small paint brush and therefore requires a lot more brush strokes to form the character As the dots printed by the printer are always the same size defining a small spot will cause more dots to be used to form the character Depending on how the font was defined it may be advantageous to select a large brush size and in effect reduce the number of dots in the character There are no real guidelines for selecting Spot size
87. generated by a faulty font file Any value here should be interpreted as a fault Rev F Page 219 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ENQ lt 33 gt Inquire Paper Size ASCII ENQ lt 33 gt Hexadecimal 05H 21H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 33 gt Function The ENQ lt 33 gt command Paper Size Status Response ACK lt 33 gt lt 41 gt lt n gt Where lt 33 gt Is the echo of command lt 41 gt Length 40 lt n gt Paper Size Statu bit 0 1 0 40 mm paper 1 58 mm paper Note 40mm can be reported as 58mm 2 80 mm paper 3 82 mm paper bit 2 Not defined 0 always bit 3 Not defined 0 always bit 4 1 40mm paper divider installed bit 5 Not defined 0 always bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always 27 In some cases a small 58 mm paper print zone is used on 40mm paper although some of the print may miss the paper 8 82 mm Paper is not supported in the Model 9000 Page 220 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 34 gt Inquire Firmware ID and Rev ASCII ENQ lt 34 gt Hexadecimal 05H 22H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 34 gt Function The ENQ lt 34 gt command returns the Firmware ID and revision Response ACK lt 34 gt lt 51 gt PE9000 X XX Where lt 33 gt Is the echo of command lt 51 gt Length 40 Firmware ID PE9000 Separator Ox2D or 45D Rev X XX Current Revision in ASCII ENQ lt 35 gt Inquire USB Watch Dog Resets ASCII EN
88. grounding differences between the host computer and the printer can cause the USB link to become unreliable There is a USB watch dog feature See page 207 in the printer that can be activated and used to make the link auto recover however it is best the try to remove the source of the noise first and or improve the USB cable We send the best cable we can find with the printer but it s not always enough Input Buffer size The input buffer in the Model 9000 is configurable to values that are less than the USB packet size The printer must be able to accept a full USB packet If the input buffer is configured to be less than the USB packet size the printer will dynamically increase the buffer to handle the maximum USB packet size The USB packet sizes and minimum buffer sizes are listed below Protocol Packet Size Minimum buffer in bytes size in bytes USB 1 1 64 104 USB 2 0 512 552 Page 290 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Ethernet TCP IP A 10 100 BaseT Ethernet adapter is available for the Ithaca Model 9000 printer This Wired Ethernet Adapter provides a fast and easy way to network and share printers in your system Ethernet provides a consistent common connection between printers and computers using standard protocols supported by Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Windows 7 as well as many other platforms Ethernet is probably the most common networking medium and thus allow
89. gt Function The ENQ lt 40 gt command returns current firmware CRC Response NAK lt 31 gt lt CRC gt lt CRCy gt Not calculated yet ACK lt 31 gt lt CRC gt lt CRCy gt Calculation complete Where lt 40 gt is the echo of command ID lt n gt is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF lt CRC gt 16 bit CRC low 8 bits lt CRCy gt 16 bit CRC upper 8 bits ENQ lt 41 gt Inquire Current Firmware CRC ASCII IENQI lt 41 gt Hexadecimal 05H 29H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 41 gt Function The ENQ lt 41 gt command firmware update process status Response ACK lt 41 gt lt n gt lt I gt lt r gt Where lt 39 gt is the echo of command ID lt n gt is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF lt I gt CBT Update Process Status 0x00 Idle 0x01 Get Name 0x11 Fault 0x03 Get Data 0x04 Write 0x05 Done 0x15 Not Processed 0x25 Done No Validation requested 0x12 Bad CRC 0x06 Roll Back performed 100 10937 Rev F Page 223 Programming Codes lt gt gt Page 224 0x08 Not yet done CBL Update Process Status 0x00 0x01 0x11 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x15 0x25 0x12 0x06 0x08 Idle Get Name Fault Get Data Write Done Not Processed Done No Validation requested Bad CRC Roll Back performed Not yet done Rev F Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes
90. gt lt 0 gt command removes an item from user store and frees up space If the item does not exist the command does nothing The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT gt n gt on page 125 Function Transfer all items from user store to extended user store ASCII ESC US t 02 Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 74H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 116 gt IPCL amp UX lt 0 gt EPOS None Description This command transfers the information in the base 16K user store to the extended user store The base user store is erased if the transfer was successful The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT gt n gt on page 125 Function Flush information from user store or extended user store ASCII ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt User Store Or ESC US f EXT lt 0 gt Extended User Store Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 66H 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 102 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp UF EPOS GS 5 Description The ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt command clears all entries in user store and frees the data space It must have the name ALL in uppercase attached If EXT is substituted for ALL extended user store If any is cleared The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT gt n gt on page 125 Page 124 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer
91. gt lt Ly gt parameters make up a 16 bit length of bar data as follows Length Ly 256 Li An alternate format is provided that allows only a single character length for some bar codes The ESC b lt n gt lt L gt Bar Data command prints information as a bar code The lt L gt parameters make up a 8 bit length of bar data as follows Length Li If a start code is to be specified The following format may be required The ESC b lt n gt lt S gt Bar Data NUL command prints information as a bar code lt S gt indicates the start code and data up to the NUL is the bar data Page 128 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Where n 0 1 2 10 11 13 14 16 18 100 10937 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 39 Code 128 3 UPC A 4 EAN 13 5 UPC E 6 EAN 8 7 Code 93 Characters Codabar 9 PDF 417 below PDF 417 EAN 128 12 EAN 14 ITF 14 Code 49 15 Maxicode below Maxicode Code16K RSS 14 Programming Codes Numeric 0 9 only must be even number of digits 26 uppercase letters A Z 10 digits 0 9 Three sets of 106 different characters Numeric 0 9 only 11 digits Numeric 0 9 only 12 digits Numeric 0 9 only 11 digits Numeric 0 9 only 7 digits 26 letters 10 digits 0 9 and 7 special 10 digits 0 9 4 start stop characters A B C and D and 6 special characters 2D alpha Numeric 16bit length See notes 2D alpha Numeric NUL term See notes belo
92. gt lt Wi gt lt Wa gt lt HL gt lt Hp gt Decimal lt 271 gt lt 26 gt lt 83 gt lt XOL gt lt XOn gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOu gt lt Wi gt lt Wa gt lt HL gt lt Hp gt IPCL None EPOS ESC W Description This command Sets the position and size of the initial area in page mode and sub pages Where lt XOL gt lt XOp gt the x direction offset Min 0 lt YO gt lt YOu gt the y direction offset Min 0 lt W gt lt W gt the width in dots Max 576 lt H _ gt lt H gt the height in dots Max 3000 This command should always be sent before or immediately after page mode is entered to define the initial page size Once in page mode after the ESC t command the command can be sent multiple times so that several different print areas aligned in different print directions can be developed in the printer s page buffer before being printed using the Print Page Mode commands FF or ESC FF The starting position of the print area is the upper left of the area to be printed The Yoffset is in the y direction and is YO dots and the Xoffset is in the x direction and is XO dots in The length of the area to be printed in the y direction is set to H dots The length of the area to be printed in the x direction is set to W dots The set print area command may be invoked multiple times while in page mode The first invocation specifies the initial master page size Following invocations will define smaller windows within the initially defined
93. identification of logistic unit contents classification 703 s Approval number of 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the processor identification of logistic unit contents 8001 Variables of roll 01 Mandatory association with a variable measure products GTIN e g an GTIN 14 starting with the digit 9 8005 Price per unit of 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a variable measure measure with N1 GTIN or the identification of variable measure 9 content of a logistic unit 8007 International Bank 8020 and Mandatory association with the payment slip Account Number Al 415 reference number AI 8020 and the GLN of the 8007 invoicing partv 8008 Date and time of 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the production identification of logistic unit contents 8020 Payment slip reference 415 Mandatory association with the GLN of the invoicing number Al 8020 party Note Is 3nnn where the first three digits are 312 313 324 325 326 327 328 and 329 Note Is 3nnn where the first three digits are 310 311 314 315 316 320 321 322 323 350 351 352 356 357 360 361 364 365 and 366 Note Is 3nnn where the first three digits are 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 353 354 355 362 363 367 368 and 369 Table 22 Mandatory Al Code Associations Note It is beyond the scope of this document to define all the Al fields there meaning requirements and
94. iii iet eseu Ee eege ceded thewestdexcecenas 233 Store Graphics in the printer 234 To Store a graphic in the printer 234 Printa stored graphiC eege Eeer 234 Generate a file to store graphics into a primter 234 How universal graphics is done EE 236 Page 10 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes How to use IPCL commands in text sirimgs nn 236 Load and store named graphic image nanna 236 Recall and print stored named graphic Image nn 237 E oti adie meni zi g a e ie EE st Seki salts cack eS Ne ada bo g Sed 237 Universal Color Command Descriptions nn 237 Model 9000 Coupon Cut Logo Feature 240 Scalable FOES i i eres aed ee eee eed eee 241 Character Gienenatlon lt a ia cot ee ee ee oh ea ater eee 241 OUTING characte S ocd dati wlied LK Ti dot taa 241 Stroke based Ghara ters assenti ed Ee eege eds 241 Gharacter Definitio is fess ba i a 242 Gharacter SIZE sg genge ta e st tap e a al 243 Selecting Character Size 243 Legacy or Classic Method 243 Line SPACING E 244 Selecting character size by points Shes na i Jeet i b Se 244 BIER 244 Character Cache xii ski A ELSEN 245 Stacked or Linked TOMS se avez ete idee Sea A ate At eee 245 BITMAP s POMS i it l a a 246 SUS FORT m 1A tini air tri d f B u a 247 ege ER ti is sbie d ibna pu fa at d kd p a GA ota fb dm rd d bad 247 Font Storage il leith auton Stati aaa ail ah Nee 248 Font Control Gommeand opsie aces e mv B een E 24
95. lt 56 gt amp PF none The ESC 8 command temporally disables the paper out sensor The printer does not stop printing or go off line when it senses it is out of paper The inquire commands still return paper out status Enable paper out sensor ESC 9 1BH 39H lt 27 gt lt 57 gt amp PO none The ESC 9 command enables paper sensing and is intended to reverse the effect of the disable paper out sensor command If the printer is out of paper when the command is issued it goes off line Set left right print margins ESC X lt n gt lt n gt 1BH 58H mu lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 88 gt lt ni gt lt N2 gt none ESC ESC Q The ESC X lt n gt lt n gt command sets left and right print margins in characters from the home position Where n left margin and n right margin the absolute position depends on the current print pitch If the left and right margins are set to the right of the current horizontal position the new margins become valid in the same line If the left margin is set to the left of the current horizontal position and the right margin set to the right of the current horizontal position the right margin setting becomes valid in the same line but the left margin setting becomes valid in the next line When the left and right margins are set to the left of the current horizontal position both left and right margin settings appear to become valid in the next line because an auto CR is performed
96. m gt lt n gt 1BH 3FH none 110 Two Color Graphics Process horizontal graphics data ESC h lt color gt 1BH 68H none 112 lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt Set horizontal graphic mode ESC lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt 1BH 2AH none 113 User Store Begin named macro record ESC US b 1BH 1FH 62H amp UB 121 lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save macro data in user store ESC US m 1BH 1FH amp UM 122 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 6DH lt Name gt lt 0 gt End named macro record ESC US e 1BH 1FH 65H amp UG 122 lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Load item from user store ESC US 1BH 1FH amp UL 123 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 6CH lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save user defined characters ESC US c 1BH 1FH 63H amp UC 122 lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Page 66 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Description Programming Codes IPCL equivalent code Run macro data from user store ESC US r 1BH 1FH 72H amp UR 123 lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Flag item as a start up macro ESC US s 1BH 1FH amp US 123 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 6DH lt Name gt lt 0 gt Delete item from user store ESC US d 1BH 1FH 64H amp UD 124 lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Flush information from
97. maximum Drawer status Open close drawer status provided to printer Cash Drawer Pin Assignments Epson 12 3 4 5 6 pin1 Not Connected pin2 CD1 pin3 CD1 Sense pin4 CD Drive 24V pin5 CD2 pin6 Ground Figure 3 Cash Drawer Pin Definitions Pin Epson Number Signal Name Direction 1 Drawer kick out drive signal 2 Output Sink Drive 2 Drawer open close signal Input 3 Signal ground 4 24V DC 5 Drawer kick out drive signal 1 Output Sink Drive 6 Frame Ground Table 10 Cash Drawer Pin Assignment 100 10937 Rev F Page 35 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Setup Verifying the Configuration Before you install an Model 9000 Printer into your system you should verify that the printer is configured as required by your system There are four parts to this verification process 1 Verify that the communications interface card is the correct one 2 Verify that the cash drawer interface is configured correctly 3 Verify that the power connection is correct 4 Verify that the firmware in the printer is configured correctly Verify the Communications Interface Card There are several basic types of interface cards and each has variations Make sure your printer has the correct interface card USB Interface Without interface card e Standard 4 pin Parallel Interface e Centronics 36 pin interface e 25 pin D shell Serial Interface e 9 pin D shell interface e 25 p
98. monetary area 415 reference number Al 8020 and the GLN of the invoicing party 391n Amount pavable with 8020 and Mandatory association with the payment slip ISO currencv code 415 reference number AI 8020 and the GLN of the invoicing partv 392n Amount pavable 01 Mandatorv association with variable measure GTIN single monetarv unit e g a GTIN 14 starting with the digit 9 393n Amount payable with 01 Mandatory association with variable measure GTIN ISO currency code e g a GTIN 14 starting with the digit 9 403 Routing code 00 Mandatory association with an SSCC 415 GLN of the invoicing 8020 Mandatory association with payment slip reference party number Al 8020 422 Country of origin 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN 423 Country of initial 01 or02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the processing identification of logistic unit contents 424 Country of processing 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the identification of logistic unit contents 425 Country of disassembly 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the identification of logistic unit contents 426 Country of full 01 or 03 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the processing identification of logistic unit contents 7001 NATO stock number 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the identification of logistic unit contents 7002 UN ECE meat 01 or02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the carcasses and cuts
99. n2 an 20 FNC1 BATCH LOT 112 Production Date YYMMDD n2 n6 PROD DATE 122 Due Date YYMMDD n2 n6 DUE DATE 132 Packaging Date YYMMDD n2 n6 PACK DATE 152 Best Before Date YYMMDD n2 n6 BEST BEFORE or SELL BY 172 Expiration Date YYMMDD n2 n6 USE BY OR EXPIRY 20 Variant Number n2 n2 VARIANT 21 Serial Number n2 an 20 FNC1 SERIAL 22 Secondary Data Fields n2 an 29 FNC1 QTY DATE BATCH 30 Count of Items Variable Measure Trade n2 n 8 FNC1 VAR COUNT Item 37 Count of Trade Items n2 n 8 FNC1 COUNT 90 Information Mutually Agreed Between n2 an 30 FNC1 INTERNAL Trading Partners 91 to 99 Company Internal Information n2 an 30 FNC1 INTERNAL 240 Additional Item Identification n3 an 30 FNC1 ADDITIONAL ID 241 Customer Part Number n3 an 30 FNC1 CUST PART NO 242 Made to Order Variation Number n3 n 6 FNC1 MTO VARIANT 250 Secondary Serial Number n3 an 30 FNC1 SECONDARY SERIAL 251 Reference to Source Entity n3 an 30 FNC1 REF TO SOURCE 253 Global Document Type Identifier GDTI n3 n13 n 17 FNC1 DOC ID 254 GLN Extension Component n3 an 20 FNC1 GLN EXTENSION 400 Customer s Purchase Order Number n3 an 30 FNC1 ORDER NUMBER 401 Consignment Number n3 an 30 FNC1 CONSIGNMENT 402 Shipment Identification Number n3 ni7 FNC1 SHIPMENT NO 403 Routing Code n3 an 30 FNC1 ROUTE 410 Ship to Deliver to Global Location n3 n13 SHIP TO LOC Number 411 Bill to Invoice to Global Location n
100. of Communications Regulatory Compliance FCC Class A ULc CE Mark UL 1950 TUV 100 10937 Rev F Page 3 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Disclaimer NOTICE TO ALL PERSONS RECEIVING THIS DOCUMENT The information in this document is subject to change without notice No part of this document may be reproduced stored or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of TransAct Technologies Inc TransAct This document is the property of and contains information that is both confidential and proprietary to TransAct Recipient shall not disclose any portion of this document to any third party TRANSACT DOES NOT ASSUME ANY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES INCURRED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM ANY ERRORS OMISSIONS OR DISCREPANCIES IN THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT TransAct cannot guarantee that changes in software and equipment made by other manufacturers and referred to in this publication do not affect the applicability of information in this publication Copyright 2007 2012 TransAct Technologies Inc All rights reserved Revision Level F July 2012 Printed in USA Trademarks Some of the product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective companies BANKjet 50Plus Insta Load Ithaca Made to Order Built to Last Magnetec PcOS
101. on the features and programming interface of the Model 9000 printer It provides the following information to support your programming and implementation efforts Warranty and technical support information Specifications and functionality description e Programming information including documentation of low level and high level command interfaces as well as sample scripts to guide your own implementation efforts We want you to have a trouble free implementation with your Transact printer For any issues not covered in this guide quality technical support is available on line at www transact tech com or by telephone at 607 257 8901 or 877 7ithaca Consult the following pages for more details about our support services Warranty Options All Model 9000 printers come with a standard 24 month standard warranty covering both parts and labor that starts upon shipment from the factory An optional extended warranty covering both parts and labor for an additional 12 months may be purchased separately For more information concerning the warranty options please contact the Sales Department at TransAct s Ithaca facility You are responsible for insuring any product returned for service and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Ithaca 100 10937 Rev F Page 17 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide C O D packages are not accepted and warranty repairs are subject to the terms and conditions as stated on the Ithaca wa
102. or 0 to 9 e GS o 3 digit country code from ISO 3166 NOTE Mode 2 supports the US Country Code 840 For other country codes please use Mode 3 instead e GS o 3 digit class of service e GS o lt The secondary message data in the required format gt EOT End of Message Where GS ASCII 29 is used to separate fields in a message and EOT ASCII 4 is the end of transmission character Page 158 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes QRCode QR Code is a 2D barcode readable by QR scanners mobile phones and smart phones with a camera The code consists of black modules arranged in a square pattern on white background The information encoded can be most any text data Although initially used for tracking parts in vehicle manufacturing QR Codes are now used in a much broader context including both commercial tracking applications and convenience oriented applications aimed at mobile phone users known as mobile tagging Denso Wave Inc invented the QR Code Barcode The word QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED This registered trademark applies only for the word QR Code and not for the QR Code pattern or image QR Codes storing addresses and URLs may appear in magazines on signs buses business cards retail receipts or on just about any object about which users might need information Users with a camera phone equipped with the correct reader application can scan t
103. partition All ASCII ESC RS s lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 73H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 115 gt Where n The partition Description The ESC RS s command will return an identifier byte and 4 additional bytes representing a 32 bit value LSB First representing the amount of free space in the partition The format is as follows S lt B7 0 gt lt B15 8 gt lt B23 16 gt lt B31 24 gt Function Close File command All ASCII ESC RS C Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 43H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 67 gt Description The ESC RS C command will close the currently open file Function Close All Files command All ASCII ESC RS K Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 4BH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 75 gt Description The ESC RS K command will close the font system and close all currently open files Internal fonts will be reopened automatically if used Function Delete File command All ASCII ESC RS D lt Filename gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 44H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 68 gt FileName File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension null terminated Description The ESC RS D command will select and delete a file Note Some of the system files are protected and cannot be deleted Page 270 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Function Set Clear File Attributes command All ASCII ESC RS A lt Attbs gt lt space gt
104. pass through data it is not processed Page 204 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes SOH ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL Where lt n gt Description ESC y ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Where n 100 10937 Begin multi drop control SOH lt n gt 01H lt n gt lt 1 gt lt n gt none is the printer address Addresses of A B or C are configurable The printer must be addressed in multi drop mode SOH lt n gt is the addressing command If the printer is configured with an address of A it operates when addressed When any other address is sent to the printer it enters print suppress mode An address of Z is n universal address that activates the printer Set control feature commands ESC y lt n gt 1BH 79H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt n gt amp Y0 9 or amp YX lt m gt lt m gt lt m gt for numbers greater than nine ESC y lt n gt 0 Reinitializes the printer and forces Citizen mode Reinitializes the printer and forces Star mode 2 Reinitializes the printer and forces Model 9000 mode 3 Reinitializes the printer and forces extended EPOS mode 4 Disables IPCL commands 5 Enables IPCL commands 6 Disables inquire processing All preprocessing is disabled 7 Enables inquire processing 8 Enables extended diagnostics 9 Print Current Configuration 10 Not used 11 Not used 12 Not used 13 Not used 14 Not used 15 Print
105. printer with the driver See http www usb org developers devclass docs usbcdci 1 pdf Transact has written a POSPrinter OCX Activex that will allow vou to easilv interface to our printers It is used by all of our demonstration programs This OCX is available for use with customer applications It works with printers installed on Serial COM ports LPT ports TCP IP and USB Class 7 interfaces A USB compatible version is available from customer support or from our web site USB DFU The Model 9000 printer supports the USB DFU Device Firmware Upgrade standards for firmware update as an option This option is disabled by default because it requires that the printer be presented as a composite device and both the USB Printing Support Driver and the DFU driver be loaded at all times In most POS system it is not desirable to load both drivers at all times It is not required to support DFU to update the firmware in the printer however without DFU it requires more host application development to support printer updates without operator attendance See www usb org developers devclass docs DFU 1 1 pdf 100 10937 Rev F Page 289 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide USB Problems USB Enumeration Issues When a printer is connected to Windows Windows remembers it If you change the configuration Windows will generally notice that the printer is different and assign a new USB port to the printer Windows also can assign a new
106. problem 18 Barcode won t fit in the print zone System Errors 90 This barcode is not active in this code 91 HRI Text field pointer is not valid Not recoverable 98 Unknown Internal ID 99 Memory allocation error Aztec 100 Input too long or too many extended ASCII characters 101 Invalid error correction level using default instead 102 Invalid Aztec Code size 103 Input too large 104 Not used 105 Aztec Invalid character NULL in input data Data Matrix 200 Invalid characters in data 201 Input wrong length 202 Invalid PZN Data 203 Value out of range 300 Data too long to fit in symbol 301 Data does not fit in selected symbol size 210 Not Used 211 Invalid symbol size 212 Unable to fit data in specified symbol size GS 1 Data 400 Extended ASCII characters are not supported by GS1 Errors 401 Control characters are not supported by GS1 ae System Errors are internal printer errors that should not occur If error codes between 90 and 99 occur contact customer support 100 10937 Rev F Page 197 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 402 Data does not start with an Al 403 Malformed AI in input data brackets don t match 404 Found nested brackets in input data 405 Invalid Al in input data Al too long 406 Invalid Al in input data Al too short 407 Invalid Al in input data non numeric characters in Al 408 Invalid data length for Al 409 Invalid Al value
107. s Guide Programming Codes Function Report on user store ASCII ESC US q lt 0 gt Print a user store report Or ESC US lt 0 gt Return a formatted user store report Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 71H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 113 gt IPCL amp UQ lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS GS 3 Description The ESC US q lt Name gt lt 0 gt command prints a status report The file name is ignored and may be omitted The NUL must be present The intention of the command is to aid in macro development The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Note The report is also printed as part of the configuration report Function Redefine User Store Termination Character ASCII ESC EM T lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 54H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 84 gt lt n gt IPCL amp UT lt n gt EPOS None Description This command allows the terminator used to signal the end of the name field in User Store commands to be modified The value of lt n gt is used in addition to the lt 0 gt for the terminator The value of n may be from 0 to 255 The default value for the second terminator is amp If this command redefines the terminator to something other than amp the amp will no longer function Example If amp UT were sent to the printer the user store command to run macro Demo would be amp amp URDemo 100 109
108. s Guide Programming Codes printing devices Other drivers are OPOS Unified POS UPOS or POSPrinter It is also possible that your application communicates directly to the printer using a custom printer driver OPOS UnifiedPOS UPOS If you are using an application that is written to interface with the OPOS OLE Point of Sale standard then the TransAct Technologies OPOS driver will allow you to communicate with most TransAct Technologies printers The OPOS driver provides the mechanisms to print in all of the print modes supported by the printer Note At this time the TransAct Technologies OPOS driver only supports Microsoft Windows operating systems Microsoft supports a Windows Printing API for Windows applications This interface is intended to support typical Windows page printers and has features such as begin document end document and tray selection While this is not an ideal environment for a POS printer there are cases where such functionality is required To support this environment TransAct Technologies provides a Windows print driver with extensions for POS which may be downloaded and installed for most TransAct Technologies printers Please read the Ithaca Printer API documentation included with the driver A POS printer is not the same as a typical consumer printer and requires unique consideration when using a Windows printer API interface 100 10937 Rev F Page 41 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer
109. save new graphic with this name command and the graphics information 4 This file can then be sent to the printer and the graphic will be saved in the printer Note If the target printer does not have enough room for the graphic information to be stored the graphic will not be stored 100 10937 Rev F Page 235 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide How universal graphics is done The printer extends all the emulations to support two additional escape sequences and adds limited IPCL support IPCL Ithaca Printer Control Language is an ASCII method of sending printer commands to the printer In Ithaca PCOS emulation IPCL command support is extensive In other emulations IPCL support is limited to the following commands amp CR Insert a CR amp LF Insert a LF amp YUAXXX Feed xxx paper steps and cycle auto cutter amp CLX Select Color where x 0 for the Primary or 1 2 3 for secondary amp UBName amp Begin defining universal graphic Name amp UGName amp End the definition of Name amp URName amp Run print universal graphic Name amp UDName amp Remove universal graphic Name from nonvolatile memory amp USName amp Flag universal graphic Name to be run when the printer is turned on amp UFALL amp Erase all stored universal graphics Erases all User Store amp UQ amp Prints a directory of the universal graphics currently stored in the printer amp UTX Changes the Name t
110. square grid with a bulls eye pattern at its centre for locating the code Data is encoded in concentric square rings around the bulls eye pattern The central bulls eye is 9x9 or 13x13 pixels and one row of pixels around that encodes basic coding parameters producing a core of 11x11 or 15x15 squares Data is added in layers each one containing 2 rings of pixels giving total sizes of 15x15 19x19 23x23 and so on The corners of the core include orientation marks allowing the code to be read if rotated or reflected Decoding begins at the corner with three black pixels and proceeds clockwise to the corners with two one and zero black pixels The variable pixels in the central core encode the size so it is not necessary to mark the boundary of the code with a blank quiet zone although some bar code readers require one The compact Aztec code core supports symbols from 15x15 room for 13 digits or 12 letters through 27x27 There is additionally a special 11x11 rune that encodes one byte of information The full core supports sizes up to 151x151 which can encode 3832 digits 3067 letters or 1914 bytes of data The level of Reed Solomon error correction is used for Aztec and the Model 9000 is configurable to 10 23 36 or 50 of the data region The recommended level is 23 Aztec Code Standard is ISO IEC 24778 published February 2008 All 8 bit values can be encoded The default interpretation for values 1 127 is ASCII and
111. ssennannununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnz 20 Model 9000 Thermal Printer Model 20 Standard EEN 20 General SOSCIICANGNG i i a a ite a GEN g ata 22 eidele E 22 Emtee EE HE ti ii fat in eege 23 DIMENSIONS inei r AEA AA LA i re 23 NN Ebert eege geed Dee EEE Heaton eee 23 Ele iri al Character e 24 Internal AC Powered ii dee E dee deeg 24 External Powered DG iii in eege lien eatin nat eased lamers 24 Thermal Print BACK tease et kt 25 Media Specifications EE 26 Receipt Paper ii si a EE E RE 26 NMOROGHIOMG EEN 26 COI a A i a i in i at 26 Liner less Label Paper Monochrome nn 26 Paper DU a i at a A ta And dances 27 PAP SOW ts io B a g 27 Receipt Printing Auto Cutter Position 27 Top of Form Marks cco oh fect heats el nh ek tA tt oe we es ek ete oe 28 BU ZO secs ef E ee E 29 Reeg Late 29 DiS play Pass Through mean scares cence did a b tvs ne cen sede deere ag dans SAAR Sev bal nase eee veep ones 29 GOMMUNIGALIONS INIGMACE ER 30 USB peter ee See SES 30 Powered USB Interface ii si lia kaz ara B aa a a a e a a a 30 100 10937 Rev F Page 5 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Ee eh 31 leiw RRE 31 Rs 282 serial Interface a a a ia a dense 32 Ree ER Signal Voltage and Current levels ss 32 Display Le a tesa ie ete eet Rie a eae ee 32 Ethernet 10 100 Base T adapter 33 General Ethernet Definitions e 33 CaS is RTE 35 Interface Description s sisien a a 35 Cash Drawer Pin Assignments AEN 35 SOUP a a i a a a a a
112. the macro when it is complete The macro data is not processed as it is sent to the printer Function Begin named macro record ASCII ESC US b lt Name gt lt 0 gt Then send the data to be recorded The printer does not process the data The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function End name macro record ASCII ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt The second way to define macros is to use ESC g commands to define the macro and then the save macro data command to save the data The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function Start macro record ASCII ESC g lt 1 gt Then send the data to be recorded The data is processed and printed 100 10937 Rev F Page 119 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Stop macro record ASCII ESC g lt 2 gt Then save the macro Function Save macro data ASCII ESC US m lt Name gt lt 0 gt Saving User defined Characters To save user defined characters first define the character set Function Define user defined characters ASCII ESC lt y gt lt C gt sta Xi dy d y x xa xk dy d y x xk Second save the definition in the nonvolatile flash memory with the appropriate command Save the definition Note the Save user defined characters command saves all th
113. the printer is re addressed data pass through is active Multi drop Configuration The Model 9000 Printer supports a multi drop configuration where up to three printers can be connected in parallel Each printer has a different address A B or C The printer does not accept any print information unless it is addressed Multi drop configuration is only available in serial mode as parallel printers cannot be connected together 100 10937 Rev F Page 307 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Off line Active A configuration flag that prevents the printer from going off line in most cases is available Off line mode allows the application to query the printer for status rather than assume a status from the control signals This feature allows the host application to query the printer at all times except when there is no power a full input buffer or a hard failure For example when the printer s cover is open the printer stops printing but still accepts data and inquiries The inquire cover status command returns Cover open Hard failures result when there is no power or a printer faut occurs If the printer is off line either the input buffer is full or a hard fault has occurred The host application should not allow the input buffer to fill 4 Most fault will auto recover A cutter fault will not as it was probably caused by a paper jam and that must be cleared by the operator Page 308 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 P
114. the ENQ 35 command will reset the count and will also reset the status reported by ENQ 20 ENQ 20 does not reset the count It simply reports that a reset occurred To keep track of how often this process is being used there is a printer statistics log entry that will be incremented when a USB watch dog disconnect actually occurs This can be printed or reported to the host Note This total is not reset by the ENQ 35 command ENQ lt 35 gt Inquire USB Watch Dog Resets ASCII ENQ lt 35 gt Hexadecimal 05H 23H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 35 gt Function The ENQ lt 35 gt command returns the number of USB Watch dog resets and then resets the count to zero Response ACK lt 35 gt lt 41 gt lt n gt Where lt 35 gt Is the echo of command lt 41 gt Length 40 lt n gt The number of USB Watchdogs since the last inquire Page 208 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Printer Status Status Inquire The Model 9000 Printer is designed for use as part of an automated system where the host computer makes every attempt to correct problems with the printer In addition the host application requires that it be able to obtain more information from the printer than is typical of normal computer printers For example a normal computer printer does not have cash drawers such additional features require that the standard printer protocol be extended to deal with the added features of a point of sale P
115. the cell adjustment flag will remain set and if legacy commands are used they will allow the cell to be expanded NOTE If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing the cell size will be expanded Page 254 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Function Set Character spacing in points with adjustment All ASCII ESC j lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 6AH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 106 gt Range d 0 16 255 The ESC j command will set the character spacing in points where Lo point is defined as 1 288 of an inch This command will force mono space printing It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used This command differs from the ESC i command in that if the character is too large for the cell the cell will be expanded in multiples of lt d gt until the character fits If d O variable spacing is selected However note that the cell adjustment flag will remain set and if legacy commands are used they will allow the cell to be expanded NOTE If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing the characters will overlap Variable spacing is recommended Function Set minimum Line Spacing
116. the paper to be changed 100 10937 Rev F Page 45 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Typical operation LED indications Code Paper Error Power Normal OFF OFF ON Indication during Normal Operation Power Save OFF OFF Very Slow Printer is in a low power Blink saving mode Out Of Paper ON ON ON Low Paper Slow Blink OFF ON Paper Low is an optional Low Paper Error Slow Blink ON ON feature Cover Open On OFF ON ON In some cases Paper Out may also be indicated when the cover is open Printer Over OFF 4 Blink Slow Blink Temp Power Bad Slow Blink OFF 2 Blink Power Problem Powering Down OFF OFF Fast Blink Low Electronic 2 Blink OFF ON Journal Maintenance OFF OFF Slow The printer has been placed Mode Double in Maintenance mode Blink Table 13 Operating Mode Blink Codes Fault Indicators The error indicator is the primary fault indicator and is either always on or blinking if a fault has occurred There are three types of faults Fully recoverable faults Paper out or cover open Semi recoverable faults Paper jam Non recoverable faults Component failure Fully recoverable and Status A fully recoverable error will restart printing exactly where it stopped when the error occurred Printing will resume after error has been properly addressed A status recoverable error is very similar to a fully recoverable error Additionally status is used to display when t
117. the print density the print speed may be slower or faster Print speed will be slower when using adhesive backed or color paper 2 The number of characters per line depend on the paper size being used and the character pitch in affect Page 20 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes e Parallel 25 or 36 pin serial 9 or 25 pin RS232C USB or Ethernet interface Configurable receiver buffer Self diagnostics Set up and configuration utility program CPI selections from 8 to 30 CPI Paper Out sensor Multiple printer emulations Ithaca PcOS Star Citizen and Epson APA and Epson graphics Over 25 Bar Codes including 2D and Composite Resident Bitmap and True Type Fonts UTF or ASCII with code page Character addressing WGL4 0 Character set Metal receipt tear off 8 dots mm thermal print head resolution ON OFF switch located on side of printer Cable routing strain relief Power Error Paper LEDs Paper feed button Cover open button Spill resistant design vertical main PCB mounting 58 mm or 80 mm paper width 4 0 inch 101 mm Paper roll diameter Portrait landscape printing under Windows Page mode printing Cover Open sensor Internal counters for hours on cuts print lines and errors 100 km print head life 60 million print line printer MCBF excluding knife Buzzer Character spacing is adjustable from 1 to 30 CPI Typical values will be between 8 and 20 CPI depending on the font sel
118. the printer the User Store command to run universal graphic Demo would be amp amp URDemo Set Print Color amp CL lt n gt This command allows various colors to be selected on printer emulations that do not support color text 0 Print with the Left cartridge Typically Black 1 2 3 Print with the Right cartridge Typically Red Blue or Green Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts amp UA Cycle Auto Cutter IPCL amp UA lt m gt lt Ms gt lt M3 gt Description This command feeds m 96 inches of paper and cycles the auto cutter Where m m m 100 m 10 m3 100 10937 Rev F Page 239 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Coupon Cut Logo Feature The Model 9000 printer has a feature that will allow a coupon and or logo graphic to printed as part of the existing auto cutter command To activate this feature it must first be configured Configuration consists of specifying in what order the Coupon Cut Logo is processed and optionally how much paper is to be feed after the new cut operation Once configured the Coupon and or logo must be defined and loaded into the printer The Universal Graphics feature should be used to define and load the graphic The Coupon is named Coupon and the Logo is named Logo They may be saved in any resolution and of any size They also need not be all graphics The existing application
119. to the left margin Note The IPCL command prints from 00 to 99 lines For example if you wish to feed 12 lines the IPCL command would be as follows amp FL12 VT Vertical tab ASCII VT Hexadecimal OBH Decimal lt 11 gt IPCL amp VT EPOS VT Description The printer sets a line counter to the top of the form at reset and when a set top of form command is issued By setting vertical tab stops various form positions can be reached with a VT operation Page 74 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC B Set vertical tab stops ASCII ESC B lt ny gt lt n gt lt n3 gt fc 0 Hexadecimal 1BH 42H lt n gt las lt n3 gt lt n gt 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 66 gt lt ni gt lt N2 gt lt N3 gt lt N gt lt 0 gt IPCL none EPOS ESC B lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt n gt 0 Description The ESC B lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt nj gt 0 command sets tab stops at line positions specified by lt n gt The end of the setting is specified by a lt 0 gt All previously set tabs will be cleared If n is less than n 4 then the command is in error and all of the following information is printed In other words tab stops must be entered sequentially in order to be accepted A total of 64 tab stops can be specified The power on default is a vertical tab on every line ESC R Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops ASCII ESC R Hexadecimal 1BH 52H Decimal l
120. to the printer using whatever means is available to you amp UBLogo amp Begin defining macro Logo amp UGLogo amp End the Definition of Logo amp UMLogo amp Save Macro Logo to nonvolatile memory A graphic image named Logo should now be stored in the nonvolatile memory e To verify the image is present use the amp UQ amp IPCL command or the PJColor Color Image Converter to print the name and size of the stored images Recall and print stored named graphic image e Send the following text string to the printer using whatever means is available to you amp URLogo amp Run Macro Logo Print the macro Cautions Universal graphics information is stored in the same place as user defined characters and user defined macros If you are using an emulation such as ESC POS that supports macros and or user defined characters universal graphics will compete for space with these functions In addition the amp UFALL amp Erase universal graphics will also erase any user defined graphics and macros If you are using the Ithaca PcOS emulation these commands are identical with the User Store commands except for the terminator character You may change the NUL terminator to amp with amp UT amp if you find the amp easier Universal Color Command Descriptions amp UB lt Name gt amp Begin named universal graphic record IPCL amp UB lt Name gt amp Description The amp UB lt Name gt amp comm
121. variations to those emulations and the Model 9000 has some ability to adjust to those variations Emulation Settings Emulation Mode Ithaca M280 Basic Product Emulation Epson TMTxx ESC POS Axiohm 73XX Star 600 or 700 Citizen Ithaca M50 Ithaca Microline Epson Model TM T85 Epson model specific TM T88ll variations TM T88lll TM T88IV TM T90 Epson ESC v Definition 2 byte How should the Epson ESC 3 byte v command function Disabled Epson ESC r Color How should the Epson ESC Inverse Video r command function Microline Mode M50 What microline variation M50 Plus should be used ML192 Microline CD Cmd BEL What command should be ESC use in microline for the cash drawer Micro Line ESC BEL No Should the Microline ESC Yes BBEL command b used Auto Center Left How should the Auto center Center be preset Right Print Zone 640 608 What print zone should be 576 512 used for 80 MM paper 480 448 416 384 Values from 576 to 384 are 320 312 typical with 576 being 288 256 standard 40mm Print zone 640 608 What print zone should be 576 512 used for 40 mm paper 480 448 Values from 320 to 256 are 416 384 typical with 312 being 320 312 standard 288 256 100 10937 Rev F Page 59 Programming Codes Configuring USB options The Model 9000 allows how the USB link works to be controlled The options are Model 9000 Programmer s Guide USB Options USB Speed USB
122. 00 Printer are generally faster The Model 9000 Printer implements the IEEE 1284 nibble mode standard If an application requires real time status from the printer the IEEE 1284 bi directional protocol must be used The Model 9000 Printer does not support byte mode If the Model 9000 Printer is used in an IEEE 1284 compliant system byte mode should be an extension and the default should be nibble mode The Model 9000 Ethernet adapter provides real time status using the UDP IP protocol This is not the same as the Epson printer In general the Model 9000 when operating through an Ethernet interface will not be interchangeable The Model 9000 Printer supports the EPOS real time status commands DLE ENQ and DLE EOT and are preprocessed by the printer The printer supports all the response bit fields as defined by the TM T88 and TM T90 Printers The Model 9000 Printer looks at and evaluates all commands as they are received and does not respond to DLE ENQ or DLE EOT commands that happen to be embedded in graphics or other commands Refer to the buffer and preprocessor descriptions in later sections Page 226 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Epson Licensed Firmware Epson has patented several features used by the TM 88 and TM90 If you use automatic status back or the real time cash drawer command you must use the added cost licensed firmware in the Model 9000 If you don t need thos
123. 00 Programmer s Guide Configuring Paper Types Programming Codes The Model 9000 can be configured for various types of paper and the black dot sensor can be used to switch between two different types The following options control the paper types Print Settings Paper Type Typical Black Typical black POS paper Prints at 12 IPS Typical Color Typical color POS paper Prints at 6 IPS Custom Setredand Allows the energy and print speed to be Black black dot adjusted but prints with only one color energy plain Custom Setredand Allows the energy and print speed to be Color black dot adjusted energy NCR adhesive Sets the printer to print optimally on NCR adhesive paper Prints at 6 IPS Custom Adhesive Sets up for adhesive paper but allows the energy and speed to be set Generic Gray Sets the printer to print standard POS paper with a gray scale Prints at about 6 IPS Custom Set red and Gray black dot energy to adjust the gray levels Sets the printer with a gray scale but allows the energy and speed to be adjusted Alt Paper type See paper type above Sets the alternate paper type Secondary Color None Set the printer to process color paper by Red selecting the alternate color of the paper Green Blue Speed Override From Paper or from The printer may be slowed down to 1 to 15 IPS better develop some paper types Setting the printer to greater
124. 000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Testing the Printer Overview Using Self Test Configuration and Hex Dump Mode Self Test Mode allows you to perform a series of tests to show if the printer is functioning correctly Self Test Mode also allows you to print a summary of how your Model 9000 is currently configured Use this printout to compare your printer s settings to your system s requirements Specific attention should be given to emulation and communications settings For serial printers the baud rate and other RS 232 interface settings are important If there is a configuration problem you should use Configuration Mode to make any changes necessary Entering Self Test and Configuration mode To enter self test and or configuration mode perform the following sequence of operations Turn the printer OFF The power indicator light will be off Press and hold the Feed button While holding the Feed button Turn the printer on When the red error indicator light blinks release the Feed button Press and release the FEED button to run the indicated test Press and hold the FEED button until the green paper LED is illuminated to select the next test Press and hold the FEED button until the red error LED is illuminated to exit self test mode OVE ON N The Model 9000 has a total of seven Self Test and or configuration options Two are designed to be useful when performing on site print evaluations One option all
125. 0b7 middle dot kana conjoctive 0046 Latin capital letter f 00b8 cedilla 0047 Latin capital letter g 00b9 superscript one 0048 Latin capital letter h 00ba masculine ordinal indicator 0049 Latin capital letter i 00bb right guillemet 004a Latin capital letter j 00bc vulgar fraction one quarter 004b Latin capital letter k 00bd vulgar fraction one half 004c Latin capital letter 00be vulgar fraction three quarters 004d Latin capital letter m OObf inverted question mark 004e Latin capital letter n 00c0 Latin capital letter a with grave accent 004f Latin capital letter o 00c1 Latin capital letter a with acute accent 0050 Latin capital letter p 00c2 Latin capital letter a with circumflex accent 0051 Latin capital letter q 00c3 Latin capital letter a with tilde 0052 Latin capital letter r 00c4 Latin capital letter a with diaeresis 0053 Latin capital letter s 00c5 Latin capital letter a with ring above 0054 Latin capital letter t 00c6 Latin capital letter a with e 0055 Latin capital letter u 00c7 Latin capital letter c with cedilla 0056 Latin capital letter v 00c8 Latin capital letter e with grave accent 0057 Latin capital letter w 00c9 Latin capital letter e with acute accent 0058 Latin capital letter x 00ca Latin capital letter e with circumflex accent 0059 Latin capital letter y D ch Latin capital letter e with diaeresis 005a Latin capital letter z 00cc Latin capital letter i with grave accent 005b left square bracket 00cd Latin capital letter i with acute a
126. 0x00 0x0000 0 NULL 0x01 0x263A 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 0x263B 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 0x2665 9829 BLACK HART SUIT 0x04 0x2666 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 0x2663 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT or Language USA Code Page 437 0x00 0x0000 Wu NULL 0x01 0x263A 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 0x263B 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 0x2665 9829 BLACK HART SUIT 0x04 0x2666 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 0x2663 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT Numbers beginning with Ox are treated as hexadecimal all other as decimal Any line beginning with a non numeric value is ignored Any information after the Unicode value is ignored Not all of the ASCII ID s need to be present however only ID s present will be affected There are two ways to select a codepage file The first is by using the standard code page select command If this command is used the file name is critical it must follow the format of Cpxyz CPM The xyz is the code page number that is being selected in the command For example CP850 CPM would be referred to as 850 If the legacy commands are to be used to select file based code page mapping the selection mode must be selected in the printer s configuration The second form is by name This command is free form and will select any file present which will then be to use it as a code page definition If the file is not a code page file 100 10937 Rev F Page 85 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide you wil
127. 1 152 153 155 157 160 161 163 164 166 167 168 169 170 171 184 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 225 Bar Code Set height 181 195 Bar Code Set Justification Print Direction 196 Bar Codes 128 Begin Italics 97 Bi directional Printing Beginning 111 Boot Loader Mode 52 Buffer 295 Carriage Return 69 Cash Drawer 1 Status Inquire 210 Cash drawer Opening 201 Change User Store Terminator 125 Changing Interface Cards 36 Character attributes 92 Character Code Page Setting 87 Character Pitch Setting 80 258 Page 336 Character Set Redefining 90 Code Page Definitions 317 Color Graphics 230 Commands User store 121 Communication Features 307 Parallel Port 293 Serial Port 298 Communications Interface 30 Configuration Remote 54 Configuration Mode Overview 53 Connecting Communication Cables 38 Connecting Power 37 Control Character Printing 91 Control Codes Overview 61 Control Codes and Commands 63 Control Feature Setting 205 Cover Open Status Inquire 211 Current Requirements 31 Data pass through 307 Display Pass Through 32 305 Display pass through 307 Double Density Graphics Full Speed Printing 109 Double Density Graphics Half Speed Printing 108 Emphasized Print Mode Beginning 95 Emphasized Print Mode Ending 96 End Italics 97 Enhanced Print Mode Ending 95 Enhanced print Beginning 95 Entering Configuration Mode 53 Entering Self Tes
128. 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes UPC E Composite UPC E Composite uses a standard zero suppressed 11 digit UPC E code with composite data and optional Addenda data Function UPC E Composite ASCII ESC b B information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 42H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 66 gt information NUL Hse ESC b 01 12345678901 234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL l li ESC b lt 66 gt 01210000345 NUL een ll l i 56 The same as above with a EAN 5 Addenda 12045 ESC b lt 66 gt 01210000345 56 NUL Figure 57 UPC E Composite Example EANX Composite EANX will process EAN 8 EAN 13 or EAN 14 based on the length of the linear data entered Function EANx Composite ASCII ESC b C information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 43H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 67 gt information NUL Nee MELI TARRA EA CH 0123456 789012 ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL DN ESC b lt 67 gt 12345678901 NUL CH The same as above with a EAN 5 Addenda lj ESC b lt 67 gt 12345678901 12345 NUL Figure 58 EAN 13 Composite Example 100 10937 Rev F Page 167 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide EAN GS1 128 Composite GS1 128 will process a GS1 128 barcode With an CC C composite component Function GS1 128 Composite ASCII ESC b D information
129. 3 ISO8859 3 Latin 3 111 177 6FH B1H 28594 ISO8859 4 Baltic 4 111 178 6FH B2H 28595 ISO8859 5 Cyrillic 111 179 6FH B3H 28597 ISO8859 7 Greek 111 181 6FH B5H 28599 ISO8859 9 Turkish 111 183 6FH B7H 28605 ISO8859 15 Latin 9 111 189 6FH BDH Note The ESC Select international character set command uses Code Pages 64 81 and represent code page maps They are provided to support legacy applications They are not recommended for new applications 100 10937 Rev F Page 317 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix D ASCII Code Table Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII o ON IO Joy O IN LO fo jo 15 13 IO OO NIO jo A W INe O IN ke ix Ss lt le gt l m IN kx S le JC JA MID JO Tv IO Z IE Ir JA Je J Z Ommo O Im gt EQ Page 318 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix E Unicode Character Addresses Appendix Note This information is based on the Unicode 3 0 Standard For specific character locations see the Unicode standard Note The Model 9000 does not contain all possible Unicode characters The default character sets are defined by the WGL4 and GB18030 standards
130. 3 n13 BILL TO Number 412 Purchased from Global Location Number n3 n13 PURCHASE FROM 413 Ship for Deliver for Forward to Global n3 n13 SHIP FOR LOC Location Number 414 Identification of a Physical Location n3 n13 LOC No Global Location Number 415 Global Location Number of the Invoicing n3 n13 PAY TO Party 420 Ship to Deliver to Postal Code Withina n3 an 20 FNC1 SHIP TO POST Single Postal Authority 421 Ship to Deliver to Postal Code with ISO n3 n3 an 12 FNC1 SHIP TO POST Country Code 422 Country of Origin of a Trade Hem n3 n3 FNC1 ORIGIN 423 Country of Initial Processing n3 n3 n 12 FNC1 COUNTRY INITIAL PROCESS 424 Country of Processing n38 n3 FNC1 COUNTRY PROCESS 100 10937 Rev F Page 173 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 425 Country of Disassembly n3 n3 FNC1 COUNTRY DISASSEMBLY 426 Country Covering full Process Chain n3 n3 FNC1 COUNTRY FULL PROCESS 310n3 Net weight kilograms Variable Measure n4 n6 NET WEIGHT kg Trade Item 311n3 Length of first dimension meters n4 n6 LENGTH m Variable Measure Trade Item 312n3 Width diameter or second dimension n4 n6 WIDTH m meters Variable Measure Trade Item 313n3 Depth thickness height or third n4 n6 HEIGHT m dimension meters Variable Measure Trade Item 314n3
131. 3029 HANGZHOU NUMERAL NINE 2589 LEFT SEVEN EIGHTHS BLOCK 303E IDEOGRAPHIC VARIATION INDICATOR 258A LEFT THREE QUARTERS BLOCK 3041 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL A 258B LEFT FIVE EIGHTHS BLOCK 3042 HIRAGANA LETTER A 258C LEFT HALF BLOCK 3043 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL 258D LEFT THREE EIGHTHS BLOCK 3044 HIRAGANA LETTER 258E LEFT ONE QUARTER BLOCK 3045 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL U 258F LEFT ONE EIGHTH BLOCK 3046 HIRAGANA LETTER U 2593 DARK SHADE 3047 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL E 2594 UPPER ONE EIGHTH BLOCK 3048 HIRAGANA LETTER E 2595 RIGHT ONE EIGHTH BLOCK 3049 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL O 25A0 BLACK SQUARE 304A HIRAGANA LETTER O 25A1 WHITE SQUARE 304B HIRAGANA LETTER KA 25B2 BLACK UP POINTING TRIANGLE 304C HIRAGANA LETTER GA 25B3 WHITE UP POINTING TRIANGLE 304D HIRAGANA LETTER KI 25BC BLACK DOWN POINTING TRIANGLE 304E HIRAGANA LETTER Gl Page 328 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix
132. 308B HIRAGANA LETTER RU 30EA KATAKANA LETTER RI 308C HIRAGANA LETTER RE 30EB KATAKANA LETTER RU 308D HIRAGANA LETTER RO 30EC KATAKANA LETTER RE 308E HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL WA 30ED KATAKANA LETTER RO 308F HIRAGANA LETTER WA 30EE KATAKANA LETTER SMALL WA 3090 HIRAGANA LETTER WI 30EF KATAKANA LETTER WA 3091 HIRAGANA LETTER WE 30FO KATAKANA LETTER WI 3092 HIRAGANA LETTER WO 30F1 KATAKANA LETTER WE 3093 HIRAGANA LETTER N 30F2 KATAKANA LETTER WO 309B KATAKANA HIRAGANA VOICED SOUND MARK 30F3 KATAKANA LETTER N 309C KATAKANA HIRAGANA SEMI VOICED SOUND 30F4 KATAKANA LETTER VU MARK 30F5 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL KA 309D HIRAGANA ITERATION MARK 30F6 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL KE 309E HIRAGANA VOICED ITERATION MARK 30FC KATAKANA HIRAGANA PROLONGED SOUND 30A1 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL A MARK 30A2 KATAKANA LETTER A 30FD KATAKANA ITERATION MARK 30A3 KATAKANA LETTER SMALLI 30FE KATAKANA VOICED ITERATION MARK 30A4 KATAKANA LETTERI 3105 BOPOMOFO LETTER B 30A5 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL U 3106 BOPOMOFO LETTER P 30A6 KATAKANA LETTER U 3107 BOPOMOFO LETTER M 30A7 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL E 3108 BOPOMOFO LETTER F 30A8 KATAKANA LETTER E 3109 BOPOMOFO LETTER D 30A9 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL O 310A BOPOMOFO LETTERT 30AA KATAKANA LETTER O 310B BOPOMOFO LETTER N 30AB KATAKANA LETTER KA 310C BOPOMOFO LETTER L 30AC KATAKANA LETTER GA 310D BOPOMOFO LETTER G 30AD KATAKANA LETTER KI 310E BOPOMOFO LETTER K 100 10937 Rev F Page 329 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide
133. 37 Rev F Page 125 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide User Macros The user macro feature works by inserting the macro data buffer into the printer data stream when the print user store data command is encountered Macros can be any data normally sent to the printer including graphics Note user store maintenance and inquire commands may not be included in the macro definitions The printer stores macro data in a RAM based storage buffer as it is received and processed The storage buffer may then be saved to a flash based user store or inserted into the print data stream If a macro is recalled from user store it is expanded into the macro buffer and replaces whatever is currently there Programming Considerations The flash nonvolatile memory has a limited number of write cycle operations Consequently the number of saves should be limited The buffer should not be saved on a transaction by transaction basis but rather a maximum of once per day The buffer is initially about 16K bytes long All commande and print data are placed in the buffer and must be included in the size limits The printer does not indicate when the buffer is full The application must make sure that the buffer is not overfilled The printer simply stops saving information when it is full As the buffer fills the input data is printed normally The effect of the macro start command is to clear the buffer and to start to save the input data The
134. 38H amp PF 199 Enable paper out sensor ESC 9 1BH 39H amp PO 199 Set left right margins ESC X lt n gt lt n2 gt 1BH 58H none 199 ni Left margin n2 Right margin Clear print buffer CAN 18H amp RP 200 Query marker ESC q lt n gt 1BH 71H none 200 Open cash drawer ESC x lt n gt 1BH 78H amp D1 n 1 201 n 1 Cash Drawer 1 amp D2 n 2 n 2 Cash Drawer 2 Perform Auto Cut ESC v 1BH 76H amp FC 201 Audio alert BEL 07H amp BL 202 Configure audio alert ESC BEL lt ni gt 1BH 07H none 202 lt Ne gt lt N3 gt Print suppress ESC lt lt n gt 1BH 3CH amp PT lt n gt 204 and data pass through Initialize printer ESC 1BH 40H none 201 Enable paper error mode operation ESC p lt n gt 1BH 70H amp PE lt m gt 202 lt m gt Begin multi drop control SOH lt n gt 01H none 205 Inquire status Refer to command ENQ lt n gt 05H none 210 descriptions Inquire cash drawer 1 status ENQ lt 1 gt 05H01H none 210 Control Periodic Status ESC EM P 1BH 19H none 225 50H Control Periodic Status ESC EM p a 19H none 225 Extended Diagnostics Set control feature commands ESC y lt n gt 1BH 79H amp Y0 9 or 205 amp YX lt m1 gt lt m2 gt lt m3 gt for numbers gt 9 Page 68 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Low Level Paper Motion Control Print Paper Motion CR Carriage return ASCII CR Hexadecimal ODH Decimal lt 13 gt IPCL amp CR EP
135. 43 Serial state bit defimttons 315 Page 16 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes About the Model 9000 Printer The Ithaca Model 9000 printer represents the very latest technology for use for thermal receipt printing for point of sale and retail environments It builds upon the architecture of Ithaca s proven thermal printers together with a host of features specifically designed to improve the performance of your receipt printing applications including Crisp clear receipt printing in either one or two colors Fast 11 inches per second print speed Rugged spill resistant cover Large 4 inch paper roll capacity with drop in loading Protected internal power supply Ethernet and USB interfaces Application controllable buzzer Configurable cash drawer functionality The Model 9000 also offers a wide range of programmable features including color and font control APA graphics support bar codes and support for multiple language character sets These features let you quickly and easily integrate more layout and printing options than ever while giving you the reliability durability and uptime you have come to expect from Ithaca printers Who Should Read This Guide This document provides information and programming specifications for programmers and or operators who will integrate the Model 9000 printer into their operations What Is Included in This Guide This Programmer s Guide includes information
136. 47 101 35 82 143 29 Table 28 Print dots to characters per inch and points Page 250 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Font Size and Spacing command interactions There are interactions between some of the following commands and some of the legacy font selection commands These interactions need to be considered when developing a application for this printer This printer uses a font rendering engine that relies on the font to provide character size and spacing information Unfortunately legacy applications assume all characters are the same and that the character size and spacing is fixed To force the characters rendered by the font rendering engine to conform to legacy modes of operation some post generation processing is performed to reposition the characters into a fixed size cell The set minimum character height and width ESC P and ESC p the set character spacing ESC ESC i ESC J and ESC j the set minimum line spacing ESC V and ESC v and the legacy font select and spacing commands all interact The set minimum character height and width ESC P and ESC p commands set character size but in two different ways In most systems a character point size refers only to the line spacing and indirectly to the character height That is also true here The vertical character height referenced in these commands refer to the character height inclu
137. 4H 00H lt k gt 00H lt n gt lt m gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 64 gt lt 04 gt lt 0 gt lt K gt lt 0 gt lt n gt lt m gt IPCL amp DH Double high double wide and double space amp SH Single high single wide and single space Also see ESC W above Description The ESC EOT NUL lt k gt NUL lt n gt lt m gt command sets double wide double high and italic print mode Where k bits k 76543210 XXXX Italic control 0 0000 No change 1 0001 Italics On 2 0010 Italics Off Where n bits n 76543210 Onnn Height multiplier Maximum 4 0 0000 No change xxxx Line spacing 0 0000 No change Where m bits m 76543210 Onnn Width multiplier Maximum 4 0 0000 No change Note The maximum height and width multiplier is four Page 94 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL IPCL EPOS Description ESC G ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC H ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC E ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC F 100 10937 Begin underline ESC lt n gt 1BH 2DH 01H lt 27 gt lt 45 gt lt n gt amp MU Begin amp CU End ESC lt n gt The ESC lt 1 gt command begins underline print mode All subsequent text leading spaces and trailing spaces are underlined
138. 6 1 always bit 7 0 always bit 0 1 always Receipt Station bit 1 0 bit 2 0 bit 3 0 bit 4 Undefined bit 5 Printer is blocking print Cover is open or out of paper bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always bit 0 Printer supports receipts bit 1 Printer supports inserted forms bit 2 Printer supports multiple colors bit 3 Printer supports cutter bit 4 Printer supports partial cuts bit 5 0 bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always Percentage of ink remaining on Head 1 0 100 40 28H Percentage of ink remaining on Head 2 0 100 40 28H Current multi head alignment 0 16 8 0 offset Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 21 gt ASCII Inquire printer ID IENQI lt 21 gt Hexadecimal 05H 15H Decimal Function Response Where lt 21 gt lt 5 gt lt 21 gt The ENQ lt 21 gt command returns the printer IEEE 1284 ID string ACK 2212 lt n gt ID string is the echo of the command ID and lt n gt is the number of return bytes in the ID string ID string is the IEEE ID return string which follows MFG TransAct 100 10937 CMD M9000CL IPCL CLS PRINTER MDL M9000 PcOS DES Ithaca M9000 REV PE9000 0M NN OPTS 63xy Where x is a bit field defined as follows bit O 1 Color support bit 1 0 bit 2 1 Periodic Status Supported bit 3 Always 0 bit 4 Always 1 bit 5 Always 1 bit 6 Always 0 bit 7 Always 0 The y is
139. 7 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide FT BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT DOWN HEAVV AND LEFT 25BD WHITE DOWN POINTING TRIANGLE UP LIGHT 25C6 BLACK DIAMOND 2547 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND UP 25C7 WHITE DIAMOND HORIZONTAL HEAVY 25CB WHITE CIRCLE Gees BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND DOWN 25CE BULLSEYE HORIZONTAL HEAVY 25CF BLACK CIRCLE 2549 BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT LIGHT AND LEFT 25E2 BLACK LOWER RIGHT TRIANGLE VERTICAL HEAVY 25E3 BLACK LOWER LEFT TRIANGLE B A BOX DRAWINGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT 25E4 BLACK UPPER LEFT TRIANGLE VERTICAL HEAVY 25E5 BLACK UPPER RIGHT TRIANGLE 254B BOX DRAWINGS HEAVV VERTICAL AND 2605 BLACK STAR HORIZONTAL 2606 WHITE STAR 2550 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE HORIZONTAL 2609 SUN 2551 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL 2640 FEMALE SIGN 9559 ROX DRAW NGS DOWN SINGLE AND RIGHT 3642 MALE SIGN oe IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER LEFT See BOX DRAW NGS DOWN DOUBLE AND RIGHT 2FFO TO RIGHT 2554 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND RIGHT 2FFI SE GE ION CHARACTER 2555 Ee SE IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARA
140. 7 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes QRCode Print Options Function QRCode code control ASCII ESC EM q lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 71H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 113 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way QRCode barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f W 57H 87D Set the minimum element width and height v 1 10 4 is the default A width of 1 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically reduce the width until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f E 45H 69D QRCode Error Correction 0 4 are accepted 0 Auto 1 Lor7 2 Mor 15 3 Q or 25 4 Hor 30 f H 48H 72D Blank Space between the barcode and the following data Default 8 f M 4DH 77D QRCode Matrix Size 0 40 are accepted 0 Auto f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode Default 0 See General description above Note If in GS1 mode a FNC1 is added to the beginning of the symbol GS1 data formatting and compaction are active and the input must follow the GS1 rules Note QR Code Model 1 is obsolete only Model 2 is supported f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefin
141. 8 189 190 191 192 193 194 225 ESC B lt n gt km lt n gt 0 Set vertical tab stops 75 ESC Begin 12 cpi 79 ESC C NUL lt n gt Set form length in inches 76 ESC c lt n gt Select color 92 ESC C lt n gt Set form length in lines 76 ESC d lt n gt Feed lt n gt lines at current spacing 74 ESC D lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt n gt 0 Set horizontal tab stops 70 71 ESC E Begin emphasized print 95 ESC F End emphasized print 96 ESC f Select receipt station 99 101 103 104 105 106 107 ESC g lt 0 gt Process user macro 127 ESC g lt 1 gt Start macro record 119 127 ESC g lt 2 gt Stop macro record 120 127 ESC g lt 3 gt Stop macro record and save 127 ESC G Begin enhanced print 95 ESC h lt color gt lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt Process color graphics 112 116 117 118 ESC h lt color gt lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt Process horizontal graphics 112 ESC H End enhanced print 95 ESC I lt n gt Set print quality mode 82 ESC J lt n gt Fine line feed 72 ESC K ons cns Print single density graphics 108 Page 335 Index Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC L ns lt n gt Print half speed double density graphics 108 ESC P lt n gt Begin rotated font 83 ESC p 3 lt n gt Select paper sensor s to output paper end signals 203 ESC p 4 lt n gt Select paper sensor s to stop printing 203
142. 8 fonts together When this is done the first font in the link is searched first If the character is not defined the next font in the link is searched This process is continued until the character is found or the last font is searched There are two ways to define a linked font This first is to define a default linked font in the POR INI file If it link font is defined in the POR INI file it will be selected as the default power on font Selecting font 0 will select the linked font provided that a link font is defined It is also possible to dynamically define a linked font This requires that the fonts to be linked be aliased to a font id in the POR INI file Defining a linked font does not necessarily activate it If the linked font was not already active it must be selected by selecting font 0 Bitmap Fonts It is possible to use bitmap fonts with the Model 9000 Printer Bitmap fonts are fixed pitch and are not scalable They will function as legacy fonts or may be selected The printer is supplied with 4 legacy bitmap fonts They are in a 10x24 12x24 16x24 draft fonts format and a 16x24 OCR B font They are defined as follows BMFont0 chr10x24 bft 10 x 24 draft font with typical spacing of 16 characters per inch BMFonti chr12x24 bft12 x 24 draft font with typical spacing of 14 characters per inch BMFonit2 chr16x24 bft16 x 24 NLQ font with typical spacing of 12 characters per inch BMFont4 ocr16x24 bft16 x 24 OCR font with typic
143. 8 full block 215d vulgar fraction five eighths 258c left half block 215e vulgar fraction seven eighths 2590 right half block 2190 leftwards arrow 2591 light shade 2191 upwards arrow 2592 medium shade 2192 rightwards arrow 2593 dark shade 2193 downwards arrow 25a0 black square 2194 left right arrow 25a1 white square 2195 up down arrow 25aa black small square 21a8 up down arrow with base 25ab white small square 2202 partial differential 25ac black rectangle 2206 increment 25b2 black up pointing triangle 220f n ary product 25ba black right pointing pointer 2211 n ary summation 25bc black down pointing triangle 2212 minus sign 25c4 black left pointing pointer 2215 division slash 25ca lozenge 2219 bullet operator 25cb white circle 221a square root 25cf black circle 221e infinitv 25d8 inverse bullet 221f right angle 25d9 inverse white circle 2229 intersection 25e6 white bullet 222b integral 263a white smiling face 2248 almost equal to 263b black smiling face 2260 not equal to 263c white sun with ravs 2261 identical to 2640 female sign 2264 less than or equal to 2642 male sign 2265 greater than or equal to 2660 black spade suit 2302 house 2663 black club suit 2310 reversed not sign 2665 black heart suit 2320 top half integral 2666 black diamond suit 2321 bottom half integral 266a eighth note 2500 box drawings light horizontal 266b Beamed eighth notes 2502 box drawings light vertical 1001 fi ligature 250c box drawings
144. 80 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Controlling Barcodes Unified Commands To making control of linear and two dimensional barcode more consistent all barcode control commands will follow a similar format The Function Control bar code ASCII ESC EM lt b gt lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H lt b gt lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt b gt lt f gt lt v gt Where lt b gt Barcode type b 62H 98D General Barcodes d 64H 100D Datamatrix Barcodes r 72H 114D GS 1 Databar RSS Barcodes 4 34H 52D Code 49 barcodes 6 36H 54D Code 49 barcodes a 61H 97D Aztec Barcodes m 6DH 109D Maxicode Barcodes q 71Hm 113D QRCode E 45H 69D PDF417 c 63H 99D Composite Barcodes lt f gt Common Format Parameter to all barcodes W 57H 87D Minimum bar width or Scale J 4AH 74D Justification 0 Left 1 Center 3 Right V 56H 86D Vertical Height value 4 dots at 203 Dots per inch G 47H 71D GS1 Mode P 50H 80D HRI Position 0 Off 1 Top 2 Bottom 3 Both F 46H 70D HRI Font H 48H 72D Space above and below the barcode in dots C 43H 67D Composite Secondary Mode Additional barcode specific controls are available lt V gt Value of the parameter Description The ESC EM lt b gt lt p gt lt n gt command sets general barcode format parameters In some cases a specific barcode may set a barcode specific parameter For example the general element wi
145. 85 Latin small letter w with diaeresis 040f Cyrillic capital letter dzhe 1ef2 Latin capital letter y with grave 0410 Cyrillic capital letter a 1ef3 Latin small letter v with grave 100 10937 Rev F Page 323 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 2013 en dash 2524 box drawings light vertical and left 2014 em dash 252c box drawings light down and horizontal 2015 horizontal bar 2534 box drawings light up and horizontal 2017 double low line 253c box drawings light vertical and horizontal 2018 left single quotation mark 2550 box drawings double horizontal 2019 right single quotation mark 2551 box drawings double vertical 201a single low 9 quotation mark 2552 box drawings down single and right double 201b single high reversed 9 quotation mark 2553 box drawings down double and right single 201c left double quotation mark 2554 box drawings double down and right 201d right double quotation mark 2555 box drawings down single and left double 201e double low 9 quotation mark 2556 box drawings down double and left single 2020 dagger 2557 box drawings double down and left 2021 double dagger 2558 box drawings up single and right double 2022 bullet 2559 box drawings up double and right single 2026 h
146. 8TXT UTF 8TXT uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence MBCS to identify the desired Unicode character This encoding method is identical to UTF 8 except commands and command parameters over 127 are not UTF 8 encoded They must be sent unmodified as 8 bit values commands and graphics while still supporting the full Unicode character encoding range Typically Model 9000 Printers are shipped set to this mode UTF 8TXT is probably the easiest mode to use It allows normal 8 bit Scalar Value 1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 0000000 00000000 Oxxxxxxx Oxxxxxxx 0000000 00000yyy yyxxxxxx 110yyyyy 10xxxxxx 0000000 zzzzyyyy VVXXXXXX 1110zzzz lOyyyyyy 10xxxxxx OOuuuuu zzzzyyyy VVXXXXXX 11110uuu 10uuzzzz 10yyyyyy 1Oxxxxxx Table 33 UTF 8 bit field definitions 100 10937 Rev F Page 261 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 0x0010FFFF are valid in Unicode 5 0 Note Where UTF8 supports values greater than 16 bits Unless the UTF32 option al firmware is installed the printer will not support values greater than 65535 O Note Where values from 0x001FFFFF may be encoded only values up to Unicode UTF8 Encoding Example 3 Byte output Example Hex Character Code FA11 FA 11 Original Hex Code s y l 11111010 000100001 Converted to Binary 1111 1010 00 0100001 Sections 1110 1111 10101000 10010001 3 8bit Binary numbers OxEF OxA8 0x91 3 Hex Bytes to Output Figur
147. 9 Font Size anal Spacing iii fa ini fat ee Caen e eae 249 Font Size and Spacing Command interactions en nnn nn n 251 Tee L MARA A MA FRA 259 Wni ode aereo Eed 259 KEE Dee a l e 259 TPG een deene 260 Unicode Extended UTF16 Encoding Example s eee nnnnnnna 260 DUE ees Eo ema ee reer Pe SA TA RN eee Ae Rey Pe re 261 cc ce Nea ere 261 ERR 261 Unicode UTF8 Encoding Example Eege cena beeen ania 262 Unicode Encoding Control Commande nn 262 Legacy Printer Features that Have Changed snnannnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnun 266 Barcode enhancements l i ia eege deet l ENEE ER EEEEENe 266 GRAPHICS ka ti dia A Dee eg 266 Dynamic code page definition ENNEN 266 USE 2 0 iri ahead lee es Ne aaa a odd Wd aA ae eiM ooh catered 267 Ethernet a kk ke G a e i a a 267 File Syst m RE 268 File Systemi Interface ue eek n pe EA e 268 File SYSIEM COMMANOS EE 269 Fee ee EE EE E EE 275 PORN TU EE 276 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control ssenunannannunanunnannunanunnnnnnnu 279 Model 9000 Internal LOS ageeeeigredg eegene istint i entanti tt 279 Model 9000 Dynamic Gonti litattoni sagt ibrida eee A 282 100 10937 Rev F Page 11 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Green and Sleep Power Control nn nn 284 COMMUNICAEIONS i exc ce ia iii pro AR d mA ak kg ata d id 286 Protocolana WEE 286 RK RE 289 Powered US B ia udikat ji chennai erate Seemed A aeons 289 USB SUPPOME isib atedabedh ieee 289 USE DE Us
148. A0 0x31FF Unassigned zone 31A0 31 FF 0x3200 Ox32FF Enclosed CJK Letters and Months 0x3300 Ox33FF CJK Compatibility 0x3400 Ox4DFF CJK Unified Ideograph Extension A Poet Unicode 2 0 0x4E00 Ox9FA5 CJK Unified Ideographs Ox9FA6 OxABFF Unassigned zone 9FA6 ABFF 0xACO00 0xD7A3 Hangul Syllables OxD7A4 OxD7FF Unassigned zone D7A4 D7FF OxD800 OxDB7F High Surrogates OxDB80 OxDBFF Private Use High Surrogates OxDCOO OxDFFF Low Surrogates 0OxE000 OxF8FF Private Use Area OxF900 OxFAFF CJK Compatibility Ideographs OxFBOO OxFB4F Alphabetic Presentation Forms OxFB50 OxFDFF Arabic Presentation Forms A OxFE20 OxFE2F Combining Half Marks OxFE30 OxFE4F CJK Compatibility Forms OxFE50 OxFE6F Small Form Variants OxFE70 OxFEFF Arabic Presentation Forms B OxFEFF OxFEFF Special OxFFOO OxFFEF Half width and Full width Forms OxFFFO OxFFFF Specials OxFFFO OxFFFD Specials OxFFFE OxFFFF Not character codes Page 320 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix F WGL4 0 Character Addresses There are 654 Characters in this set and does not use address greater than OxFFFF Unicode Character 0070 Latin small letter p 0020 space 0071 La
149. AN 13 EAN 8 ojo loo Code 93 Code 93 Codabar Data Bar o o Data Bar Stacked oo CJO Ooo GJO EAN 128 EAN 14 Gicojmjm ITF 14 Code 49 Code 16K OJ BICjJojojTIT le gd Le gie gd lege gie geg ooo ed Mega gd Legd bake o lege gd lege gie giele gege OAID OIOI ojlo oo o ool o o o lt GJO OAID Oooo ooo ooo oo U OPO oooO o ooo o oT O0 AID Oooo oo o ooo o olI Ooo PDF417 Maxicode Datamatrix QRCode Aztec 3 G wlojajzjmjoji Code One v o la 3 Lo a 3 Composite ol wlejaljz E o b c cjojwjoja z Cc ol Imlejalz 100 10937 Table 25 Barcode Control Commands Rev F Note If there are two letters listed either command may be used Both will set a common value Page 183 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide PDF417 Print Options Function PDF 417 bar code control ASCII ESC EM E lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 45H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 69 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way PDF 417 barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f X 58H 88D Set encoding X aspect 2 lt v lt 6 Default v 3 Note the X aspect is equivalent to the module width and affects the maximum number o
150. AREA m2 log 335n3 Logistic volume liters n4 n6 VOLUME I log 336n3 Logistic volume cubic liters n4 n6 VOLUME m3 log 837n3 Kilograms per square meter n4 n6 KG PER m 340n3 Logistic weight pounds n4 n6 GROSS WEIGHT lb 341N3 Length or first dimension inches n4 n6 LENGTH i log 342n3 Length or first dimension feet n4 n6 LENGTH f log 343n3 Length or first dimension vards n4 n6 LENGTH y log 344n3 Width diameter or second dimension n4 n6 WIDTH i log 345n3 Width diameter or second dimension n4 n6 WIDTH f log 346n3 Width diameter or second dimension n4 n6 WIDTH y log 347n3 Depth thickness height or third n4 n6 HEIGHT i log Page 174 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes dimension 348n3 Depth thickness height or third n4 n6 HEIGHT f log dimension 349n3 Depth thickness height or third n4 n6 HEIGHT y log dimension 350n3 Area square inches Variable Measure n4 n6 AREA if Trade Item 351ns Area square feet Variable Measure n4 n6 AREA f Trade Item 352n3 Area square yards Variable Measure n4 n6 AREA yf Trade Item 353n3 Area square inches n4 n6 AREA i log 354n3 Area square feet n4 n6 AREA f log 355n3 Area square yards n4 n6 AREA y log 356n3 Net weight troy ounces Variable n4 n6 NET WEIGHT t Measure Trade Item 357n3 N
151. Area square meters Variable Measure n4 n6 AREA m2 Trade Item 315ns Net volume liters Variable Measure n4 n6 NET VOLUME l Trade Item 316n3 Net volume cubic meters Variable n4 n6 NET VOLUME m3 Measure Trade Item 320n3 Net weight pounds Variable Measure n4 n6 WEIGHT Ib Trade Item 321n3 Length or first dimension inches n4 n6 LENGTH i Variable Measure Trade Item 322n3 Length or first dimension feet Variable n4 n6 LENGTH f Measure Trade Item 323n3 Length or first dimension yards Variable n4 n6 LENGTH y Measure Trade Item 324n3 Width diameter or second dimension n4 n6 WIDTH i inches Variable Measure Trade Item 325n3 Width diameter or second dimension n4 n6 WIDTH f feet Variable Measure Trade Item 326n3 Width diameter or second dimension n4 n6 WIDTH y yards Variable Measure Trade Item 327n3 Depth thickness height or third n4 n6 HEIGHT i dimension inches Variable Measure Trade Item 328n3 Depth thickness height or third n4 n6 HEIGHT f dimension feet Variable Measure Trade Item 329n3 Depth thickness height or third n4 n6 HEIGHT y dimension yards Variable Measure Trade Item 330n3 Logistic weight kilograms n4 n6 GROSS WEIGHT kg 331Nn3 Length or first dimension meters n4 n6 LENGTH m log 332n3 Width diameter or second dimension n4 n6 WIDTH m log meters 333ns Depth thickness height or third n4 n6 HEIGHT m log dimension meters 334n3 Area square meters n4 n6
152. C encoding 5 6 ESC b lt 2 gt lt 10 gt NUM 123456 4 NUM 1 2 3 Figure 17 Automatic Encoding Example Note If the first character is greater than lt 31 gt and not lt 135 gt through lt 137 gt the printer will discard the first character and print the data as defined in Code A In automatic mode any ASCII data from 0 to 127 could be entered Values less than 32 will be encoded as Code stick A NUL US values from 96 through 127 will be encoded from Code stick B Where ever possible numeric pairs will be encoded from Code stick C FNC1 FNC2 FNG3 and FNC4 may be encoded based on the table below All other values will result in a barcode data error and the barcode will not be generated 128 Code Value in Value in Decimal Hex FNC3 128 80 FNC2 129 81 Not Valid 130 82 131 83 132 84 FNC4 133 85 FNC1 134 86 Figure 18 Code 128 FNC encoding Page 136 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 2 of 5 Function Interleaved 2 of 5 ASCII ESC b lt 0 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 0 gt 03H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt 209 lt 3 gt Interleaved 2 of 5 is a high density self checking continuous numeric bar code It is mainly used where fixed length numeric fields are required The data field must be an even number of characters If an odd data field is sent to the Model 9000 Prin
153. CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH OxDE 0x00DE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN DIAERESIS OxDF 0x00DF LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S 0xA0 0x00A0 NO BREAK SPACE 0xE0 0x00E0 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE OxA1 Ox00A1 INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK OxE1 Ox00E1 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE OxA2 Ox00A2 CENT SIGN OxE2 Ox00E2 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OxA3 0x00A3 POUND SIGN CIRCUMFLEX OxA4 Ox00A4 CURRENCY SIGN OxE3 0x00E3 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH TILDE 0xA5 0x00A5 YEN SIGN OxE4 0x00E4 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS OxA6 Ox00A6 BROKEN BAR OxE5 Ox00E5 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH RING OxA7 0x00A7 SECTION SIGN ABOVE 0xA8 Ox00A8 DIAERESIS OxE6 Ox00E6 LATIN SMALL LETTER AE 0xA9 0x00A9 COPYRIGHT SIGN OxE7 0x00E7 LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA OxAA Ox00AA FEMININE ORDINAL INDICATOR OxE8 0x00E8 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE 0xAB 0x00AB LEFT POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE OxE9 Ox00E9 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE QUOTATION MARK OxEA OxOOEA LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DAC 0x00AC NOT SIGN CIRCUMFLEX 0xAD 0x00AD SOFT HYPHEN OxEB 0x00EB LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS OxAE Ox00AE REGISTERED SIGN OxEC Ox00EC LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH GRAVE OxAF Ox00AF MAGRON OxED 0x00ED LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH ACUTE 0xBO 0x00B0 DEGREE SIGN OxEE 0x00EE LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH CIRCUMFLEX OxB1 Ox00B1 PLUS MINUS SIGN OxEF 0x00EF LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH DIAERESIS 0xB2 0x00B2 SUPERSCRIPT TWO OxFO 0x00FO LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH 0xB3 0x00B3 SUPERSCRIPT THR
154. CTER LEFT 2556 AN er TEET apes IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 2557 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND LEFT eee ARAGTER FULL 2558 BOX DRAWINGS UP SINGLE AND RIGHT DOUBLE 2FF4 SURROUND 2559 BOX DRAWINGS UP DOUBLE AND RIGHT SINGLE T 255A BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE UP AND RIGHT 2FF5 e l GE SE 255B BOX DRAWINGS UP SINGLE AND LEFT DOUBLE SC IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 255C BOX DRAWINGS UP DOUBLE AND LEFT SINGLE SURROUND FROM BELOW 255D BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE UP AND LEFT BS IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 255E BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND RIGHT SURROUND FROM LEFT DOUBLE 2FF8 IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 255F BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL DOUBLE AND RIGHT SURROUND FROM UPPER LEFT SINGLE DEE IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 2560 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND RIGHT 9 SURROUND FROM UPPER RIGHT 2561 BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND LEFT OFFA IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER DOUBLE SURROUND FROM LOWER LEFT 2562 BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL DOUBLE AND LEFT OFFR IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER SINGLE OVERLAID 2563 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND LEFT 3000 IDEOGRAPHIC SPACE 2564 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN SINGLE AND 3001 IDEOGRAPHIC COMMA HORIZONTAL DOUBLE 3002 IDEOGRAPHIC FULL STOP 2565 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN DOUBLE AND 3003 DITTO MARK HORIZONTAL SINGLE 3005 IDEOGRAPHIC ITERATION MARK 2566 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND 3006 IDEOGRAPHIC CLOSING MARK HORIZONTAL 3007 IDEOGRAPHIC NUMBER ZERO GES BOX DRAW NGS UP SINGLE AND HORIZONTAL 3008 LEFT ANGLE BRACKET T BRACKET 2568 She YP P
155. Current totals 16 Not used 17 Requests the printer to enter remote Standby See page 284 18 Requests the printer to exit remote Standby 20 Print alignment settings 21 Force Off Line Mode to Normal operation 22 Force Off Line Mode to Buffer full only 34 Reinitializes the printer and forces Model 50 mode 35 Reinitializes the printer and forces Microline mode 48 Force Microline status to False 49 Force Microline status to True 78 Reset all character attributes to disabled 87 Force the printer into Windows mode 203x203 and No Wrap Rev F Page 205 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Description The ESC y lt n gt command enables and disables command set features It is possible that the IPCL commands will interfere with print data If this occurs the Page 206 IPCL can be disabled with an ESC y lt 4 gt command Note 1 Once IPCL commands are disabled the Enable IPLC command will not be a valid IPCL code Note 2 ESC y lt 0 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 34 gt and lt 35 gt allow the printer to switch between emulation modes When the switch takes place the current print buffer is printed and the printer reinitializes These commands do not permanently change the configuration A power on reset restores the mode that was configured in menu mode A reset by command or from the INIT pin does not restore the mode Note 3 ESC y lt 6 gt and lt 7 gt enable and disable the inquir
156. DRAW NGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND LEFT 241D PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TEN BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND LEFT UP 247E PARENTHESIZED NUMBER ELEVEN 2529 HEAVY 247F PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TWELVE BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND LEFT DOWN 2480 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER THIRTEEN 252A HEAVY 2481 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER FOURTEEN 252B BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY VERTICAL AND LEFT 2482 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER FIFTEEN 252C BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND HORIZONTAL 2483 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER SIXTEEN BOX DRAWINGS LEFT HEAVY AND RIGHT DOWN 2484 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER SEVENTEEN 252D LIGHT 2485 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER EIGHTEEN BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT HEAVY AND LEFT DOWN 2486 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER NINETEEN 252E LIGHT 2487 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TWENTY 252F BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND HORIZONTAL 2488 DIGIT ONE FULL STOP HEAVY 2489 DIGIT TWO FULL STOP 2530 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND HORIZONTAL 248A DIGIT THREE FULL STOP LIGHT 248B DIGIT FOUR FULL STOP SN BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT LIGHT AND LEFT DOWN 248C DIGIT FIVE FULL STOP HEAVY 248D DIGIT SIX FULL STOP 2532 BOX DRAWINGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT DOWN 248E DIGIT SEVEN FULL STOP HEAVY 248F DIGIT EIGHT FULL STOP 2533 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY DOWN AND HORIZONTAL 2490 DIGIT NINE FULL STOP 2534 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND HORIZONTAL 2491 NUMBER TEN FULL STOP 2535 BOX DRAWINGS LEFT HEAVY AND RIGHT UP 2492 NUMBER ELEVEN FULL STOP LIGHT 2493 NUMBER TWELVE FULL STOP 2536 GC AW NGS RIGHT HEAVY AND LEFT UP 2494 NUMBER THIRTEEN FULL STOP 2495 NUMBER FOURTEEN FULL STOP 2537 DON RRAN NGS UP LIGHT AND
157. Databar barcodes use GS1 formatting f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command bP and ESC EM bK will turn on HRI for non stacked RSS barcodes However the ESC EM rP and ESC EM rK may be used to turn on the stacked barcode HRI Note If RSS stacked barcodes don t generally use HRI The ESC EM 100 10937 Rev F Page 193 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Composite Barcode Print Options Function Composite Barcode control ASCII ESC EM c lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 63H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 99 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way Composite barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f W 57H 87D Set the minimum element width v 1 3 2 is the default and height A width of 1 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically reduce the width until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f M 4DH 77D Composite CC mode 1 3 are accepted 0 Auto O Auto 1 CC A 2 CC B or 3 CC C f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode See General description above If in GS1 mode the symbol start w
158. EE OxF1 0x00F1 LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH TILDE 0xB4 0x00B4 ACUTE ACCENT OxF2 Ox00F2 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE 0xB5 0x00B5 MICRO SIGN OxF3 0x00F3 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE 0xB6 0x00B6 PILCROW SIGN OxF4 Ox00F4 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH 0xB7 0x00B7 MIDDLE DOT CIRCUMFLEX 0xB8 Ox00B8 CEDILLA OxF5 0x00F5 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH TILDE 0xB9 0x00B9 SUPERSCRIPT ONE OxF6 0x00F6 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS OxBA 0x00BA MASCULINE ORDINAL INDICATOR OxF7 0x00F7 DIVISION SIGN 0xBB 0x00BB RIGHT POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE OxF8 Ox00F8 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE QUOTATION MARK OxF9 Ox00F9 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE OxBC 0x00BC VULGAR FRACTION ONE QUARTER OxFA Ox00FA LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE OxBD 0x00BD VULGAR FRACTION ONE HALF OxFB 0x00FB LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH OxBE_ 0x00BE VULGAR FRACTION THREE QUARTERS CIRCUMFLEX OxBF 0x00BF INVERTED QUESTION MARK OxFC 0x00FC LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS oxco 0x00CO LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE UND 0x00FD LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE Get 0x00C1 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH ACUTE OxFE 0x00FE LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN 0xC2 0x00C2 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OxFF OxOOFF LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS CIRCUMFLEX 0xC3 0x00C3 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH TILDE OxC4 0x00C4 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS OxC5 0x00C5 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE OxC6 0x00C6 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE OxC7 0x00C7 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA OxC8
159. EEPROM is not readable or the check sum is bad Pressing the Power Button will attempt to rewrite the configuration information This may leave the printer configured incorrectly EEPROM WRITE ERROR Power up down and Configuration only The Internal EEPROM is defective There is no recovery SOFTWARE ERROR VECTOR Can occur at any time These errors can occur during operation They signal a serious problem with the system In most cases this error will also generate a Watch Dog reset A power cycle will generally recover normal printer operation An ESD event or a firmware bug generally causes these errors The printer maintains an error log this log contains additional information about the fault and is printed during manual configuration The information in this log should be reported to Transact to identify the exact cause of the fault USERSTORE FORMAT ERROR Power up or User Store Write Operations The User Store data in FLASH has an invalid format Pressing the Power Button will erase the user store and reformat it This can be caused by a firmware update FLASH WRITE ERROR Power up or User Store Write Operation The Program Flash has failed There is no recovery from this error COM ADAPTER ERROR Power up only The communications interface card is not supported by the firmware There is no recovery 100 10937 Rev F Page 309 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programmer s Notes When the serial port is used it is important tha
160. ESC lt 0 gt ends the mode Note In EPOS mode ESC lt n gt performs a similar function however near letter quality NLQ is not available Begin enhanced print ESC G 1BH 47H lt 27 gt lt 71 gt amp ME ESC G lt 1 gt All subsequent text is printed in enhanced print mode two passes with a vertical offset Enhanced printing provides a deeper resolution of each character and may enhance multiple part forms printing End enhanced print mode ESC H 1BH 48H lt 27 gt lt 72 gt amp CE ESC G lt 0 gt The ESC H command cancels enhanced print mode and returns to the currently selected font Begin emphasized print mode ESC E 1BH 45H lt 27 gt lt 69 gt amp MM ESC E lt 1 gt The ESC E command begins emphasized print mode one pass with horizontal offset Emphasized print is bolder than normal print End emphasized print mode Rev F Page 95 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ASCII ESC F Hexadecimal 1BH 46H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 70 gt IPCL amp CM EPOS ESC E lt 0 gt Description The ESC F command cancels emphasized print mode ESC S lt 0 gt Select superscript ASCII ESC S lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 53H 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 83 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp SP EPOS none Description The ESC S lt 0 gt command selects superscript The following characters are printed half size on the upper side of the print line Note Superscrip
161. F ANGLE BRACKET 3120 BOPOMOFO LETTER AU PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT 3121 BOPOMOFO LETTER OU FE40 ANGLE BRACKET 3122 BOPOMOFO LETTER AN PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT 3123 BOPOMOFO LETTER EN FEA1 CORNER BRACKET 3124 BOPOMOFO LETTER ANG PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT 3125 BOPOMOFO LETTER ENG FE42 CORNER BRACKET 3126 BOPOMOFO LETTER ER FE43 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT 3127 BOPOMOFO LETTER WHITE CORNER BRACKET 3128 BOPOMOFO LETTER U SE PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT 3129 BOPOMOFO LETTER IU WHITE CORNER BRACKET 3220 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH ONE FE49 DASHED OVERLINE 3221 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH TWO FE4A CENTRELINE OVERLINE 3222 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH THREE FE4B WAVY OVERLINE 3223 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH FOUR FE4C DOUBLE WAVY OVERLINE 3224 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH FIVE FE4D DASHED LOW LINE 3225 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH SIX FE4E CENTRELINE LOW LINE 3226 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH SEVEN FEAF WAVY LOW LINE 3227 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH EIGHT FE50 SMALL COMMA 3228 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH NINE EES SMALL IDEOGRAPHIC COMMA 3229 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH TEN FE52 SMALL FULL STOP 3231 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH STOCK FE54 SMALL SEMICOLON 32A3 CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH CORRECT FE55 SMALL COLON 338E SQUARE MG FE56 SMALL QUESTION MARK 338F SQUARE KG FE57 SMALL EXCLAMATION MARK 339C SQUARE MM FE59 SMALL LEFT PARENTHESIS 339D SQUARE CM FE5A SMALL RIGHT PARENTHESIS 339E SQUARE KM FE5B SMALL LEFT CURLY BRACKET 33A1 SQUARE M SQUARED FE5C SMALL RIGHT CURL
162. FF In off mode the Model 9000 enters a verv low power mode where it consumes less than 1 watt of power In this mode the printer is effectivelv off and the communications interface is not active Sleep In Sleep mode the Model 9000 printer enters a low power state where evervthing but the communications is disabled In this mode the printer mav be reactivated bv command or by pressing the Power Button As the print head preheat is turned off it may take a few seconds for the Model 9000 to warm up the print head in preparation for printing This mode is activated by command only See page 284 100 10937 Rev F Page 47 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Green Standby In Green mode the Model 9000 printer enters a lower power state where everything including the communications is disabled This mode is only available when the USB link is being used The printer will enter and leave Green mode based on the Vous signal on the USB link This allows the printer to enter a low power state whenever the USB link is placed in a low power state The operational state of the Model 9000 can be determined by looking at the Power Indicator Light LED When the printer enters ON mode the green power indicator light will be activated When in Sleep mode the Power Indicator Light LED will blink about every 3 seconds In Green mode the Power Indicator Light LED will blink about every 5 seconds Page 48 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9
163. H 70D HRI Font f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command printers limited print zone If this happen the barcode print functions will fault Note The printer will attempt to print large Aztec barcodes with single dot elements Single dot elements may have poor readability Note It is possible to define a Aztec Barcode that is too large to fit in the 100 10937 Rev F Page 191 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Code One Print Options Function Code One code control ASCII ESC EM 1 lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 31H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 49 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way Aztec barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f W 57H 87D Set the minimum element width v 1 10 6 is the default and height A width of 1 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically reduce the width until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f M 4DH 77D Code One Matrix Size 1 10 are accepted 0 Auto Size 1 8 are 1A 1H and 9 10 allow other shapes f H 48H 72D Blank Space between the barcode and the following data Default 8 f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode See General description above If in GS1 m
164. H COMMERCIAL AT FF21 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A FF22 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B FF23 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C FF24 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D FF25 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E FF26 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F FF27 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G FF28 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H FF29 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER FF2A FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J FF2B FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K FF2C FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L FF2D FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M FF2E FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N FF2F FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O FF30 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P FF31 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q FF32 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R FF33 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S FF34 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTERT FF35 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U FF36 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V FF37 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W FF38 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X FF39 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V FF3A FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z FF3B FULLWIDTH LEFT SQUARE BRACKET FF3C FULLWIDTH REVERSE SOLIDUS FF3D FULLWIDTH RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET FF3E FULLWIDTH CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT FF3F FULLWIDTH LOW LINE FF40 FULLWIDTH GRAVE ACCENT FF41 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER A FF42 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER B FF43 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER C FF44 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER D FF45 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER E FF46 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER F FF47 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER G FF48 FULLWIDTH LAT
165. HESIS 0079 LATIN SMALL LETTER Y 0029 RIGHT PARENTHESIS 007A LATIN SMALL LETTER Z 002A ASTERISK 007B LEFT CURLY BRACKET 002B PLUS SIGN 007C VERTICAL LINE 002C COMMA 007D RIGHT CURLY BRACKET 002D HYPHEN MINUS 007E TILDE 002E FULL STOP 007F lt CONTROL gt 002F SOLIDUS 00A4 CURRENCY SIGN 0030 DIGIT ZERO 00A7 SECTION SIGN 0031 DIGIT ONE 00A8 DIAERESIS 0032 DIGIT TWO 00B0 DEGREE SIGN 0033 DIGIT THREE 00B1 PLUS MINUS SIGN 0034 DIGIT FOUR 00B7 MIDDLE DOT 0035 DIGIT FIVE 00D7 MULTIPLICATION SIGN 0036 DIGIT SIX 00E0 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE 0037 DIGIT SEVEN 00E1 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE 0038 DIGIT EIGHT 00E8 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE 0039 DIGIT NINE 00E9 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE 003A COLON OOEA LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX 003B SEMICOLON OOEC LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH GRAVE 003C LESS THAN SIGN DOED LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH ACUTE 003D EQUALS SIGN 00F2 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE 003E GREATER THAN SIGN 00F3 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE 003F QUESTION MARK OOF7 DIVISION SIGN 0040 COMMERCIAL AT OOF9 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE 0041 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A OOFA LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE 0042 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B OOFC LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS 0043 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C 0101 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH MACRON 0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D 0113 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH MACRON 0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E 011B LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CARON 0046 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F 012B LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH MACR
166. IN SMALL LETTER H FF49 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER FF4A FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER J FF4B FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER K FF4C FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER L FF4D FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER M FF4E FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER N FF4F FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER O FF50 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER P FFS1 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER Q FF52 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER R FF53 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER S FF54 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER T FF55 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER U FF56 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER V FF57 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER W FF58 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER X FF59 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER Y FFSA FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER Z FF5B FULLWIDTH LEFT CURLY BRACKET FF5C FULLWIDTH VERTICAL LINE FF5D FULLWIDTH RIGHT CURLY BRACKET FFSE FULLWIDTH TILDE FFEO FULLWIDTH CENT SIGN FFE1 FULLWIDTH POUND SIGN FFE2 FULLWIDTH NOT SIGN FFE3 FULLWIDTH MACRON FFE4 FULLWIDTH BROKEN BAR FFES FULLWIDTH YEN SIGN 100 10937 Rev F Page 331 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix H Windows 1252 Latin 1 Windows 1252 Latin 1 to Unicode translation ASCII Unicode Character 0x45 0x0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E 0x00 0x0000 NULL 0x46 0x0046 LATIN CAPI
167. IRAGANA LETTER NE 30CC KATAKANA LETTER NU 306E HIRAGANA LETTER NO 30CD KATAKANA LETTER NE 306F HIRAGANA LETTER HA 30CE KATAKANA LETTER NO 3070 HIRAGANA LETTER BA 30CF KATAKANA LETTER HA 3071 HIRAGANA LETTER PA 30D0 KATAKANA LETTER BA 3072 HIRAGANA LETTER HI 30D1 KATAKANA LETTER PA 3073 HIRAGANA LETTER BI 30D2 KATAKANA LETTER HI 3074 HIRAGANA LETTER PI 30D3 KATAKANA LETTER BI 3075 HIRAGANA LETTER HU 30D4 KATAKANA LETTER PI 3076 HIRAGANA LETTER BU 30D5 KATAKANA LETTER HU 3077 HIRAGANA LETTER PU 30D6 KATAKANA LETTER BU 3078 HIRAGANA LETTER HE 30D7 KATAKANA LETTER PU 3079 HIRAGANA LETTER BE 30D8 KATAKANA LETTER HE 307A HIRAGANA LETTER PE 30D9 KATAKANA LETTER BE 307B HIRAGANA LETTER HO 30DA KATAKANA LETTER PE 307C HIRAGANA LETTER BO 30DB KATAKANA LETTER HO 307D HIRAGANA LETTER PO 30DC KATAKANA LETTER BO 307E HIRAGANA LETTER MA 30DD KATAKANA LETTER PO 307F HIRAGANA LETTER MI 30DE KATAKANA LETTER MA 3080 HIRAGANA LETTER MU 30DF KATAKANA LETTER MI 3081 HIRAGANA LETTER ME 30E0 KATAKANA LETTER MU 3082 HIRAGANA LETTER MO 30E1 KATAKANA LETTER ME 3083 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YA 30E2 KATAKANA LETTER MO 3084 HIRAGANA LETTER YA 30E3 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YA 3085 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YU 30E4 KATAKANA LETTER YA 3086 HIRAGANA LETTER YU 30E5 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YU 3087 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YO 30E6 KATAKANA LETTER YU 3088 HIRAGANA LETTER YO 30E7 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YO 3089 HIRAGANA LETTER RA 30E8 KATAKANA LETTER YO 308A HIRAGANA LETTER RI 30E9 KATAKANA LETTER RA
168. JI ESC b lt 5 gt 01210000345 12345 NUL o 120451 3 Figure 22 UPC E Examples Page 138 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes EAN 13 EAN 13 is a fixed length numeric continuous code that employs four element widths The printer supports EAN 13 which is a superset of UPC that encodes 12 digits Typically the format starts with a number set digit which defines how the next six digits are encoded The next five digits have fixed encoding The last is a check digit The printer prints an EAN 13 bar code with the 12 digits sent to it and generates the check digit If fewer than 12 digits are sent the remaining digits will be zeros EAN 13 may include an EAN 2 or EAN 5 Addenda Function EAN 13 ASCII ESC b lt 5 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 5 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 5 gt information NUL I i ESC b lt 3 gt 12345678901 NUL 1 234567 890128 UPC Awith an EAN 2 Addenda NNN Dot H ESC b lt 3 gt 1234567890141 2 NUL 890128 UPC A with an EAN 5 Addenda 12345 ii I ESC b lt 3 gt 12345678901 12345 NUL 234567 890128 Figure 23 EAN 13 Examples 100 10937 Rev F Page 139 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide EAN 8 EAN is a fixed length numeric continuous code that employs four element widths The printer supports EAN 8 which is
169. Jamo 0x1100 Ox11F9 Korean combining alphabet 0x1200 0x137F Ethiopian Post Unicode 2 0 0x13A0 Ox13FF Cherokee Post Unicode 2 0 0x1400 0x167F Canadian Syllabics Post Unicode 2 0 0x16A0 0x1DFF Unassigned zone 16A0 1DFF 0x1E00 OxiEFF Latin Extended Additional 0x1F00 0x1 FFF Greek Extended 0x2000 Ox206F General Punctuation 100 10937 Rev F Page 319 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 0x2070 Ox209F Superscripts and Subscripts 0x20A0 Ox20CF Currencv Svmbols Ox20D0 Ox20FF Combining Diacritical Marks for Svmbols 0x2100 0x214F Letter like Symbols 0x2150 0x218F Number Forms 0x2190 Ox21FF Arrows 0x2200 Ox22FF Mathematical Operators 0x2300 Ox23FF Miscellaneous Technical 0x2400 0x243F Control Pictures 0x2440 Ox245F Optical Character Recognition 0x2460 Ox24FF Enclosed Alphanumerics 0x2500 0x257F Box Drawing 0x2580 Ox259F Block Elements Ox25A0 Ox25FF Geometric Shapes 0x2600 Ox26FF Miscellaneous Symbols 0x2700 0x27BF Dingbats 0x27C0 Ox27FF Unassigned zone 27C0 27FF 0x2800 Ox28FF Braille Pattern Symbols Post Unicode 2 0 0x2900 Ox2FFF Unassigned zone 2900 2FFF 0x3000 0x303F CJK Symbols and Punctuation 0x3040 Ox309F Hiragana 0x30A0 Ox30FF Katakana 0x3100 0x312F Bopomofo 0x3130 0x318F Hangul Compatibility Jamo Based on KSC 5601 0x3190 0x319F Kanbun 0x31
170. M90 Microline and Ithaca M50 Under Communications the way the printer deals with the communications port can be adjusted The printer will only show communications options that deal with the communications adapter installed Under General Options all other configurable features of the printer can be adjusted The default language paper options electronic Journal features and print defaults may be set Details of all printer options and features will de discussed later in this manual Factory Test The printer is equipped with several factory test modes These test options are only used for factory burn in and testing TEST Burn in TEST Rolling ASCII Page 50 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Hex dump Mode Hex dump mode is used to diagnose communication problems with the printer As information is received by the printer the information is converted to a Hex ASCII format and printed No translation is made which means no commands are interpreted All information is converted to Hex ASCII and printed on the receipt tape If a carriage return is sent to the printer it is translated to OD in the hexadecimal field and in the ASCII field Entering Hex dump Mode To enter hex dump mode perform the following sequence of operations Turn the printer off Press and hold the Feed button While holding the Feed button while turning the printer on Hold the Feed button until the ERROR LED star
171. MFLEX ACCENT 0x19 0x0019 END OF MEDIUM Ox5F Ox005F LOW LINE Ox1A 0x001A SUBSTITUTE 0x60 0x0060 GRAVE ACCENT 0x1B 0x001B ESCAPE 0x61 0x0061 LATIN SMALL LETTER A 0x1C 0x001C FILE SEPARATOR 0x62 0x0062 LATIN SMALL LETTER B 0x1iD 0x001D GROUP SEPARATOR 0x63 0x0063 LATIN SMALL LETTER C DIE Ox001E RECORD SEPARATOR 0x64 0x0064 LATIN SMALL LETTER D Ox1F 0x001F UNIT SEPARATOR 0x65 0x0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E 0x20 0x0020 SPACE 0x66 0x0066 LATIN SMALL LETTER F 0x21 0x0021 EXCLAMATION MARK 0x67 0x0067 LATIN SMALL LETTER G 0x22 0x0022 QUOTATION MARK 0x68 0x0068 LATIN SMALL LETTER H 0x23 0x0023 NUMBER SIGN 0x69 0x0069 LATIN SMALL LETTER 0x24 0x0024 DOLLAR SIGN Ox6A Ox006A LATIN SMALL LETTER J 0x25 0x0025 PERCENT SIGN 0x6B 0x006B LATIN SMALL LETTERK 0x26 0x0026 AMPERSAND Ox6C 0x006C LATIN SMALL LETTER L 0x27 0x0027 APOSTROPHE 0x6D 0x006D LATIN SMALL LETTER M 0x28 0x0028 LEFT PARENTHESIS Ox6E Ox006E LATIN SMALL LETTER N 0x29 0x0029 RIGHT PARENTHESIS 0x6F 0x006F LATIN SMALL LETTER O Ox2A 0x002A ASTERISK 0x70 0x0070 LATIN SMALL LETTER P 0x2B 0x002B PLUS SIGN 0x71 0x0071 LATIN SMALL LETTER Q Ox2C 0x002C COMMA 0x72 0x0072 LATIN SMALL LETTER R 0x2D 0x002D HYPHEN MINUS 0x73 0x0073 LATIN SMALL LETTER S Ox2E 0x002E FULL STOP 0x74 0x0074 LATIN SMALL LETTER T Ox2F 0x002F SOLIDUS 0x75 0x0075 LATIN SMALL LETTER U 0x30 0x0030 DIGIT ZERO 0x76 0x0076 LATIN SMALL LETTER V 0x31 0x0031 DIGIT ONE 0x77 0x0077 LATIN SMALL LETTER W 0x32 0x0032 DIGIT TWO 0x78 0x0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER
172. Most Frequent Configuration Incompatibilities n 53 Parallel PMG tox au a A aa 53 Serial Printer iii ege ae te ee 53 How to Change Configuration Settings 53 Entering into Configuration Mode uk 53 Entering into Configuration Mode Alternate 53 Using Configuration e E 53 Remote Configuration WEE 54 G ntig ring Paper Type Sinsen b e a t b f enna ae 55 Setting up for Color Paper l is sis e oe EES 56 Setting up for Top of Form Marks wc cc cies ia aka eee pala bejn i e ee L 57 Configuring the printer for Top of form marks 57 Configuring various emulatons rna 59 Configuring USB OD EEN 60 Other la ji eege Eege ege 60 Programming RE is sa a a ad a a 61 Control Codes Overview 5 kee wea eee a el apa a eee 61 INGIMIGHIC iz U ao oe nets exes sac ctnhceaaser vs agace ahs caesar aquseoes A 61 Standard IE Mell AMON i crates eee te rai Gta peg teats es Rial a 62 PEPE te 62 EPOS EMU anon i ieda de Macnee ame ada Bate add g eb 62 100 10937 Rev F Page 7 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide aSo eaer E E Un DOLE MONEE PTE COTE REET 62 Ithaca Microline Eliette Eege Ee 62 Application Develop Mens ie peels ses epee tes Tj e canes 62 Ithaca Control Codes and Commands i biet bb u Mibni geg po d Mra 63 PcOS Printer Control Codes iii ki e i Eee EEN SNE 63 Quick PCOS Reference GA i dee ees 63 Low Level Paper Motion Control 69 PrintiPaper WOON EE 69 Horizontal Motor Emelie Geet bo bag at co
173. NUL Figure 64 GS1 Databar Stacked Composite Example Page 170 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes GS1 Databar Stacked Omni Composite GS1 Databar Stacked Omni composite will process a GS1 Databar Stacked barcode With an CC A or CC B composite component Function GS1 Databar Stacked Omni Composite ASCII ESC b J information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 4AH information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 74 gt information NUL ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL ESC b lt 74 gt 12345678901 23 NUL Figure 65 GS1 Databar Stacked Omni Composite Example GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Composite GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked composite will process a GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked barcode With an CC A or CC B composite component Function GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Composite ASCII ESC b K information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 4BH information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 75 gt information NUL ll Il ESC b TI l 017123456789012341117100909 307123456 NUL DRUI ESC b lt 75 gt 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL Figure 66 GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Composite Example 100 10937 Rev F Page 171 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide GS 1 Barcodes The GS1 General Specification defines a global standard for encoding data about products The full specification is available from www gs
174. NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 44H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 68 gt information NUL ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL ESC b lt 68 gt 01 12345678901234 NUL In Hm C01 e 345678901234 Figure 59 EAN GS1 128 Composite Example GS1 Databar 14 Composite GS1 Databar 14 composite will process a GS1 Databar 14 barcode With an CC A or CC B composite component Function GS1 Databar 14 Composite ASCII ESC b E information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 45H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 69 gt information NUL H 4 ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL ESC b lt 69 gt 1234567890123 NUL 01 12345678901231 Figure 60 GS1 Databar 14 Composite Example Page 168 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes GS1 Databar Truncated Composite GS1 Databar truncated composite will process a GS1 Databar truncated barcode With an CC A or CC B composite component Function GS1 Databar Truncated 14 Composite ASCII ESC b F information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 46H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 70 gt information NUL PR Es Sate ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL III UI ESC lt 70 gt 1234567890123MNULI 01 12345678901231 Figure 61 GS1 Databar Truncated 14 Composite Example GS1 Databar Limited Composite GS1 Databar limited composite will process a G
175. NUMERAL THREE 041F CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER PE 2173 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR 0420 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ER 2174 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE 0421 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ES 2175 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SIX 0422 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TE 2176 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN 0423 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER U 2177 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT 0424 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EF 2178 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL NINE 0425 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER HA 2179 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TEN 0426 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TSE 2190 LEFTWARDS ARROW 0427 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER CHE 2191 UPWARDS ARROW 0428 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHA 2192 RIGHTWARDS ARROW 0429 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHCHA 2193 DOWNWARDS ARROW 042A CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER HARD SIGN 2196 NORTH WEST ARROW 042B CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YERU 2197 NORTH EAST ARROW 042C CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SOFT SIGN 2198 SOUTH EAST ARROW 042D CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER E 2199 SOUTH WEST ARROW 042E CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YU 2208 ELEMENT OF 042F CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER VA 220F N ARV PRODUCT 0430 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER A 2211 N ARV SUMMATION 0431 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER BE 2215 DIVISION SLASH 0432 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER VE 221A SQUARE ROOT 0433 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER GHE 221D PROPORTIONAL TO 0434 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER DE 221E INFINITY 0435 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER IE 221F RIGHT ANGLE 0436 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZHE 2220 ANGLE 0437 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZE 2223 DIVIDES 0438 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER 2225 PARALLEL TO 0439 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHORT 2227
176. Not Used for Flow Control RTS Request to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready Figure 82 XON XOFF Serial Port Flow Control 100 10937 Rev F Page 299 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Print Buffer Flow Flow Chart 1 illustrates how the communications driver acquires data from the serial port and places it in the buffer using Ready Busy or XON XOFF flow control Wait for data from the host Place data in the print buffer Is the buffer full Na Update the buffer pointers Is the buffer past the high vatermark2 Clear the DTR signal or transmit XOFF Flow Chart 1 Serial Buffer Operation At the top of this flow chart the driver is waiting for data When data is received from the host the printer checks to see if it is an inquire command If the data is an inquire it is responded to and placed in the buffer If not the data is placed in the buffer without response The buffer is then checked to see if it is full before the internal pointer is incremented If it is not full the pointer is incremented in preparation for the next data byte The buffer is checked by looking to see if it has passed a high watermark If the buffer has the communication driver is notified and it resets DTR to indicate to the host that no more data should be sent Page 300 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Flow Chart 2 illustrates how the print control software takes data from the buff
177. OB FULLWIDTH PLUS SIGN FA21 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA21 FFOC FULLWIDTH COMMA FA23 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA23 FFOD FULLWIDTH HYPHEN MINUS FA24 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA24 FFOE FULLWIDTH FULL STOP FA27 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA27 FFOF FULLWIDTH SOLIDUS FA28 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA28 FF10 FULLWIDTH DIGIT ZERO FA29 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA29 FEI FULLWIDTH DIGIT ONE FESO PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL TWO DOT FF12 FULLWIDTH DIGIT TWO LEADER FF13 FULLWIDTH DIGIT THREE FE31 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL EM DASH FF14 FULLWIDTH DIGIT FOUR FE33 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LOW LINE FF15 FULLWIDTH DIGIT FIVE Eau PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL WAVY FF16 FULLWIDTH DIGIT SIX LOW LINE FF17 FULLWIDTH DIGIT SEVEN FE35 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT FF18 FULLWIDTH DIGIT EIGHT PARENTHESIS FF19 FULLWIDTH DIGIT NINE FE36 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT FFIA FULLWIDTH COLON PARENTHESIS FFIB FULLWIDTH SEMICOLON FFIC FULLWIDTH LESS THAN SIGN Page 330 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix FFID FULLWIDTH EQUALS SIGN FFIE FULLWIDTH GREATER THAN SIGN FFIF FULLWIDTH QUESTION MARK FF20 FULLWIDT
178. ON 0047 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G 0144 LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE 0048 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H 0148 LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CARON 0049 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER 014D LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH MACRON 004A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J 016B LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH MACRON 004B LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K 01CE LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CARON 004C LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L 01D0 LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH CARON 004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M 01D2 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CARON 004E LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N 01D4 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CARON 004F LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O 01D6 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND 0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P MACRON 0051 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q 01D8 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND 0052 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R ACUTE 0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND 01DA 0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T CARON 0055 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND 01DC 0056 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V GRAVE ei 0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W 0251 LATIN SMALL LETTER ALPHA 0058 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X 0261 LATIN SMALL LETTER SCRIPT G 0059 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y 02C7 CARON MANDARIN CHINESE THIRD TONE 005A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z 02C9 MODIFIER LETTER MACRON MANDARIN 0088 LEFT SQUARE BRACKET MODIEERLETTER ACUTE ACCENT MANDARIN 005C REVERSE SOLIDUS 005D RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET us CHINESE SECOND TONE MODIFIER LETTER GRAVE ACCENT MANDARIN 005E CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT 02CB 005F OW LINE CHINESE FOURTH TONE ii 02D9 DOT ABOVE
179. OS printer All inquire commands are processed as they are received preprocessed or real time and require a response from the printer Consequently parallel IEEE 1284 bidirectional communications USB or bidirectional serial operation is required The Model 9000 Printer looks at and evaluates all commands as they are received and does not respond to inquire commands that happen to be embedded in graphics or other commands Refer to the buffer and preprocessor descriptions in later sections In all cases inquire commands are responded to by an acknowledged ACK or a not acknowledged NAK and then the command ID which allows the host application to make multiple requests and receive identifiable responses If the printer is configured for serial or USB operation the status is automatically returned to the host If the printer is configured for parallel IEEE 1284 operation the HOST must initiate a reverse channel request to return the status Serial and USB Mode Inquire All inquire ENQ commands require a response from the printer During serial operation all inquire commands are responded to by an acknowledged ACK or not acknowledged NAK the command ID and in some cases status Most status responses sequences contain a length field to help decode and separate responses In general the printer should be configured for Buffer Full Only off line operation if inquire commands are used This prevents the printer from using fl
180. OS ODH Description The CR command prints the contents of the print buffer if any and resets the next character print position to the left margin A line feed is not performed unless auto feed is active The print rotation direction and the left margin command define the left margin LF Line feed ASCII ILF Hexadecimal OAH Decimal lt 10 gt IPCL amp LF EPOS OAH Description The LF command prints the contents of the buffer if any and advances paper one line at the current default line spacing The next character print position is not reset to the left margin unless auto CR is active Horizontal Motion Control Several commands can be used to control the horizontal position of characters Many applications use space control to position fields However the Model 9000 Printer has the ability to control character position with horizontal tab stops This is done using the horizontal tab HT to move to those tab stops HT Horizontal tab ASCII HT Hexadecimal 09H Decimal lt 9 gt IPCL amp YHT EPOS HT Description The HT command inserts spaces in the print buffer up to the next tab stop The default tab locations are every eight spaces 100 10937 Rev F Page 69 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide BS ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC D ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC R ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description P
181. OUBEE AND HORIZONTAL 300A LEFT DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET 2569 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE UP AND HORIZONTAL 3008 RIGHT DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET 300C LEFT CORNER BRACKET 256A BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND 3000 RIGHT CORNER BRACKET HORIZONTAL DOUBLE S BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL DOUBLE AND 300E LEFT WHITE CORNER BRACKET 56B HORIZONTAL SINGLE 300F RIGHT WHITE CORNER BRACKET BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND 3010 LEFT BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET 256C HORIZONTAL 3011 RIGHT BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET 256D BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC DOWN AND RIGHT 3012 POSTAL MARK 256E BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC DOWN AND LEFT 3013 GETA MARK 256F BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC UP AND LEFT 3014 LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET 2570 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC UP AND RIGHT 3015 RIGHT TORTOISE SHELE BRACKET BA BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL UPPER RIGHT 3016 LEFT WHITE LENTICULAR BRACKET TO LOWER LEFT 3017 RIGHT WHITE LENTICULAR BRACKET BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL UPPER LEFT 301D REVERSED DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK 2572 TO LOWER RIGHT 301E DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK 2573 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL CROSS 3021 HANGZHOU NUMERAL ONE 2581 LOWER ONE EIGHTH BLOCK 3022 HANGZHOU NUMERAL TWO 2582 LOWER ONE QUARTER BLOCK 3023 HANGZHOU NUMERAL THREE 2583 LOWER THREE EIGHTHS BLOCK 3024 HANGZHOU NUMERAL FOUR 2584 LOWER HALF BLOCK 3025 HANGZHOU NUMERAL FIVE 2585 LOWER FIVE EIGHTHS BLOCK 3026 HANGZHOU NUMERAL SIX 2586 LOWER THREE QUARTERS BLOCK 3027 HANGZHOU NUMERAL SEVEN 2587 LOWER SEVEN EIGHTHS BLOCK 3028 HANGZHOU NUMERAL EIGHT 2588 FULL BLOCK
182. Oy gt lt W gt lt Wy gt lt HL gt lt Hp gt IPCL amp PS lt 0000 gt lt WWWWs lt HHHH gt EPOS ESC W Description This command Sets the position and size of the printing initial area in page mode and sub pages Where lt O gt lt Oy gt the y direction offset Default 0 lt W gt lt W4 gt the width in dots Default 576 lt HipeHip the height in dots Default 6000 This command should always be sent before or immediately after page mode is entered to define the initial page size Once in page mode after the ESC t command the command can be sent multiple times so that several different print areas aligned in different print directions can be developed in the printer s page buffer before being printed using the Print Page Mode commands FF or ESC FF The starting position of the print area is the upper left of the area to be printed The offset is in the y direction and is O dots The length of the area to be printed in the y direction is set to H dots The length of the area to be printed in the x direction is set to W dots Note that the Y offset is always 0 The set print area command may be invoked multiple times while in page mode The first invocation specifies the final page height Following invocations will define smaller windows within the initially defined page If the Set page size command is not used the page size will default to the maximum size The orientation of the set print area command is always base
183. PC was called UPC E This barcode differs from UPC A in that it only a 6 digit code is used it does not use middle guard bars and the end bit pattern is altered UPC E requires that the first digit is zero for number system zero however the printer does not enforce it The printer does the compression based on the compression rules for UPC E prints an UPC bar code based on the 11 digits sent to it and generates the check digit If fewer than 11 digits are sent leading zeros are added to form an 11 digit code If the barcode does not meet the compression rules invalid zero suppression digits are removed UPC E may include an EAN 2 or EAN 5 Addenda Last digit UPC E equivalent is UPC A equivalent is 0 XXNNNO OXX000 O00NNN check 1 XXNNN1 0XX100 00NNN check 2 XXNNN2 OXX200 0ONNN check 3 XXXNN3 OXXX00 000NN check 4 XXXXN4 0XXXX0 0000N check 5 XXXXX5 OXXXXX 00005 check 6 XXXXX6 OXXXXX 00006 check 7 XXXXX7 OXXXXX 00007 check 8 XXXXX8 OXXXXX 00008 check 9 XXXXX9 OXXXXX 00009 check Figure 21 UPC E Zero Suppression Formats Function UPC E ASCII ESC b lt 5 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 5 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 5 gt information NUL l ESC b lt 5 gt 01210000345 NUL 120 451 3 o UPC E with an EAN 2 Addenda o 12 04 12 WW ESC b lt 5 gt 01210000345 12 NUL GW UPC E with an EAN 5 Addenda 12345 lif u II
184. Powered USB interface Supply Supply Frequency Hz Idle Current amps Voltage Voltage Current Rating Range amps VDC VDC 24 22 8 DC 2 0 A Cash Drawer Fire 541096 26 42 3 5 A Printing maximum for lt 1 minute 4 8 A Peak lt 167 msec Table 3 Power Input Requirements with the 24 volt DC Power The Model 9000 can be configured to operate with various power supplies If a DC power supply with less capability is used the printer must be configured for reduced power and the printer will print slower For DC powered printers the cash drawer is supplied directly from the DC input supply The cash drawer requirements may affect the allowable range of voltages Page 24 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Thermal Print Head Thermal Print Head Overview Number of heat elements Heat element pitch Print width Max Print width 80mm paper Print width 58mm paper Print width 40mm paper Pulse Life Abrasion Life Vertical dot pitch Operating Temperature Humidity Operation Precautions e Do not print without paper Programming Codes 640 0 125 mm 8 dots mm 80 mm 0 2 mm 640 dots 72 mm 0 2 mm 576 dots 56 mm 0 2 mm 448 dots 36 mm 0 2 mm 288 dots 100 million pulses 100 km 0 125 mm 0 0049 inch or 203 DPI 5 45 degrees C 10 90 RH non condensing e Clean the head with ethyl alcohol after power is removed from the printer This will
185. Print Supress Data Pass Through Enabling 204 Printer ID Inquire 215 Printer Reset Requesting 211 Printer State Inquire 213 Printer Status 209 Printer Status Inquire 210 214 217 218 219 222 223 Process User Macro 127 Programmer s Notes 310 Programming Considerations 126 Quad Density Graphics Printing 109 Query marker 200 Read and return Totals 280 Recovery form Mechanical Errors 309 Regulatory Compliance 3 Remote Power Control 284 Remote Reset 306 Removing Old Interface Cards 37 Rotated Font Beginning 83 Select Color 92 Select Subscript 96 Select Superscript 96 Self Test Using 49 Serial Device Identification 303 Serial Interface Communication 32 Serial Interface Connector 38 Serial port flow control 298 Serial Port Inquire 303 304 Signal Levels 31 Single Density Graphics Printing 108 Specifications and Requirements 20 Standard APA Graphics 108 Standard Emulation 62 Start up Macro Flagging 120 Status Inquire 209 Status Inquire Receipt Paper Low 210 Superscript and Subscript 96 Tab Stops Resetting 70 75 Testing the Printer 49 Top of Form Setting 75 Page 337 Index Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Underline Beginning 93 95 User Store Delete item 124 Unidirectional Printing Beginning 110 User Store Flush Information 121 124 USB Interface Connector 38 User Store Load item 123 User Defined Character Saving 120 122 User Store Loading item 120 User
186. Q lt 35 gt Hexadecimal 05H 23H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 35 gt Function The ENQ lt 35 gt command returns the number of USB Watch dog resets and then resets the count to zero Response ACK lt 35 gt lt 41 gt lt n gt Where lt 35 gt Is the echo of command lt 41 gt Length 40 lt n gt The number of USB Watchdogs since the last inquire ENQ lt 36 gt Inquire current UTF encoding mode ASCII ENQ lt 36 gt Hexadecimal 05H 24H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 36 gt Function The ENQ lt 36 gt command returns the current UTF encoding mode Response ACK lt 36 gt lt 41 gt lt n gt Where lt 36 gt Is the echo of command lt 41 gt Length 40 lt n gt The UTF Mode where 0 ASCII 1 UTF8 Text only 2 UTF8 4 UTF16 8 UTF16BE 16 UTFI6LE Note This command must be sent in the current encoding Only ASCII UFT8 Text and UTF Modes use identical data structures 100 10937 Rev F Page 221 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ENQ lt 37 gt Inquire barcode error status ASCII ENQ lt 37 gt Hexadecimal 05H 25H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 37 gt Function The ENQ lt 37 gt command returns the last barcode error code Response ACK lt 37 gt lt 42 gt lt Error7 gt lt Errorys g gt Where lt Error7 o gt lt Errorys g gt indicate a 16 bit barcode error code The returned error code reflects the last barcode print attempt See page 197 fora detailed list of barcode errors 0 i
187. R THAN OR EQUAL TO 2515 BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND RIGHT HEAVY 2266 LESS THAN OVER EQUAL TO 2516 BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND RIGHT LIGHT 2267 GREATER THAN OVER EQUAL TO 2517 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY UP AND RIGHT 226E NOT LESS THAN 2518 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND LEFT 226F NOT GREATER THAN 2519 BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND LEFT HEAVY 2295 CIRCLED PLUS 251A BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVV AND LEFT LIGHT 2299 CIRCLED DOT OPERATOR 251B BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY UP AND LEFT 22A5 UP TACK 251C BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND RIGHT 22BF RIGHT TRIANGLE 281D BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL LIGHT AND RIGHT 2312 ARC HEAVV 2460 CIRCLED DIGIT ONE JE BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND RIGHT DOWN 2461 CIRCLED DIGIT TWO LIGHT 2462 CIRCLED DIGIT THREE 251F BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND RIGHT UP 2463 CIRCLED DIGIT FOUR LIGHT 2464 CIRCLED DIGIT FIVE 2520 BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND RIGHT 2465 CIRCLED DIGIT SIX LIGHT 2466 CIRCLED DIGIT SEVEN 2521 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND RIGHT UP 2467 CIRCLED DIGIT EIGHT BOK DRAW NGS UP LIGHT AND RIGHT DOWN 24 IRCLED DIGIT NINE 2469 CIRCLED NUMBER TEN Ma BOX DRAW NGS HEAVV VERTICAL AND RIGHT Se See Ges SS Ge 2524 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND LEFT 2476 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT THREE 2525 cca NGSVERTIGAL LIGHTAND LEFT 2477 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT FOUR 2478 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT FIVE 2526 POX DRAW NGS UP HEAVY ANDILERTDOWN 2479 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT SIX DATA PARENTHESIZE DIEISEVEN 2827 BOX DRAW NGS DOWN HEAVY AND LEFT UP 247B PARENTHESIZED DIGIT EIGHT Se PARENTHESI ED DIGIT NINE SS BOX
188. Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Font4 TactOCR ttf Font5 TactWGL_V ttf The brush size effects only stroke fonts Brush 100 legacy EmulationMode Font Horizontal Vertical Width Where If Font 0 Use Linkfont else l 4 above If Font is 100 or greater use BMFont Font 100 BMFonts only used Width Horizontal and Vertical are in 8th points Width in Dots See the Programmers guide for more information Epsonl 0 56 72 10 Epson2 0 64 72 14 Epson3 0 50 60 8 PcOSI 0 52 72 10 PcOS2 0 60 72 14 PcOS3 0 80 80 18 PcOS4 0 80 80 20 PcOSOCR 4 80 80 20 BarCl 0 56 72 10 BarC2 0 64 72 14 BarC3 0 50 60 8 Up to 8 user defined fonts may be defined USRFonti 100 9 24 10 USRFont2 101 12 24 13 USRFont3 4 56 72 0 USRFont4 4 64 72 0 gtech bmfont There may be up to 8 bitmap fonts Bitmap fonts are fixed sizes and have no options BMFont0O chrl10x24 bft BMFontli chr13x24 bft BMFont2 chr15x24 bft BMFont3 ocrl6x24 bft usb USB Driver Usbclass may be 255 7 GSA 108 Default is class 7 Printer device Usbclass 7 UsbSpeed may be 0 for Full or 1 for High Usbspeed 1 USB Plug and Play Print driver 1 PnP Active USB_PnP 0 options to remove white space set Linespace to 0 Linespace 0 Font1 through Font99 may be defined and the font number is t
189. S1 Databar limited barcode With an CC A or CC B composite component Function GS1 Databar Limited Composite ASCII ESC b G information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 47H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 71 gt information NUL AMIE es Fe ESC b B 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL ESC b lt 71 gt 12345678901 23 NUL 01 12345678901231 Figure 62 GS1 Databar Limited Composite Example 100 10937 Rev F Page 169 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide GS1 Databar Expanded Composite GS1 Databar Expanded composite will process a GS1 Databar Expanded barcode With an CC A or CC B composite component Function GS1 Databar Expanded Composite ASCII ESC b H information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 48H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 72 gt information NUL ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL III ESC b lt 72 gt 01 12345678901234 NUL 01 12345678901234 Figure 63 GS1 Databar Expanded Composite Example GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Composite GS1 Databar Stacked composite will process a GS1 Databar Stacked barcode With an CC A or CC B composite component Function GS1 Databar Stacked Composite ASCII ESC b I information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 49H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 73 gt information NUL bi l ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL ESC b lt 73 gt 12345678901 23
190. SC y commands for extended diagnostics The ESC y commands are not available 100 10937 Rev F Page 279 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Read and Return Totals ASCII ESC T lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 7EH 54H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 84 gt lt n gt Description This command returns the current statistics for parameter n The value returned will be T lt n gt with the next 4 bytes being an unsigned integer For example ESC T lt 1 gt Request cover open count Returns T lt 1 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 1 gt lt 100 gt or 256 100 or 356 cover opens Values ofn Request 16 Configuration Faults 0 Not Used 17 Cash Drawer Opens Not Used 18 Auto Cutter Cycles 2 Not Used 19 Not Used 3 Cover Opens 20 Not Used 4 Paper Outs 21 Standby Cycles 9 Line Feeds 22 Power Up Cvcles 6 Characters Printed 23 Fault Resets 7 Cash Drawer 24 Power On Time Min 8 Not Used 25 System Active Time 9 Init Requests Min 10 Auto Cutter Faults 26 Error Vectors 11 Over Temperature 27 Flash File Faults 12 Auto Cutter Re home 28 USB Watch Dog Count 13 Not Used 29 FAT Flash Erase Cycles 14 Not Used 30 Ext Flash Erases 15 Missed TOF if equipped 31 System Memory Faults Table 36 Totals register indexes Page 280 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Function Print Current Configuration and Totals ASCII ESC v lt 9 gt or ESC lt 9 gt Hexadecim
191. SCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 100 10937 Process user macro ESC g lt 0 gt 1BH 67H 00H lt 27 gt lt 103 gt lt 0 gt amp GP ESC g lt 0 gt The ESC g lt 0 gt command prints the user store data buffer Start macro record ESC g lt 1 gt 1BH 67H 01H lt 27 gt lt 103 gt lt 1 gt amp GS ESC g lt 1 gt The ESC g lt 1 gt command clears the user store data buffer and begins recording data The next 2000 bytes including characters and commands are recorded Stop macro record ESC g lt 2 gt 1BH 67H 02H lt 27 gt lt 103 gt lt 2 gt amp GE ESC g lt 2 gt The ESC g lt 2 gt command stops recording user store data information The buffer is not saved into the nonvolatile memory Stop macro record and save ESC g lt 3 gt 1BH 67H 03H lt 27 gt lt 103 gt lt 3 gt amp GW ESC g lt 3 gt The ESC g lt 3 gt command stops recording graphic save information The buffer is saved into the user store nonvolatile memory under the name ESCg3_Save Note The ESC g lt 3 gt command is supplied for compatibility with the Series 80PLUS and 90PLUS printers Rev F Page 127 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Bar Codes The Model 9000 Printer supports the ability to print bar codes The printer offers a number of formats as defined below The host does not need to form the graphic image for these bar codes The host n
192. Set page mode page size ESC u lt ni gt 1BH 75H amp PS 104 Set page mode page position ESC o lt n1 gt 1BH 6FH none 106 Start Page Mode ESC SUB t 1BH 1AH amp PM 99 53H Set Page Mode Size Enhanced ESC SUB S aa 1AH none 101 Set Page Mode Printed Area ESC SUB W an 1AH none 103 Set Page Position Enhanced ESC SUBJA y ae 1AH amp PY 106 Set Page Position Relative ESC SUB R ia 1AH none 106 Set Page Overlav mode IESCJISUBJO S Ge 1AH none 106 Set Page Overlay mode ESC SUB M See 1AH none 107 Clear Page Mode Page ESC SUB C Hee 1AH none 107 Set Page Mode Auto Size ESC SUB Z be 1AH none 105 Select page mode ESC t lt n gt 1BH 74H amp PM lt m1 gt Set page mode page position ESC o lt ni gt 1BH 6FH 106 Exit page mode FF OCH amp FF 107 APA Graphics Print single density graphics ESC K ms lt n2 gt 1BH 4BH none 108 lt ny gt 0 255 lt No gt 0 3 len lt n gt 256 lt n gt Print half speed double density graphics ESC L lt ni gt ze 1BH 4CH none 108 Print full speed double density graphics ESC Y lt ni gt zit 1BH 59H none 109 Print quad density graphics ESC Z lt n gt lt n gt 1BH 5AH none 109 Select bidirectional or unidirectional print ESC U lt n gt 1BH 55H amp GU n 1 110 n 0 Bidirectional amp GB n 0 n 1 Unidirectional Print graphics in mode lt m gt ESC lt m gt lt ni gt 1BH 2AH none 109 lt Ne gt Reassign graphic mode ESC lt
193. TAL LETTER F 0x01 0x0001 START OF HEADING 0x47 0x0047 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G 0x02 0x0002 START OF TEXT 0x48 0x0048 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H 0x03 0x0003 END OF TEXT 0x49 0x0049 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER 0x04 0x0004 END OF TRANSMISSION Ox4A 0x004A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J 0x05 0x0005 ENQUIRY 0x4B 0x004B LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K 0x06 0x0006 ACKNOWLEDGE 0x4C 0x004C LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L 0x07 0x0007 BELL 0x4D 0x004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M 0x08 0x0008 BACKSPACE Ox4E 0x004E LATIN CAPITAL LETTERN 0x09 0x0009 HORIZONTAL TABULATION Ox4F 0x004F LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O Ox0A 0x000A LINE FEED 0x50 0x0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P 0x0B 0x000B VERTICAL TABULATION 0x51 0x0051 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q 0x0C 0x000C FORM FEED 0x52 0x0052 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R 0x0D 0x000D CARRIAGE RETURN 0x53 0x0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S Ox0E Ox000E SHIFT OUT 0x54 0x0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T Ox0F 0x000F SHIFT IN 0x55 0x0055 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U 0x10 0x0010 DATA LINK ESCAPE 0x56 0x0056 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V 0x11 0x0011 DEVICE CONTROL ONE 0x57 0x0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W 0x12 0x0012 DEVICE CONTROL TWO 0x58 0x0058 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X 0x13 0x0013 DEVICE CONTROL THREE 0x59 0x0059 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y 0x14 0x0014 DEVICE CONTROL FOUR 0x5A 0x005A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z 0x15 0x0015 NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE 0x5B 0x005B LEFT SQUARE BRACKET 0x16 0x0016 SYNCHRONOUS IDLE 0x5C 0x005C REVERSE SOLIDUS 0x17 0x0017 END OF TRANSMISSION BLOCK 0x5D 0x005D RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET 0x18 0x0018 CANCEL Ox5E Ox005E CIRCU
194. TER NU 2025 TWO DOT LEADER 03BE GREEK SMALL LETTER XI 2026 HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS 03BF GREEK SMALL LETTER OMICRON 2030 PER MILLE SIGN 03C0 GREEK SMALL LETTER PI 2032 PRIME 03C1 GREEK SMALL LETTER RHO 2033 DOUBLE PRIME 03C3 GREEK SMALL LETTER SIGMA 2035 REVERSED PRIME 03C4 GREEK SMALL LETTER TAU 203B REFERENCE MARK 03C5 GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON 20AC EURO SIGN 03C6 GREEK SMALL LETTER PHI 2103 DEGREE CELSIUS 03C7 GREEK SMALL LETTER CHI 2105 CARE OF 03C8 GREEK SMALL LETTER PSI 2109 DEGREE FAHRENHEIT 03C9 GREEK SMALL LETTER OMEGA 2116 NUMERO SIGN 0401 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER IO 2121 TELEPHONE SIGN 0410 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER A 2160 ROMAN NUMERAL ONE 0411 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER BE 2161 ROMAN NUMERAL TWO 0412 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER VE 2162 ROMAN NUMERAL THREE 0413 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER GHE 2163 ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR 0414 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DE 2164 ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE 0415 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER IE 2165 ROMAN NUMERAL SIX 0416 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZHE 2166 ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN 0417 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZE 2167 ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT 0418 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER 2168 ROMAN NUMERAL NINE 0419 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHORT 2169 ROMAN NUMERAL TEN 041A CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER KA 216A ROMAN NUMERAL ELEVEN 041B CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EL 216B ROMAN NUMERAL TWELVE 041C CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EM 2170 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL ONE 041D CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EN 2171 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TWO 041E CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER O 2172 SMALL ROMAN
195. TIE Code Code Ki 131 83 C o 5 127 7F GO O 128 80 e NI 129 81 o o Code FNC4 Cod 100 132 84 73 105 69 B eB 74 106 6A FNC4 Code 1 A A k 5 107 ep S BE a FNC1 102 134 86 76 76 108 6C E 7 GES EB Start Code A 103 135 87 7 TR m Start Code B 104 136 88 F a GE Start Code C 105 137 89 Stop 1 133 85 o N N 4 o Ei N 70 CO o ine 113 71 82 114 72 Figure 16 Code 128 encoding values B k 100 10937 Rev F Page 135 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Code 128 Auto Encoding To have the printer selected code set and automatically generate an optimal barcode the value of Code should be the length Function Code 128 Automatic Encoding ASCII ESC b lt 2 gt lt Length gt information Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 2 gt lt Length gt information Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 2 gt lt Length gt information If the first character lt Length gt is from 1 to 31 the printer will automatically select Code A B or C depending on the data present If the data is all numeric the data can be printed as pairs This effectively doubles the amount of data that can be printed The check digit is generated and printed by the printer In this mode the exact data sent to the printer is encoded There is no offset function code or shift code requirements For example the following is printed in a mixture of code A and
196. The ESC p 5 lt n gt command enables or disables the FEED button When the least significant bit LSB of lt n gt one the FEED button is disabled when it is zero the button is enabled To prevent problems caused by accidentally pressing the FEED button use the command to disable it The FEED button is temporarily enabled regardless of how the command is set during the wait time set by the GS z 0 command for paper insertion and during the recovery confirmation time Where lt n gt Bit 0 1 the FEED button is disabled Bit 0 0 the button is enabled Page 202 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC p 4 Select paper sensor s to stop printing ASCII ESC p 4 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 70H 34H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 52 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC p 4 lt n gt command selects the sensors that tell the printer to stop printing The default setting occurs when only the Paper Out sensor stops printing When the paper roll near end sensor is enabled and the sensor detects a near end condition during printing the printer completes the current line and then automatically goes off line Replacing a new paper roll restarts the printing When the paper roll near end sensor is disabled and a paper near end condition is detected during printing the paper out LED comes on but the printer continues to print Note The FST does not allow the Paper Out sensor
197. The PJColor program has been enhanced to provide several ways to create color Logos and Coupons and make them available to the Model 9000 printer 100 10937 Rev F Page 233 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 3 Select the resolution you would like to have the printer use to print the graphics Low resolutions are faster high resolutions produce better graphics 4 Load the graphics Image you wish to print 5 Select the communications port and configuration 6 Adjust the image to produce the effect you would like The lower graphic window displays an approximation of the printed image 7 When you are satisfied with the graphic press the Print to a File button PJColor will ask what file you would like to receive the print data 8 This file can be sent to the printer and the graphic will be printed Store Graphics in the printer PJColor can store a graphic in the Model 9000 Printer or generate a file that will store a graphic in the printer To Store a graphic in the printer 1 Start PUColor 2 Under Settings Select the Model 9000 printer Then select the emulation that you will be setting the printer to 3 Select the resolution you would like to have the printer use to print the graphics Low resolutions are faster high resolutions produce better graphics 4 Select the communications port and protocol that is to be used to communicate to the printer 5 Load the graphics Image you wish to prin
198. USB port all on its own This typically happens when windows thinks the previous port is already in use when the printer enumerates This generally happens after a windows crash but it can happen for other reasons Once it does the previous USB port is not easy to free up Rather than hard code a USB port ID like USBOO1 the application should look for the printer on a series of USB ports starting at USB001 and going up until it s found Generally the first 10 is good enough although going through the first 99 is possible The trade off is that it takes time to search and if the printer is not connected it won t be found USB Drops and disconnects Another USB issue is that the USB link can be dropped by Windows Windows will terminate a USB link if it sees babble on the link Google USB Babble This can be caused by poor USB cables or a high noise environment It s also dependant on the host system hardware Some PC s are much worse than others The root cause is EMI Electromagnetic Interference and this should be considered during system installation The power line is generally the primary source of EMI but it can come from other sources like air conditioners and other equipment One situation to avoid is using different power sources for the printer and the host computer There can be significant potential differences between the grounds of two different primary power sources USB shares the ground between the host and the printer and any
199. Where n Interval in 100 MS increments IE 20 2 Seconds Setting the value to 0 disables the feature 100 10937 Rev F Page 225 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC POS Codes The EPOS codes that are supported by the Model 9000 Printer are listed in this section Note The Epson emulation does not support Unicode Double Byte or downloaded True Type fonts Differences between Epson TM T88V and Model 9000 In a few minor ways the operation and programming Model 9000 is not identical to a TM T90 The following is a summary of key differences Page Mode The page mode in the Model 9000 operates in the same way as the TM T88 and the TM T90 however the page size can be larger if the ESC POS emulation is selected Undocumented Epson Commands There are a number of undocumented commands in Epson printers Where TransAct is aware of these commands they have been duplicated in the Model 9000 Printer Barcodes The barcode generation in the Model 9000 generates barcode differently and ata different resolution than the Epson printer In most cases the barcodes are equivalent however in some cases the Model 9000 may generate a larger or smaller image and may be encoded differently Real time Status The Model 9000 Printer is available in USB serial parallel and Ethernet versions Epson supports parallel operation through a parallel to serial interface Consequently the response times for the Model 90
200. X 0x33 0x0033 DIGIT THREE 0x79 0x0079 LATIN SMALL LETTER Y 0x34 0x0034 DIGIT FOUR Ox7A 0x007A LATIN SMALL LETTER Z 0x35 0x0035 DIGIT FIVE 0x7B 0x007B LEFT CURLY BRACKET 0x36 0x0036 DIGIT SIX 0x7C 0x007C VERTICAL LINE 0x37 0x0037 DIGIT SEVEN 0x7D 0x007D RIGHT CURLV BRACKET 0x38 0x0038 DIGIT EIGHT Ox7E 0x007E TILDE 0x39 0x0039 DIGIT NINE Ox7F 0x007F DELETE Ox3A_ 0x003A COLON 0x80 Ox20AC EURO SIGN 0x3B_ 0x003B SEMICOLON 0x81 0x0000 0x3C 0x003C LESS THAN SIGN 0x82 0x201A SINGLE LOW 9 QUOTATION MARK 0x3D 0x003D EQUALS SIGN 0x83 0x0192 LATIN SMALL LETTER F WITH HOOK 0x3E 0x003E GREATER THAN SIGN 0x84 0x201E DOUBLE LOW 9 QUOTATION MARK Ox3F 0x003F QUESTION MARK 0x85 0x2026 HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS 0x40 0x0040 COMMERCIAL AT 0x86 0x2020 DAGGER 0x41 0x0041 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A 0x87 0x2021 DOUBLE DAGGER 0x42 0x0042 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B 0x88 0x02C6 MODIFIER LETTER CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT 0x43 0x0043 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C 0x89 0x2030 PER MILLE SIGN 0x44 0x0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D Ox8A 0x0160 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON 100 10937 Rev F Page 333 Appendix C Ordering Supplies Model 9000 Programmer s Guide
201. X 1 50 TOTAL 7 68 CASH TEND 20 00 CHANGE DUE 12 23 Figure 70 Sample Receipt When printing line graphics the data path to the printer must be eight bits Seven bit serial protocols do not access the extended characters The extended characters require that the form be reverse fed Consequently printing line graphics on the receipt may be less than acceptable APA Graphics The printer is capable of all points addressable APA or horizontal graphics Generating a graphic image by hand is time consuming and tedious It is recommended that a graphic package be used to create a graphic image The following procedure will help with the setup Procedure for APA graphics 1 2 ne Generate the graphic image in the program of your choice APA graphics only support monochrome images Make sure the paper size chosen fits the printer 3 inches wide with 0 25 inch margins If the paper size cannot be set print a portion of the page Print the graphic to a file using a generic IBM graphic 9 pin driver The standard IBM resolutions are 240 x 216 dpi 120 x 72 dpi and 60 x 72 dpi The Model 9000 Printer supports all three resolutions For good resolution with reasonable speed use 120 x 72 dpi Print the graphic image to a file Edit the resulting file to remove any unwanted form control and insert the Model 9000 form control Make the resulting file available to your application so it can be sent to the printer when required
202. Y BRACKET 33C4 SQUARE CC FESD SMALL LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET 33CE SQUARE KM CAPITAL FESE SMALL RIGHT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET 33D1 SQUARE LN FESF SMALL NUMBER SIGN 33D2 SQUARE LOG FE6O SMALL AMPERSAND 33D5 SQUARE MIL FE61 SMALL ASTERISK 3400 4DB5 CJK UNIFIED IDEOGRAPH EXTENSION A FE62 SMALL PLUS SIGN 4E00 9FAS CJK UNIFIED IDEOGRAPH FE63 SMALL HYPHEN MINUS E78D E796 PRIVATE USE AREA FE64 SMALL LESS THAN SIGN E7C7 E7C8 PRIVATE USE AREA FE65 SMALL GREATER THAN SIGN E815 E864 PRIVATE USE AREA FE66 SMALL EQUALS SIGN F92C CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F92C FE68 SMALL REVERSE SOLIDUS F979 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F979 FE69 SMALL DOLLAR SIGN F995 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F995 FEGA SMALL PERCENT SIGN F9E7 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F9E7 FE6B SMALL COMMERCIAL AT F9F1 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F9F1 FFO1 FULLWIDTH EXCLAMATION MARK FAOG CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FAOG FFO2 FULLWIDTH QUOTATION MARK FAOD CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FAOD FFO3 FULLWIDTH NUMBER SIGN FAOE CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FAOE FFO4 FULLWIDTH DOLLAR SIGN FAOF CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FAOF FF05 FULLWIDTH PERCENT SIGN FATI CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA11 FFO6 FULLWIDTH AMPERSAND FA13 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA13 FFO7 FULLWIDTH APOSTROPHE FA14 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA14 FF08 FULLWIDTH LEFT PARENTHESIS FA18 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA18 FFO9 FULLWIDTH RIGHT PARENTHESIS FAIF CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA1F FFOA FULLWIDTH ASTERISK FA20 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA20 FF
203. a Swiss ll Table 17 Language Table ID s ESC T Select character code page ASCII ESC T lt np gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 54H lt np gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 84 gt lt np gt fl IPCL amp CP mus lt M2 gt lt M3 gt lt M4 gt EPOS ESC t lt n gt Description The ESC T lt np gt lt n gt command selects character code page lt np gt lt n gt The Model 9000 Printer supports many code pages The following code pages are supported Refer to Appendix A for a list of supported code page 100 10937 Rev F Page 87 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide page numbers lt np gt and lt n gt e g lt Np gt 256 lt n gt For example 1 256 181 437 For the IPCL command the page is specified in ASCII as a 4 byte field Note If the code page is not found in the internal translation the code page requested is translated into a code page file name and if a user defined file is found it will be used as the code page definition Note If UTF encoding is active code pages are not meaningful This command will have no affect on the character addressing O Note The code page field is a 16 bit field that is a function of the code Function Select character code page by name ASCII ESC C Codepage CPM lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 43H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 67 gt CodePage File name from 5 to 30 characters Description The ESC C command
204. a 36 Verifying Buet UI e EE 36 Verify the Communications Interface Card nn 36 USB Interface Without interface card 36 parallel Jet Loge veces eessen e a i B 36 serial Jet Li ia i p a ne p dp ew ed e e 36 Changing Interface Cards isa ia hecanieteneeehs cue naccemeneie ede none 36 Removing the Old Interface Card L 37 Installing Cable Se i ii e ia 37 LEDESCH POWER det 37 Connecting Communications Cables 38 b L kamal ee 38 POV AO E skid kok ed a e B a 38 USB si fn afna fa a ce nee ft fat fa g 38 ee EE 38 Verify the Firmware Configuration 2e2gzei Serie ht eget edd Zeg 39 stalling EE 39 Auto Paper Sensing ed cities poezija ties sa beni plate se e pa ea a Shapes REEE 39 Printer Drivers and Printer Controls a 40 Definitions for terms you will see in this goude 40 Wind ws DROI u eh iad Dee 40 Windows Device RTE 40 Windows Printer drivers si said b di ifa Mikea aa BGBl d Me 40 OPOS UnifiedPOSUPOS 2 iii i E A 41 Windows Printer RTE 42 When to use a windows printer driver kk 42 When not to use a windows printer driver nn nnnnn mnn 42 EIERE 42 When to use an OPOS driver iii See NEEN EES 43 When not to use an OPOS rivers i ia re a b EES 43 POSPrinter ActiveX Control POSPrinter OCX nn 44 When to use the POSPrinter OCGX nn 44 When not to use the POSPrinter OC EEN 44 Where to get more information EE 44 How to Operate the Model 9000 Printer ssnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnn 45 Power SWIG iss
205. a superset of UPC that encodes seven digits The printer prints an EAN 8 bar code with the seven digits sent to it and generates the check digit If fewer than seven digits are sent the remaining digits will be zeros EAN 8 may include an EAN 2 or EAN 5 Addenda Function EAN 8 ASCII ESC b lt 6 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 6 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 6 gt information NUL ll li EEN 1234 5670 234 S67 1234 5670 EAN 8 with an EAN 2 Addenda ESC b lt 6 gt 1234567 12 NUL EAN 8 with an EAN 5 Addenda It ESC b lt 6 gt 1234567 12345 NUL Figure 24 EAN 8 Examples EAN 14 EAN 14 It is a high density fixed length numeric continuous code which employs multiple element widths EAN 14 is a subset of Code 128 that encodes FNC1 and 14 digit pairs If fewer than 14 digits are sent leading zeros will be added to complete the code Function EAN 14 ASCII ESC b lt 12 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 12 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 12 gt information NUL 01 05001234567890 ESC b lt 12 gt 0500123456789 NUL Figure 25 EAN 14 Example Page 140 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ITF 14 ITF 14 is the GS1 formatted Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode It is intended to encode a Global Trade Item Number The ITF 14 will
206. aBar Expanded Bar Code Symbols can encode a GTIN with N1 9 02 Identification of logistic 00 Mandatory association with an SSCC Serial unit contents Shipping Container Code 02 Identification of logistic 37 Mandatory count of the contained trade items unit contents 10 Batch lot number O1or 02 Mandatory association with a Global Trade Item Number GTIN or with the identification of logistic unit contents 11 13 15 Dates 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the 17 identification of logistic unit contents 12 Due date 8020 and Mandatory association with the payment slip 415 reference number AI 8020 and the Global Location Number GLN of the invoicing partv 20 Product variant 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the identification of logistic unit contents 21 Serial number 01 Mandatory association with a GTIN of a single trade item a serial number cannot apply to a grouping of trade items 22 Secondary data health 01 Mandatory association with a GTIN industry 240 Additional product 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the identification identification of logistic unit contents 241 Customer part number 01 or 03 Mandatory association with a GTIN or with the identification of logistic unit contents 242 Made to Order 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a GTIN 14 with Variation Number with N1 Indicator Digit 9 represents a Custom Industrial 9 Supply Item 250 Secondary serial 01 Mandatory associ
207. ack Dot Auto Measure Enable Should the self test black dot Disable test automatically measure the dot size and repeat length and configure the printer to cut on the black dot Dot Offset Do not change if auto measure is on If not the relative offset to the black dot This is typically automatically set by the printer If you do not wish to cut at the black dot you should turn off all the auto measure features and set this value to cut the paper in the correct location OFS Cal Do not change This is used by the auto measure functions and this is set based on the ability of the top of form sensor to see the paper This is factory set Dot Width The top to bottom width of the black dot in dots In 203 per inch steps 3 8 would be 76 Dot Cover Cal Enable Should the sensor be Disable recalibrated on every cover close Dot Cover Measure Enable Should the black dot be Disable measured after every cover close Takes more paper Print Settings Paper type What type of paper is to be used as the standard paper Alt Paper type What type of paper should be used as the alternate paper Page 58 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Configuring various emulations Programming Codes The Model 9000 supports various printer emulations Each manufacture of this type of printer provides their own and in some cases other companies printer emulations There are
208. actual printing process The Ethernet adapter also supports a subset of the RFC 3805 Printer MIB This will also allow easier printer tatus tracking 100 10937 Rev F Page 267 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide File System File System Interface The Model 9000 provides a file system to support fonts configuration information user graphics and macros There are a number of commands that are provided to support the file system In general files need to be opened for read or write read from or written to and then closed There is a command that will delete a file as well as print or return a file directory TransAct Technologies provides a Windows based tool that will interact with the Model 9000 and provide a drag and drop interface to the file system The file system in the Model 9000 is partitioned into two sections one for internal system use by the printer and one for user information The system partition is referred to as partition 0 It is reserved for fonts configurations and code page files This partition cannot be deleted or completely erased The second partition is for all other information There is a command that will erase all the files in this partition The partition where files are placed is determined by the three character extension There is a third RAM file partition that may be used to saving temporary information The internal file system allows multiple files to be ope
209. age 60 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Programming Codes Control Codes Overview This Programmer s Guide is designed to help users of the Model 9000 printer develop applications Model 9000 Printers are specialized point of sale printers that have several features not normally found on general purpose printers Because of these special features Model 9000 Printers have unique control codes This programmer s guide documents the control codes that are unique to the Model 9000 Printer Nomenclature When describing control codes confusion often occurs as to whether the description is decimal hexadecimal or ASCII To minimize the problem this programmer s guide uses the following nomenclature when describing control code sequences Encloses a control character represents a single 8 bit value as defined in the standard ASCII tables The ASCII Code Table in Appendix B lists the control codes An example would be ESC which would represent a 1BH or 27 decimal lt gt Encloses an 8 bit value in decimal format The value is from zero to 255 An example is lt 2 gt which represents 02H or 2 decimal lt n gt Indicates a variable parameter The variable parameter lt n gt can have a value from zero to 255 The meaning of lt n gt is described and defined in the description of the command lt N gt lt No gt Indicates that there are two parameters mz and lt n gt where both can have v
210. age 70 Back space BS 08H lt 8 gt amp BS BS The BS command moves the print buffer one character width to the left The pointer position cannot be moved to the left of the left margin BS does not cause the buffer to be printed rather the following data is OR ed with the previous data Set horizontal tab stops ESC D lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt ni gt 0 1BH 44H lt n gt las lt n3 gt lt n gt OOH lt 27 gt lt 68 gt lt ni gt lt N2 gt lt N3 gt lt N gt RO none ESC D lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt N gt 0 The ESC D lt n gt lt n gt lt N3 gt fc 0 command sets tab stops at the character columns specified by lt n gt The end of the settings is specified by a lt 0 gt All previously set tabs will be cleared The restore default procedure other than to re specify the tabs Column sizes are in accordance with the current character pitch Setting tabs that are beyond the station width is possible A CR is inserted when the tab is used Printing begins at the home position The power up default is every eight spaces i e 9 17 25 and so on Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops ESC R 1BH 52H lt 27 gt lt 82 gt amp HV none The ESC R command resets horizontal and vertical tab stops to the power up configuration The power up horizontal default is every eight spaces i e 9 17 25 and so on The vertical default is every line Rev F 100 10937
211. al 1BH 79H 09H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt 9 gt Description This command forces the printer to print the current configuration To function correctly it must be issued with the printer in the proper emulation mode It is intended to be printed in the default Ithaca configuration but will print in any configuration Note This command must be preceded with an ESC y lt 8 gt Function Print Current Totals ASCII ESC v lt 15 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 79H OFH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt 15 gt Description This command forces the printer to print the current totals log Note This command must be preceded with an ESC y lt 8 gt Function Print Current Print Setup Values ASCII ESC y lt 20 gt or ESC lt 20 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 79H 14H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt 20 gt Description This command forces the printer to print the current setup values Note This command must be preceded with an ESC y lt 8 gt Function Enter Hex Dump Mode ASCII ESC y H Hexadecimal 1BH 79H 48H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt 72 gt Description This command forces the printer into Hex dump mode Once in this mode all data is printed as a hex equivalent The printer must be power cycled or a rese command sent to the printer to exit this mode processed and responded to They will not be displayed Note This command will process all UTF data into a 16bit Unicode value to be displayed Note This command allo
212. al spacing of 12 characters per inch It is possible to define a custom bitmap font Transact supports a bitmap font compiler that will convert a bitmap font picture file into a compressed bitmap file that may be loaded into the printer as a bitmap bft font file The input to the program is a text file in a predefined format consisting of a font description followed by character definitions consisting of the character ID and then the character definition The format is as follows Note lines preceded with characters are comments 11 by 24 font with a base line at 22 RSC GE F X is not used in Thermal Products 20 tan kw tafal u W 11 H 24 B 22 F 0 Qe A EPE N 0000 U 0000 NULL ZO ws gg E OE Pg Siete hie elas Zoe eae Releases DA IS A ZO P wel r eRe UE AE N 0001 U 0020 SPACE OF g in dara eae OT T a gute te ae DST MEERDERES ee 10 tata yates Soe a OG setae de g s G3 ku ae eta OM Roba its eiece QAL aA hee ates OB AN OO aa eet OF what eres Veto KEE kai A KREE KSE Jk smajna OB nee JI ebe ge O95 be Se gien Kuba ue Ms ea inns LOS Ab vated sy DA i De te de r a Die za ea DQ Lg Aah ber EG t ES g is tr RA MAL GA Ae JON KEE E gh SEN Page 246 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts MGR ee Se Rae D I RARE en E gt ele eege Se E EE L JURER ES l KE SE Ty EE ee O 1 Saegtiestag ege Z o eer audi SE See G PTP ign iat Sie ete VA jik anti DA
213. allel port Data T minG eu cic e olen Witte etn aie eee 293 Figure 80 Parallel Port ACK Timing Optons ENNEN 294 Figure 81 Serial Port Flow Control Using DIR 298 Figure 82 XON XOFF Serial Port Flow Control nanna 299 100 10937 Rev F Page 15 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Tables Table PrintSpecificationS i tissa f a onde hale a f a 22 Table 2 Standard Power Input Heourements nn nn nnnnn mnn 24 Table 3 Power Input Requirements with the 24 volt DC Power ss ssseeenennnnnnzennnznnzz 24 Table 4 Paper Low adjustment rna 27 Table 5 Standard USB Pin definitions AA 30 Table 6 CyberData Powered USB 24V to 1x8 Cables ooennnnnnnnnneeeeneeen ennenen eenen 30 Table 7 Powered USB Pin Geiger eege ee ENEE ENEE 30 Table 8 Parallel Interface Pin definitions sssssssseenennnnennnnzznnnnzzzznnnnnnnnznnnzzznnzzzza 31 Table 9 Serial Interface Pin definitions sssssssssennnnnnnnzannnnznnnnnznznnenznznmnzznzzntazza 32 Table 10 Cash Drawer Pin Assignment ss eennennnnnnzzznnnnnnzzznnnnnzzznnnnnnn 35 Table 11 Serial interface pin EE isse eat A ee Eege 38 Table 12 Parallel interface pin Out xi a a de eege dE EEN 38 Table 13 Operating Mode Blink Codes AAA 46 Table 14 Error Blink Codes en sistigenas kiel ei bas kie b si bb su b b ak EEN 47 Table 15 Character Pie ENEE 80 Table 16 Inter character Spacing WEE 81 Table 1 7 Language Table ID 8 iii nati kmieni a 87 Table 18 Euro Character Substitution Mat
214. alues from zero to 255 lt m gt lt m gt __Is an Ithaca Printer Control Language IPCL parameter consisting of two digits where mz and lt mz gt are ASCII characters from zero to nine The parameter is combined to form a value from zero to 99 If cms is included the parameter is combined to be from zero to 999 If two values are specified there must be two bytes added to the IPCL code That is if the command specifies mz lt mz gt and the desired value is five it must be specified as 05 x All other characters in control strings represent ASCII characters For example ESC 1 represents 1BH followed by 31H In many cases applications require that control sequences be specified in hexadecimal or decimal codes In most cases commands are specified in ASCII hexadecimal and decimal The ASCII Code Table in Appendix B page 318 lists ASCII hexadecimal and decimal equivalents 100 10937 Rev F Page 61 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Standard Emulation The standard control codes for the Model 9000 Printer are extensions and subsets of the PcOS IBM emulation provided on other Ithaca products In some cases an application designed for a Series 50 Printer with IBM code sets will function with a Model 9000 Printer IPCL Codes Ithaca Printer Control Language IPCL codes are part of PCOS and designed to control a printer without using control characters i e characters less than 20H Only the standard P
215. amp YX18 EPOS ESC y lt n gt Where n 17 Requests the printer to enter remote sleep mode 18 Requests the printer to exit remote sleep mode Description Inquiry ENQ commands are accepted and answered in remote power down mode The printer reactivates if the power button is pressed or a wake up command is received printer remembers it is in power down mode but does not reactivate the communications link The power button must be pushed to return the printer to full operation Note 2 This command is not available in STAR mode Note 1 If power is lost after the power down command is issued the ESC S Set Sleep Wait ASCII ESC S lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 7EH 53H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 83 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS None Where n Specifies the sleep timer in 10 second increments 1 10 seconds and so on 0 Disable sleep Description If no data is received after this period of time the printer will enter a sleep mode where less power is consumed Once in this mode the printer will resume normal operation after a slight delay when data is received Note 1 At low temperatures this delay will include a print head preheat delay while the print head is heated to a level that will allow normal operation Note 2 Sleep mode also removes the feed motor hold current It is possible that the first line of print may be slightly altered if the paper is moved while in sleep mode Page 284 Re
216. and date in a symbol that can be omni directionally scanned Function GS1 Databar Expanded ASCII ESC b lt 23 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 23 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 23 gt information NUL LUMI 01 12345678901234 11 100909 30 123456 ESC b lt 23 gt 01 12345678901 234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL Figure 36 GS1 Databar Expanded Example as defined by the GS 1 specification and comply with the EAN UCC format The GS 1 ISO IEC 24724 standard specifies these formats Note It is possible to define an RSS Expanded barcode that will not fit in the print zone of the Model 9000 printer If this occurs the printer will attempt to scale the barcode to fit If the scaling fails the barcode may be unreadable Note The data for expanded RSS barcodes must be formatted using Al fields GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked RSS Expanded Stacked GS 1 DataBar Expanded Stacked encodes the EAN UCC item identification plus supplementary element strings such as weight and date ina stacked symbol that can be omni directionally scanned The ratios between the top and bottom of this symbol are fixed and are not adjustable There is also a separator between the barcodes that has a specific relationship to the top and bottom bars This barcode must be printed within a controlled aspect ratio GS1 Databar Stacked sym
217. and initializes the universal graphic buffer structure and redirects the following data to the universal graphic buffer It uses the lt Name gt field as a reference If the name already exists in the flash user store the command is ignored The command must be followed by the End name universal graphic record command with the same name If the data that follows is larger than the universal graphic buffer about 16K the universal graphic definition is terminated without saving any data amp UG lt Name gt amp End named universal graphic record IPCL amp UG lt Name gt amp Description The amp UG lt Name gt amp command ends the universal graphic record operation and saves the universal graphic to flash It uses the lt Name gt field to verify the command end and must match the Begin named universal graphic record command If the name already exists in the flash user store or the universal graphic memory is exceeded the command is invalid and the lt Name gt field prints 100 10937 Rev F Page 237 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide amp UR lt Name gt amp Run universal graphic data from user store IPCL Description amp UR lt Name gt amp The amp UR lt Name gt amp command loads the referenced universal graphic into the universal graphic buffer The universal graphic buffer is then inserted into the data stream If the named item does not exist or is not a uni
218. any you are using What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred How you tried to solve the problem Return Materials Authorization and Return Policies If the technical support person determines that the printer should be serviced at our facility and you want to return the printer for repair we will issue you the Returned Materials Authorization RMA number that is required before returning the printer Repairs are warranted for 90 days from the date of repair or for the balance of the original warranty period whichever is greater Please prepare the printer being returned for repair as follows Pack the printer to be returned in the original packing material Packing material may be purchased from TransAct s Ithaca Facility Do not return any accessories unless asked to do so by a support technician Write the RMA number clearly on the outside of the box Service Programs TransAct Technologies Incorporated has a full service organization to meet your printer service and repair requirements If your printer needs service please contact your Page 18 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes service provider first If any problems still persist you can directly contact the Ithaca facility s Technical Support Department at 607 257 8901 or 877 7ithaca for a return authorization International customers should contact your distributor for services TransAct offers the following service p
219. ar pattern The encoder for Code16K automatically selects the proper encoding method to produce the most compact barcode If the bar code has four or more consecutive numbers the numbers are encoded in number pairing mode This means that two numbers are encoded into one character width making the size of the bar code smaller The Code 16K bar code has three forms of error detection Parity is checked for each character start and stop characters are used to identify each row and two checksum characters are always appended to the end of the bar code Function Code 16K ASCII ESC b lt 17 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 17 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 17 gt information NUL Ur MA ESC b lt 17 gt 12345678901 234 NUL Figure 40 Code 16K Example O Note There is no user control of the number of rows or columns Note The scale may be set from 2 to 6 Note GS 1 encoding may be activated for both Code16 There is an FNC1 indicator in the barcode that indicated that GS1 is active If GS 1 formatting is used it s up to the user to recognize that GS1 is active and decode the barcode as GS1 data Page 150 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes PDF 417 Truncated PDF417 and Micro PDF 417 PDF 417 Truncated PDF417 and Micro PDF 417 are a two dimensional barcode that will encode the full ASCII character set As it encodes the full set including control characters t
220. aracters 0 Disables the characters IPCL none Description The ESC gt lt n gt command enables or disables the user defined characters The internal character set is printed Character Attributes ESC c Select color ASCII ESC c lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 63H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 99 gt lt n gt IPCL amp CL lt m gt EPOS none Description The ESC c lt n gt command selects the print color and should match the color of the paper installed Where lt n gt 0 Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Blue SO Begin one line double wide print ASCII SO Hexadecimal OEH Page 92 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Decimal IPCL EPOS Description DC4 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC _ ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL IPCL EPOS Description ESC W ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 100 10937 lt 14 gt amp MW none The SO command causes subsequent characters to be printed at twice the currently selected character width For example ten cpi becomes five cpi 17 cpi becomes 8 5 cpi etc The SO command remains in effect until A valid line terminator is received CR LF or ESC J lt n gt fine line feed The command is canceled or the maximum number of characters per line is reached and the printer performs an auto print Cancel one line double wide print DC4 14H lt 20 gt am
221. ast adida NA a E 69 Vertical Motion Control l iii ei ii i hi abate cadehauatis obeie AE atauashelaweeahaiasthonts 72 Feed t Black Det eege eren degen een Ad eege ea EAR EREEREER AEREE EESE 77 Black Der alibratiorii i a ei ii feta ns it en ite do oan Ost artal dea ate 78 Gharacter EE 79 Character Eont cc iii Gara DOB B ti de b ta rt ir a ea at 82 Character Sets and Code Pages isa kkritika ina i bt Et ka nts 84 Codepage description files 84 Double Byte and Multi Bvte Code Page Description Files 86 Code page selection E 86 Print Gonirol Characters si iii ua a a 91 User Defined characters ia i a Raee ee Sebel Ae E EE 91 Gharacier ug le 92 Page MOLLA ai 98 How to use page Mode tales cei ee le eet ei eM a Sacre Mere ieee 98 Page DER IMN 2 0 nse Sin ee Ce ia eo ean as dep ea ante hap eae nate eer 98 Auto cutter and page mode i istat fk ita inti d tests ata 99 Mechanism commands in page mode 99 Stopping page mode definition eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteesesaaaeeeeeeees 99 Printing the page iii ik B a f wa 99 Page mode O MANU Si tax idi ata Ee ta A 99 Graphie Le 108 Standard APA Gra nics E 108 Extended AP Ee Ile 109 Horizontal Graphics Raster Color Gray Graphics nn 112 Graphics Compression i sa agdariecsecradeieas ace eelangent 114 Simple Raster Ee 115 Bitmap Graphics re e E 116 User Store Graphic Save EE 119 Defining Macros EEN 119 User Store Commands sssi aree pe e i e b e 121 SEM oo E 126 Programming Considerations
222. at The host sends an inquire to the printer asking for the form The printer receives sensor status the request and preprocesses it The printer responds with an ACK lt id gt or NAK lt id gt indicating the form sensor The host receives the response and status decodes it Flow Chart 3 Inquire Flow 100 10937 Rev F Page 303 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide The host sends an ENQ lt id gt form sensor status request to the printer The printer responds with an ACK lt id gt indicating that the request was identified status true Inquire commands affect the printer s performance Communication is a high priority for the printer Inquire commands take processing time away from the print tasks It is possible to ask for so much status that the printer slows In serial mode it is important that the response to an inquiry is received by the host before another command is issued When an inquiry is received by the printer it is buffered in a high speed processing queue When the printer has time it empties the queue and processes the inquiries The printer responds to the command as soon as the second byte of the command is taken from the high speed buffer If the host is looking for a form to be inserted it should not send status requests as fast as it can The host will receive a response to all of them If the host did not wait for a response to each there would be unnecessary responses
223. ation with a GTIN a secondary number serial number cannot apply to a grouping of trade items 251 Reference to source 01 Mandatory association with GTIN of the trade item entity 254 Extension component 414 Mandatory association with Al 414 Only GS1 of a GLN 128 GS1 DataBar Expanded symbologies and EPC RFID tags are valid This is used with GLN and not GTIN 30 Variable count 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a variable measure GTIN e g a GTIN 14 starting with the digit 9 or the identification of variable measure content of a logistic unit 3nnn Trade measures that 01 Mandatory association with a variable measure cannot be summed GTIN e g a GTIN 14 starting with the digit 9 3nnn2 Trade measures that 01 or 02 Mandatory association with a variable measure can be summed GTIN e g a GTIN 14 starting with the digit 9 or the identification of variable measure content of a logistic unit 3nnng Logistic measures 00 or 01 Mandatory association with an SSCC or a variable measure GTIN e g a GTIN 14 starting with the digit 9 837n Kilograms per square 01 Mandatorv association with a GTIN metre 87 Count of units 02 Mandatorv association with the identification of 100 10937 Rev F Page 177 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide contained logistic unit contents 390n Amount payable 8020 and Mandatory association with the payment slip single
224. ault but will slow the print process and print the barcode anyway In general barcodes with a single dot wide element are unreadable There are several versions or formats of RSS bar codes and each has specific options and requirements 100 10937 Rev F Page 143 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide GS1 Databar 14 GS1 Databar Omni directional RSS 14 GS 1 DataBar Omni directional encodes the full 14 digit EAN UCC item identification in a symbol that can be omni directionally read For example Figure 30 RSS 14 symbol representing 01 20012345678909 Where the leading 01 is the implied application identifier and is not encoded in the symbol The last digit 9 is not directly encoded in the symbol but is a calculated mod 10 check digit The 01 and the last digit are not sent as part of the command so the data field would therefore be 2001234567890 Function GS1 Databar 14 ASCII ESC b lt 18 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 18 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 18 gt information NUL f ESC b lt 18 gt 1234567890123 NUL 01 12345678901231 Figure 31 GS1 Databar 14 Example Note Note that the data to be encoded does not include the GS1 format 01 as it is implied You only need to send the 13 digit item number The check digit will be generated by the printer RSS 14 is capable of
225. be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used This command differs from the ESC j command in that all characters are centered on the fixed cell size It the character is too big for the cell it may overlap the previous and next character The character size is not adjusted to fit the cell If d 0 variable spacing is selected NOTE If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing the characters will overlap Variable spacing is recommended Function Set Character spacing in points with adjustment All ASCII ESC J lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 4AH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 74 gt Range d 0 4 72 The ESC J command will set the character spacing in points where one point is defined as 1 72 of an inch This command will force mono space printing It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used This command differs from the ESC command in that if the character is too large for the cell the cell will be expanded in multiples of lt d gt until the character fits If d O variable spacing is selected However note that
226. bols are typically printed without HRI To allow HRI to be printed if required the Stacked HRI may be enabled with a special configuration command Function GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked ASCII ESC b lt 24 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 24 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 24 gt information NUL RI HHN Esc o lt 24 gt IW IE MILI 0171234567890123411171009091301123456JNUL Figure 37 GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Example 100 10937 Rev F Page 147 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide EAN 128 GS1 128 The GS1 128 Bar Code has been designed through joint co operation between GS1 and Automatic Identification Manufacturers Inc AIM The GS1 128 barcode is a subset of the more general Code 128 barcode By agreement between AIM Inc and GS1 use of the Function 1 Symbol Character FNC1 in Code 128 Symbols in the first symbol character position following the Start Character has been reserved exclusively for the GS1 System The Model 9000 printer provides a GS 1 coded input to the barcode and encodes all the EAN 128 requirements into the data Function GS1 128 ASCII ESC b lt 11 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 11 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 11 gt information NUL ESC b lt 11 gt 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL UA MM 01 12345678901234 11 100909 30 123456
227. by the subsequent data Rev F Page 199 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide CAN ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC q ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Response Page 200 Clear print buffer CAN 18H lt 24 gt amp RP CAN The CAN command clears the print buffer and any unprinted information in the printer received before it If the input buffer is not being processed because the printer is out of paper or a form is not inserted the CAN command will not be processed until after the error is cleared The CAN command does not restore default conditions it only clears the print buffer Query marker ESC q lt n gt 1BH 71H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 113 gt lt n gt none none The ESC q lt n gt command returns a status to the host when it is processed SOH lt n gt The ESC q lt n gt command may be placed in the print data and when processed by the printer will return a progress status marker The value of lt n gt can be any 8 bit value Itis returned to the host unaltered The intent is for it to be a sequence number The command can be used to track the print progress of the printer or verify that data has been printed Note The ESC q lt n gt command is a line terminator that causes the printer to print all previous data If a normal line terminator like a CR is not supplied right justify and auto center do not function c
228. cOS emulation supports IPCL In rare cases an IPCL code will interfere with the text that is to be printed The IPCL translator can be disabled with an ESC y lt 4 gt command EPOS Emulation ESC POS is referred to here as EPOS The Model 9000 Printer supports two Epson emulations One emulation is for the TM T88 and the other is an enhanced EPOS emulation that may help the Model 9000 replace other printers Specific EPSON compatibility features such as its Automated Status Back ASB feature are available as an option from TransAct Technologies Command codes pertaining to these features are patented by Epson and require added cost licensed firmware It is intended that the standard Ithaca PcOS emulation be used for new applications Not all features of Model 9000 Printers are supported by EPOS specifically the ability to print color horizontal graphics Axiohm The printer contains an Axiohm A793 emulation that will allow the printer to replace an Axiohm thermal print in most applications Note that the Model 9000 does not support the printer configuration commands provided in the A793 Printer The Model 9000 should be configured through the keypad or with the TransAct configuration program Ithaca Microline Emulation The Model 9000 printer supports several Microline emulations These emulations allow the Model 9000 Printer to replace some older Ithaca M50 printers with Microline commands This emulation is not doc
229. ccent 005c backslash 00ce Latin capital letter i with circumflex accent 005d right square bracket D Latin capital letter i with diaeresis 005e circumflex accent 00d0 Latin capital letter eth DOT underline 00d1 Latin capital letter n with tilde 0060 grave accent 00d2 Latin capital letter o with grave accent 0061 Latin small letter a 00d3 Latin capital letter o with acute accent 0062 Latin small letter b 00d4 Latin capital letter o with circumflex accent 0063 Latin small letter c 00d5 Latin capital letter o with tilde 0064 Latin small letter d 00d6 Latin capital letter o with diaeresis 0065 Latin small letter e 00d7 multiplication sign 0066 Latin small letter f 00d8 Latin capital letter o with oblique stroke 0067 Latin small letter g 00d9 Latin capital letter u with grave accent 0068 Latin small letter h 00da Latin capital letter u with acute accent 0069 Latin small letter i 00db Latin capital letter u with circumflex accent 006a Latin small letter j 00dc Latin capital letter u with diaeresis 006b Latin small letter k 00dd Latin capital letter y with acute accent 006c Latin small letter 00de Latin capital letter thorn 006d Latin small letter m OOdf Latin small letter sharp s 006e Latin small letter n 00e0 Latin small letter a with grave accent 006f Latin small letter o 00e1 Latin small letter a with acute accent 100 10937 Rev F Page 321 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide
230. character cache is empty The first ticket will require that all characters to be printed be generated from the vector data This will typically make the first ticket slightly slower than subsequent tickets It is also possible to define a user defined font with different metrics that will cause the cache to be flushed when any of the user characters are being accessed If this should occur the user defined font should be changed to match the other fonts in the printer Stacked or Linked fonts The Model 9000 also uses a font stacking technology where fonts are linked together This means that as each character is looked up the first font in the stack containing the character is then printed For example if a customer would like to replace several standard characters with custom characters a user defined font can be provided that would if first in the link replace the characters n the standard font It may also be desirable to stack fonts to provide a precedent for how individual characters are looked up For example e An application may wish to alter the appearance of several characters for security e It might be necessary to define a group of special symbols for a specific application 100 10937 Rev F Page 245 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide e It might be necessary to supplement a font with special characters like OCR characters To provide this flexibility the Model 9000 has the ability to link up to
231. code 32 32 10 Printed below the bar code 48 48 11 Printed above and below the bar code Vertical print mode Page mode mav work better 0 00 Bar code printed in horizontal direction default 64 64 100 Bar code printed in vertical direction Note 2 HRI is not available in vertical print mode You may print normal barcodes in page mode which will provide for HRI as well as significantly longer barcodes Note 1 The ESC EM J lt n gt command only affects bar code printing Page 196 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Identifying Barcode Processing Errors Barcodes that are not entered correctly in most cases will not print It can be difficult at times to identify why To help identify the problem there is a command that will return the last barcode error in the form of a 16 bit error ID ASCII ENQ lt 37 gt Hexadecimal 5 25H Decimal 5 37 Will return ACK lt 37 gt lt 42 gt lt Error7 gt lt Errorys 3 gt Or 05H 25H 2AH Error a gt lt Erroris g gt Where the error codes are as follows Error Type ErrorID Description Warnings 1 Invalid option default used 2 Invalid barcode Command 3 Unable to process the barcode command General Errors 10 Too much barcode data 11 Not enough barcode data 12 Too much Addenda data 13 Invalid bar code data 14 Invalid check digit 15 Invalid option 17 Barcode encoding
232. command prints lt n gt 256 lt n gt bytes of double density graphics 120 dpi at half speed allowing full and half dots to be printed Page 108 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC Y Print full speed double density graphics 120h x 72v dpi ASCII ESC Y lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 59H lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 89 gt lt ni gt lt N2 gt IPCL none Description The ESC Y lt n gt lt n gt command prints lt n gt 256 lt n gt bytes of double density graphics 120 dpi at full speed with no consecutive dots The mode is generally used to print 120h by 144v dpi resolutions in two passes ESC Z Print quad density graphics 240h x 72v dpi ASCII ESC Z lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5AH lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 90 gt lt ni gt lt Ne gt IPCL none Description The ESC Z ans lt n gt command prints lt n gt 256 lt n gt bytes of quad density graphics 240 dpi at half soeed with no consecutive dots The mode is generally used to print 240h by 144v dpi resolutions in two passes Extended APA Graphics ESC Print graphics in mode lt m gt 60h 120h 240h x 72v dpi ASCII ESC lt m gt is an Hexadecimal 1BH 2AH lt m gt lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 42 gt lt M gt sis lt N2 gt IPCL none Description The ESC lt m gt lt n gt lt n2 gt command selects one of three grap
233. cters above 255 You must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF 16LE UTF 16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255 however UFT32 does not require Surrogates to address character values greater than 65535 UTF 32LE uses the little endian method of sending the four bytes This method sends the low byte first and then the higher bytes Note UTF32 support is optional in the Model 9000 Note Once selected all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding even for non print commands Note When UTF32 firmware is installed all print information in the printer will be stored as a 32 bit value This includes graphics As this will make stored graphics and logos much larger UTF32 is supported as an optional firmware load Function Initiate Unicode UTF 16BE Encoding All ASCII ESC H Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 48H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 72 gt Description The ESC H command will put the printer into UTF 16BE character encoding mode of operation If you wish to access characters above 255 you must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF 16BE UTF 16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255 sending two 8 bit bytes that form a 16 bit address to access the desired character UTF 16BE uses the big endian method of sending the two bytes This method sends the high byte first and then the low byte Note Once selected all information sent to the printer must then use this
234. d Characters are then positioned in the cell based on this origin All characters in the font are then based on the same rules The white space between lines in defined to be above the character Widih bytes Character Origin and Compositon Point Escapement Figure 72 Scalable font cell indexes The information available at print time is listed above The complete cell is not provided only the escapement black width and depth and the x and v offsets to the origin are available The printer cannot arbitrarily shorten the cell height that was defined by the font designer even though the provided character may fit in a smaller space Using these rules may result in characters that at first appear too small with excessive white space between lines however this is how the font was designed The printer must allow the minimum line spacing based on the point selection and not on the actual character height of any given characters Second guessing the font designer can have very bad results when character are encountered that use the full cell Asian fonts require slightly different rules for character placement and are not as one would expect The Asian ideographs are positioned on center of mass rather than ona baseline The Latin data in Asian typefaces must be built on the same rules As a result when Latin characters are scaled the expected baselines do not line up Asian fonts are Page 242 Rev F 100 10937
235. d EPOS printers there are two ways of selecting a character set One way substitute s international characters in the upper 128 characters of a standard character set The substitution technique supports a few different countries However as more and more countries were added too many characters were being replaced and it became a problem for the application to match the characters displayed and printed To solve this problem a second method of selecting a character set was developed code pages The printer and display use the same code page and the application displays and prints the same characters IBM and EPOS defined new commands to select code pages and left the old commands in effect The Model 9000 Printer supports international character sets as well as code pages To allow the most flexibility for the application programmer both methods are extended in the Model 9000 Printer The Model 9000 Printer allows the IBM code page selection command to choose character sets as well as normal IBM code pages The EPOS character set select command has been extended to allow additional character sets over and above the 11 defined by EPOS The EPOS code page select command has not been extended because there is no EPOS definition beyond the first six ID s b Epson provides limited code page support through ID to code page translation Only six translations are defined Page 86 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Pr
236. d on 0 degrees regardless of the current orientation setting This includes if the command is sent before the start page mode command after the start page mode command or as a sub page Note The maximum printable area in the x direction is 576 203 or 3 15 inches Note The maximum printable area in the y direction is 5999 203 or 29 inches Note The printed page length will only include what actually has print data Page 104 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Set Print Area Auto Size Enhanced ASCII ESC SUB Z lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 5AH lt n gt Decimal lt 2 gt lt 26 gt lt 90 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS None Description This command Sets page auto size mode This command must be sent to the printer before page mode is started It modifies the way page mode works only printing the Y direction of the page that is actually used This allows a large page to be defined but only what is actually used to be printed This is useful when the page data is dynamically generated and the page length is not known until all the data is generated Where n 1 to set auto page size and n 0 to print the page length as defined Function Set Page Mode Entry Position ASCII ESC SUB A lt X_ gt lt Xy gt lt Y_ gt lt Yu gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 41H lt X gt lt Xy gt lt Y gt lt Yy gt Decimal lt 2 gt lt 26 gt lt 65 gt lt X gt lt Xy gt sc Wu Wu IPCL amp PY lt XXXX gt
237. d sensor disabled On 04H lt 4 gt Paper roll end sensor enabled 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll end sensor disabled On 08H lt 8 gt Paper roll end sensor enabled 4 7 Undefined Table 27 Paper Sensor out of paper Commands ESC lt Enable print suppress and data pass through ASCII ESC lt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 3CH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 60 gt lt n gt IPCL amp PT lt n gt EPOS ESC lt n gt Description The ESC lt lt n gt command provides print suppress and data pass through features Where Bit 0 Printer select Bit 1 Pass through On Bits 2 7 Undefined If Bit O is clear the printer stops processing data If Bit 1 is set the data is passed through the printer and sent out on the serial port Note 1 The pass through command is preprocessed It is processed as soon as it is received The printer may continue to print while previously received data is processed The printer must be on line and ready to activate the command Note 2 Pass through should only be used with serial printers If the printer is configured for parallel operation the data is still pass through on the IEEE 1284 port In most cases this is not useful Note 3 When Ithaca Series 50 Printer compatibility is being used these commands do not function Series 50 Printer pass through must be used Note 4 Multi drop is not operational during suppress and pass through If a multi drop address is present in the
238. d size and fixed character spacing these bitmap fonts are limited to specific magnification factors from 2 8X and required scaling and smoothing at larger font sizes Moreover such scaling and smoothing operations were often unsuitable for complex fonts such as Asian characters where changes to pixel layout actually risk changing character meanings To take full advantage of scalable fonts the Model 9000 supports additional commands and features including Character size selection by points Character pitch selection by points Variable character spacing if desired Custom fonts Unicode support for international language support Enhanced code page support for ASCII based applications Character Generation The font technology in the Model 9000 printer uses standard outline fonts sometimes referred to as TrueType fonts or stroke fonts Both technologies are scalable however each has unique advantages eco Outline characters Outline characters use points along the edge of the character to describe the character The character generator defines the edge and then fills in the enclosed space to define the character This type of character generation produces very well formed characters and produces the best looking characters However it requires more storage than stroke fonts and is best for non Asian fonts Stroke based characters With stroke based characters the points stored are along the center line Less than half t
239. d the Model 9000 will replace the with a check digit for that field calculated as defined in the GS1 general specification 0x20 Use to delineate Al fields rather than Default The default value for most barcodes is 0x19 which provides variation of the Al 01 length and optional automatic check digit generation If you require strict compliance with the GS1 general specification set the GS1 Mode to 0x01 f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command See page 257 f f 66H 102D HRI Format f 0 UPC and EAN check digits under the barcode f 1 Outside the barcode f H 48H 72D Space above and below the barcode between the barcode and any HRI if active This is in dots Typically 2 dots although some 2D barcodes require more If HRI is inactive it is up to the user to enforce any extra quite zone between the barcode and any user data f C 43H 67D Composite Secondary Mode f O Auto 1 CC A 2 CC B or 3 CC 3 Page 182 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide f O 4FH 79D sets a left offset to be added to the barcode Barcode Control Summery Chart Programming Codes Barcode Type lt b gt Format Parameter lt f gt Barcode G Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 39 Code 128 UPC A UPC E E
240. dd 155 Testing Data Matrix barcodes ANEN 155 Maxi OGG EE 156 Maxicode edu 157 MaxiCode Mode 2 and 3 Structured Carrier Message 157 A fa a A 159 QRCode Commands EE 160 Micro ORG OCG i a a aa aa a a 161 Micro QRCode Commands i a AR AERdEE 161 PI G A EE EE 162 A iec Gommanas ii e EE Ee 163 IS A EE 164 COMpOsiiesBalCOdeS cairn n a G g a eet 165 Gomposit data is g inu ip o ke e waetinaet 166 UPE A COmpOsite EE ee 166 UPC E COMpOSiles woe a oo Geeta ea whence da mana ca wanes ee 167 EANX COMPOSING i ini setet G ta we fa so 167 EAN GS bel ee 168 GS 1 Databar 14 Compoette kee 168 GS 1 Databar Truncated Composite Au 169 GS1 Databar Limited Composite 2 nn 169 GS 1 Databar Expanded Composite 170 GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Composite nn 170 GS1 Databar Stacked Omni Composite nn 171 GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Composite 22 en 171 GO We EE 172 100 10937 Rev F Page 9 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide GS 1 AGSTININONS a a ee oie eee ae oe eno ite 173 Mandatory Al ASSO IgtiOn Si i at ache ceeded rte ate eather ore 177 ele BT Ee 179 GS 1 Al fields with a Check Digit 180 Controlling Barcodes E 181 Unified CommandS a ecciet sae eae cat eet es a 181 Barcode Control Summerv Chart nn nr nn 183 PDEA 7 Print le iii et e eeadementt tae 184 Data Matrix Print OPLIONS gege Bid a A Hh A a N b aa 186 G de 49 Print OPtlONS ege Seege beet 187 Code 16K Print Options e a
241. de UTF 8 encoding MBCS ESC M 1BH 2BH 4DH none 264 Initiate Unicode UTF 8 Text only encoding ESC T 1BH 2BH 54H none 265 MBCS Initiate normal 8 bit ASCII character ESC A 1BH 2BH 41H none 265 encoding File System Commands Open File ESC RS O lt Mod gt 1BH 1EH 4FH none 269 FileName lt 0 gt Return Free Space for Open File ESC RS S 1BH 1EH 53H none 270 Return Free Space for Partition ESC RS s 1BH 1EH 73H none 270 Return Last File Command Status ESC RS 1BH 1EH 3FH none 272 Close File ESC RS C 1BH 1EH 43H none 270 Close All Files ESC RS K 1BH 1EH 4BH none 270 Open File ESC RS O 1BH 1EH 4FH none 269 FileName lt 0 gt Set Clear File Attributes ESC RS A lt Atb gt 1BH 1EH 41H none 271 FileName lt 0 gt Write File Data ESC RS W A 1BH 1EH 57H none 273 lt Ly gt lt data gt IP UTF32 requires special firmware See page 255 for more information 100 10937 Rev F Page 67 Programming Codes Description Model 9000 Programmer s Guide IPCL equivalent code Read File Data ESC RS R lt Li gt 1BH 1EH 52H none 273 lt Ly gt File Directory File ESC RS 1BH 1EH 49H none 273 Delete all Files in partition ESC RS E lt p gt 1BH 1EH 45H none 273 De fragment File system ESC RS F 1BH 1EH 46H none 274 Miscellaneous Commands Disable paper out sensor ESC 8 1BH
242. dentification amp other Al amp other Al element element strings strings Maximum 16 16 numeric 16 16 numeric 16 74 numeric 74 numeric Data Capacity numeric fixed numeric fixed numeric 41 alpha 41 alpha fixed fixed fixed Character Set 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 ASCII See ASCII See Note Note Number of 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 11 rows HRI Available Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No Note The printer will encode the Value and insert latch sequences based on the ASCII Input Refer to the ISO IEC 24724 specification for more information Table 20 RSS Characteristics Summary 25 Itis possible for the Model 9000 to accept rather than to delaminate Al fields however if that is done the characters may not be used in the data Page 172 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Note RSS 14 barcodes are sometimes printed in a composite form The Model 9000 does not support the composite RSS EAN13 barcode GS 1 Al definitions Note This is not a complete list and is not intended to replace the GS1 General Specification Al Data Content Format FNC1 Data Title See Notes See Note Note 00 SSCC Serial Shipping Container Code n2 n18 SSCC 01 Global Trade Item Number GTIN n2 n14 GTIN 02 GTIN of Contained Trade Items n2 n14 CONTENT 10 Batch or Lot Number
243. ding the white space between lines The horizontal character width is defined by the font Normally only the character height would be specified and the width would be defined by the font and that s how these commands work if the width is defined as zero If the width is defined as zero this is used as a flag to the printer to generate characters as defined by the font and use the character width returned by the font In effect the vertical point size passed to the font rendering engine is the same as the horizontal value The added effect of the width being passed as zero is that any enforced horizontal spacing is disables IE the effect of the ESC I ESC i ESC J and ESC j commands are disabled If the width is not zero the ESC I ESC i ESC J and ESC j remain in effect and only the resulting character size is changed the horizontal spacing is not changed The legacy ESC lt n gt select the print mode effectively issues a set minimum character height and width command followed by a set character spacing command without effecting the pseudo fixed spacing flag The pseudo fixed spacing flag is a further complication required for dealing with fonts that are not truly fixed pitch In some cases a fixed pitch font will have more that one character size depending on what the character is used for This generally only affects Asian fonts where the ideograms are generally twice as wide as Latin characters In fixed spaci
244. dium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command Page 190 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Aztec Print Options Function Aztec code control ASCII ESC EM a lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 61H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 97 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way Aztec barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f W 57H 87D Set the minimum element width v 1 10 6 is the default and height A width of 1 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically reduce the width until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f M 4DH 77D QRCode Matrix Size 1 36 are accepted 0 Auto Size 1 4 are Compact and 5 36 are normal f E 45H 69D QRCode Error Correction 1 4 are accepted 0 default to level 2 f H 48H 72D Blank Space between the barcode and the following data Default 8 f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode See General description above If in GS1 mode the symbol start with an FNC1 and that the compression is slightly altered GS1 data formatting and compaction are active and the input must follow the GS1 rules f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46
245. dpi print pass Full speed double density mode makes two passes with a half dot offset Full speed double density mode is half the speed of single density mode but it prints at 120 dpi Half speed double density mode is half the speed of full speed double density however the print quality is enhanced Character Graphics Character graphics is the term for joining individual characters together to produce a mosaic of characters that form a graphic image The simplest method uses an or any other character to form an image For example ITHACA might be formed as follows kk kKK kud ki kk ki kud i i i KkKKKK KKK i Xikix kud i i i kud kk kud kud kud kk i Figure 68 Example of Character Graphics The extended character set of the printer supports line graphic characters that can be combined to form windows and other shapes For the shapes to join from line to line the spacing must be set properiv All characters are in a nine dot high character cell The dots are 1 60 inch apart Therefore the line spacing should be 10 60 or 1 6 inch The set fine line space command can be used to set the line spacing If possible the spacing should be reduced slightly to overlap the rows which prevents any white spacing from appearing between the lines The following example illustrates the use of extended character graphics Page 228 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts
246. dth value is generally not optimal for 2D barcodes so each 2D barcode will use its own parameter General Settings f W 57H 87D Minimum bar width or scale Minimum bar width or Scale f J 4AH 74D Justification 0 Left 1 Center 3 Right 100 10937 Rev F Page 181 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide f V 56H 86D Vertical Height Height value 4 dots at 203 Dots per inch f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode The GS1 Mode is configurable as to how closely the GS1 specification is followed This allows future changes in GS1 compaction to be processed without error In some cases this parameter will activate Enhanced features The values for GS1 Mode are bit values and are as follows 0x01 GS1 Al and Compaction Active If this bit is not set no GS 1 Al processing is performed The input data is not scanned nor are the Al fields preprocessed or compressed Not setting this option may produce invalid GS1 barcodes 0x02 Al field lengths are not strictly enforced 0x04 No GS1 faults are generated All Al fields and compaction that can be processed will be but unknown fields or fields in error will not stop the barcode generation Setting this may produce invalid barcodes 0x08 Al 01 data field may be passed 12 13 or 14 bytes 12 and 13 byte fields will be expanded to 14 with leading zeros 0x10 The check digit in Al fields 00 01 02 253 402 410 trough 415 8003 and 8018 may be replaced with a an
247. e Page 98 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes The ESC u command wet the maximum page dimensions Note that these dimensions are always based on 0 degree rotation Enter text and or graphics as required Auto cutter and page mode You may embed an auto cutter command with in a page definition The auto cut command may be placed anywhere in the page definition however it will be processed after the page is printed To prevent the cut from occurring in the page it will be preceded with a feed that will place the end of the page about 0 125 inches above the auto cut position Mechanism commands in page mode In general mechanism commands received during page mode will be processed if the result will not affect the printed result Stopping page mode definition The following operations will stop a page mode definition 1 ESC Printer initialize command 2 Real time reset request ENQ lt 10 gt 3 Turning the printer off Printing the page The FF command starts the printing process Printing starts at the current paper position The complete page definition is printed excluding any blank information at the bottom of the page If the FF command is used to print the page the memory used to store the page image is not maintained and is released to be used by other functions Page mode commands Function Select page mode ASCII ESC t lt x gt or ESC SUB t Hexadecimal 1BH 74H lt x gt
248. e diagnostics perform the following tasks Cold Power On Basic System Integrity Vector Integrity RAM Test Flash Boot Loader Integrity Flash Firmware Integrity NOTE If the firmware is corrupted the printer will remain in boot load Start Normal Firmware OOT AO 100 10937 Rev F Page 51 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Verify Configuration Integrity Interface Card Configuration User store Integrity Start Kernel Verify Multitasking Start Tasks 00 SI o Once the kernel is running the following tests must pass to allow operation However if anv test fails except the knife home test the remaining tests will generate recoverable faults and normal operation will start as soon as the fault is cleared These tests are also run when operation is resumed from OFF 11 Cover Closed Check 12 Knife Home if installed 13 Paper Present 14 Place Printer On line Start Normal Operation The first phase of testing consists of step 1 5 and determines that the boot loader is accurate and the printer firmware is correct Tests 1 through 4 produce non recoverable errors if thev fail in which case the power must be removed from the printer and the printer returned for service If the boot loader is intact but the main firmware is corrupted the printer automatically enters boot loader mode where the firmware can then be reloaded into the printer Boot Loader Maintenance Mode Maintenance mode supports f
249. e 75 UTF 8 encoding example Unicode Encoding Control Commands Function Initiate Unicode UTF 32BE Encoding All ASCII ESC h Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 68H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 104 gt Description The ESC h command will put the printer into UTF 32BE character encoding mode of operation If you wish to access characters above 255 you must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF 32BE UTF 16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255 however UFT32 does not require Surrogates to address character values greater than 65535 UTF 32BE uses the big endian method of sending the four bytes This method sends the high byte first and then the lower bytes Note UTF32 support is optional in the Model 9000 Note Once selected all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding even for non print commands Note When UTF32 firmware is installed all print information in the printer will be stored as a 32 bit value This includes graphics As this will make stored graphics and logos much larger UTF32 is supported as an optional firmware load Page 262 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Function Initiate Unicode UTF 32LE Encoding All ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 6CH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 108 gt Description The ESC command will put the printer into UTF 32LE character encoding mode of operation If you wish to access chara
250. e Model 9000 indicator lights are e Power LED Green Indicates Power state and non recoverable errors e Error LED Red Indicates problems and probability of recovery e Paper LED Green Indicates paper status paper low Power Indicator LED The power indicator lets the user know that the printer is ON If the power indicator blinks in conjunction with the error indicator the printer is experiencing a non recoverable error see the fault indicators discussed below If the power indicator blinks and there is no error indicator blinking the printer is being held in reset by the host Error Indicator LED The error indicator lets the user know that the printer is experiencing a problem If the power indicator is lit not blinking the error is generally recoverable without data loss If the power indicator is blinking a non recoverable error has occurred see the fault indicators below If the error is not operator recoverable a power cycle may correct the problem If a power cycle does not correct the fault the printer must be serviced Paper Indicator LED The paper indicator signals the paper status If the printer is equipped with a paper low option the paper indicator will blink when the paper is low The low sensor is adjustable and the amount of paper remaining is dependent on the adjustment If the paper indicator is lit with the error indicator the printer is out of paper in this case the printer stops printing and waits for
251. e commands or features using the standard Model 9000 firmware will result in a lower cost printer Model 9000 Citizen Emulation The Model 9000 printer uses a subset of the Epson emulation for Citizen Model 9000 Star Emulation The Model 9000 printer has Star emulation that will allow the Model 9000 to replace most Star printers with similar features to the Model 9000 Star used a real time cash drawer command that uses features patented by Epson If you use the Star real time cash drawer command you must use the added cost licensed firmware Model 9000 Axiohm Emulation The Model 9000 printer has an Axiohm emulation that closely matches the A793 and A794 printers The Axiohm command set for the most part is a superset of the Epson emulation Because several of the Axiohm commands make use of features that patented by Epson you must use the added cost licensed firmware to use these commands If you don t need those commands and features using the standard Model 9000 firmware will result in a lower cost printer 100 10937 Rev F Page 227 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Graphics Printing Graphics The Model 9000 Printer has bit image graphic capability and a full PC compatible graphic character set The bit image format is similar to that used on other personal computer printers Three modes of operation are available Single density is the fastest mode It makes a single unidirectional 60
252. e line double wide print SO OEH amp MW 92 Cancel one line double wide print DC4 14H amp MN 93 Multi line double wide double high mode ESC W lt n gt 1BH 57H amp FS n 0 93 n 0 Standard mode SE We n 1 Double wide z n 2 Double high 3 Both Enable disable Strike Through ESC _ lt n gt 1BH 5FH amp CO n 0 93 n 0 End amp MO n 1 n 1 Begin Begin underline mode ESC lt n gt 1BH 2DH amp CU n 0 95 n 0 End amp MU n 1 n 1 Begin Begin enhanced print ESC G 1BH 47H amp ME 95 End enhanced print ESC H 1BH 48H amp CE 95 Begin emphasized print ESC E 1BH 45H amp MM 95 End emphasized print ESC F 1BH 46H amp CM 95 Set print style See command ESC 1BH 5BH amp DH 94 description 40H amp SH Select superscript ESC S lt 0 gt 1BH 53H OOH amp SP 96 Select subscript ESC S lt 1 gt 1BH 53H 01H amp SB 96 End superscript or subscript ESC T 1BH 54H amp SE 96 Begin italics ESC G 1BH 25H 47H amp MI 97 End italics ESC H 1BH 25H 48H amp CI 97 100 10937 Rev F Page 65 Programming Codes Description Model 9000 Programmer s Guide IPCL equivalent code Rotated Print Begin rotated font See command ESC P lt n gt 1BH 50H aa 83 description SES Page Mode Select page mode ESC t lt n gt 1BH 74H amp PM 99
253. e n4 n14 FNC1 DIMENSIONS Diameter Direction Splices 8002 Cellular Mobile Telephone Identifier n4 an 20 FNC1 CMT No 8003 Global Returnable Asset Identifier n44 n13 an 16 FNC1 GRAI GRAI 8004 Global Individual Asset Identifier GIAI n4 an 30 FNC1 GIAI 8005 Price Per Unit of Measure n44 n6 FNC1 PRICE PER UNIT 8006 Identification of the Components of a n4 n14 n2 n2 FNC1 GCTIN Trade Item 8007 International Bank Account Number n4 an 30 FNC1 IBAN IBAN 100 10937 Rev F Page 175 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 8008 Date and Time of Production n44 n8 n 4 FNC1 PROD TIME 8018 Global Service Relation Number GSRN n4 n18 FNC1 GSRN 8020 Payment Slip Reference Number nd an 25 FNC1 REF No 8100 GS1 128 Coupon Extended Code n4 n6 FNC1 8101 GS1 128 Coupon Extended Code n4 n1 n5 n4 FNC1 8102 GS1 128 Coupon Extended Code n4 n1 ni FNC1 8110 Coupon Code Identification for Use in n4 an 30 FNC1 North America Notes As of GS1 General Specifications Version 10 0 Issue 1 Jan 2010 Note The first position indicates the length number of digits of the GS1 Application Identifier The following value refers to the format of the data content The following conventions applied n numeric digit an any valid character n3 3 numeric digits fixed length n 3 up to 3 numeric digits an 3 up to 3 valid characters Note If only year and m
254. e new scan line data Think of compression mode as The scan line is the same as the previous except for the byte at a specific position ESC h lt 1 gt lt 5 gt lt 254 gt lt 03H gt lt d5H gt lt ObH gt lt 51H gt Where lt 03H gt lt d5H gt means use the previously transmitted scan line data but change byte 3 to a d5H and change byte 11 0bH to a 51H Same as previous Compression In same as previous compression the command does not contain any graphics data The command specifies that the printer is to use the previous scan line data for the current scan line ESC h lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 255 gt Page 114 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Simple Raster Graphics Simple Raster Graphics prints a horizontal raster of graphics data one or multiple times Horizontal offset and number of data bytes are variable and specified by parameters This is a legacy support command and intended to be replaced by compressed color horizontal graphics commands This command does not support compression or color graphics ESC Simple raster graphic mode ASCII ESC m n rL rH d1 dn Hexadecimal 1BH 2EH m n rL rH d1 dn Decimal lt 27 gt lt 46 gt m n rL rH d1 dn IPCL none Description The ESC command is a simple method of printing raster graphics however the format does not support compression or color Where m horizontal offset from left margin 8 x m dots n number of data by
255. e process These commands are not processed as they are received but are buffered then processed The buffering process allows inquire commands sent after a disable to be answered In addition inquires sent after an enable may not be answered See additional notes 3 and 4 on the next page Note 5 In EPOS mode the ESC y command is active Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes USB Recovery Watch Dog The USB link can be susceptible to various errors that can cause it to stop functioning This typically happens when noise is introduced into the cable resulting in a buffer overrun at the host This can cause a hub or a USB driver to suspend interaction with whatever device appeared to be the source of the problem When this happens the only way to recover the link is to disconnect from the device and then reconnect This is typically done in the host In some cases for various reasons the host driver is not able to generate a disconnect It is possible to have the printer force the disconnect however the host application must start the service and then continue to extend the disconnect watch dog There is one command and two status indicators to help the application keep track of the watch dog When activated the printer will schedule a USB disconnect reconnect after the specified time unless the command is sent the command again before the time expires to either extend the time or disable the timer
256. e the Joe s Market to amp URJoe s amp When the Model 9000 finds amp URJoe s amp it is replaced with the stored graphic Some applications allow a graphic file to be sent to the printer In this case PJColor can generate the graphic file and then your application can send it to the printer This file will support two color print PJColor also has a feature that will allow you to generate a file that will define the graphic to be stored into the printer You can then use this file to setup any number of printers with the same graphic If you are using a windows print driver other than the Transact Model 9000 driver to support your printer you will not be able to send color graphics to the printer through the print driver The print driver will not support universal color graphics You can however store the graphic in the printer and use IPCL commands to print the stored graphic You must select a printer resident font for this to work The following is a short summary and how to description of these features Print File Graphics PJColor can generate a print file that may be sent to the printer in any emulation and produce a two color print graphic To generate a print file 1 Start PUColor 2 Under Settings Select the Model 9000 printer Then select the emulation that machines the printer Color is supported with special color firmware option 31 Universal color graphics is not compatible with Page Mode 32
257. eck the power cycle flag before and after all transactions An alternate approach is to check the flag after every off line to on line transition Note If the printer mode was changed by the ESC y lt 2 gt or lt 8 gt command a power cycle reset will return to the initial configuration Data Pass through The Model 9000 Printer supports data pass through sometimes referred to as display pass through Data pass through is activated by the print suppress command with the pass through bit set In pass through mode the printer can be requested to transmit any data that it receives When this is the case the printer s inquire commands are active but of little use Typically the printer s transmit data is connected to the next device in line Inquire commands have no data path back to the host If pass through is to be used it is a good idea to deactivate the inquire commands Use ESC y lt 6 gt Before pass through data can be used it must be activated in the configuration menu which is the third selection in the print suppress pass option All data after but not including the print suppress command is pass through When deactivated the print suppress command is again not pass through During pass through the multi drop commands are active if configured The printer will act upon a multi drop control command found in the pass through data If the printer is deselected during pass through it stops passing on the data When
258. ected Values of 13 3 14 86 or 17 3 are typical for each resident font Barcodes include EAN 8 EAN 13 EAN 14 GS1 128 EAN128 Codabar Code 2 of 5 Code 39 Code 39 Extended Code 93 Code 128 A B and C UPC A UPC E Code49 Code1 6K PDF417 MicroPDF417 Maxicode QRCode Datamatrix GS1 Databar 14 GS1 Databar Truncated GS1 Databar Limited GS1 Databar Expanded GS1 Databar 14 Stacked GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Aztec EANX Composite EAN128 Composite GS1 Databar 14 Composite GS1 Databar Truncated Composite GS1 Databar Limited Composite GS1 Databar Expanded Composite UPC A Composite UP CE Composite GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Composite GS1 Databar 14 Omni Composite GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Composite and EAN 2 and EAN 5 Add on barcodes 100 10937 Rev F Page 21 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide General Specifications Printing Specifications Printing method Thermal Sensitive Line Dot System Vertical Horizontal dot pitch 0 125 mm Resolution 8 dots per mm 203 DPI Line feed pitch 3 2 mm 125 inches Print zone maximum 40 or 80 mm 1 57 or 3 15 inch Print Speed monochrome 11 inches per second Print Speed Adhesive backed 6 8 inches per second Print Speed two color 4 6 inches per second Number of print elements 640 dots in line Table 1 Print Specifications Note This document is not the controlling document for print specifications for pri
259. ed by using the change legacy font command printers limited print zone If this happen the barcode print functions will fault Note The printer will attempt to print large QR barcodes with single dot elements Single dot elements may have poor readability Note It is possible to define a QR Barcode that is too large to fit in the 100 10937 Rev F Page 189 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Maxicode Print Options Function Maxicode control ASCII ESC EM m lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 6DH lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 109 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way Maxicode barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f W 57H 87D Set Scale The scale may be set from 0 to 10 however only values of 8 6 4 and 2 will be used default is 4 0 will default to 4 and odd numbers will round down A scale of 2 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically reduce the scale until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f H 48H 72D Blank Space between the barcode and the following data Default 8 f M 4DH 77D Mode 2 3 4 and 5 are accepted 0 Auto f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font f 0 Me
260. eed only send the printer the information to be bar coded and a graphic is generated by the printer In some cases a check character is required by the format In most cases the printer generates the check character and inserts it correctly in the format The printer uses internal graphic modes to form bar code images and the images are adjusted for ink bleed In general the bar codes generated by sending graphic data to the printer are not as readable as the bar codes the printer generates Bar codes are printed at a 203 x 203 resolution Barcodes may be printed horizontally or vertically using page mode Function Print bar code ASCII ESC b lt n gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt n gt 03H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt n gt lt 3 gt IPCL amp 25 CR Interleaved 2 of 5 amp 39 CR Code 39 amp 12 CR Code 128 amp 28 mz lt M gt Code 128 allows a two character length preceding the information amp UP CR UPCA amp UE CR UPC E amp EA CR EAN 13 amp E8 CR EAN 8 amp 93 CR Code 93 amp CB CR Codabar Description The ESC b lt n gt Bar Data NUL command prints information as a bar code The bar data is terminated with an ETX CR LF or NUL An alternate Format is provided if control characters can be part of the barcode data The ESC b lt n gt lt L gt lt Lp gt Bar Data command prints information as a bar code The lt L
261. eek small letter chi 0452 Cyrillic small letter dje 03c8 Greek small letter psi 0453 Cyrillic small letter gje 03c9 Greek small letter omega 0454 Cyrillic small letter ukrainian ie 03ca Greek small letter iota with dialvtika 0455 Cyrillic small letter dze 03cb Greek small letter upsilon with dialvtika 0456 Cyrillic small letter bvelorussian ukrainian i 03cc Greek small letter omicron with tonos 0457 Cyrillic small letter vi 03cd Greek small letter upsilon with tonos 0458 Cyrillic small letter je 03ce Greek small letter omega with tonos 0459 Cyrillic small letter lje 0401 Cyrillic capital letter io 045a Cyrillic small letter nje 0402 Cyrillic capital letter dje 045b Cyrillic small letter tshe 0403 Cyrillic capital letter gje 045c Cyrillic small letter kje 0404 Cyrillic capital letter ukrainian ie 045e Cyrillic small letter short u 0405 Cyrillic capital letter dze 045f Cyrillic small letter dzhe 0406 Cyrillic capital letter bvelorussian ukrainian i 0490 Cyrillic capital letter ghe with upturn 0407 Cyrillic capital letter yi 0491 Cyrillic small letter ghe with upturn 0408 Cyrillic capital letter je 1e80 Latin capital letter w with grave 0409 Cyrillic capital letter lje 1e81 Latin small letter w with grave 040a Cyrillic capital letter nje 1e82 Latin capital letter w with acute 040b Cyrillic capital letter tshe 1e83 Latin small letter w with acute 040c Cyrillic capital letter kje 1e84 Latin capital letter w with diaeresis 040e Cyrillic capital letter short u 1e
262. encoding 2x10 values These values are expressed as 14 digits The first digit is a linkage flag followed by 13 data digits The 13 data characters plus the check digit form the 14 digit identification number including the leading indicator digit Values 10 000 000 000 000 and above indicate that the linkage flag is set and therefore a 2D component is present That is 10 001 234 567 890 encodes as 00012345678905 with a linkage flag of 1 22 The 14 digit field is not a simple sequence of digits but must follow EAN UCC conventions and the GS 1 General specification Page 144 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes GS1 Databar Truncated GS1 Databar truncated is a more compact version of the GS1 Databar and will encode the full 14 digit EAN UCC item identification but using less vertical height The specification defines the truncated version to be 13 times the X dimension however the height of the barcodes can be set by the configuration commands The GS1 Databar truncated version printed by the Model 9000 is simply 1 2 the height of the standard GS 1 DataBar symbol Function GS1 Databar 14 Truncated ASCII ESC b lt 19 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 19 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 19 gt information NUL EA A ESC b lt 19 gt 1234567890123 NUL 01 12345678901231 Figure 32 GS1 Databar 14 Truncated Example as it is implied You only need to send the 13
263. encoding example Page 260 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control UTF 16 With UTF16 values from 0x0000000000 to 0x0000D7FF and 0x0000E000 to 0Ox0010FFFF may be represented Values from 0x0000D800 to OxOOOODFFF and above 0x0010FFFF are not valid and in fact are not valid for any characters in Unicode rev 5 0 regardless of encoding UTF 16BE uses the big endian method of sending the two bytes This method sends the high byte first and then the low byte It is not required to send the byte order mark OxFEFF for the correct byte order to be initialized Sending the BOM in big endian would be as follows OxFE OxFF UTF 16LE uses the little endian method of sending the two bytes This method sends the low byte first and then the high byte It is not required to send the byte order mark OxFEFF for the correct byte order to be initialized Sending the BOM in big endian would be as follows OxFF OxFE UTF 8 UTF 8 uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence MBCS to identify the desired Unicode character This encoding method is less straightforward but preserves some of the 8 bit character of ASCII encoding This method uses unique bit sequences at the MSBs of a byte to determine its location and meaning within the MBCS encoding See the table below for more information If UTF 8 is selected all data sent to the printer must be encoded All command parameters over 127 must be encoded in UTF 8 UTF
264. entially sends two 8 bit bytes that form a 16 bit address to access the desired character Basic UTF 16 does not define the byte order If you wish to use UTF 16 and allow the printer to determine the byte order you must send the byte order mark OxFEFF before you send any characters To prevent loss of byte order synchronization you should periodically send the byte order mark to resynchronize the printer with your application If UTF 16 is selected all data sent to the printer must be 16 bits All commands and command parameters are also 16 bit however only values between 0 and 255 are valid Extended addressing uses surrogate pairs to encode values above OxFFFF Scalar Value UTF 16 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX OOOQUUUUUXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 11011O0wwwWXXXxxx 110111xxxxxxxxxx Note wwww UUUUU 1 and uuuuu may not be larger than 10000 Table 32 UTF 16 bit field definitions Unicode Extended UTF16 Encoding Example 3 Byte output Example Hex Character Code 0x00010302 00 01 03 02 Original Hex Code s 00000000 00000001 00000011 00000010 Converted to Binary 00000000 000 00001 000000 11 00000010 Bit Sections Discarded 0000 000000 11 00000010 Adjusted by subtracting g il g 1 from uuuuu 0000000000 1100000010 Merged into two va l 10 bit values 1101100000000000 1101111100000010 Surrogates added 1101 1000 0000 0000 1101 1111 0000 0010 2 16 bit values OxD800 0xDF02 2 16 bit hex values Figure 74 UTF 16
265. er and controls flow At the top of the chart the print control software asks for data If there is no data in the buffer a no data flag is returned The print software must then wait for data If there is data in the buffer it is read and the pointers are updated The buffer is then checked to see how much information is left If the buffer is below a low watermark about 100 bytes left the communication driver is notified and DTR is reasserted When XON XOFF flow control is used the flow is similar to DTR flow except that DTR is not used and XON XOFF control characters are transmitted back to the host on the serial link The XON XOFF advantage is that only three wires are required to interconnect to a printer The disadvantage is that a serial port receiver driver must be written for the host The print controller needs data to print or a command to decode Loop through idle task and then look for more data Is there anv data in the buffer Return to print controller with no data available Yes Acquire data from the buffer Move buffer pointers to the next data byte Is the buffer Ves Set DTR or transmit below the low XON mi No Return data to print controller Flow Chart 2 Print Controller Using Data 100 10937 Rev F Page 301 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide When the printer is on the print controller looks for data If there is data it process
266. er iota with tonos 0439 Cyrillic small letter short i 03b0 Greek small letter upsilon with dialytika and tonos 043a Cyrillic small letter ka 03b1 Greek small letter alpha 043b Cyrillic small letter el 03b2 Greek small letter beta 043c Cyrillic small letter em 03b3 Greek small letter gamma 043d Cyrillic small letter en 03b4 Greek small letter delta 043e Cyrillic small letter o 03b5 Greek small letter epsilon 043f Cyrillic small letter pe 03b6 Greek small letter zeta 0440 Cyrillic small letter er 03b7 Greek small letter eta 0441 Cyrillic small letter es 03b8 Greek small letter theta 0442 Cyrillic small letter te 03b9 Greek small letter iota 0443 Cyrillic small letter u 03ba Greek small letter kappa 0444 Cyrillic small letter ef 03bb Greek small letter lamda 0445 Cyrillic small letter ha 03bc Greek small letter mu 0446 Cyrillic small letter tse 03bd Greek small letter nu 0447 Cyrillic small letter che 03be Greek small letter xi 0448 Cyrillic small letter sha O3bf Greek small letter omicron 0449 Cyrillic small letter shcha 03c0 Greek small letter pi 044a Cyrillic small letter hard sign 03c1 Greek small letter rho 044b Cyrillic small letter veru 03c2 Greek small letter final sigma 044c Cyrillic small letter soft sign 03c3 Greek small letter sigma 044d Cyrillic small letter e 03c4 Greek small letter tau 044e Cyrillic small letter yu 03c5 Greek small letter upsilon 044f Cyrillic small letter va 03c6 Greek small letter phi 0451 Cyrillic small letter io 03c7 Gr
267. er of lines to be received before printing the complete page The advantage of page mode is that text and or graphics can be placed anywhere on the page in any order and in any of 4 orientations How to use page mode Page mode requires two phases to operate correctly 1 Page definition a Define the master page size either just before or just after entering page mode b Optionally define a sub page The master page defines the maximum page size all sub pages must be smaller and contained within the master page Master and sub page definitions are always done base on the 0 degree orientation not the current rotation c Optionally set an orientation This may be 0 90 180 or 270 degrees d Optionally set the entry position This is based on the current sub page and the current rotation e Enter text or graphics f Go to step b to define additional sub pages or step c to change the orientation 2 Print the page Page Definition The ESC t command will start page definition and define the initial orientation An ESC t command during page definition will change the orientation and reset the entry location back to the top left corner of that orientation Receipt or Inserted Form Initial entry l 1 location 1 A gt gt gt gt gt J i v v v vV v A A A A H A m lt lt lt lt lt 9 i i Figure 8 Page Mode Entrv Orientations 9 Horizontal Color graphics is not compatible with Page Mod
268. er store for the macro the save is not performed but the macro buffer is valid The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function Save macro data in user store ASCII ESC US m lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 6DH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 109 gt IPCL amp UM lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS GS lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated Description The ESC US m lt Name gt lt 0 gt command saves the current macro buffer structure into the flash user store area It uses the lt Name gt field as areference name If the name already exists in the flash user store the command does not store the data The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function Save user defined characters ASCII ESC US c lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 63H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 99 gt IPCL amp UC lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS GS 6 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated Description The ESC US c lt Name gt lt 0 gt command saves the current user defined character structure in the flash user save storage area It uses the lt Name gt field as a reference If the name already exists in the flash user store the command will n
269. eral description above By default Databar barcodes use GS1 formatting f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command 100 10937 Rev F Page 187 Programming Codes Code 16K Print Options Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Code 16K Options ASCII ESC EM 6 lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 36H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 54 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way code16K barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f W 57H 87D Set the minimum element width v 1 10 3 is the default A width of 1 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically reduce the width until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f H 48H 72D Blank Space between the barcode and the HRI Default 8 f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode See General description above By default Databar barcodes use GS1 formatting f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font Page 188 f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command Rev F 100 1093
270. ermination character from amp to x x may range from 21H to 255H Ithaca emulation mode You should use lt 0 gt or define the terminator with the amp UTx command Note The amp used to flag the end of the Name string is not valid in PCOS The extended Escape sequences are ESC US and ESC FS The ESC US commands are the same as the PcOS emulation The ESC FS commands are not intended to be used by the customer They provide the universal graphics support Because graphics would be very difficult to generate and are not supported by any graphics drives other than PJColor How to use IPCL commands in text strings If your software allows you to pass text strings to the printer you should be able to use the universal graphics commands Most POS software allows user customization of the text message printed at the beginning and the end of the receipt To use the Universal IPCL commands simply place them in a text string like the following example note that your results may vary depending on the operation system software and the ability to pass ASCII Characters Load and store named graphic image e First you must create the graphic image using the PJColor Color Image Converter and save the image to a file See the section Generate a file to store graphics into a printer above Page 236 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts e Send the following text strings
271. ervice Serial Control ActiveX OR Parallel Parallel OPOS Cash OR OR OPOS Cash USB bus i USB Drawer Control Drawer Driver Activex Service OR OR Figure 5 OPOS or UPOS When to use an OPOS driver When an application is written that invokes the retail device functions based on the UPOS specification in a vendor independent manner OPOS can be used on the Microsoft Windows platform It allows access to all the features of a retail device without having to deal with specific device commands It also allows information to be retrieved from the retail device When not to use an OPOS driver When the application is written using the Windows print API and device specific commands are sent directly through the application to the device 100 10937 Rev F Page 43 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide POSPrinter ActiveX Control POSPrinter OCX This is not a driver but rather a software component that provides a connection from an application to a port driver This allows an application to communicate directly with a printer This approach allows an application to send commands to the printer if desired similar to the legacy DOS approach once used to communicate with a POS printer Window s Operating System Port Driver Pont Hardware POS Application POSPrinter ocx Parallel ActiveX Control OR Printer USB Driver OR Eternet Figure 6 POSPrinter OCX When to use the POSPrinter OCX
272. es it Flow control is done when the data is taken from the buffer and the amount of data in the buffer is less than a prescribed amount The low watermark is set based on the expected environment The Model 9000 Printer sets the low watermark at half the buffer size or 1024 characters whichever is smaller The low watermark gives the host application time to get more data to the printer before the printer uses up what it has When XON XOFF protocol is implemented it is possible for the host to miss an XON or an XOFF To prevent this from causing a communication lockup the printer sends an XOFF for every character received after the high watermark is reached If the printer detects that the serial data link is inactive it sends out an XON about every two seconds When the printer cover is opened an XOFF is sent An XOFF is sent even when the internal data buffer is past the high watermark and is done to allow the host to know that the printer is not ready Printer Buffer Size The size of the Model 9000 buffer is configurable which allows an application to control how far ahead of the printer it can get before being asked to wait The buffer size can be set from 256 to 8192 bytes The smaller the buffer the tighter the control will be It is up to the developer to select the optimal buffer size for an application Serial Mode Plug and Play Microsoft has defined a Plug and Play PnP protocol to identify devices on serial links The enumerat
273. et weight or volume ounces Variable n4 n6 NET VOLUME oz Measure Trade Item 360n3 Net volume quarts Variable Measure n4 n6 NET VOLUME q Trade Item 361ns Net volume gallons U S Variable n4 n6 NET VOLUME g Measure Trade Item 362n3 Logistic volume quarts n4 n6 VOLUME q log 363n3 Logistic volume gallons U S n4 n6 VOLUME g log 364n3 Net volume cubic inches Variable n4 n6 VOLUME i3 log Measure Trade Item 365n3 Net volume cubic feet Variable n4 n6 VOLUME f3 log Measure Trade Item 366n3 Net volume cubic yards Variable n4 n6 VOLUME y3 log Measure Trade Item 367n3 Logistic volume cubic inches n4 n6 VOLUME q log 368n3 Logistic volume cubic feet n4 n6 VOLUME g log 369n3 Logistic volume cubic yards n4 n6 VOLUME i3 log 390n3 Applicable Amount Payable local n4 n 15 FNC1 AMOUNT currency 391n3 Applicable Amount Pavable with ISO n4 n3 n 15 FNC1 AMOUNT Currency Code 392n3 Applicable Amount Payable single n4 4n 15 FNC1 PRICE monetary area Variable Measure Trade Item 393n3 Applicable Amount Payable with ISO n4 n3 n 15 FNC1 PRICE Currency Code Variable Measure Trade Item 7001 NATO Stock Number NSN n4 n13 FNC1 NSN 7002 UN ECE Meat Carcasses and Cuts n4 an 30 FNC1 MEAT CUT Classification 7003 Expiration Date and Time n4 n10 FNC1 EXPIRY TIME 703s Approval Number of Processor with ISO n4 n3 an 27 FNC1 PROCESSOR s Country Code 8001 Roll Products Width Length Cor
274. eter 730 to 860 inches Roll footage 400 feet approximate Color roll diameter 101 6 mm 4 0 inches Max paper thickness 0 05 to 0 09 mm 002 to 0035 inches Paper Width 57 5 5 mm 2 26 02 inches wide 79 5 5 mm 3 13 02 inches wide Core Inside diameter 445 to 635 inches Outside diameter 730 to 860 inches Liner less Label Paper Monochrome roll diameter 101 6 mm 4 0 inches Max paper thickness 0 06 to 0 09 mm 0025 to 0035 inches Paper Width 39 5 5 mm 1 55 02 inches wide 79 5 5 mm 3 13 02 inches wide Core Inside diameter 445 to 635 inches Outside diameter 730 to 860 inches Adhesive backing Stripe or patch Roll footage 270 feet approximate Paper Usage Precautions e The life of the thermal head when two color paper is used is reduced to about half of the life when single color thermal paper is used e Use of narrow paper for extended periods will prevent conversion to wider paper e Use only specified thermal paper If other paper is used print quality head life and cutter life may deteriorate The printer can be configured to use two color thermal papers however at this time Transact does not have any recommendations for a specific paper 6 Currently only NCR 80mm and 40mm liner less papers are qualified for use in the M9000 printer Page 26 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Paper Out Programming Codes A rece
275. eturn the CRC and length of the currently open file Return ACK File open NAK File not open Length High 0 Length Low 0 CRC High 0 CRC Low 0 Function Write File command All ASCII ESC RS W lt L gt lt Ly gt lt data gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 57H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 87 gt Description The ESC RS W command sends data to the printer to be stored in the file The lt LL gt lt LH gt parameters specify the length of data that will follow where the length is LH 256 LL The data is treated as binary data with no translations Function Read File command All ASCII ESC RS R lt L gt lt Ly gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 52H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 82 gt Description The ESC RS R command requests that data be read from the file and returned to the host The lt LL gt lt LH gt parameters specify the length of data that should be returned where LH 256 LL specifies the number of returned bytes The data is treated as binary data with no translations If there is not enough data in the file to make up the requested length only the available data is returned Function Generate and return a file directory report All ASCII ESC RS Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 49H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 73 gt Description The ESC IRSJI command requests that a formatted text directory be returned from the printer Each line is null terminated Function Erase all files in a partition All ASCII ESC RS
276. f columns that will fit in the print zone f Y 59H 89D Set encoding Y aspect 2 lt v lt 8 Default v 3 f H 48H 72D Blank Space before and after the barcode 0 sv lt 255 Default is 8 dots f C 43H 67D Set encoding columns 0 sv lt 30 Values gt 8 generally will not fit in the print zone Default v 0 automatic mode If v O then automatic processing is used When automatic processing is specified the number of columns is calculated with the number of code words based on the size of the printable area f R 52H 82D Set encoding rows v Oor3svs90 Default v 0 f v 0 then automatic processing is used When automatic processing is specified the number of rows is calculated with the number of code words or the range of the printable area Note If the number of rows is specified it will be the minimum printed If more are required this setting will be ignored Note The number of rows times the number of columns must not exceed 928 Typically the row and columns should be set to 0 so that auto encoding will be used The X and Y aspect represent the number of dots horizontally and vertically to form the smallest image element Values of 2 for each produce very small elements and are probably too small unless good paper is used The defaults are 3 by 9 which produce easily readable barcodes f E 45H 69D Set error correction level If v between 1 and 40 it is interpreted as a percentage of the data If v i
277. f line The IEEE 1284 reverse channel responds to status changes even when the printer is off line In general the printer should be configured for Buffer Full Only off line operation if inquire commands are used This prevents the printer from using flow control for anything but buffer full The programmer must take on the responsibility for assuring that inquire commands are used to maintain status of the printer Inquire Commands ENQ Inquire printer status ASCII ENQ lt n gt Hexadecimal 05H lt n gt Decimal lt 5 gt lt n gt IPCL none EPOS GS r or DLE ENQ or DLE EOT Description The ENQ lt n gt command inquires about the printer s status and returns a result KA Note When the printer is off line inquires mav not be accepted ENQ lt 1 gt Inquire Cash Drawer 1 status ASCII ENQ lt 1 gt Hexadecimal 05H 01H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 1 gt Function Cash Drawer 1 Status Response ACK lt 1 gt 06H 01H Cash Drawer 1 is closed NAK lt 1 gt 15H 01H Cash Drawer 1 is open Cash drawer status is defined as open circuit being drawer closed ENQ lt 3 gt Inquire receipt paper low status ASCII ENQ 432 Hexadecimal 05H 03H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 3 gt Function Receipt paper low Response ACK 432 06H 03H Receipt paper is present NAK lt 3 gt 15H 03H Receipt paper is low Page 210 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 4 gt Inquire rece
278. for values 128 255 ISO 8859 1 Figure 52 Aztec Svmbol Encoding TransAct Technologies Inc 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca New York 2 The Aztec Standard allows values from 0 through 255 However at this time the Model 9000 will not handle a NUL Page 162 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Aztec Commands There are two version of the command one is null terminated and the other allows a length to be specified Note that the length is a two byte field as the symbol may contain more than 256 characters Function Aztec ASCII ESC b lt 30 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 30 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 30 gt information NUL Function Aztec ASCII ESC b lt 29 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt dn gt Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 29 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 29 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt ESC b lt 30 gt TransAct Technologies Inc 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca New York NUL Figure 53 Data Aztec Example commands do not affect Aztec barcodes The rules governing how the barcode is printed do not allow variations in the aspect ratios There are Aztec control commands that will allow some control over how the barcode is printed O Note The normal Select barcode Width and Select Barcode height Function Aztec Rune ASCII ESC b lt 31 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H l
279. gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 7 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 7 gt information NUL Codabar E dW LIU ESC b lt 7 gt Code 93 NUL 9 Figure 28 Code 93 Example Codabar is a variable length format primarily used for numeric symbols It offers 16 data characters including the numeric digits zero through nine and and Four unique start stop characters designated A B C and D are also available Due to space limitations only 12 characters can be printed If the first character is 1 to 31 it will be used as the length Note If the first and last characters are not a start or stop code Code A will be added Function Codabar ASCII ESC b lt 8 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 8 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 8 gt information NUL As Start and Stop are not specified start and stop A has been ESC b lt 8 gt 27 50 NUL added 8572 74 5 H Figure 29 Codabar Example Page 142 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes DataBar RSS GS 1 barcodes The Reduced Space Symbology RSS barcodes are intended to encode 14 digit fields and is intended to replace UPC barcodes in the Retail industry In February 2007 the GS1 organization took over control of the RSS barcodes and renamed them DataBar RSS barcodes use 6 variable bar and
280. hanging the emulation note that the printout that was printed at the beginning of the configuration process may be incorrect for the new emulation and the configurable features may be different If you are using this print out as a configuration guide and you are changing the emulation you may wish to save the new emulation and then re enter Configuration Mode to change other options This will print all the available features for the new emulation The Feed button is used to select and change configuration setting By pressing and releasing the Feed button the parameter to be changed can be selected By pressing and holding the Feed button the value of the selected parameter will change Note There are a number of features that are be configurable It is intended that if you need to change them you will contact TransAct Technical support for assistance Remote Configuration Remote configuration is provided for all printers and is accessed through a series of extended diagnostic and configuration commands The TransAct universal configuration program will allow the configuration to be read edited and written back to the printer It will also allow the configuration of one printer to be recorded and replicated over a number of printers The program is available from TransAct Technical Support or by downloading it from the Internet consult the section On line Technical Support for further details Page 54 Rev F 100 10937 Model 90
281. he alias used by the set font command e g Font23 is selected by doing a select font 23 command Font 0 is reserved for selecting the linked font The printer may contain one default linked font A linked font is a method of allowing the user to replace characters in a standard font with custom characters described in more detail in an earlier section The POR INI file is one way of defining a linked font In the 100 10937 Rev F Page 277 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide above POR INI file link the link font consists of User TactWGL and the TactGB18030 fonts When a character is to be printed the user font will be searched followed by TactWGL and then the TactGB18030 font The first font containing the character will define the character Bitmap fonts are not recommended they should only be used if an exact bitmap is required Bitmap fonts are not scalable like true type fonts only the normal 2X 3X and so on scaling is available TransAct Technologies can upon request and signing an NDA provide tools to allow the customer to develop there own bitmap fonts These fonts must be in Unicode order but only need support the specific characters needed in the font NOTE When loaded and made available the legacy select font commands should select the bitmap font by adding 100 to the font ID For example to use BMFontO select font 100 in the Legacy font definition Note Only the font ID is used from the legacy
282. he image of the QR Code to display text contact information connect to a wireless network or open a web page in the phone s browser This act of linking from physical world objects is known as a hard link or physical world hyperlinks ce 5M Oore mer t mer er el ays Numeric only Max 7 089 characters Alphanumeric IMax 4 296 characters Binary 8 bits Max 2 953 bytes Kanji Kana Max 1 817 characters NOTE At this time Kanji and Katakana are not supported by the Model 9000 QR codes use the Reed Solomon error correction and the error correction capacity may be adjusted Error correction Level 7 of code words can be restored 15 of code words can be restored LevelQ 25 of code words can be restored Level H 30 of code words can be restored If numeric data is used the barcode generator will optimize the barcode generation for numeric data In Aloha numeric mode the printer will encode 0 9 A Z space and at A Figure 48 QRCode Symbol Encoding TransAct Technologies Inc 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca New York 100 10937 Rev F Page 159 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Figure 49 QRCode Symbol for a URL Encoding www transact tech com QRCode Commands There are two version of the command one is null terminated and the other allows a length to be specified Note that the length is a two byte field as the symbol may contain more than 256 characters Func
283. he length of the following data must be provided to the printer PDF 417 Large amounts of text and data can be encoded when using the PDF417 barcodes The printed symbol consists of several linear rows of stacked code words Each codeword represents 1 of 929 possible values from one of three different clusters A different cluster is chosen for each row repeating after every three rows Because the code words in each cluster are unique the scanner is able to determine what line each cluster is from PDF417 uses Reed Solomon error correction instead of check digits This error correction allows the symbol to endure some damage without causing loss of data AIM standards recommend a minimum error correction level of 2 The X dimension is the width of the narrowest bar in a printed codeword The Y dimension is the height of each row within the PDF417 symbol The PDF417 barcode is usually printed at an X to Y ratio of 1 2 to 1 5 The Model 9000 printer defaults to a 1 ratio By lowering the ratio a significant amount of space can be saved however some scanners cannot read X to Y ratios of less than 1 3 The form of the command is as follows Function PDF 417 ASCII ESC b lt 9 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 9 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt dn gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 9 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Where the data length is nH 256 nL The length is lim
284. he points are needed to render stroke based characters This improves character generation performance and uses less space This type of character generation is fast and efficient and is ideally suited for Asian fonts 100 10937 Rev F Page 241 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Character Definition True Type and Stroke fonts are designed as a complete font with character cell size and character position in the cell based on the overall font design Typical the characters are defined as vectors and stored as coordinates on a character cell grid The grid is in an arbitrary design unit and may be up to 4096 units on a side In most systems character sizes is specified as a point size where the point size refers to the character height The character width is typically variable and designed to produce the optimal appearance The font rendering system must take the requested point size and generate a character based on the original design units and produce a character that is the correct size and position for the printer In most font designs the vertical point size includes white space between lines The font designer defines the height of the character cell in design units for all characters then defines a character origin that will be used for all the characters in the font The designer then defines individual character sizes based on how the font is supposed to look and all the characters that are to be include
285. he printer consumables may need replacing Semi recoverable A semi recoverable error is determined by whether or not the printer has to be shut off and turned back on while attending to the problem The amount of information lost is dependent on the type of error and the state of the information being processed Non recoverable A non recoverable error produces information loss Page 46 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Error Blink Codes If during normal operation the error indicator is lit and the power indicator is blinking a minor error occurred The power indicator shows the error by blinking a pattern Cycling the power restarts the printer Blink patterns are defined as follows 1 Blink 1 blink pause ill 2 Blink 2 blinks pause fj 9 3 Blink 3 blinks pause ff 988 A similar pattern is followed for other blink counts Error indications are as follows Print Fonts are Missing 1 Configuration Read 2 Configuration Write 3 Software Error 4 Auto Cutter Error 5 Unused 6 User Store Format Error 7 Electronic Journal Format Error 8 Flash Operation Error 9 Internal Firmware load Error 10 Internal Font Svstem Failed 11 Internal Memorv Error 12 Communication Adapter Error 14 Operating Svstem Error 15 Print Head Has Failed 16 The USB Subsvstem Has Failed 17 Table 14 Error Blink Codes Power Saving Modes O
286. he printer follows the standard Centronics parallel port conventions With Options 1 and 3 the acknowledged and busy signals change simultaneously which is sometimes referred to as ack after busy Options 2 and 3 force busy high on the rising edge of the strobe which is sometimes referred to as busy while strobe timing In all cases the data is latched on the rising edge of the strobe In most cases the normal timing mode gives the best results Dita FF H STB tf E E t2 H t4 BUSY ACK ACK while BUSY 15 ACK ACK in BUSV l i ACK ACK after BUSY LI Figure 80 Parallel Port ACK Timing Options Legend Time Interval Minimum Maximum ti DATA Setup to STB 0 5 uS t2 STB Width 0 5 uS 500 uS t3 DATA Hold after STB 0 5 uS t4 BUSY Delay after STB 0 0 5 uS t5 ACK Pulse Width 2 5 uS Table 37 Parallel port Timing Note Altered STB timing to take data on the falling edge of STB can be generated as a factory option Printer Buffer Size The Model 9000 printer has a configurable buffer size It can be set from 40 to 8192 bytes The configurable buffer allows an application to control how far ahead the buffer gets from the printer The smaller the buffer the tighter the control will be It is up to the application developer to select the optimal buffer size Parallel Port Inquire and IEEE 1284 The Model 9000 printer supports the IEEE 1284 bidirectional parallel peripheral interface
287. hic modes as specified by lt m gt Where lt m gt 0 60 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 120 dpi Half speed 8 bit slices 2 120 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 3 240 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 4 80 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 5 72 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 6 90 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 7 144 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 8 9 Not supported 10 104 x 96 dpi 1 horizontal 1 vertical pass 11 208 x 96 dpi 2 horizontal 1 vertical pass 12 104 x 192 dpi 1 horizontal 2 vertical passes 13 208 x 192 dpi 2 horizontal 2 vertical passes 100 10937 15 16 Not supported Rev F Page 109 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC Reassign graphic mode ASCII ESC lt m gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 3FH lt m gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 63 gt lt m gt lt n gt IPCL none Description The ESC lt m gt lt n gt command reassigns graphic mode lt m gt to resolution lt n gt Possible values for lt m gt are K L Y or Z Resolutions lt n gt are zero to seven as follows Where lt m gt 0 60 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices Default for K 120 dpi Half speed 8 bit slices Default for L 2 120 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices Default for Y 3 240 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices Default for Z 4 80 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 5 72 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 6 90 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 7 144 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 10 104 x96 dpi 1 horizontal 1 vertical pass dr ESC U lt 1 gt ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal
288. his command will force the printer to perform a black dot auto calibration The printer should be loaded with the intended paper when this command is issued The command will adjust the sensor calibration measure the black dot and set the feed to black dot to cut in the middle of the black dot Page 282 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Function Set Head energy for test ASCII ESC H lt c gt lt e gt Hex 1BH 7EH 48H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 72 gt Description This command will temporarly set the head energy to lt e gt There are limited checks to verify that the values sent are usable You can temporarly disable the printer using this command lt c gt is the color R for Color energy B for the Black energy lt e gt is the energy 12 20 for Color and 18 to 35 for Black Function Return the printers serial number ASCII ESC Hex 1BH 7EH 49H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 73 gt Description Read and return the printers serial number as a NUL terminated ASCII string Function Return the Firmware ID ASCII ESC F Hex 1BH 7EH 46H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 70 gt Description Read and return the printer s firmware ID as a NUL terminated ASCII string Function Return the Firmware ID and file system image ID ASCII ESC f Hex 1BH 7EH 66H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 102 gt Description Read and return the printer s firm
289. ibility with legacy products Level 8 is never used Note Setting the Error correction higher will increase the size of the f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command 100 10937 Rev F Page 185 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Data Matrix Print Options Function Data Matrix bar code control ASCII ESC EM d lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 64H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 100 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way Data Matrix barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f H 48H 72D Blank Space before and after the barcode f M 4DH 77 Set minimum matrix size v 1 30 0 sets to auto Symbol Size Size v 104 x 104 120 x 120 132 x 132 144x 144 CO CO N OO O01 B G PO O CH Figure 67 ECC 200 Size options Note If the data will not fit in the selected size the printer will revert to auto mode f Q 52H 82 if v 1 Only square matrix sizes will be selected in auto mode y v 0 1 f W 57H 87D Set the minimum element width and height v 1 10 6 is the default A width of 1 or 2 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically
290. ics Note 1 Red green and blue pixels set to one at the same location result in a white dot while red green and blue pixels set to zero form a black dot For black print one represents a black dot and zero represents a white dot Note 2 More than one color may be set at a time for example setting the color to six would set green and blue simultaneously Note 3 Horizontal Color graphics is not compatible with Page Mode Note 1 If the printer is configured for Gray scale paper this command is lt length gt byte specifying the length of the data including the format byte ranging from 0 to 254 255 is reserved for future use lt format gt byte specifying the format of the graphics data O for raw data 1 for bit wise RLE compression Page 112 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes 8 for byte wise RLE compression 254 for difference compression 255 for same as previous scan line data lt data gt the data bytes that define the graphics to be printed ESC Set horizontal graphic mode ASCII ESC lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2AH lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 42 gt lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt IPCL none Description The ESC lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt command selects one of the three graphic modes specified by lt m gt The two bytes after the mode must be zero Where lt m gt 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 Standard Graphic Modes See ESC command d
291. igure 42 Truncated PDF 417 Example Note Micro PDF 417 shares a control table with PDF417 however the right side is removed Note The PDF417 specification does not reference GS 1 formatting however GS 1 encoding may be activated for both Standard and Truncated PDF417 There is no indicator in the barcode that indicates that GS1 is active If GS 1 formatting is used it s up to the user to recognize that GS1 is active and decode the barcode as GS1 data Note The printer has a limited print zone and the amount of data that may be contained in a PDF417 barcode is large The height of the PDF 417 barcode may be limited by the internal size of the row buffer rather than the PDF417 generator Page 152 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Micro PDF 417 MicroPDF417 is two dimensional 2D multi row barcode derived from PDF417 Micro PFD417 can encode up to 150 bytes Micro PDF417 is designed for applications requiring improved area efficiency The form of the command is as follows Function Micro PDF 417 ASCII ESC b lt 83 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 33 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 33 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Where the data length is nH 256 nL The length is limited to be from 1 to 150 characters Alternate Command Function Micro PDF 417 ASCII ESC b lt 34 gt informat
292. ii rattan eee el tia ac aa A ate 141 Figure 27 EAN 2 and EAN 5 Addendas nn nn rna 141 Fi ur 28 Code 93 Exa MP e i ii u 142 Figure 29 Godabar Ex arn ple i eet cect Er f B a 142 Figure 30 RSS 14 symbol representing 01 20012345678909 144 Figure 31 GS1 Databar 14 Example ee 144 Figure 32 GS1 Databar 14 Truncated Example AA 145 Figure 33 GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Example 145 Figure 34 GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni Example AA 146 Figure 35 GS1 Databar Limited Example ss ss sisien ian ga ites PO A 146 Figure 36 GS1 Databar Expanded Example AAA 147 Figure 37 GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Exvample sse nnnnnnnnnnnna 147 Figure 38 GS1 128 Examples otitis onda te at d 148 Figure 39 Code 49 El TE 149 Figure 40 Code 16K Example ix ia ccc tes asl cae ae belt eet eel ees ee 150 ele UI HEART 407 Ee EE 151 Figure 42 Truncated PDF 417 Example AA 152 Figure 43 Micro PDF 417 lt EE 153 Figure 44 Data Mattes ee dee ae 155 Figure 45 ECC 200 reference symbol encoding 30Q324343430794 lt OQQ 44 155 Figure 46 Maxitode Symes EE 156 Figure 47 Data Maxicode Example nanna 157 Figure 48 QRCode Symbol esis sie pi i aulb tet 159 Page 14 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Figure 49 QRCode Symbol for a URL 160 Figure 50 Data QR Code Example es a 160 Figure 51 Data Micro QRCode Example s 161 Fig re 52 AZIEC ele dic ki ejt eb it Sect ne nate ok heme n d E ta dbase te 162 Figure 53 Data Aztec Eeample gei
293. imal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 16 gt information NUL Function Maxicode ASCII ESC b lt 15 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 15 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 15 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt ESC b lt 16 gt GS 148501200 GS 231 GS 3 GS TransAct Technologies Inc 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca New York NUL Figure 47 Data Maxicode Example Note The normal Select barcode Width and Select Barcode height commands do not affect Maxicode barcodes The rules governing how the barcode is printed do not allow variations in the aspect ratios There are Maxicode control commands that will allow some control over how the barcode is printed Note GS1 encoding is not supported by Maxicode MaxiCode Mode 2 and 3 Structured Carrier Message MaxiCode Mode 2 and Mode 3 are generally use as a destination sorting symbol In these modes the primary message is always data specific and encodes postal code country code and service class The three primary data elements should be supplied in the above order separated by GS Group Separator ASCII 29 immediately followed by the secondary message contents There are two commonly used message formats when using Mode 2 and Mode 3 Messages Beginning with gt RS01GSyy Messages which begin with the seven encoded data characters gt RSO1GSyy conform to particular open system standards and ha
294. in D shell interface Ethernet 10 100 Base T Adapter e Standard Ethernet port connector It is easy to distinguish most of the interface cards other than the 25 pin serial and 25 pin parallel interface cards To determine what interface is installed refer to the configuration receipt shipped with the printer or enter configuration mode and look at the verification printout If a serial interface card is installed the printout will refer to the RS 232 serial interface If the parallel interface card is installed the printout will refer to the parallel interface Changing Interface Cards The interface card on the Model 9000 Printer can be added or changed in the field In most cases interface cards are interchangeable without altering the printer firmware However you may have to load new firmware and or a new boot loader before you change the interface cards Check with Technical Support for firmware compatibility between interface cards before ordering O Note The USB interface does not require an interface card Page 36 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Removing the Old Interface Card 1 2 3 4 Turn over the printer taking care not to allow the cover to open or the paper to fall Disconnect the current communications and cash drawer cables Remove the interface retaining screws Remove the existing Adapter a Slide the interface card back and out of the printer b If the printer is c
295. in Points All ASCII ESC V lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 56H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 86 gt Range d 0 4 72 The ESC V command will set the line spacing in points where one point is defined as 1 72 of an inch If d 0 variable spacing is selected NOTE This is the minimum spacing If the character height setting requires a larger spacing the character height will override this setting 100 10937 Rev F Page 255 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Set minimum Line Spacing in 1 4 Points All ASCII ESC v lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 76H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 118 gt Range d 0 16 255 The ESC v command will set the line spacing in 1 4 points where 1 4 point is defined as 1 288 of an inch ASCII ESC v lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 76H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 118 gt Range d 0 16 255 If d 0 variable spacing is selected NOTE This is the minimum spacing If the character height setting requires a larger spacing the character height will override this setting Function Set stroke font brush size All ASCII ESC B lt w gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 42H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 66 gt Range w 0 6 200 Description The ESC B command will set brush stroke percentage for stroke fonts If the brush size is set to zero the font design stroke width will be used Values from 6 to 200 represent 0 4 to 12 of
296. in functions Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Vbus 5 V dc 3 Plus data 2 Minus data 4 Ground Table 5 Standard USB Pin definitions Note The 5 power on the standard USB interface does not have enough power to run the printer Note The Vbus signal may be used to place the printer in a low power mode however this requires the printer to be configured for Green operation Powered USB Interface The Model 9000 printer may be supplied with a powered USB interface as a factory installed option The printer will be supplied with a standard 24V inline 8 pin powered USB connector See the Powered USB web site http www poweredusb org for the Powered USB standards Matching cables are available from Transact or from CyberData See http www cyberdata net products cables pusbcables index html for a list of cables available from CyberData Length CyberData Part Number 1 2M 010617 3M 010729 3 8M 010694 4M 010730 Table 6 CyberData Powered USB 24V to 1x8 Cables The Powered USB inline 8 connector has the following pin functions Signal Pin Signal 1 3 8 Ground 5 Minus data 2 7 24V 6 Vbus 5 V dc 4 Plus data Table 7 Powered USB Pin definitions KA Note Printers with the powered USB interface are supplied without an internal power supplv No other interface adapter mav be installed in these printers Page 30 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Progra
297. ined as well as the ability to define custom mappings unique to your application Note Note If UTF encoding is active code pages are not meaningful Code page commands will have no affect on the character addressing Codepage description files The format of the codepage description file is somewhat flexible The basic format is that each line will specify an ASCII character ID and the Unicode character that is to appear in that ASCII ID location The file format is one character per line with the first value being the ASCII ID and the second value being the Unicode address The file should be something like this 0x00 0x0000 NULL 0x01 0x0001 START OF HEADING 0x02 0x0002 START OF TEXT 0x03 0x0003 END OF TEXT or Language USA Code Page 437 0x00 0x0000 56 NULL 0x01 Ox263A 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 0x263B 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 0x2665 9829 BLACK HEART SUIT 0x04 0x2666 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 0x2663 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT or 0 0 NULL 1 9786 WHITE SMILE Page 84 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes 2 9787 BLACK SMILE 3 9829 BLACK HEART SUIT 4 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 5 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT or SYMBOL SET WE name Windows 3 1 Latin 2 pcl char E symbols 32 0x0020 Space Code Prntabl Thin Space 33 0x0021 Exclamation 34 0x0022 Neutral Double Quote 5 0x0023 Number 36 0x0024 Dollar or Language USA Code Page 437
298. ing systems were developed however it was clear that a standard needed to be developed In 1991 Version 1 0 of the Unicode standard was developed to standardize how and where characters are to be addressed in an expanded addressing scheme In 2006 Version 5 0 of the Unicode standard was published and generally accepted The Model 9000 follows this standard for character placement and encoding and Unicode addresses from 0 to 1114111 0x00 to 0x010FFFF are supported by the Model 9000 Printer Note If a custom font is used that is not in Unicode order the order of the font will be used as if it were in Unicode order Any subsequent character mappings will assume to font is in Unicode order and may not produce the desired effects Unicode Encoding The Model 9000 Printer supports Unicode character addressing using Unicode Transform Format or UTF as defined in the Version 5 0 Unicode Specification There are several forms of UTF encoding UTF32 big and little endian UTF16 big and little endian and UTF8 UTF 32 Note UTF32 support is optional in the Model 9000 When UTF32 firmware is installed all print information in the printer will be stored as a 32 bit value This includes graphics As this will make stored graphics and logos much larger UTF32 is supported as an optional firmware load UTF 32 is a straight forward although not very efficient way to access characters above 255 UTF 32 essentially sends four 8 bit bytes that form a
299. inter and the expected CRC of the file If all the files verify this command will return VG followed by it s 2 byte CRC If any of the files do not verify the command will return VB followed by it s 2 byte CRC For example the file might look like this Por ini OxO6FF Only the Por ini file will be checked in this example An additional and optional feature of this command is that it can verify the CRC of the operating firmware By adding Firmware as a file name this command will recalculate the Firmware CRC and compare it to the master value If the recalculation does not match the master value this command will return a failed response The file would be as follows to add the Firmware check By using the master value this file need not be updated if the firmware is updated Por ini OxO6FF Firmware By knowing the CRC of the Verify cfg file the host application can verify that all the other files are correct and optionally the firmware without knowing anything about the other files of firmware Note The typical printer is not shipped with a Verify cfg file Note This command is not performed as a condition of normal operation Page 274 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control It is up to the host application to refuse to use the printer if this command returns a fail to verify status Note if the Verify cfg file is not present the verify command will return VB and a 0 CRC
300. ion NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 34 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 34 gt information NUL RTH EE ESC b lt 32 gt TransAct Technologies Inc NUL Figure 43 Micro PDF 417 Example Note Micro PDF 417 shares a control table with PDF417 PDF417 allows the columns to be set from 1 to 30 however Micro PDF417 only allows 1 4 0 will auto set the columns If the columns are set out of range it will be limited to 4 Note The encryption level cannot be changed for Micro PDF 417 Note MicroPDF417 is used for composite barcodes which use GS1 formatting When used for composit barcodes GS1 encoding is active Note The PDF417 and Micro PDF 417 specifications do not reference GS 1 formatting however GS 1 encoding may be activated for MicroPDF417 There is no indicator in the barcode that indicates that GS1 is active If GS 1 formatting is used it s up to the user to recognize that GSI is active and decode the barcode as GS1 data 100 10937 Rev F Page 153 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Data Matrix Bar Code This is a 2 D matrix symboligy barcode that can encode numeric or alphanumeric data and includes error correction There are 4 original error correction ECC 000 ECC 140 as well as the standard Reed Solomon ECC 200 error correction Most current scanners only support ECC 200 In theory 3116 numeric and 2335 characters can be encoded in Data Matrix From a practical point of view the limited
301. ion process is designed to find and automatically configure a device driver for the printer It is done by toggling the control lines in a specific sequence that is recognized by the printer The peripheral then responds such that Windows can identify the device To allow the printer to look for and respond to the sequence EISA PnP must be enabled When enabled in serial mode the flow control is forced to Request to Send RTS with Data Terminal Ready DTR static Using DSR Windows uses the host s Data Set Ready DSR line the printers DTR line on the serial port to determine whether a device is attached to the port When Windows is booted or does PnP the system sets the host s DTR and RTS to zero and waits approximately 200 milliseconds It then sets the DTR to one and waits another 200 milliseconds After 200 milliseconds the system checks to see whether the DSR line is high This indicates that a serial device is attached to the serial port The system responds by setting RTS high and waits to receive the device identification string In some devices such as the serial mouse the DSR line can be held high by tying it directly to the DTR line When the mouse is connected to the serial port on the personal computer the power supplied through the DTR line also raises DSR high For Plug and Play compatibility RTS flow control is used at the printer because DSR must stay high as long as the device is attached to the serial port
302. ipt paper out sensor is provided as a standard feature It senses when there is approximately 5 inches length of paper left on the paper roll Paper Low A receipt paper low sensor is provided as an optional feature An operator adjustable paper low assembly will be provided to allow the printer to sense when the paper roll diameter is between 94 to 1 29 inches approximate It is adjustable to compensate for various paper core dimensions Paper Low Adjustment Settings Approximate Paper Remaining Paper Roll Diameter in feet UPPER LIMIT 2 turns counter clockwise 29 1 29 1 turn counter clockwise 23 1 203 FACTORY SETTING 18 1 115 1 turn clockwise 13 1 028 LOW LIMIT 2 turns clockwise 8 5 940 Table 4 Paper Low adjustment Notes e These measurements are approximate Paper roll used for testing had paper roll core outside diameter of 750 inches and inside diameter is 625 inches Results will vary depending on core O D I D dimensions e Paper roll core should meet or exceed paper width e Results based on thermal paper 0025 inches thick e The receipt printable area is as shown in the following diagram RECEIPT PAPER ROLL LLLLILLLLL LLL LLL LLLLL LL LL LLL LLL l PAPER CUT OFF Figure 1 Receipt Printing Tear off Position The paper tear off is positioned 1 inch from the last line of print Receipt Printing Auto Cutter Position A receipt auto cutter
303. ipt paper out status ASCII ENQ lt 4 gt Hexadecimal 05H 04H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 4 gt Function Receipt paper exhausted Response ACK lt 4 gt 06H 04H Receipt paper is present NAK lt 4 gt 15H 04H Receipt paper is exhausted ENQ lt 8 gt Inquire cover open status ASCII ENQ lt 8 gt Hexadecimal 05H 08H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 8 gt Function Cover open closed status Response ACK 482 06H 08H The cover is closed NAK 482 15H 08H The cover is open ENQ lt 9 gt Is the buffer empty Clear the IEEE 1284 buffer ASCII ENG 292 Hexadecimal 05H 09H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 9 gt Function The ENQ lt 9 gt command allows the host to know when the print buffer is empty If IEEE 1284 is active the command also clears the response buffer Response ACK lt 9 gt 06H 09H The buffer is empty NAK lt 9 gt 15H 09H The buffer is not empty ENQ lt 10 gt Request printer reset ASCII ENG lt 10 gt Hexadecimal 05H OAH Decimal lt 5 gt lt 10 gt Function Reset printer Response Serial Parallel ACK lt 10 gt 06H OAH No response The command was accepted NAK lt 10 gt 15H OAH The command was rejected Description The ENQ 4102 EPOS DLE ENQ lt n gt commands and the INIT pin all have the same effect and are referred to as reset commands To prevent data loss the printer tries to finish printing the buffered data When operator intervention with the printer is required for any reason data los
304. ir Fa d A at sack eas dost eae 45 Feed Button epes Ee 45 Indicator Lights RR EE 45 Power Indicator EE DY ieee ar E E e A A E EAA S 45 Error Indicator LED ereere ai bt metan e e tit 45 Page 6 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Paper Indicator tee Dy ic eee Se ie Oe SE e 45 Typical operation LED Wie Le eu LTE 46 Fault tele 46 Fuliv re overabie and Status eege EES 46 SOMII FECOVOTADIO ic akee E Eee E REEERE A TEREE R AERE 46 Non recoverable 2 ee aed dat eae eae 46 EEGEN 47 Power Saving EE 47 El EE 47 i e EE 47 EE e le EE 48 Testing the Printer Overview ENEE 49 Using Self Test Configuration and Hex Dump Mode 49 Entering Self Test and Configuration mode nn 49 Testing TNE die EE 49 TEST RE IPU Lis tied van a Seek e e p b sa l p 49 WES IARC o TOS edt iii i jA E 49 Maintaining the Electronic Journal nnn nn nnnnnn nn nar nn tna 50 Config rnng ele ti ji a a 50 EES COM ATG tas ege eege Zeene Saad Ze ees 50 Factory Tester nenie Nee cate coat E aes Ca lo Ne cat cae a cian atte Coe lc sale Cac ahd 50 kee Gump Mode il i ri i e a hun EES 51 Entering Hex dump Mode i242 ai eh a 51 Hex dump TORN AL i EE 51 Hex Dump by command ii misset sitta ot it ek ti Miet stab fat 51 Level 0 RTE e e TEE 51 Gold Power Qis Ma ttt aa d i E E vale eehbees 51 Boot Loader Maintenance Mode AAA 52 Configuring Your Model 9000 Printer sssrnennenzannenzennennennennnnnnznn 53 Configuration Mode Overview kee 53
305. irmware updates and other maintenance and configuration operations Maintenance mode may be entered by a series of host commands or it may be entered manually To manually enter the maintenance hold the paper sensor down while the paper cover is open and turn the power switch on Level 0 diagnostics will be run and the power indicator will display a very slow double blink pattern If the error Indicator comes on some type of level 0 error was detected In maintenance mode the firmware may be loaded or reconfigured and fonts added or changed For a complete list of operations available refer to the maintenance mode programmer s guide The printer does not need to be functional for maintenance mode to function Page 52 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Configuring Your Model 9000 Printer Configuration Mode Overview There are two ways to configure the Model 9000 printer the first is to use the manual configuration sequence by using the keypad controls and the second is to use TransAct s remote configuration software TransAct Technologies offers the use of a remote CONFIG program as a fast easy way for system integrators to configure or reconfigure your Model 9000 printer To obtain more information or the latest version of the CONFIG program call our Sales Department or Technical Support Most Frequent Configuration Incompatibilities Parallel Printer Emulation Carriage Return Options Serial
306. is a standard feature with all Model 9000 Printers Cutter tvpe 100 10937 Rotarv Rev F Page 27 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Media width 3 13 02 inches 79 5 4 5 mm Media thickness range 0 0025 to 0 0035 inch Cut to line of print 0 70 inch Cutter life 1 000 000 cuts Partial Cut tab 125 inches 0625 inches right edge of receipt Cut time Less than 350 milliseconds Top of Form Marks The Model 9000 is equipped with a top of form sensor For this function to function correctly the paper must have a top of form mark where the receipt is to be cut The mark must be on the left back or the paper When viewed from the front and be at least Va inch wide and at least 1 2 inch wide Top Minimum black mark size 0 375 inch High 0 5 inch wide No gap should show to the edge of the paper Cut point 0 75 inch clear zone As viewed from the back of paper re IE Black dots may repeat from every 1 inch to up to every 12 inches Figure 2 Top of Form Marking requirements Note The Black dot repeat length should be configured into the printer to prevent excessive paper being wasted during automatic black dot sensing Page 28 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Buzzer A buzzer is provided as a standard feature It is triggered upon command from the host terminal to make a sound loud enough to be heard under noisy conditions
307. it is possible that other generators will generate different barcode patterns that are equivalent Encoding scheme ASCII double digit numerics 4 ASCII values 0 127 8 Extended ASCII values 128 16 255 C40 Upper case alphanumeric 5 33 Lower case and special 10 66 characters Text Lower case alphanumeric 5 33 Upper case and special 10 66 characters X12 ANSI X12 EDI data set 5 33 EDIFACT ASCII values 32 94 6 Base 256 All byte values 0 255 8 encoded as two C40 values as result of use of a shift character encoded as two Text values as result of use of a shift character Table 19 Encoding schemes for ECC 200 kk Page 154 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Data Matrix barcodes are fixed sizes and depending on how the data compresses two different strings with the same character count may print different size barcodes It is possible to select a minimum barcode size and unused data locations will be filled with pad data Data Matrix Commands There are two version of the command one is null terminated and the other allows a length to be specified Note that the length is a two byte field as the symbol may contain more than 256 characters Function Data Matrix ASCII ESC b lt 28 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 28 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 28 gt information NUL Function Data Matrix
308. ited to be from 1 to 2048 characters Alternate Command Function PDF 417 ASCII ESC b lt 10 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 10 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 10 gt information NUL BIN ARNOA PE Wit BAT BA E ESC b lt 10 gt TransAct Technologies Inc NUL TransAct Technologies Inc Figure 41 PDF 417 Example 100 10937 Rev F Page 151 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Truncated PDF 417 Truncated PDF417 is two dimensional 2D multi row barcode derived from PDF417 A truncated PDF417 symbol uses less area than the normal PDF417 barcode as the right hand side of the symbol is removed or truncated This option should be used where damage to the barcode is unlikely as it is not as easily read ad normal PDF417 The form of the command is as follows Function Truncated PDF 417 ASCII ESC b lt 88 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 38 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 38 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Where the data length is nH 256 nL The length is limited to be from 1 to 150 characters Alternate Command Function Truncated PDF 417 ASCII ESC b lt 39 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 39 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 39 gt information NUL ERJA l H date ue ESC b lt 39 gt TransAct Technologies Inc NUL F
309. ith an FNC1 and that the compression is slightly altered GS1 data formatting and compaction are active and the input must follow the GS1 rules f K 4BH 75D HRI On and Font f 0 Off F 1 Medium f 2 Larger f 3 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command Note that this command referances font offset by 1 Note The normal HRI options do not affect Composite barcodes Composite barcode HRI may be on or off and you may select the font HRI is only available below barcode Page 194 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Legacy Commands Function Set bar code height ASCIl ESC EM B lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 42H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 66 gt lt n gt IPCL amp BH lt m gt Description The ESC EM B lt n gt command sets the bar code height where lt n gt 24 are the number dots The default is n 4 and results in a barcode that is about 0 47 inches high Function Set bar code width ASCII ESC EM W lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 57H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 87 gt lt n gt IPCL amp BW lt m gt Description The ESC EM w lt n gt command sets the minimum bar width The value may be between 1 and 8 The default is 3 Note A value of 1 may result in barcodes that are unreadable with some readers An alternate version of this command is available for Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes Interleave
310. itialize the printer ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 40H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 64 gt Description The ESC command initializes the printer All settings including character font and line spacing are canceled 100 10937 Rev F Page 201 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide BEL Audio alert ASCII BEL Hexadecimal 07H Decimal lt gt IPCL amp BL EPOS BEL Description When enabled the BEL command starts the audio alert sequence The default is a single sound lasting the period of time defined by the audio alert setting If the audio alert is off it does not function ESC BEL Configure audio alert ASCII ESC BEL mus lt n gt lt n3 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 07H mus lt n gt lt n3 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt gt lt Ny gt lt N2 gt lt Ng gt IPCL None EPOS None Description The ESC BEL lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt command alters the way the audio alert sounds The default is a single sound lasting the period of time defined by the audio alert setting The ESC BEL ms lt nz gt lt n3 gt command allows the sound to be altered Where lt n1i gt _ is the number of alert cycles lt n2 gt is the on time of the alert cycle in ten Ms intervals lt n3 gt is the off time of the alert cycle in ten Ms intervals ESC p 5 Enable disable paper feed ASCII ESC p 5 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 70H 35H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 53 gt lt n gt Range Osns255 Description
311. jy bata Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Change History Rev A Initial release Sept 2011 Rev B Rev C Rev D Rev E Rev F Nov 2011 Updated the error indicator section Corrected the Data matrix Control command Minor typos Renamed FST to Model Updated the error indicator section Updated the configuration section Dec 2011 Typo corrections Removed configurable cash drawers Epson only Clarified Interface adapter changing instructions Feb 2012 Updated the difference section between the iTherm280 and then M9000 Added USB Troubleshooting Corrected a few typo s March 2012 Removed Right to Left Entry mode Added a note to the ESCJIEMJER command Added a few captions Added Top of form marking requirements to the media section Note Universal color graphics is not compatible with Page Mode Julv 2012 Added documentation for the RSS Stacked HRI control commands Added notes about small buffer configurations while using USB Added documentation for additional page mode commands Added an additional format for some barcode HRI It puts first and last digit of some integrated barcode HRI outside the barcode rather than a subscripted character under the barcode Added Powered USB adapter information Add documentation for the USB CDC Abstract Control Model support Page 2 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Federal Communication
312. k boundaries and is the primary protocol that establishes the Internet IP defines addressing methods and structures for information encapsulation The Transmission Control Protocol TCP is one of the core protocols of the Internet Protocol Suite TCP is one of the two original components of the suite complementing the Internet Protocol IP and therefore the entire suite is commonly referred to as TCP IP TCP provides the service of exchanging data directly between two network hosts whereas IP handles addressing and routing message across one or more networks In particular TCP provides reliable ordered delivery of a stream of bytes from a program on one computer to another program on another computer Other applications which do not require reliable data stream service may use the User Datagram Protocol UDP which provides a datagram service that emphasizes reduced latency over reliability The Model 9000 uses TCP IP port 9100 to connect the host system to the printer and then use the native printer protocol sometimes referred to as Raw Data to communicate with the printer The host system opens a TCP IP connection to the printer and by sending data to the printer on port 9100 and listening to returned information on port 9100 and send commands and data to the printer and receive status back The User Datagram Protocol UDP is one of the core members of the Internet Protocol Suite With UDP a computer applications can send and receive mes
313. l lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 73 gt Range d 0 4 72 The ESC command will set the character spacing in points where one point is defined as 1 72 of an inch This command will force mono space printing It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used This command differs from the ESC J command in that all characters are centered on the fixed cell size It the character is too big for the cell it may overlap the previous and next character The character size is not adjusted to fit the cell If d 0 variable spacing is selected NOTE If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing the characters will overlap Variable spacing is recommended 100 10937 Rev F Page 253 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Set Character spacing in points All ASCII ESC i lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 69H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 105 gt Range d 0 16 255 The ESC i command will set the character spacing in points where Lo point is defined as 1 288 of an inch This command will force mono space printing It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above This spacing will
314. l 9000 Ethernet Adapter supports the UDP protocol to handle printer status without the TCP IP interface being open When Activated the Ethernet Adapter will report printer status to the specified host without the TCP IP link being open The Ethernet Adapter uses IP port 9110 to report status and control the UDP interface The Ethernet Adapter II supports 6 commands and 10 reports Each command has an associated response report plus there are 4 additional printer status reports See the Ethernet adapters user s manual 100 10938 for more information The default iTherm Ethernet Adapter s UDP IP port is 9110 however this is configurable At this time the UDP server in the iTherm Ethernet Adapter is similar to the UPnP service in that it does not require an exact match for source or destination IP addresses It will respond to IP broadcasts local subnet broadcasts and the Ethernet Adapter s specific IP address In addition the source port need not match the Ethernet adapters provided that it is directed to the Ethernet Adapters UDP IP port The Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP is a networking protocol for distributed collaborative hypermedia information system HTTP is the foundation of data communication for the World Wide Web The Model 9000 printer used HTTP to provice the ability to configure the Ethernnet interface adapter using any standard web browser The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is an auto configuration protocol
315. l get unexpected results If the file does not exist the command is ignored Any extension may be used for a codepage map however it is best to use the CPM extension with a descriptive filename recommended For example ISO8859 1 CPM would be a good choice for the ISO8859 1 code page Double Byte and Multi Byte Code Page Description Files In ASCII mode the Model 9000 Printer supports double byte code pages Currently there are 4 double byte codepages available and one multi byte Double Byte code pages available are Code page 932 936 949 and 950 Multi bvte code page available are GB18030 2000 These code pages require an appropriate Unicode font be loaded that support all the characters in the requested code page Due to the large number of characters in these code pages These files are not supported in a customer definable ASCII form like the Code page descriptions files described above They are compiled and compressed into a 2 or 3 file code description set One file is like the Code page description file in that it may be referenced just like the normal code page description files The other two files are double byte and multi byte decode files and are referenced in the master code page description These files not distributed with the standard printer but are available from Transact upon request Code page selection In ASCII mode the Model 9000 Printer supports over 40 different international character sets by default In IBM an
316. l letter eth 0147 Latin capital letter n with hacek DOT Latin small letter n with tilde 0148 Latin small letter n with hacek oof2 Latin small letter o with grave accent 0149 Latin small letter n preceded by apostrophe 00f3 Latin small letter o with acute accent 014a Latin capital letter eng 00f4 Latin small letter o with circumflex accent 014b Latin small letter eng 00f5 Latin small letter o with tilde 014c Latin capital letter o with macron 00f6 Latin small letter o with diaeresis 014d Latin small letter o with macron 00f7 division sign 014e Latin capital letter o with breve 00f8 Latin small letter o with oblique stroke 014f Latin small letter o with breve 0of9 Latin small letter u with grave accent 0150 Latin capital letter o with double acute accent 00fa Latin small letter u with acute accent 0151 Latin small letter o with double acute accent DO Latin small letter u with circumflex accent 0152 Latin capital ligature o with e oofc Latin small letter u with diaeresis 0153 Latin small ligature o with e O0fd Latin small letter y with acute accent 0154 Latin capital letter r with acute accent O0fe Latin small letter thorn 0155 Latin small letter r with acute accent OOff Latin small letter y with diaeresis 0156 Latin capital letter r with cedilla 0100 Latin capital letter a with macron 0157 Latin small letter r with cedilla 0101 Latin small letter a with macron 0158 Latin capital letter r with hacek 0102 Latin capital letter a with breve 0159 Lati
317. l qa 188 QRCode EENS esa kt a a Ges etd Act eats a end 189 Maxicode Print Option St ie iure i a da ati a 190 Aztec Print OPTIONS isa i EW rt a b gt ir d E 191 Code One Print OPONSE tai ie se a a ege e 192 Databar RSS Print Options siti si a Reeg 193 Composite Barcode Print Options nanna 194 Legacy EELER kee ee EE 195 Identifying Barcode Processing Ermors na 197 Miscellaneous Printer Control 199 USB Recovery Watch Dog sas ii sieq ice hick Matin cent Ae a 207 lu 209 Sireno ealo UT Ee et 209 Serial and USB Mode Inquire ENEE 209 IEEE 1284 Mode e De 209 Inq ire Command EE 210 ESC POS EE 226 Differences between Epson TM T88V and Model 9000 en 226 Page ModE eet Anita f ta ata ila ilar alte 226 Undocumented Epson Commande AAA 226 BAF O ES nenene i E R a aa 226 Real time EE 226 Epson Licensed Firmware eent Ree EE a a ln a E 227 Model 9000 Citizen Emulation essesiccccoceces anideniiccheoradajudacten nuentad nsdesieartacsaneiedeeeauueredanebes 227 Model 9000 Star Emulation rna 227 Model 9000 Axiohm Emulation ege 227 Model 9000 Graphics a i a a a ENENKNN NEE EEN ANN e 228 Printing CARA e 228 G aracier e Te 228 APA Lara eebe eier 230 Procedure for APA SPIERT eicecc 2 ices ege e e d Dj E de egENier 230 POlOMGNABNICS ca B nee tein Basle an Ge eege altos 230 Procedure for color horizontal graphies nn 231 Model 9000 Universal Color Graphics AAA 233 et 233 To generate a print file issisii
318. light down and right f002 fl ligature 2510 box drawings light down and left fb01 Fi ligature 2514 box drawings light up and right fb02 FI ligature 2518 box drawings light up and left 251c box drawings light vertical and right Note This information is based on the Microsoft s Tvpographv web page Page 324 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix G GB18030 Character Addresses There are 28575 Characters in this set and does not use address greater than OxFFFF UNICODE CHARACTER 0070 LATIN SMALL LETTER P 0020 SPACE 0071 LATIN SMALL LETTER Q 0021 EXCLAMATION MARK 0072 LATIN SMALL LETTER R 0022 QUOTATION MARK 0073 LATIN SMALL LETTER S 0023 NUMBER SIGN 0074 LATIN SMALL LETTER T 0024 DOLLAR SIGN 0075 LATIN SMALL LETTER U 0025 PERCENT SIGN 0076 LATIN SMALL LETTER V 0026 AMPERSAND 0077 LATIN SMALL LETTER W 0027 APOSTROPHE 0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X 0028 LEFT PARENT
319. lt Wau gt lt HL gt lt Hp gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 87 gt lt XO_ gt lt XOy gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOu gt lt W1 gt lt Wu gt lt Hi gt lt Hy gt IPCL None EPOS ESC W Description This command is similar Set Print Area in Page Mode command above however it will force the complete page to be printer rather than only what is used It will define sub pages however is intended to set the initial page size Where lt XOL gt lt XOp gt the x direction offset Min 0 lt YO gt lt YOu gt the y direction offset Min 0 lt W_ gt lt W gt the width in dots Max 576 lt H gt lt H gt the height in dots Max 3000 This command should always be sent before or immediately after select page mode command and will define the initial page size This command differs from the Set Print Area in Page Mode command in that it does not allow the page to be shortened The complete page is printed even if it is not used Cut to print offset 0 7 in or 18mm Start of page definition Max width is 576 dots End of page definition Bottom most print data Cut point after is not printed definition Figure 11 Defined Page mode printed area 100 10937 Rev F Page 103 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function Set Print Area in Page Mode Legacy Support Command ASCII ESC u Ou Wisa us HipeHp Hexadecimal 1BH 75H lt O gt lt Oy gt lt W gt lt Wy gt lt HL gt lt Hp gt Decimal lt 2 7 gt lt 117 gt lt O _ gt lt
320. lt n gt 1BH 43H amp SI lt m gt 76 lt Mo gt Reverse line feed ESC 1BH 5DH amp LR 77 Character Pitch Set character spacing in points ESC I lt n gt 1BH 2BH 49H None 253 Set character spacing in points ESC i lt n gt 1BH 2BH 69H None 254 Set character spacing in points with ESC J lt n gt 1BH 2BH 4AH None 254 adjustment Set character spacing in 1 4 points with ESC j lt n gt 1BH 2BH 6AH None 255 adjustment Begin 10 CPI character pitch DC2 12H amp F3 79 Begin 12 CPI character pitch ESC 1BH 3AH amp F2 79 Begin 17 CPI character pitch SI OFH amp F 1 79 Set character pitch ESC P lt n gt EEN amp F lt n gt 80 Set inter character spacing ESC V lt n gt 1BH 56H none 81 Begin 24 CPI character pitch ESC SI 1BH OFH amp F4 79 Select Minimum character Height and ESC p lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 70H none 256 Width in 1 4 points Set left right print margins ESC X lt n1 gt lt n2 gt 1BH 58H none 199 n Left margin n Right margin Character Font Select font ESC 3 lt ID gt 1BH 2BH 31H none 249 Select font by name ESC N 1BH 2BH 4EH none 249 Filename lt 0 gt Define Stacked Font ESC S lt ID gt 1BH 2BH 53H none 249 lt IDo gt Set stroke font Brush Size ESC B lt w gt 1BH 2BH 42H none 256 Select Minimum character Height and ESC P lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 50H none 255 Width in points Page 64 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide P
321. m being sent from the host The print control software takes information from the buffer as it needs it and can use it When the buffer output function finds that the buffer is getting low it notifies the communication driver that the information flow can be resumed if it was stopped and allows more information to be placed in the buffer The Model 9000 printer has a configurable input buffer The printer can be configured to allow from 40 to 8196 bytes of input buffer Consequently up to 8196 characters or control codes can be sent to the printer before they are interpreted and printed In effect the host computer can get 8196 characters ahead of the printer In all cases the buffer resumes communications when it is half empty For example if the buffer is configured to be 2048 the printer will signal stop when 2048 bytes are in the buffer resume will be signaled when 1024 bytes remain Inquire commands are preprocessed which means they are found in the input data stream and acted upon as they are received The status returned is valid as of the time the command is received This is termed real time status even though inquire commands are preprocessed and still placed in the buffer Real time status assures that data is not lost when the inquire sequence is part of another command However the buffer may also be filled by inquire commands if the printer is waiting for some activity Page 288 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s G
322. macro stop command stops saving data and initializes internal pointers for the next print To store the data in the nonvolatile flash it must be named and saved by one of the user store save commands When the macro buffer is inserted into the data stream configuration commands like font or pitch changes remain in effect after the macro is processed Illegal commands are placed in the buffer and take up space Horizontal color graphics should be sent to the printer compressed If the data is not compressed it is saved in the macro buffer If the buffer is saved into the user store nonvolatile flash there must be enough room in the user store for all of the data As user store space is used the macro buffer will be larger than the available space in user store Only the used space is saved but it is possible to define a macro that does not fit in the remaining user store space 20 The actual buffer is smaller because of the overhead IPCL commands are converted by the printer into an equivalent ESC code and then placed in the save buffer The equivalent ESC code should be used to calculate the size of the save buffer data Page 126 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC g lt 0 gt ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC g lt 1 gt ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC g 2 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description ESC g lt 3 gt A
323. mand selects the font for printing This command is used to select a previously loaded font based on its alias not exist the previous font will remain in effect Note Selecting font 100 will select bit map font 0 101 is bitmap font 1 and so on Up to 7 bitmap fonts may be present Note Selecting font 0 will select the linked font If the selected font does Function Define a Stacked or Linked Font All ASCII ESC S lt ID gt lt ID2 gt lt ID2 gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 53H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 83 gt Description The ESC S command defines but does not select a stacked or linked font set This command will define a linked list of previously loaded and aliased fonts into a linked font stack The font ID is the same ID as in the select font command Up to 8 fonts may be linked The last entry must be 0 If the font does not exist it will not be made part of the link O Note You must select font 0 to activate the linked font Note You can not use bitmap fonts as part of a linked font Function Select Font by name All ASCII ESC N lt FileName gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 31H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 51 gt Description The ESC N command selects the font for printing by file name This command is used to select a previously loaded font by its file name If the selected font does not exist the previous font will remain in effect Note This command may be undesirable beca
324. maps assign characters to a particular address built into the printer Occasionally an application needs to redefine a character or group of characters in a code page The Model 9000 Printer allows the map for any code page to be redefined or replaced The define character set command allows any character or group of characters to be replaced with any other printable character Unicode addressing is used The redefine character set command is used as follows S lt 3 gt lt 0 gt lt 35 gt lt 90 gt lt 1 gt AAAAA AA AAAAAN 346 Character in the Master Set 1 256 90 35 Character 3 bytes to follow 0 256 3 The new map remains until the printer is power cycled or the character set is redefined The code page and character set commands completely redefine the table 18 100 9785 Page 90 Note This command functions by redefining the code page translation table if Unicode UTF encoding is active all code page selection and modification commands do not functional and have no effect The internal character map is provided in the Master Character Set Definitions Guide PN Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Print Control Characters ESC ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Print control character ESC lt n gt 1BH 5EH lt n gt
325. mmer s Guide Parallel Interface Your printer features two parallel interface options Programming Codes e An IEEE 1284 A 25 pin D shell connector with pin outs that interface to a standard IBM PC parallel printer interface with a one to one cable e An IEEE 1284 B which is a standard Centronics 36 pin connector Both interface cards provide a dual cash drawer interface The following table lists interface signals and corresponding pins 25 pin Connector 36 pin Signal Description Direction Connector Pin 1 Pin 1 STROBE Clock data to printer Host to Printer Pins 2 9 Pins 2 9 DO D7 Data Host to Printer Pin 10 Pin 10 ACK Printer accepted data Printer to Host Pin 11 Pin 11 BUSY Printer busy Printer to Host Pin 12 Pin 12 PE Paper Out Status Printer to Host Pin 13 Pin 13 SLCT Printer selected Printer to Host Pin 14 Pin 14 AUTOFD Autofeed paper Host to Printer Pin 15 Pin 32 FAULT Printer error Printer to Host Pin 16 Pin 31 INIT Initialize printer Host to Printer Pin 17 Pin 36 SLIN Select printer Host to Printer Pin 17 FG Frame ground Printer to Host Pin 18 5V Peripheral logic high Printer to Host Pins 18 25 Pins 16 19 30 GND Ground Table 8 Parallel Interface Pin definitions Signal Levels Voltage levels 0 V and 5 V nominal Logic levels Logic one Driver 2 4 V to 5 V Receiver 2 0 V to 5 V Logic zero Driver 0 V to 0 4 V Receiver 0 V to 0 8 V Cu
326. mp RI n 2 amp RF n 1 amp RN n 0 EPOS ESC V lt n gt Description The ESC P lt n gt command sets the print font to a rotated 90 or 270 font Where n n 0 Normal n 1 Rotate 90 n 2 Rotate 270 100 10937 Rev F Page 83 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Character Sets and Code Pages The Model 9000 Printer is primarily intended to be used in Unicode based systems However to provide legacy support the printer supports 8 bit and double byte ASCII encoding with code pages When not using Unicode or double byte encoding the printer is restricted to the 8 bit ASCII character set To support international languages the characters that are assigned to each of the 256 possible locations can be remapped to any character in the Unicode standard Typically the first 32 characters are reserved for control characters The next 72 are typically fixed to alpha numeric and punctuation The upper 128 characters are typically redefined to characters that support the specific language or country These mappings are generally referred to as codepages The Model 9000 provides several legacy commands to select a country code or codepage maps However they all simply select an ASCII to Unicode translation map Several predefined mappings to provide legacy support are internal to the printer but the majority of the maps are placed in the printer s file system This allows any preexisting codepage mapping to be def
327. n an asynchronous fashion where information can be placed in it at any rate and retrieved from it at any rate but the information order is not altered All buffers have a finite size and if information is put in faster than it is removed the buffer will overflow To avoid overflow a flow control mechanism is required The print control mechanism is the remainder of the printer hardware and control software It interprets control codes and operates the control panel print head and cash drawer interface 100 10937 Rev F Page 287 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide The following figure illustrates the four basic parts of printer flow control Printer ae Com munications port ENQ processor Print buffer Print control Serial or parallel Data SA Data connection ata Data SS Print head Status Status Getting full getting empty Figure 78 Printer Communications Buffer Flow The communication port is either serial or parallel and is controlled by a software communication driver The driver receives data and returns requested status As information is received from the host data is taken from the communication port hardware by the driver preprocessed to look for status inquire commands and placed in the buffer When the buffer input function finds that the buffer is getting full it notifies the communication driver to implement flow control Flow control attempts to stop further information fro
328. n capital letter z with hacek 0127 Latin small letter h with stroke 017e Latin small letter z with hacek 0128 Latin capital letter i with tilde 017f Latin small letter long s 0129 Latin small letter i with tilde 0192 Latin small letter script f florin sign 012a Latin capital letter i with macron Otfa Latin capital letter a with ring above and acute 012b Latin small letter i with macron 01fb Latin small letter a with ring above and acute 012c Latin capital letter i with breve O1fc Latin capital ligature ae with acute 012d Latin small letter i with breve O1fd Latin small ligature ae with acute 012e Latin capital letter i with ogonek Olfe Latin capital letter o with stroke and acute 012f Latin small letter i with ogonek 01 ff Latin small letter o with stroke and acute 0130 Latin capital letter i with dot above 02c6 nonspacing circumflex accent 0131 Latin small letter i without dot above 02c7 modifier letter hacek 0132 Latin capital ligature ij 02c9 modifier letter macron 0133 Latin small ligature ij 02d8 breve 0134 Latin capital letter j with circumflex 02d9 dot above 0135 Latin small letter j with circumflex 02da ring above 0136 Latin capital letter k with cedilla 02db ogonek 0137 Latin small letter k with cedilla 02dc nonspacing tilde 0138 Latin small letter kra Odd modifier letter double prime Page 322 Rev F 100 10937
329. n concurrently however only one file handle is reserved for access by command Therefore only one file may be accessed by the host system at a time You must close any previously open file before you can open another one A single file may not be open with two handles If the file is open internally you cannot open it externally For example you can t open an internal font Note True type fonts stored in the printer are generally protected by copyrights To protect the copy right owner True Type font files cannot be read from the printer They can be deleted and as you can t read them you probably can t replace them Page 268 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control File System commands Function Open File command All ASCII ESC RS O lt Mode gt lt space gt lt Filename gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 4FH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 79 gt Mode Mode of operation r for read or w for write FileName File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension Description The ESC RS O command will select and open a file for the selected operation If the file being opened for write exists the existing file will be overwritten Note that only one file may be open for external operations at any one time The Mode and FileName take the following format and must be null terminated r Filename ext lt 0 gt Valid Modes are p Read
330. n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 11 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS GS VT lt n gt Where n lt n gt is the number of inches to feed while looking for the black marker Description The ESC VT command performs feeds the paper until the black dot is positioned as configured The Model 9000 keeps track of the location of the black dot and will feed paper until the black dot is positioned as configured There are three configurable Black Dot parameters The Dot Width and the Offset may be adjusted to operate with a specific paper The Calibration is preset and should not be changed Function Adjusting the width and offset of the Black Dot ASCII ESC W nl nh m Hexadecimal 1B 7E 57 nl nh m Decimal 27 126 87 nl nh m Where n The offset adjustment of the Black dot in n 203 inches where n nl 256 nh Default is 304 or 1 5 inches Values greater than 368 will set n to 368 m The Width of the black dot in m 203 inches The default is 76 or 0 375 inches Values less than 51 will be ignored 100 10937 Rev F Page 77 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide The offset adjustment is the position of the black dot in relation to the cut point If n 0 the cut point will be in the center of the black dot If the value of n 304 the cut point will be 1 5 inches above the black dot Note This command may be issued as part of an application If the values in the configuration match the requested values no operation occurs
331. n small letter r with hacek 0103 Latin small letter a with breve 015a Latin capital letter s with acute accent 0104 Latin capital letter a with ogonek 015b Latin small letter s with acute accent 0105 Latin small letter a with ogonek 015c Latin capital letter s with circumflex 0106 Latin capital letter c with acute accent 015d Latin small letter s with circumflex 0107 Latin small letter c with acute accent 015e Latin capital letter s with cedilla 0108 Latin capital letter c with circumflex 015f Latin small letter s with cedilla 0109 Latin small letter c with circumflex 0160 Latin capital letter s with hacek 010a Latin capital letter c with dot above 0161 Latin small letter s with hacek 010b Latin small letter c with dot above 0162 Latin capital letter t with cedilla 010c Latin capital letter c with caron 0163 Latin small letter t with cedilla 010d Latin small letter c with caron 0164 Latin capital letter t with hacek 010e Latin capital letter d with hacek 0165 Latin small letter t with hacek 010f Latin small letter d with hacek 0166 Latin capital letter t with stroke 0110 Latin capital letter d with stroke 0167 Latin small letter t with stroke 0111 Latin small letter d with stroke 0168 Latin capital letter u with tilde 0112 Latin capital letter e with macron 0169 Latin small letter u with tilde 0113 Latin small letter e with macron 016a Latin capital letter u with macron 0114 Latin capital letter e with breve 016b Latin small letter u with macr
332. ndicates no error was detected ENQ lt 38 gt Inquire currently loaded firmware file name ASCII IENQI lt 38 gt Hexadecimal 05H 26H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 38 gt Function The ENQ lt 38 gt command returns the file name of the currently loaded firmware Response ACK lt 38 gt lt Len 40 gt Firmware Id String lt 0 gt ENQ lt 39 gt Inquire update Process status and CRC ASCII IENQI lt 39 gt Hexadecimal 05H 27H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 39 gt Function The ENQ lt 39 gt command returns File and POR system status Response ACK lt 39 gt lt n gt lt I gt lt le gt fa za Where lt 39 gt is the echo of command ID lt n gt is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF lt I gt CBT Update Process Status 0x00 Idle 0x01 Get Name 0x11 Fault 0x03 Get Data 0x04 Write 0x05 Done 0x15 Not Processed 0x25 Done No Validation requested 0x12 Bad CRC 0x06 Roll Back performed 0x08 Not yet done lt r gt CBL Update Process Status 0x00 Idle 0x01 Get Name Page 222 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes 0x11 Fault 0x03 Get Data 0x04 Write 0x05 Done 0x15 Not Processed 0x25 Done No Validation requested 0x12 Bad CRC 0x06 Roll Back performed 0x08 Not yet done lt 3L gt lt 44 gt Current CBL process CRC ENQ lt 40 gt Inquire Current Firmware CRC ASCII ENG lt 40 gt Hexadecimal 05H 28H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 40
333. ndows 1252 Latin 1 sssrnsenanzannennannennennennennenzanz 333 TAR Xi a a ia 335 100 10937 Rev F Page 13 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Figures Figure 1 Receipt Printing Tear off Position 27 Figure 2 Top of Form Marking requirements ENNEN 28 Figure 3 Cash Drawer Pin Definitions seer eeeeennaaaeeeeeeeeeteeas 35 Figure 4 Windows Print Diver iii da hates ou edna a dc ba Gua kadud 42 Figure SO POS OP UP OS EE 43 Fig re 6 POSPrinter OCX eege cence EE 44 Figure 7 Top of Form Marking requirements ENNEN 57 Figure 8 Page Mode Entry Orientations 98 Figure 9 Page mode Set printable area 102 Figure 10 Default Page mode printed area 102 Figure 11 Defined Page mode printed area 103 FIGURE 12 G0de 89 EXGINple i is B ee 131 Figure 13 Code 39 Extended Example nanna 131 Figure 14 Code 39 full 128 character encoding sse eseennnnzennnenzzznnnnnnzze nanna 132 Figure 15 Code 128 Manual Encoding Exvample nn nn nnnn 133 Figure 16 Code 128 encoding NET 135 Figure 17 Automatic Encoding Example i sir nti tg ict 136 Figure 18 Code 128 FNC encoding ssi aca ed deed deeg EE 136 Figure 19 Interleaved 2 of 5 Example sr 137 Figure 20 UPC A Examples i i fak isba sie fe kie B ner nne 137 Figure 21 UPC E Zero Suppression Format AAA 138 Fi ure 22 UPO TT 138 Piguie 23 WER Examples sie nn aan ae aa cea Aa dante d 139 Fi re 24 BANS TEE 140 Figure 25 bau 140 Figure 26 ITF 14 Examples i
334. ne line feed ESC J lt n gt 1BH 4AH amp FM ms 72 lt Mo2 gt lt M3 gt 100 10937 Rev F Page 63 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Description ASCII Hex IPCL Page equivalent code Set 1 8 inch line spacing ESC 0 1BH 30H amp ST 72 Set 7 72 inch line spacing ESC 1 1BH 31H amp SG 73 Begin variable line spacing Enable ESC 2 1BH 32H none 73 ESC A lt n gt Set variable line spacing to n 216 inch ESC 3 lt n gt 1BH 33H amp SV ms 72 lt M2 gt lt M3 gt Set variable line spacing to n 72 inch ESC A lt n gt 1BH 41H none 73 Feed lt n gt lines at current spacing ESC d lt n gt 1BH 64H amp FL me 74 lt Mo gt Set vertical tab stops ESC B lt ni gt lt n gt 1BH 42H none 75 lt Nng3 gt lt ni gt 0 Vertical tab VT OBH amp VT 74 Form feed FF OCH amp FF 75 Feed to black dot IESCJIVTI 1BH 0BH None 77 Set top of form ESC 4 1BH 34H amp TF 75 Set form length in lines ESC C lt n gt 1BH 43H amp SL lt m gt 76 lt Mo gt Select Minimum character Height and ESC P lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 50H none 255 Width in points Select Minimum character Height and ESC p lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 70H none 256 Width in points Begin auto line feed n 0 end n 1 ESC 5 lt n gt 1BH 35H amp CA n 0 76 amp MA n 1 Set form length in inches ESC C NUL
335. ng See the table below for more information Note Once selected all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding even for non print commands Scalar Value 1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 3rd Byte 00000000 Oxxxxxxx OXXXXXXX OOOOOVVV yyxxxxxx 110yyyyy 10xxxxxx ZZZZYYYY YYXXXXXX 1110zzzz 10yyyyyy 10xxxxxx OOOLLLLL ZZZZVVVV yyxxxxxx 11110uuu 10uuzzzz 10yyyyyy 10xxxxxx 0x0010FFFF are valid in Unicode 5 0 Note Where UTF8 supports values greater than 16 bits Unless the UTF32 option al firmware is installed the printer will not support values greater than 65535 O Note Where values from 0x001FFFFF may be encoded only values up to Page 264 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Function Initiate Unicode UTF 8 Text only Encoding MBCS All ASCII ESC T Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 54H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 84 gt Description The ESC T command will put the printer into UTF 8 Text only character encoding mode of operation This mode is identical to the UTF 8 mode described above except commands and there parameters are not UTF encoded For example the following command would be used to select underline on ESC W 128 If true UTF 8 encoding were in effect the 128 parameter would be UTF encoded to ESC W 194 128 With UTF 8 Text only mode this command is simply ESC W 128 Note This command also applies to graphic data being
336. ng lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Page 120 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Flush information from user store ASCII ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt Base User Store or ESC US f EXT lt 0 gt Extended User Store Description The ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt command clears all of the information to the user store and frees the data space The ESC US f EXT lt 0 gt command clears all of the information in the extended the user store The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function Report on user store ASCII ESC US q lt 0 gt Description The ESC US q lt 0 gt prints or returns information about the contents of and available space in user store The configuration option prevents the occurrence of new user store data operation until the lock is manually reset and accidental deletion of the saved information The user defined character buffer and or user data buffer may be redefined and used but cannot be stored Note A configuration option is available that locks the user store data The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 User Store Commands Function Begin named macro record ASCII ESC US b lt Name gt lt 0 gt He
337. ng less paper than standard type fonts This type of font is sometimes referred to as a condensed font Selecting Character Size The Model 9000 provides two ways to specify character size The legacy or classic font selection method is based on dot matrix size The second method is based on the standard type points system The advantage of the type point system is that the print produced by the printer will match what is displayed by the host system as both use the same system for describing the characters produced Legacy or Classic Method With the classic method the application selects a character size and then sets the character spacing by adding or removing dot spaces between the characters Using the scaled font the Model 9000 provides 3 basic predefined character sizes The smallest is a 10x24 dot like font and is typically printed in pitches from 16 to 20 characters per inch CPI The next larger font is 13 x 24 dot like and is typically printed in pitches from 14 to 16 CPI The largest font is 14 x 24 dot like font and is typically printed at pitches from 10 to 14 CPI The Model 9000 always prints at 203 dots per inch dpi and always uses the scalable font to form characters The resulting characters are not necessarily exactly the dot size 33 Characters are dot like because thev are not guaranteed to be exactiv at an exact dot equivalent They are spaced in a fixed character cell that provides equivalent spacing and alignment as
338. ng mode the printer will put the rendered character at whatever spacing is requested even if they don t fit If the character is too big it will overlap the previous and next character To allow a fixed pitch operation that deals with small and large fixed pitch character the printer has a pseudo fixed pitch flag that will increase the spacing in multiples of the requested spacing until it fits 100 10937 Rev F Page 251 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide The following table lists the commands and how they interact Command Zero Character Character Cell Width Pseudo Fixed width height pitch flag ESC P Width 0 Same as From From Font No effect ESC p Height command ESC P Width From From Based on Will be used if ESC p Not Zero Command command set character previously set spacing and character command spacing is not being defined by the font ESC I Value 0 No effect No effect From Font Set Off but has ESC 1 no effect ESC I Value No effect No effect From Set Off ESC 1 Not zero Command ESC J Value 0 No effect No effect From Font Set On but has ESC j no effect ESC J Value No effect No effect A multiple of Set On ESC j Not zero the value defined by the command ESC I lt n gt From From As defined by Will be used if POR INI POR INI command previouslv set definition definition Table 29 Scalable font command in
339. nses will reflect the state of the printer when the error occurred Note 3 For this status request to function during a serious error the Buffer Full Only off line option should be selected Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 23 gt Inquire user store status ASCII IENQI lt 23 gt Hexadecimal 05H 17H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 23 gt Function The ENQ lt 23 gt command reports on the user store status Response ACK lt 23 gt lt Report gt lt 0 gt Where lt 23 gt is the echo of command ID The report is a null terminated string with the following format 12345 CR LF Free user store 12345 Type Name CR LF First entry etc 12345 Type Name CR LF Last entry lt 0 gt Type The type field describes the type of information M macro C character definition ENQ lt 24 gt Inquire Color status ASCII ENQ lt 24 gt Hexadecimal 05H 18H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 24 gt Function The ENQ lt 24 gt command reports Color Cartridge status Response ACK lt 24 gt lt Length 40 gt lt n gt lt N2 gt lt N3 gt Where lt 24 gt Is the echo of command lt N gt Secondary Paper Color 0 Not installed 1 Red 2 Green 4 Blue lt N2 gt Primary Paper Color 1 Red 2 Green 4 Blue 16 Black always Black lt N3 gt Pen Status bit 0 Not defined 0 always bit 1 Not defined 0 always bit 2 Not defined 0 always bit 3 Not defined 0 always bit 4 N
340. nt location tolerances or power requirements The information specified here is to aid in program development 5 Adhesive backed paper print speed is paper dependent Color paper print speed is paper dependent 7 Typical print on 80mm paper uses 576 of the 640 available dots Page 22 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Physical Characteristics EE Neo S LA DEE w KEE e o IH Oooo l wa TRA a rg W gg Dimensions in inches Weight Approximate weight 4 6 Ib Shipping weight 6 0 Ib 100 10937 Rev F Page 23 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Electrical Characteristics Internal AC Powered The Model 9000 Printer is designed to be AC self powered in domestic and international markets The printer is equipped with a universal input power supply that is designed to operate worldwide without modification Supplv Supplv Frequencv Rated Power Idle Current Printing Current Voltage Voltage Hz watts Lampe amps Rating Range VAC VAC 100 240 90 264 47 63 45 1A 120VAC 1 4 A 120VAC 05 A 240VAC 7 A 240VAC Table 2 Standard Power Input Requirements External Powered DC Optionally the Model 9000 Printer can be operated with 24 volt DC power supplied from a host through a
341. ntly active page area It allows the complete page or a portion to be erased and allow additional information to be added without the previous information being included Function Exit Page Mode ASCII FF or ESC SUB P Hexadecimal OCH or 1BH 1AH 50H Decimal lt 12 gt or lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 80 gt IPCL amp YFF EPOS FF Description This command exits page mode definition and starts the print process If the printer is not in page mode this command is treated as a normal form feed command restored to the values before the select page mode command All other Note When page mode finishes printing the left and right margins are format changes are preserved 100 10937 Rev F Page 107 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Graphic Modes The Model 9000 Printer conforms to the basic definition of IBM all points addressable APA graphic commands It is not designed to print large quantities of graphical data The printer only prints graphics that are 2 5 inches wide At this time there is nota graphics mode for Epson emulation The Model 9000 Printer always prints in one of the native resolutions of 104 x 96 208 x 96 104 x 192 or 208 x 192 dpi To provide compatibility with the standard IBM APA resolutions the printer internally modifies the graphics to print as expected The printer converts the vertical resolution by altering the ESC J command which is typically used for vertical spacing and adjusting i
342. o colors the horizontal graphic command interface gives color or gray scale support for printer graphics Color support is provided to establish a full color standard for future printers Color data is sent in one of three color planes Typically a red plane or scan line is sent then green and blue Gray scale support is provided by using the red green and blue as gray levels The sequence of lines defines one row of dots that is printed on the paper The horizontal graphic commands do not include resolution information Therefore only once before sending graphics data set the graphics resolution by sending the ESC command with a zero length no data The graphic resolution sets the internal graphic mode of the printer The printer stays in graphic mode until it is changed by another command Note that the bar code generation and other graphic commands change graphics mode The format of the horizontal graphic command follows ESC h Process horizontal graphics data ASCII ESC h lt color gt lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt Hexadecimal 1BH 68H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 104 gt IPCL None EPOS None Description The ESC h lt color gt lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt command processes horizontal graphic data where lt color gt is a byte that specifies the color of the data being sent lt color gt 0 Use Previously Selected Color 1 Red Gray 2 Green or Light Gray 4 Blue Dark Gray used for gray scale graph
343. o position the print on the page Function Set Page Mode Entry Position Legacy Support ASCII ESC o lt X_ gt lt Xy gt lt Y_ gt lt Yy gt lt F gt Hexadecimal 1BH 6FH lt X gt lt Xy gt lt Y_ gt lt Yy gt lt F gt Decimal lt 2 7 gt lt 111 gt lt X _ gt lt Xy gt lt Y_ gt lt Yy gt lt F gt IPCL None EPOS ESC W Description This command sets the horizontal and vertical entry position to anywhere on the page It is only valid in page mode If the value specified is beyond the page boundary the command is ignored X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the ESC t command and is not same as the page definition of X and Y The X and Y positions are in dots Y Vu 256 Vi dots from the top X Zu 256 Xi dots from the left The F parameter is a flag that specifies if this command is an absolute position command or relative to the current position If its value is lt 1 gt the command is processed as a relative position command and if its value is lt 0 gt the command is interpreted as an absolute position command Note You can also use the ESC J ESC M ESC d and ESC e commands to position the print on the page Function Set Page Mode Text Overlay Enhanced ASCII ESC SUB O lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 4FH lt n gt Decimal lt 2 gt lt 26 gt lt 79 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS None Description This command sets alters the way information is merged into the page If Overlay mode i
344. oad macro character 123 ESC US m lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save macro data 122 ESC US m lt Name gt Save macro data 120 ESC US q lt Name gt lt 0 gt Query user store 125 ESC US r lt Name gt lt 0 gt Run macro data 123 ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt Flag as a start up macro 120 ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt Flag start up macro 123 ESC Reverse line feed 77 ESC lt n gt Print control character 91 ESC lt lt n gt Enable data pass through 204 ESC lt lt n gt Enable print suppress 204 ESC lt n gt lt n gt lt n gt Set horizontal position 71 ESC lt y gt eps lt c gt Define user defined characters 91 ESC y c co Define user defined characters 120 ESC gt lt n gt Enable user defined characters 92 ESC 0 Set line spacing to 27 216 inch 72 ESC 1 Set line spacing to 7 72 inch 73 ESC 2 Enable variable line spacing 73 ESC 3 lt n gt Set line spacing to n 216 inch 72 ESC 4 Set top of form 75 ESC 5 lt 01 gt Begin auto line feed 76 ESC 8 Disable paper out sensor 199 ESC 9 Enable paper out sensor 199 ESC a lt n gt Set justification 71 ESC A lt n gt Set variable line spacing to n 72 inch 73 ESC b lt n gt Print bar code 128 131 133 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 155 157 160 161 163 164 166 167 168 169 170 171 184 186 187 18
345. ocumentation in previous section 8 9 Not supported 10 102 x 102dpi 1 horizontal 1 vertical pass 11 203 x 102 dpi 2 horizontal 1 vertical pass 12 102 x 203 dpi 1 horizontal 2 vertical passes 13 203 x 203 dpi 2 horizontal 2 vertical passes 14 15 16 Not supported Note 1 Only modes 10 thorough 13 should be selected for horizontal graphics Example Command Comment ESC lt 10 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Set resolution to 100x96 dpi ESC h lt 1 gt lt 9 gt lt 0 gt lt eight data bytes gt Send 8 bytes red pixels ESC h lt 2 gt lt 9 gt lt 0 gt lt eight data bytes gt Send 8 bytes green pixels ESC h lt 3 gt lt 9 gt lt 0 gt lt eight data bytes gt Send 8 bytes blue pixels LF Send line feed to force print of any buffered data not yet printed Note 2 Graphic data is committed to paper when more than 12 dot rows have been transmitted to the printer If less than 12 dot rows have been sent they are not printed until the line is terminated i e a line feed command is sent To make graphics faster to send and smaller to store several algorithms are included with the graphic command to compress the data 100 10937 Rev F Page 113 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Graphics Compression Although the printer compression algorithms are documented it is recommended that our Windows printer driver be used to generate a graphic image Our Windows printer driver selects the best compression me
346. ode the symbol start with an FNC1 and that the compression is slightly altered GS1 data formatting and compaction are active and the input must follow the GS1 rules f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command Page 192 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Databar RSS Print Options Function Databar Options ASCII ESC EM r lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 72H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 114 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way Databar barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f W 57H 87D Set the minimum element width v 1 10 3 is the default A width of 1 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically reduce the width until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f S 53H 83D Expanded Stack character segment width v 2 10 Default 3 f K 4BH 75D Activate Stacked symbol HRI 0 off 1 on By convention stacked barcode are not printed with HRI however if required they may be activated f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode Default 0x19 See General description above By default
347. of ring signal detection of the device D2 bBreak State of break detection mechanism of the device D1 bTxCarrier State of transmission carrier This signal corresponds to V 24 signal 106 and RS 232 signal DSR DO bRxCarrier State of receiver carrier detection mechanism of device This signal corresponds to V 24 signal 109 and RS 232 signal DCD Note Only DSR and DCD are supported by the printer Table 43 Serial state bit definitions When the Model 9000 is in the CDC class USB device support mode it looks to the host like a Legacy UART The printer does not actually do the USB to serial translation so many of the UART control features are implemented but don t really do anything useful This USB class is provided to support legacy applications that only support a legacy serial port interface 100 10937 Rev F Page 315 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide USB Transact Virtual Serial port In addition to the USB class 7 Printer support class and the USB class 3 CDC interface the Model 9000 supports a User class 255 interface that may be used with the Transact Virtual Serial port driver This driver was developed before the CDC standard was released and provides the same basic functionality The intent was to provide a virtual serial port in the PC to support legacy applications that do not support USB interfaces This interface is provided to to support existing applications already using the Transact Virtual Serial d
348. ogramming Codes All characters in code pages as well as character sets are addressed as zero through 255 Characters below 32 must be addressed with the ESC lt n gt command Code pages may be changed at any time and are active for all features including rotated print To allow other code pages to be created by an application a redefine character set command is provided As discussed above there are two commands for language selection in IBM mode The first is ESC which selects one of 19 international character sets The ESC command does not allow all of the possible character sets to be selected it is provided for compatibility with older programs only The second is ESC T which selects any code page In EPOS mode the ESC R command has been expanded to select any code page ESC Select international character set ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 21H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 33 gt lt n gt IPCL amp CS lt n gt EPOS ESC R lt n gt Description The ESC lt n gt command selects international character set lt n gt In standard mode the value of lt n gt is as follows Language ASCII slashed zero l Italian 65 A ASCII unslashed zero 74 J French Canadian 66 B British 75 K Spanish 67 C German 76 LU Swedish II 68 D French 77 M Swedish III DOE Swedish 78 N Swedish IV 70 F Danish 79 O Turkish 71 G Norwegian 80 P Swiss l 72 H Dutch A
349. oint size for the horizontal point size To provide fine control over character size two commands are available one of which specifies the size in points and the other of which specifies the size in 4 point increments If the font is a stroke font the boldness of the characters is controlled through variations in individual stroke width Diacritical Marks It is sometimes required that diacritical marks like accents be placed on characters The Unicode standard defines three basic ways to accomplish this 1 Define a character with the diacritical mark as part of the character definion 2 Define combining diacritical marks that may be added to existing characters 3 Define diacritical marks as characters that may be positioned and combined with other characters The first is the easiest as the character is addressed as a single character and renders the character with the the character with the diacritical mark The second defines a character with a negative position that places the character over the previous character Page 244 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts when it is rendered The third requires that the diacritical mark be positioned over the character The Unicode standard does not always make it clear how the diacritical marks are defined In general characters from 0x300 through 0x36F are defined as combining diacritical marks In this case the character to character to
350. on 0115 Latin small letter e with breve 016c Latin capital letter u with breve 0116 Latin capital letter e with dot above 016d Latin small letter u with breve 0117 Latin small letter e with dot above 016e Latin capital letter u with ring above 0118 Latin capital letter e with ogenek 016f Latin small letter u with ring above 0119 Latin small letter e with ogenek 0170 Latin capital letter u with double acute accent Otia Latin capital letter e with hacek 0171 Latin small letter u with double acute accent 011b Latin small letter e with hacek 0172 Latin capital letter u with ogonek 011c Latin capital letter g with circumflex 0173 Latin small letter u with ogonek 011d Latin small letter g with circumflex 0174 Latin capital letter w with circumflex Olle Latin capital letter g with breve 0175 Latin cmall letter w with circumflex 011f Latin small letter g with breve 0176 Latin capital letter y with circumflex 0120 Latin capital letter g with dot above 0177 Latin small letter y with circumflex 0121 Latin small letter g with dot above 0178 Latin capital letter y with diaeresis 0122 Latin capital letter g with cedilla 0179 Latin capital letter z with acute accent 0123 Latin small letter g with cedilla 017a Latin small letter z with acute accent 0124 Latin capital letter h with circumflex 017b Latin capital letter z with dot above 0125 Latin small letter h with circumflex 017c Latin small letter z with dot above 0126 Latin capital letter h with stroke 017d Lati
351. onth are available DD must be filled with two zeroes Note The fourth digit of this GS1 Application Identifier indicates the implied decimal point position Example 3100 Net weight in kg without a decimal point 3102 Net weight in kg with two decimal points Note FNC1 All GS1 Application Identifiers indicated with FNC1 are defined as variable length and must be limited by a Function 1 Symbol Character unless this Element String is the last one to be encoded in the symbol The printer will automatically insert FNC1 s when and as required Table 21 RSS GS1 Al Codes meaning requirements and restrictions The Model 9000 will do minimal validation of the Al fields to assure that the barcode can be generated It will not assure that the barcode meets the GS 1 standard Refer to the GS 1 General specification for additional information O Note It is beyond the scope of this document to define all the AI fields there Page 176 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Mandatory Al Associations Some Al fields must be associated with other fields For example a date field must be associated with some item so cannot be used alone Programming Codes Al Definition 01 or 02 Identification of a 30 3nnn1 Mandatory association with variable measure with N1 9 Variable Measure or 3nnn2 information Only GS1 128 ITF 14 and GS1 Trade Item or 8001 Dat
352. or 1BH 1AH 74H Decimal lt 2 gt lt 116 gt lt x gt or lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 116 gt IPCL amp PM lt x1 gt EPOS ESC L Description This command activates page mode and sets the orientation This command may also be issued during page definition When issued in page mode it resets the orientation and entry position but does not cause the currently defined image to be erased or printed Where x 0 for standard orientation Direction A x 1 for 270 Rotation Direction B x 2 for 180 Rotation Direction C x 3 for 90 Rotation Direction Di 100 10937 Rev F Page 99 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Receipt or Inserted Form Initial entry location Note 1 This command saves the current right and left margin and sets them to the maximum values for the orientation currently defined Note 2 During page mode definition almost all printer commands are active The following table lists the exceptions Command Active Action Cash drawer Yes Immediate action commands Bell command Yes Immediate action Auto cut commands Delayed The printer will perform a feed to cut and then operate the auto cutter after the page is printed The cut command may be anywhere in the definition If the page is printed twice the Auto cut command must be reissued after the first print to generate additional cuts Electronic journal No This command is like a station select and is n
353. or act on any commands other than inquires If pass through data is sent to the printer in continuous mode i e as fast as possible each ENQ character in the sequence delays the transmit data by one byte The printer buffer size is limited If the buffer overruns data will be lost Modem handshake signals from the printer are not controlled during past through Their state is set by printer status Opening the cover toggles the control lines When the printer cover is open it accepts data including all ENQ commands If an ENQ is received when off line pass through is entered Previously buffered data is processed by the printer in pass through mode Printer performance is degraded by the processing of pass through data In 8 bit no parity mode data is passed through unaltered In all other modes the parity is checked stripped and then regenerated by the printer Pass through has no affect on a printer in parallel mode 100 10937 Rev F Page 305 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Remote Printer Reset Reset in Serial USB and Ethernet Mode It is possible to generate a software printer reset in serial USB or Ethernet mode The ENQ lt 10 gt command requests that the printer reset This is not a hardware reset The reset completely initializes the hardware and software Note If the printer mode was changed by the ESC y lt 2 gt or lt 3 gt command a soft reset will not return to the power on default
354. orizontal ellipsis 255a box drawings double up and right 2030 per mille sign 255b box drawings up single and left double 2032 prime 255c box drawings up double and left single 2033 double prime 255d box drawings double up and left 2039 single left pointing angle quotation mark 255e box drawings vertical single and right double 203a single right pointing angle quotation mark 255f box drawings vertical double and right single 203c double exclamation mark 2560 box drawings double vertical and right 203e overline 2561 box drawings vertical single and left double 2044 fraction slash 2562 box drawings vertical double and left single 207f superscript Latin small letter n 2563 box drawings double vertical and left 20a3 french franc sign 2564 box drawings down single and horizontal double 20a4 lira sign 2565 box drawings down double and horizontal single 20a7 peseta sign 2566 box drawings double down and horizontal 20ac euro currency symbol 2567 box drawings up single and horizontal double 2105 care of 2568 box drawings up double and horizontal single 2113 script small 2569 box drawings double up and horizontal 2116 numero sign 256a box drawings vertical single and horizontal double 2122 trademark sign 256b box drawings vertical double and horizontal single 2126 ohm sign 256c box drawings double vertical and horizontal 212e estimated symbol 2580 upper half block 215b vulgar fraction one eighth 2584 lower half block 215c vulgar fraction three eighths 258
355. orrectly All data is left justified ESC q does not perform a CR or LF function Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC x Open cash drawer ASCII ESC x lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 78H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 120 gt lt n gt IPCL amp D1 Cash Drawer 1 amp D2 Cash Drawer 2 EPOS ESC p Description The ESC x lt n gt command charges the cash drawer lt n gt for 150 ms Where lt n gt lt 1 gt 01H or 1 31H for Cash Drawer 1 lt 2 gt 02H or 2 32H for Cash Drawer 2 The time period that drawer is activated can be changed in the configuration menu Activation time ranges from 25 mS to 250 mS Note 1 Cash drawer open commands are processed as part of print data They are not immediate commands and are not processed until found in the input buffer by the print processor Note 2 Cash Drawer 2 is factory configurable in one of two modes Either pin 2 or 3 is active depending on an internal jumper setting The factory default is pin 3 Cash Drawer 1 is always on pin 2 The cash drawer status is defined as an open circuit for drawer closed ESC v Perform Auto Cut ASCII ESC v Hexadecimal 1BH 76H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 118 gt IPCL amp FC amp PC EPOS ESC i or ESC m Description The ESC v command operated the auto cutter Note The auto cutter is optional If the auto cutter is not installed this command will be ignored ESC In
356. os and User defined Characters for definitions of these functions To allow the host application to maintain these groups of data a series of user store maintenance commands are available As referenced earlier in this manual the user can define a limited number of custom characters and define a macro These character macro definitions can also be saved in user store However only one character definition and one macro can be active at any time One macro and one user defined character definition can be flagged to load and run at startup If a flag is set the printer will automatically process the macro and or load the user defined character set at initialization Because user store is intended to be loaded only a few times and then printed as part of normal operation the programmer must take some care during the definition phase The programmer must assume the responsibility to assure the 16K buffer size is not exceeded User store can save macros and user defined character sets When the basic user store is full it can be moved to extended user store Individual items in the extended user store can not be erased The entire extended user store must be erased all at once You may place two items in user store with the same name and the last defined item will be used Defining Macros Macros can be defined two ways The first is by using the begin and end named macro commands These commands start the recording process and automatically save
357. ot active You station select cannot store page mode images in the electronic journal A page mode command in journal station mode will exit journal mode Electronic journal Yes You can make journal entries as part of a page description entries They are saved as text and not part of the page Status requests Yes The status is returned during definition Printer initialize Yes Cancels page mode definition and returns the printer to standard command mode Set top of form No You must set the top of form outside of page mode The form position is maintained after the page is printed Vertical tab No The definition of a vertical tab is ambiguous in page mode and is ignored Macro definitions No You can not define or delete a macro while in page mode You can however invoke a macro or stored graphic You can not enter page mode while in a macro definition Note 3 Unless specified by a page mode set page size command the default page size is the full paper width for about 6 inches Printing starts at the current paper position The complete page definition is printed excluding any blank information at the bottom of the page Page 100 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Set Print Area in Page Mode Enhanced ASCII ESC SUB S lt XO _ gt lt XOp gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOu gt lt Wi gt lt Wy gt lt Hi gt lt Hy gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 53H lt XO gt lt XOn gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOu
358. ot defined 0 always bit 5 Not defined 0 always bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always ENQ lt 25 gt Inquire Electronic Journal ASCII ENQ lt 25 gt Hexadecimal 05H 19H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 25 gt Function The ENQ lt 25 gt command returns current status and free space in the electronic journal Response NAK lt 25 gt lt n gt lt r gt lt r gt Electronic Journal NOT active ACK lt 25 gt lt n gt lt I gt lt r2 gt Electronic Journal active 100 10937 Rev F Page 217 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Where lt n gt lt I gt lt Io gt ENQ lt 26 gt ASCII lt 25 gt is the echo of command ID is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF MSB of size in K bytes LSB of size in K bytes Inquire current print zone ENQ lt 26 gt Hexadecimal 05H 1AH Decimal Function Response Where lt n gt seu lt Io gt ENQ lt 28 gt ASCII lt 5 gt lt 26 gt The ENQ lt 26 gt command returns current print zone in dots ACK lt 26 gt lt n gt lt r gt lt r gt lt 26 gt is the echo of command ID is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF MSB of the print zone LSB of the print zone Inquire Buffer status ENQ lt 28 gt Hexadecimal 05H 1CH Decimal Function Response Where lt n gt seu Page 218 lt 5 gt lt 28 gt The ENQ lt 28 gt command
359. ot store the data The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Page 122 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Load item from user store ASCII ESC US Name lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 6CH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 108 gt IPCL amp UL lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS GS 0 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated Description The ESC US lt Name gt lt 0 gt command loads the referenced item into the appropriate structure If the item referenced is a user defined character set it is loaded into the current user character definition which does not affect the active state of user defined characters If itis a macro it is loaded into the macro buffer but it is not inserted into the data stream ESC g lt 0 gt inserts the macro buffer into the data stream If the named item does not exist the command does nothing The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT gt n gt on page 125 Function Run macro data from user store ASCII ESC US r lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 72H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 114 gt IPCL amp UR lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS GS 0 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated Description The
360. ow control for anything but buffer full The programmer must take on the responsibility for assuring that inquire commands are used to maintain status of the printer The printer always accepts serial data even when it is off line The printer has reserve buffer space that allows additional information to be received even if the printer is signaling buffer full or off line Because inquire commands are processed before they go into the buffer the printer responds even when it is busy printing In serial mode the response to an inquiry should be received by the host before another inquire command is issued to the printer When the printer receives an inquiry it generates a response If inquiries are sent to the printer too quickly the printer spends all of its time responding and does not have time to print IEEE 1284 Mode Inquire In parallel IEEE 1284 mode status information can be returned to the host through the IEEE 1284 reverse channel After the host makes an inquire request it activates IEEE 1284 mode 0 reverse channel and waits for a response from the printer The response to the inquire is identical to serial mode in format 100 10937 Rev F Page 209 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide The printer always accepts IEEE 1284 reverse channel requests but does not accept inquire commands when off line It is possible to obtain status when off line by placing the printer in dynamic response mode before the printer goes of
361. ows the printers electronic journal to be maintained one allows the printers configuration to be changed and two are designed for factory setup by TransAct Testing the printer Use the following two TEST options when verifying basic printer operation TEST Receipt The receipt test is the primary test option to use when determining if the printer is functioning correctly The receipt test is mostly used during the early stages of troubleshooting to eliminate the possibility that the problem is occurring with the printer If the printer experiences a failure and the error indicator light is activated call TransAct s Ithaca Facility s Technical Support Department TEST Head Test This test performs a test pattern that will print all the head print elements and verify that the drive roll is free from defects The print head has two heating elements per dot position A print element is not considered bad unless both elements are missing If the head test shows that there is an inconsistency in the drive roll it may be debris or a void If debris is indicated cleaning the drive roll should correct the problem If this does not correct the problem contact TransAct s Ithaca Facility s Technical Support Department 100 10937 Rev F Page 49 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Maintaining the Electronic Journal The Model 9000 has an electronic journal option It is possible to configure the printer with a journal station
362. p MN none The DC4 command cancels one line double wide mode set by the SO command and allows single and double wide characters to be printed on the same line Enable Disable Strike Through ESC _ lt n gt 1BH 5FH 01H lt 27 gt lt 95 gt lt n gt amp MO Begin amp CO End ESC lt n gt The ESC _ lt 1 gt command begins strike through print mode All subsequent text leading spaces and trailing spaces are over scored ESC _ lt 0 gt ends the mode Multi line double wide and double high mode ESC W lt n gt 1BH 57H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 87 gt lt n gt amp FD n 1 amp FS n 0 amp FHA n 3 Note Single wide double high mode is not available in IPCL mode ESC lt n gt The ESC W lt n gt command controls multi line double wide or double high mode where n specifies the mode Rev F Page 93 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide n 0 is standard single wide and single high n 1 begins double wide n 2 begins double high and n 3 begins double wide double high Note The ESC W lt n gt command does not affect line spacing Where n Bits 76543210 Function l Underline l Double wide 1 Dowble high x Font O draft 1 large draft ESC Set print style double wide double high italic control ASCII ESC EOT NUL lt k gt NUL lt n gt lt m gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 40H 0
363. page If the Set page size command is not used the page size will default to the maximum size The orientation of the set print area command is always based on 0 degrees regardless of the current orientation setting This includes if the command is sent before the start page mode command after the start page mode command or as a sub page inches Note The maximum printable area in the y direction is 2999 203 or 14 78 inches Note Only the used portion of the page is printed That is the page length will only include what actually has print data See illustration below KA Note The maximum printable area in the x direction is 576 203 or 3 15 100 10937 Rev F Page 101 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide YOffset lt O gt lt Oy gt Width lt Wi gt lt W gt XOffset lt OL gt lt Op gt Figure 9 Page mode set printable area SE Cut to print offset 0 5 in or 13mm Start of page definition Max width is 576 dots Cut point is after bottom most print data Bottom most print data End of page Unused page area definition is not printed Figure 10 Default Page mode printed area Page 102 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Set Printed Area in Page Mode Enhanced ASCII ESC SUB W lt XO_ gt lt XOy gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOu gt lt WL gt lt Wu gt lt HL gt lt HH gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 57H lt X0O gt lt XOy gt lt lt YO_ gt lt YOu gt lt Wi gt
364. ponses In IEEE 1284 mode the printer remains busy until the inquire command is processed assuring responses in real time To receive the response the host must ask for it It is possible for the host to make a number of requests and wait for the responses however the status returned is valid at the time the request was made It is also possible for the dynamic response mode to be activated and the reverse channel mode to be opened The reverse channel then changes from reverse idle to reverse data available as the status changes The application must be careful in dynamic response mode that the dynamic responses are not left active when the reverse channel is closed If the dynamic responses are active when the reverse channel closes the output buffer overflows If data is in the buffer when dynamic responses are activated it will not be replaced by the current status If dynamic response is off and a buffer clear command is issued followed by activation of dynamic responses the buffer will contain fresh data If the buffer clear command is issued after the dynamic response is activated the buffer will be cleared and any unread responses will be lost Page 296 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Parallel Port Plug and Play Microsoft Windows implements Plug and Play PnP by doing a special parallel IEEE 1284 inquire during boot The Model 9000 Printer responds to the inquiry if IEEE 1284 is active If the
365. posite data 64 Secondary Data GS 1 Alpha Numeric NUL term Linear Barcode data 65 UPCA Numeric 0 9 only 11 digits 66 UPC E Numeric 0 9 only 11 digits 67 EAN 8 13 14 Numeric 0 9 only 7 12 or 13 digits 68 EAN 128 GS 1 code 128 Alpha Numeric 69 RSS 14 See GS1 Databar barcode definitions below 70 RSS 14 Truncated 71 RSS Limited 72 RSS Expanded 73 RSS Stacked i No HRI will be printed 74 RSS Stacked Omni No HRI will be printed 75 RSS Expanded Stacked S No HRI will be printed barcodes 90 or 180 you can get significantly longer barcodes Note2 A CR LF or NUL may also be used in place of the NUL to end the bar code data field Note 3 Only information that is usable in a particular bar code will be printed Note1 You may print barcodes in page mode If you rotate these Barcodes and Code Pages In ASCII mode the barcode data is not translated by the active code page In general barcode data is numeric 0 9 or aloha numeric 0 9 and A Z Some barcodes support additional characters and are defined by the barcode specification Barcodes and Unicode In Unicode mode the printer can accept character values from 0 to 65535 In general barcode data is generally numeric 0 9 or aloha numeric 0 9 and A Z and are limited to values from 0 127 Some barcodes support additional characters as defined by the barcode specification however only character values from 0 to 255 will be used for barcodes An
366. print width of the Model 9000 limits the maximum size of the barcode The Data Matrix barcode matrix may be square or rectangular and only specific sizes are allowed You may select a size and you may limit the selection to square only however if you limit the size you must leave enough room for the data or the printer will automatically select a larger matrix The commands to control 2 dimensional barcode options start on page 186 Data Matrix Encoding As referred to above there are 2 basic encoding schemes defined for Data Matrix barcodes ECC 000 140 and ECC 200 ECC 200 which uses Reed Solomon error correction and is recommended for all new applications ECC 000 140 is the older system and only supported by a few older scanners As ECC200 is the recommended encoding it is the only version supported by the Model 9000 Data Matrix ECC200 ECC200 is actually 6 encoding schemes The data to be encoded is scanned and the optimal encoding scheme or combination of schemes is used to encode the symbol The resulting encoded data is then processed with the Reed Solomon error correction algorithm and the resulting information is formatted into a Data Matrix barcode Note The ISO IEC 16022 2006 specification defines how the ECC200 encoding schemes are to be evoked however in some cases the resulting size of the compressed data is identical with 2 or more different encoding sequences The ISO standard is followed by the Model 9000 however
367. r attempts to mix the colors to generate black Note that in text mode the colors are not mixed This requires that there be two basic modes of color graphic generation If the Model 9000 printer is configured with two colors the printer will mix the two colors on the thermal paper using the primary and the secondary color Because there are three primary colors the printer is unable to print full color The printer follows the rules for mixing colors and it if the result is ambiguous because of the missing color the printer will print with the primary color This results in a image made up of primary color dots secondary color dots and mixed dots The mixed dots color may not be black but a mixture of whatever colors are installed In text mode the primary color is assigned as the default color and the secondary color is assigned as the alternate highlight color In most cases the darkest color should be initialized as the primary color The Ithaca Windows print driver provides the translation from Windows color to the three color planes When a graphic is created for the Model 9000 Printer the colors used must take into account that colors other than the highlight color will print black The Ithaca Windows driver helps adjust the color content and generates the desired print from a full color image Procedure for color horizontal graphics There are many ways to generate graphics for the Model 9000 printer The easiest is to use
368. r by grasping the green cover release between your thumb and forefinger and squeeze the release This will pop the cover up 2 Open the cover and install a roll of paper with the paper coming off of the bottom of the roll 3 Lay the paper tail over the front of the printer and center it over the paper path 4 Close the cover When the cover is closed the printer will feed several inches of paper to make sure the paper is aligned in the printer If equipped with a cutter the printer will automatically cut the paper tail and the printer is now ready to print If the printer is not equipped with a cutter the operator should remove the paper tail Auto Paper Sensing The Model 9000 is equipped with the ability to sense and switch between Standard point of sale POS paper and NCR adhesive backed paper It will also automatically switch between 80mm paper and 40mm paper How the printer prints on the different types of paper is configurable There is a primary and alternate paper setup The POS paper uses the primary values and the MCR paper uses the alternate values NCR adhesive backed paper uses black top of form marks on the back of the paper to allow the printer to align the paper cutter to cut between the black dots and make sure the paper drive is not left for extended periods on the adheasive patch The black top of form mark is used to distinguish between standard POS paper and the NCR paper The printer also has a sensor that will
369. r the image will be much longer than the same monochrome image You are much better off converting the image to Monochrome or 16 colors within your application Note Where as the printer will process and print an 8 bit or 24 bit color ESC FS Print Bitmap File Record ASCII ESC FS lt Bitmap file data gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1CH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 28 gt IPCL None EPOS None Description The ESC FS command is actually a group of commands intended to print graphics All bit map files begin with BM so when the bitmap data is sent after the ESC FS the command is really ESC FS B This command accepts Monochrome and 16 color bitmap files and saves it as a temporary RAM file The image may then be printed with the ESC FS p command or saved in the file system with and ESC FS S command Note A Bitmap graphic file may also be written to the Model 9000 s file system using the file system commands It can then be printed by the ESC FS P command In this case it is not saved in the temporary file so the ESC FS p does not work Page 116 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC FS p Print bitmap image buffer ASCII ESC FS p lt Scale gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1CH 70H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 28 gt lt 112 gt IPCL None EPOS None Description The ESC FS p command prints a bitmap image in the temporary buffer Where Scale 0 one to one 1 twice the width 2 Twice
370. reduce the width until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode See General description above and that the compression is slightly altered GS1 data formatting and Note If in GS1 mode a FNC1 is added to the beginning of the symbol compaction are active and the input must follow the GS1 rules f P 50H 80D HRI Position f 0 Off f 1 Top f 2 Bottom f 3 Both f F 46H 70D HRI Font f 0 Medium f 1 Larger f 2 Smaller Note Fonts may be redefined by using the change legacy font command Page 186 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Code 49 Print Options Function Code 49 Options ASCII ESC EM 4 lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 34H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 52 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None Description This command alters the way Code49 barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f W 57H 87D Set the minimum element width v 1 10 3 is the default A width of 1 may be unreadable It the barcode will not fit in the print zone the printer will automatically reduce the width until the barcode will fit If the barcode will not fit at a width of 1 the printer will not print the barcode f H 48H 72D Blank Space between the barcode and the HRI Default 8 f G 47H 71D GS1 Mode See Gen
371. ree character definitions Function Save user defined characters ASCII ESC US c lt Name gt lt 0 gt Third load the character set or load and run the macro To restore the character definitions issue a load item command with the name of the character set to be loaded The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function Load item from user store ASCII ESC US Name lt 0 gt If the item referenced is a user defined character set it is loaded into the current definition If it is a macro it is loaded into the macro buffer It is not processed or printed To help maintain the user store area the following commands can be used The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function Flag as a start up macro ASCII ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt The ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt command flags the referenced item to be processed at startup No more than one user character definition and user data item may be flagged The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 Function Remove item from user store ASCII ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt The ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt command removes an item from user store and frees up its space The terminati
372. reprinted forms Enable ESC A lt n gt variable line spacing ESC 2 1BH 32H lt 27 gt lt 50 gt none none The ESC 2 command is a companion to the ESC A lt n gt command and puts the specified line spacing into effect It remains in effect until another line spacing command is issued Rev F Page 73 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC d Feed lt n gt lines at the current spacing ASCII ESC d lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 64H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 100 gt lt n gt IPCL amp FL lt m1 gt lt m2 gt EPOS ESC d Description The ESC d lt n gt command prints the contents of the buffer if any and performs lt n gt line feeds at the current line spacing The command does not change the default line spacing value The next character print position is reset to the left margin Note The IPCL command prints from 00 to 99 lines For example if you wish to feed 12 lines the IPCL command would be as follows amp FL12 Function Reverse feed lt n gt lines at the current spacing ASCII ESC e lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 65H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 101 gt lt n gt IPCL amp FB lt m1 gt lt m2 gt EPOS ESC e Description The ESC e lt n gt command prints the contents of the buffer if any and performs lt n gt reverse line feeds at the current line spacing The command does not change the default line spacing value The next character print position is reset
373. restrictions The Model 9000 will do minimal validation of the Al fields to assure that the barcode can be generated It will not assure that the barcode meets the GS 1 standard Refer to the GS 1 General specification for additional information Page 178 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Invalid Al associations Some Al fields cannot be used with other Al fields Programming Codes Al Definition Al Definition 01 Identification of a 01 Identification of a Duplicate Global Trade Item trade item trade item Numbers GTINs with different values 01 Identification of a 02 Identification of Al 02 must not be used for the trade item logistic unit identification of trade items contained in contents a trade item 01 Identification of a 37 Count of units The count of units contained would trade item contained duplicate the master data of the GTIN Al 37 may only be used with Al 02 22 Secondary data for 30 Count Duplicate counts with different values the health industry 22 Secondary data for 10 Batch lot number Duplicate lot numbers with different the health industry values 22 Secondary data for 17 Expiration date Duplicate expiration date with different the health industry values 22 Secondary data for 21 Serial number Duplicate serial numbers with different the health industry values 242 Made to Order 01 or 02 Identification of a Made to Order Variation can only be Variation with N1
374. returns current print zone in dots ACK lt 28 gt lt n gt lt I gt lt 28 gt is the echo of command ID is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF 0 100 Percent of input buffer being used Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 31 gt ASCII Inquire Power on status ENG lt 31 gt Hexadecimal 05H 1FH Decimal Function Response Where lt N gt lt i gt lt Io gt lt g gt 100 10937 lt 5 gt lt 31 gt The ENQ lt 31 gt command returns File and POR system status ACK lt 31 gt lt n gt lt I gt lt I gt fa lt 31 gt is the echo of command ID is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF Power up system status where the bits are defined as follows 0x01 No Font present 0x02 No Files present 0x04 File system faulted and has been cleared 0x08 POR IN file was missing and a default has been generated 0x10 Code page file requested Is missing 0x20 The primary FAT was corrupt and the alternate was used 0x40 The primary and alternate FAT s are corrupt and the file system has been initialized Font system status 0x00 Font system closed 0x01 Font system Ready 0x02 Font system Fault All other values are errors that will also set the R3 status byte Font imaging system extended status Extended status information being present is a serious error in the printer Typically
375. reverse channel buffer The Mode 0 reverse channel request begins returning information to the host The host may terminate the transmission at any time If the link is terminated between nibbles the last nibble is retransmitted on the next request If a complete byte is transmitted it is deleted from the IEEE 1284 reverse channel buffer An inquire command can clear the reverse channel buffer before placing its response in the buffer The IEEE 1284 buffer is limited to 1000 characters If the buffer is not emptied by reverse channel requests the buffer overflows The buffer is a first in first out FIFO buffer and the last data placed in the buffer is lost Time outs IEEE 1284 specifies time outs for various phases of the protocol The Model 9000 printer treats time outs as minimums The printer time outs at the specified period only if it is idle during the complete phase Active State The IEEE 1284 reverse channel may be activated at any time as long as the printer is not busy with data If the printer is off line or the cover is open the reverse channel may be activated If the printer is placed back on line while the reverse channel is active the printer will not exit the reverse channel mode 100 10937 Rev F Page 295 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Inquire Responses In general inquire commands place two byte responses in the IEEE 1284 reverse channel buffer The two bytes are the same as the serial mode res
376. rinter will print the complete data field from the selected set Due to space limitations only ten characters can be printed The check digit is generated and printed by the printer Characters are also specified as shown in Figure 18 Space is defined as a lt 0 gt which makes programming difficult and causes control character conflicts for the printer To solve this problem the Model 9000 Printer subtracts 32 from all characters that are to be included in the bar code In the Code 128 definition an A is lt 33 gt however the printer converts an ASCII A lt 65 gt to a lt 33 gt internally This sets Code 128C and the start codes off by 32 Barcode 128 consists of 107 unique symbols 101 of the symbols take on different meanings based on the start code or an embedded shift code sequence Code stick A consists of alphanumeric characters and ASCII control codes see the table below Code stick B consists of Alpha numeric with lower case alpha Code stick C consists of numeric pairs In most cases the Model 9000 will generate the most compact barcode for you However if it is desirable to have complete control the programmer should use manual mode 2 d is Po a y NUL ESC b lt 2 gt lt 137 gt lt 44 gt lt 66 gt lt 132 gt Parts NUL Start with Code C lt 44 gt is for character pair 12 lt 66 gt is tos for character pair 34 lt 132 gt shifts to Code B then it s followed with the character
377. river and should not be used for new applications Page 316 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix C Internal Code Pages Country Code Language Set Page Decimal lt nn gt lt n gt Appendix Hex lt n gt lt n gt 64 USA Slashed 0 0 64 0H 040H 65 USA Unslashed 0 0 65 0H 041H 66 British 0 66 0H 042H 67 German 0 67 0H 043H 68 French 0 68 0H 044H 69 Swedish 0 69 0H 045H 70 Danish 0 70 0H 046H 71 Norwegian 0 71 0H 047H 72 Dutch 0 72 0H 048H 73 Italian 0 73 0H 049H 74 French Canadian 0 74 0H 04AH 75 Spanish 0 75 0H 04BH 76 Swedish II 0 76 0H 04CH 77 Swedish III 0 77 0H 04DH 78 Swedish IV 0 78 0H 04EH 79 Turkish 0 79 0H 04FH 80 Swiss 0 80 0H 050H 81 Swiss ll 0 81 0H 051H 437 USA 1 181 1H 0B5H 737 Greek 2 225 2H 0E1H 850 Multilingual 3 82 3H 052H 852 East Europe Latin Il 852 3 84 3H 054H 855 Cyrillic l 855 3 87 3H 057H 857 Turkey 857 3 89 3H 059H 858 Multilingual Euro 3 90 3H 05AH 866 Cyrillic Il 866 3 98 3H 062H 1004 IS08859 3 236 3H O0ECH 1250 Windows 1250 Central Europe 4 226 4H 0E2H 1251 Windows 1251 Cyrillic 4 227 4H 0E3H 1252 Windows 1252 Latin 1 4 228 4H 0E4H 1253 Windows 1253 Greek 4 229 4H 0E5H 1254 Windows 1254 Turkish 4 230 4H 0E6H 1257 Windows 1257 Baltic 4 233 4H 0E9H 28591 ISO8859 1 Latin 1 111 175 6FH AFH 28592 ISO8859 2 Latin 2 111 176 6FH BOH 2859
378. rnet Plug and Play protocol Most POS system don t want printers to automatically be discovered and added to a host system This would make assigning specific printers to specific terminals very difficult Page 292 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Parallel Port Parallel Port Protocol The Model 9000 parallel port behaves just as any printer connected to a personal computer The parallel interface accepts 8 bits of data from the host The strobe signal from the host is used to indicate that data is available When the printer sees the strobe signal and accepts the data it asserts a busy signal The busy signal indicates to the host that the printer has accepted the data and is working on it After the printer absorbs the data and is ready to accept another byte the printer asserts acknowledged ACK negates busy and then finally negates ACK The host computer should meet the following parallel port specifications and timing Ina standard personal computer the strobe signal is generated by software writes to the parallel port control port which is typically done in the bios or some parallel port driver As personal computers become faster it is up to the software to assure that the strobe signal does not get too narrow One microsecond is the minimum pulse width that should be sent down a cable Shorter pulse widths 500 nanoseconds will be accepted by the printer The cable can introduce significant signal
379. rocessed 100 10937 Rev F Page 165 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Composite data Composite data generally follows the GS 1 standards however the GS 1 field processing and data compaction may be controlled by the setting the GS 1 options for Composite barcodes Function Composite data ASCII ESC b information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 40H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 64 gt information NUL Note GS 1 field processing and data compaction occurs when the barcode is generated not when the secondary field is defined Note The secondary field will remain static until it is redefined An example would be ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL The data field is a valid GS 1 identification string 01 12345678901 234 1 1 100909 30 123456 will be processed as 01 12345678901 234 11 100909 30 123456 UPC A Composite UPC A Composite uses a standard 11 digit UPC A code with composite data and optional Addenda data Function UPC A Composite ASCII ESC b A information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 41H information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 65 gt information NUL MECHT ESC b 01 12345678901234 1 1 100909 30 123456 NUL ESC b lt 65 gt 12345678901 NUL Me WTA ON ii i i ii The same as above with a EAN 2 Addenda ESC b lt 65 gt 12345678901 12 NUL Figure 56 UPC A Composite Example Page 166 Rev F
380. rocessed as binary data URL information works best in upper case Note At this time Kanji and Katakana are not supported by the Model 9000 Micro QRCode is controlled by the same commands as QR code Error correction level H is not available as the number of correction characters would exceed the input length Micro QRCode Commands There are two version of the command one is null terminated and the other allows a length to be specified Note that the length is a two byte field as the symbol may contain more than 256 characters Function Micro QRCode ASCII ESC b lt 37 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 37 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 37 gt information NUL Function Micro QRCode ASCII ESC b lt 86 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 36 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 36 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt d ESC b lt 36 gt WWW TRANSACT TECH COM NUL Figure 51 Data Micro QRCode Example Note The normal Select barcode Width and Select Barcode height commands do not affect Micro QRCode barcodes The rules governing how the barcode is printed do not allow variations in the aspect ratios The QRCode control commands that will allow some control over how the barcode is printed 100 10937 Rev F Page 161 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Aztec The symbol is built on a
381. rogrammer s Guide Appendix Recovery from Mechanical Errors The Ithaca Inquire commands and the Epson DLE ENQ and DLE EOT commands allow most printer error status to be read and in some cases recovery attempted Paper jams and auto cutter faults can some times be recovered however any data not previously printed will be lost If the application is to support error recovery the application should use the appropriate status request commands to query the printer periodically If an error response is such that the fault is recoverable the host application should interact with the operator and request that the fault be corrected IE Clear the Paper Jam When the operator indicates that the problem has been corrected the host can issue a reset request If a serious error occurs the printer will halt and enter fault error mode If the fault is such that the printer can maintain communications with the host the print status request and response system will remain active The status of the system will however remain static i e the status responses will reflect the state of the system when the fault occurred There are errors that cannot be reported to the host system These errors are such that the integrity of the printer does not allow continued operation That is there is no way to report the error These errors occur for the most part during power up diagnostics They are as follows EEPROM READ ERROR Power up only The Internal
382. rogramming Codes Description ASCII Hex IPCL Page equivalent Code Select Minimum character Height and ESC p lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 70H none 256 Width in 1 4 points Begin 12 x 12 draft print ESC lt 0 gt 1BH 23H 00H amp QT 82 Set print quality mode ESC lt n gt 1BH 49H amp QT n 0 82 n 0 Draft 12 x 12 okies n 1 Large draft 12 x 14 amp OS n 3 n 2 NLQ 24 x 16 n 3 NLQ 24 x 16 n 4 7 Repeats 0 3 Begin rotated font See command ESC P lt n gt 1BH 50H tA 83 description So an Select character code page ESC T lt n gt lt n gt 1BH 5BH amp CP me 87 54H lt M2 gt lt M3 gt lt Ma4 gt Insert Euro character ESC C lt n gt aor amp EU 89 Print control character ESC lt n gt 1BH 5EH amp CC lt mi gt 91 lt M2 gt lt M3 gt Redefine character set ESC S Uy a 90 Define user defined characters ESC lt y gt lt c gt 1BH 3DH none 91 lt Co gt Enable user defined characters ESC gt lt n gt 1BH 3EH none 92 Cancel user defined characters ESC 1BH 24H none 92 Print control character ESC lt n gt 1BH 5EH amp CC lt mi gt 91 lt M2 gt lt M3 gt Print Unicode character ESC lt n gt lt ny gt 1BH 22H amp PU lt mi gt 91 lt M2 gt lt M3 gt lt M4 gt lt M4 gt Character Attributes Select color ESC c lt n gt 1BH 63H amp CL ams 92 Begin on
383. rograms to meet your needs Extended Warranty Depot Repair Maintenance Contract Internet Support Sales Support To order supplies receive information about other Ithaca products or obtain information about your warranty contact our Sales Department at the contact telephone or fax numbers listed below To receive information on International distribution visit our web site at www transact tech com Contact Information TransAct Technologies Incorporated Ithaca Facility 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca NY 14850 USA Telephone 877 7ithaca or 607 257 8901 Main fax 607 257 8922 Sales fax 607 257 3868 Technical Support fax 607 257 3911 Web site www transact tech com 100 10937 Rev F Page 19 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Specifications and Requirements Model 9000 Thermal Printer Models Model 9000 USB USB interface printer Model 9000 P parallel interface printer Model 9000 S serial interface printer Model 9000 Ethernet interface Standard Features The following features are common to the entire family of thermal printers Print Speed for text is 11 inches per second 279 mm sec 12 0 inches per second paper feed speed Selectable 1 57 or 3 15 inch 40 or 80 mm print zone 44 57 characters per line Built in self ranging External Power supply Clam shell paper loading Single RJ11 cash drawer driver with status Single RJ12 Monochrome printing In some cases depending on
384. ront and be at least 3 8 inch high and at least 1 2 inch wide There must be no other marks in the clear zone Top Minimum black mark size 0 375 inch High 0 5 inch wide No gap should show to the edge of the paper 0 75 inch clear zone As viewed from the back of paper GI IE Black dots mav repeat from everv 1 inch to up to everv 12 inches Figure 7 Top of Form Marking requirements Configuring the printer for Top of form marks The top of form options are Top Of Form Options Black dot Auto Detect Inactive Is black dot paper required Required never used or should it be Auto Detect automaticallv detected Format length The maximum repeat This should be set to a little length greater than the repeat length Seek POR Enabled Should the receipt be Disabled positioned at the black dot at pOWer Up Seek on Cut Enable Should the cut command Disable automatically seek the black 100 10937 Rev F Page 57 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide dot Seek on cover Close Enable Should the printer automatically Disable seek and cut the paper when the cover is closed Alt Paper Standard If the printer has black bot Alternate paper should it use the Standard or Alternate paper settings Dot Cal Do not change Sensor calibration Black Dot Auto Cal Enable Should the self test black dot Disable test automatically recalibrate the sensor Bl
385. rranty policy Technical and Sales support Your Ithaca printer is backed by the resources of TransAct Technologies a global technology firm with dedicated technical support and sales assistance Here is how we can help you On line Technical Support Our web site at www transact tech com is your on line portal to obtaining technical assistance with your Ithaca printer Click on Ithaca link and then the Technical Support link to find documentation for your Model 9000 printer including a current copy of this Programmer s Guide Our on line support site also includes a convenient e mail assistance request form where you can submit support requests 24 hours a day and receive a return contact from a TransAct support technician during regular business hours Telephone Technical Support Live telephone support is available Monday through Friday from 8 AM to 5 PM Eastern US time excluding holidays We can provide general information about programming for your Model 9000 printer technical support documentation or assistance in sending a printer for service To obtain telephone support call TransAct s Ithaca Facility at 607 257 8901 and ask for Technical Support To help us serve you faster please have the following information ready when you call The Model Number and Serial Number of the printer A list of any other peripheral devices attached to the same port as the printer What application software operating system and network if
386. rrent requirements Logic one Logic zero 0 25 ma at 2 4 V 16 ma Source Sink Line termination Data and control Strobe 3 3k ohm to 5 V 1 2k ohm to 5 V 100 10937 Rev F Page 31 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide RS 232 Serial Interface Serial Port Features The serial port features are as follows Baud Rates 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K and 57 6K Bit Patterns 8 bit no parity 8 bit odd 8 bit even 7 bit no parity 7 bit odd 7 bit even Flow Control DTR and XON XOFF pi 9 pin 25 pin Signal Description Pin 1 Pin 8 Not Connected Pin 2 Pin 3 Receive Data Pin 3 Pin 2 1X Transmit Data Pin 4 Pin 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready Pin 5 Pin 7 GND Signal Ground Pin 6 Pin 6 DSR Data Set Ready Pin 7 Pin 4 RTS Request to Send Pin 8 Pin 5 CTS Clear to Send Pin 9 Pin 11 Not Connected Table 9 Serial Interface Pin definitions Signal Voltage and Current levels The serial interface meets EIA RS232 interface specifications Voltage Levels Max 15 Volts Min 3 Volts Mark Off 3 to 15 Volts Space On 3 to 15 Volts Because both the host and printer are DTE s Data Terminal Equipment they use the same serial port pin outs If the cable that is used to connect the host to the printer is a pin to pin inter connect it will not work Therefore a null modem or turn around cable must be used to interconnect the host and the printer Display Pas
387. rted to A Function Code 39 Extended ASCII ESC b lt 1 gt lt L gt information Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 1 gt lt L gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 1 gt lt L gt LILU UNI In full 128 character mode the printer will encode the full 128 character set In this mode the first character received must be the length IE ESC b lt 1 gt lt L gt where L specifies the number of characters to follow and must be less than 32 The characters following the length may be from 0 to 127 Values greater than 127 are converted to printable characters by removing the 8 bit ESC b lt 1 gt lt 8 gt TransAct E ere character support however the is much denser and harder to read til rans characters to the character pair equivalent The HRI will print the Note In extended mode the printer will automatically convert extended extended character not the character pair 100 10937 Rev F Page 131 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide The following table specifies the Code 39 character set ASCII NUL SOH STX ETH EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US Page 132 Code MU A B C D E F G H J K L M N SO P Q R S T U V W X Y Z WA B C D E ASCII Code SP Space A A B IC D K E amp JE R IG
388. s Parts and the ending 1 Figure 15 Code 128 Manual Encoding Example 100 10937 Rev F Page 133 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes DI OO UI Hi oi scil Gol oi sti ul ol ni ol ol ct a oj a Wt Lf oF H Gi ol tio oi ni ao ol lt Gol ol ol ol mo sl sl sl sti si sl si sl sl sl sl sl sl XI FI sl OF OF OO WO Olli oli OO wo ol ol scil ol ol sl ul ol toi Oli of zl DI oo mo oj N Oli Oil sl Oli ol stil ul O ol oi ol ol ol o ol ol oi 0 NINI NIN MI MI Mm FI Oo oi CO ol oi oi o Ee beid kl bel i g LLI foe N r o kl fo Oo Encoding 20 N se Space A H o B 42 Di OO Ft oo o N ol 100 10937 Rev F Page 134 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Code 128 Encoding Manual DC3 83 115 73 Encoding DC4 84 84 116 74 ick Decimal H EE pa SE ay NAK as 85 117 75 CodeA Code Code Value Value e Value SYN se a TM 7 z ETI W N 7 119 77 ele ele u res 59 e 1 5B CA Z e wo CO e 8 120 78 Oo 2 5C EM 9 121 79 61 o 3 5D SU Ww o 0 122 7A e 4 5E ES 123 7B O El o o 5 5F o N OO FS 2 124 ZC GO 6 60 GS 3 125 7D o 7 61 RS o A o 4 126 7E e CO 62 67 99 63 us PEL 100 64 FNC3 FNC3 l 96 65 FNC2 FNC2 70 102 66 Shift Shift o 98 130 82 EE T
389. s results The reset operation is saved until the printer goes idle When the printer processes a reset command the printer goes off line and or busy until the reset completes In serial mode the printer may have information in its high speed buffer that was received after the reset command but before the reset was processed If the host 100 10937 Rev F Page 211 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide application continues to send information to the printer after a reset command some of that information may be processed before the reset is processed In parallel mode the printer goes busy after the reset is received but before the next byte is accepted It will not accept any additional data until after the reset is processed In USB mode the USB link is not affected by the reset Any data sent to the printer after the reset and before the printer completes the reset may be lost however the USB link will acknowledge all packets Note If reset inhibit is set in the configuration menu this command is ignored ENQ lt 11 gt Inquire power cycle status ASCII ENQ lt 11 gt Hexadecimal 05H OBH Decimal lt 5 gt lt 11 gt Function Has the printer been power cycled since the last request Response ACK lt 11 gt 06H OBH Printer has been power cycled since the last ENQ lt 11 gt NAK lt 5 gt 15H OBH Printer has not power cycled since the last ENQ lt 11 gt Description The first time after a reset
390. s Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement The Model 9000 Printer complies with the limits for a Class A computing device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules These regulations are designed to minimize radio frequency interference during installation however there is no guarantee that radio or television interference will not occur during any particular installation Interference can be determined by turning the equipment off and on while the radio or television is on If the printer causes interference to radio or television reception try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 1 Reorient the radio or television receiving antenna 2 Relocate the printer with respect to the receiver 3 Plug the printer and receiver into different circuits If necessary the user should consult their dealer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the US Government Printing Office Washington DC 20402 Ask for stock number 004 000 00345 4 Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Statement The Model 9000 Printer does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department
391. s Guide Windows Printer Driver A Windows printer driver is a specific type of driver defined by Microsoft that the OS uses to translate drawing commands by a Windows application to a specific printer s command set A standard Windows printer driver is a graphics page mode driver and is not a POS point of sale driver Have you ever had to open a cash drawer that was connected to your printer at home PC Hardware Window s Operating System Windows Printer Port Print GDI Driver Hardware Application Driver Graphics Serial Device Serial Interface OR OR Parallel Part of the Windows Paranal OR API Printer OR USB bus Driver USB OR OR Other Other Figure 4 Windows Print Driver When to use a windows printer driver Use a printer driver when writing a program that uses the Windows API to send print information to the printer When not to use a windows printer driver When a program wants to send printer command codes to the printer or when a program wants to get information back from a printer OPOS driver An OPOS driver is an implementation of the UnifiedPOS UPOS specification Page 42 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes It provides an application interface for retail devices such as a POS printer scanner cash drawer pole display MICR scale or others PC Hardware Window s Operating System POS Application OPOS POSPrinter port Driver ardware OPOS Printer S
392. s Through The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the printer The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable The host sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display The printer does not provide power to the display During normal printer operation no data is passed to the display In pass through mode all received data is passed on to the display Page 32 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Ethernet 10 100 Base T adapter An IP addressable 10 Base T Ethernet adapter is available for the Model 9000 printer A users manual for this adapter is available from transact The user s manual part number is100 10938 The adapter provides for web page configuration and supports bi directional RAW and Telnet interfaces All protocols are implemented to the extent necessary to support printing from Windows platforms specific protocols supported include the following TCP IP Port 9100 RAW data Line Printer Daemon Protocol LPR Hypertext Transfer Protocol for configuration UDP Port 9110 for real time status DHCP or IPv4 address assignment SNMP RFC1213 for printer and network management General Ethernet Definitions The Internet Protocol IP is the principal communications protocol used for relaying packets of information across an network The IP is responsible for routing packets across networ
393. s between 48 and 56 it is set to a specific level of 0 to 8 Page 184 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Error correcting levels are selected using one of two methods The first is a fixed level Level Code Word Level 0 28 49 tear 4 50 leez 28 te se 4 4 5 51 5 5 5 v 8 9 0 Level 3 2 3 5 6 2 4 16 52 lees a 53 lees 64 55 Leez 256 The second way is to determine correction level based on a percent of the encoded data in the barcode where the value v is a percent between 1 and 40 The correction level is determined by calculating a correction factor based on the formula Cf v Encoded Length 50 100 then using Cf in the following table to set the correction level Cf Level Code Words Log 3 8 46 100 64 101 200 201 400 401 Up 512 For example if the encoded data length is 80 bytes and v 10 then Cf 10 80 50 100 or Cf 8 Therefore Cf is between 4 and 10 so Level 2 correction would be used The encoded length is not the same as the input length The input data is first compressed into Text Octet and Numeric data and the resulting encoded data length is then used to calculate the correction level barcode and reduce the available space for data Note The encoding may be set to 0 which will do a 10 error correction however this is not the same as 1 0 does not do round off and provides compat
394. s by redefining the code page translation table if Unicode UTF encoding is active all code page selection and modification commands do not functional and have no effect Rev F Page 89 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC S ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL Description Redefine character set ESC S zz lt Ly gt ses lt TyH gt lt TiL gt lt Ta gt lt T a gt lt T3y gt lt T3L gt lass aus 1BH 5BH 53H lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 83 gt none The ESC S lt L gt lt Ly gt ses lt TiH gt lt TyL gt lt Ta gt lt Ta gt lt T3H gt lt T3L gt Tass Las command allows an application to replace or redefine the active character set mapping in the printer where lt L gt lt L gt defines the total length of the following data lt L gt 256 lt Ly gt 1 2 the total number of characters to be replaced lt Bc gt is the first character in the active map to be replaced lt Tin gt lt TiL gt is the internal address of the replacement character image The mapping of a print pattern to each character address is referred to a code page or ESC character set At any given time the printer character set is comprised of 256 characters Each character is addressed by an 8 bit value generally referred to as a character code For example if you want to print an A it would be addressed by sending a lt 65 gt decimal to the printer Sixty five predefined code pages or character
395. s printers to be easily added moved and removed with inexpensive common cabling and off the shelf components Print Server Features Standard Ethernet Connection 10 100 Mbps Speed 10 100 Base T RJ45 network connection Network Traffic LED indicator Configured through networked PC Web Browser Works with Virtually All Major Operating Systems Integrated into the Printer Supported Protocols Port 9100 RAW Port 515 LPR Hypertext Transfer Protocol for configuration Port 9110 UDP for real time status SNMP for network maintenance and printer status User Interface Configuration e HTTP Web Interface o Home status and information Page o General Configuration Page IP Address Subnet Mask Auto IP DHCP Static IP Printer Host Name User Defined Printer Location User Defined UDP configuration SNMP configuration o Printer Configuration Page Configurable RAW Port selection e Adapter Firmware Update Other e Push Button for Initial IP Address status and adapter reset e Self Diagnostics e Firmware Upgrade via Transact provided utility e Only a subset of the RFC 3805 Printer MIB is supported SNMP is primary supported to assist in network maintenance 100 10937 Rev F Page 291 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide For more information and a user s guide refer to the Transact Ethernet Users Guide 100 10938 Ethernet Plug and Play At this time the Ethernet adapter does not support the Ethe
396. s set inactive new data placed on the page is logically or ed with the existing data If Overlay is active new information is exclusive or ed with the existing data Note This command is only active during page definition and has no effect in normal operation It may be issued before or after entering page mode Note When you exit page mode the feature is turned off until reactivated Page 106 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Set Page Mode Margins Enhanced ASCII ESC SUB M lt L gt lt Ly gt lt W gt lt Wy gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 4DH lt L gt lt Ly gt lt W gt lt W gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 77 gt lt L palk Wi pa MN us IPCL None EPOS None Description This command sets the print margins in dots lt L gt lt Ly gt specify the left offset from the currently defined page and AN Wu specify the width Both are in dots If lt W gt lt W4 gt is zero the maximum width allowed by the current page is used page will set the margins to the edges of the page Note This command is also active when not in page mode and will set the left and right margins based on dot columns O Note This command is active during page definition and redefining the Function Clear Page Mode Page Enhanced ASCII ESC SUB C Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 43H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 67 gt lt N gt IPCL None EPOS None Description This command clears the data in the curre
397. s the following structure e gt RS Message Header 100 10937 Rev F Page 157 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide 01GS Format Header o 2 digit representing the year vv of a date e Postal Zip Code o If Mode 2 5 digit zip code 4 digit zip code extension o If Mode 3 6 alphanumeric characters zip code A through Z or 0 to 9 e GS o 3 digit country code e GS o 3 digit class of service e GS NOTE The following format is not verified by the Model 9000 lt tracking number gt Mandatory Data for UPS GS lt SCAC gt Mandatory Data for UPS GS lt UPS shipper number gt GS lt Julian day of pickup gt GS lt shipment ID number gt GS lt n x gt Package n x GS lt package weight gt GS lt address validation gt GS lt ship to street address gt GS lt ship to city gt GS lt ship to state gt RS e EOT End of Message Where GS ASCII 29 is used to separate fields in a message RS ASCII 30 is used to separate format types and EOT ASCII 4 is the end of transmission characters Note The Model 9000 only enforces the format through the GS after the class of service field The remainder of the message is not validated and is simply encoded by the printer Messages NOT Beginning with gt RS01GS Postal Zip Code o If Mode 2 NUMERIC ONLY 5 digit zip code 4 digit zip code extension if none exists four zeros 0000 must be specified o If Mode 3 ALPHANUMERIC 6 alphanumeric characters zip code A through Z
398. sages to and from other computers or devices using an Internet Protocol IP network without requiring prior communications to set up special transmission channels or data paths 13 A subset of the RFC1213 is supported that will allow basic printer status and network management to be performed 100 10937 Rev F Page 33 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide UDP uses a simple transmission model without implicit hand shaking dialogues for providing reliability ordering or data integrity Thus UDP provides an unreliable service and information may arrive out of order appear duplicated or go missing without notice UDP assumes that error checking and correction is either not necessary or performed in the application avoiding the overhead of such processing at the network interface level Time sensitive applications often use UDP because dropping packets is preferable to waiting for delayed packets which may not be an option in a real time system UDP s stateless nature is also useful for servers answering small queries from huge numbers of clients Model 9000 printers Unlike TCP UDP is compatible with packet broadcast sending to all on local network and multicasting send to all subscribers Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP File Transfer UDP is used by the Model 9000 to support real time status monitoring The Mode
399. sed for a bar the readability of the barcode will be marginal Setting up for Color Paper The Model 9000 may be configured to print two color thermal paper For good print quality the printer should be optimized to print on the color paper being used When setting the color energy start with a red setting of about 0 12 and a black energy of 0 24 First adjust the black level to produce acceptable black print then increase the red to produce acceptable red Don t do too high on the red or the paper may turn black over time DO NOT EXCEED 0 40 mJ sq mm or the paper may adhere to the print head and cause paper jams Setting the Black energy too high will also slow the printer down All color papers tested by TransAct will operate with black levels less than 0 35 mJ sq mm When the Black energy is set adjust the Color value for acceptable color NEVER exceed the Black energy with the Color energy The color level can be very critical Do not attempt to make the color darker by increasing the energy to the point where black starts to appear the print quality will not be consistent Page 56 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Setting up for Top of Form Marks The Model 9000 is equipped with a top of form sensor For this function to function correctly the paper must have a top of form mark where the receipt is to be cut The mark must be on the left back or the paper When viewed from the f
400. sent to the printer The graphic data is a command and not text It is not UTF 8 encoded Function Initiate Normal 8 bit ASCII Character Encoding All ASCII ESC A Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 41H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 65 gt Description The ESC A command will put the printer into normal character encoding mode of operation One byte one character In this mode international characters must be selected by selecting the appropriate code page for translation 100 10937 Rev F Page 265 Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Legacy Printer Features that Have Changed Because this product employs outline and stroke font character generation support for several legacy features are changed from standard Model 9000 version Barcode enhancements Barcode support has been enhanced and some features have changed when compared to the iTherm 280 The Model 9000 is capable of more accurate printing of and a greater number of bar code types than previous TransAct printers Because of these improvements those bar codes that are supported on other printers may print differently on the Model 9000 Please see the appropriate bar code printing and option command descriptions for more details The iTherm 280 does not support e Composite e GS1 Data bar All varieties e Maxi Code e UCC EAN128 e QR Code Other Differences in barcode support e Coda bar 9000 does not show the start stop codes in HRI 280 8000 do
401. some cases you may need to install one or more drivers to support the printer Typically the driver will automatically be loaded by Windows however in some cases yo may have to manually load a device driver and or a printer driver Windows Device Drivers In some cases Windows may need a special driver to support the physical interface being used by the printer In most cases the driver is already part of Windows but in some cases you may have to get it from the Microsoft web site Serial and parallel drivers are not supplied in some versions of windows as most new PC s don t have serial or parallel ports It s possible that your system has serial and or parallel ports but does not have Serial or parallel port drivers You may have to load them from the Windows distribution CD The Windows USB driver is called USB Printing support and allows a Windows Printer Driver to communicate with the USB port This driver provides a USB port interface to the printer as defined in the Universal Serial Bus Device Class Definition for Printing Devices Version 1 1 See Appendix B The Windows Virtual serial port driver is called USB Modem Driver and it supports the USB CDC specification See Appendix B Windows Printer drivers There are several types of drivers that may be used to support the Model 9000 printer One common driver is the Windows Printer Driver that supports a standard API to all Page 40 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer
402. space widths to encode the value Because of the width encoding a single scaling factor is used to adjust the barcode The wide and narrow bar settings are not used Non stacked barcodes will use the height setting however stacked versions have specific height to width ratio requirements and will adjust the ratios to fit in the selected height The scale factor will also be used but will only affect the width All RSS barcodes are encoded with awareness of the GS 1 General specification for Al and Al field requirements In some cases not all possible character sequences are allowed in an Al field and many are fixed length In some cases AI fields contain check digits and during the encoding process they are removed When specifying Al fields with check digits the check digit must be passed to the Model 9000 printer In some cases it is used and in others it is removed and replaced by the reader The Model 9000 will make some attempt to verify the format however only critical data that would prevent encoding the data is actually checked by the printer It s up to the application programmer to format the data in accordance with the GS 1 specification RSS barcodes may get excessively large The printer will attempt to generate a barcode that is the requested size but will automatically shrink the barcode scale if it will not fit in the print zone This may result in elements that are too small to print reliably If that happens the printer will not f
403. sts current DTE rate stop bits parity and number of character bits SET_CONTROL_LINE_STATE 22h RS 232 signal used to tell the DCE device the DTE device is now present Notifications Code Description RESPONSE_AVAILABLE Oih Notification to host to issue a GET ENCAPSULATED RESPONSE request SERIAL_STATE 20h Returns the current state of the carrier detect DSR break and ring signal Table 39 Supported Class Specific Requests and Notifications USB class specific requests that are supportd by the printer as follows bmRequest bRequest wValue windex wLength Data Type 00100001B SEND ENCAPSULATED COMMAND Zero Interface Amount of Control protocol data in bytes based command associated with this recipient 10100001B GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE Zero Interface Amount of Protocol data in bytes dependent data associated with response this recipient 00100001B SET_LINE_CODING Zero Interface Size of Line Coding properties Structure 10100001B GET_LINE_CODING Zero Interface Size of Line Coding Structure Structure 00100001B SET_CONTROL_LINE_STATE Control Interface Zero None Signal Bitmap Table 40 Supported Class Specific Requests Page 314 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix The line coding structure is as defined in the CDC specification but is not used by the printer Offset Field Size Value Description 0 dwDTERate 4 Number
404. t 6 Adjust the image to produce the effect you would like The lower graphic window displays an approximation of the printed image 7 When you are satisfied with the graphic press the Store in Printer button PJColor will attempt to interrogate the printer and will display the graphics currently in the printer if any Note If PJColor cannot communicate with the printer only the Save to File option will be allowed 8 Make sure there is enough room in the printer for the graphic 9 Insert a name in the Macro Name box Keep it simple this name will be used later to print the graphic 10 Record the graphic in the printer Print a stored graphic In the data stream to the printer enter amp URName amp and the graphic will print in place of the URName amp data The Name must be identical to the name entered earlier Generate a file to store graphics into a printer To generate a file that will store a graphic into a printer follow the same procedure to store a graphic in a printer up through step 8 Then 1 Insert a name in the Macro Name box Keep it simple this name will be used later to print the graphic 2 Press the Save to File button This will allow you to select a file where the stored universal graphic information is saved Page 234 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts 3 This file contains an erase any previous graphic with the same name command a
405. t 89 Table 19 Encoding schemes for ECC 200 154 Table 20 RSS Characteristics Summary nn nn nnnnnr nn nn rr nnnn mnn 172 Table 21 E EE 176 Table 22 Mandatory Al Code Associations 178 Table 23 Invalid Al Code Associations 0nnneeneeeeee eenen eenen ennenen ennenen 179 Table 24 Als supported by automatic check digit generation sssssssesesnnnzennzzzenni 180 Table 25 Barcode Control Commande A 183 Table 26 Paper Sensor stop printing Commands ss mn eennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 203 Table 27 Paper Sensor out of paper Commande 204 Table 28 Print dots to characters per inch and points 250 Table 29 Scalable font command interactions nn 252 Table 30 Legacy font definition t get tegt Eege 257 Table Si Ghara ier Pre DE 258 Table 32 UTF 16 bit field definitions AAA 260 Table 33 UTF 8 bit field definitions s ss sssseeennnnzznnnnzzznnnnnzznnnnzzzznnnnnzzznzznzzzzza 261 Table 34 System file extensions ssssssseeennnnannnnnzannnnnnnnnznnnninirmennrrzzzzzrnzzzzzzzza 269 Table 35 File system status bit definitions A 272 Table 36 Totals register indexes AAA 280 Table 87 Parallel port Timing te deer user grebekeeEg Eege oleaasaseinestedeteerseeeneciebed 294 Table 38 USB Class 7 Control pipe commande nn 312 Table 39 Supported Class Specific Requests and Nottteatons 314 Table 40 Supported Class Specific Heoueste eenen 314 Table 41 Line Coding Eng ert 315 Table 42 Set control Line estate 315 Table
406. t 15 gt IPCL amp F1 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The SI command sets 17 333 characters per inch print pitch ESC SI Begin 24 cpi character pitch ASCII ESC SI Hexadecimal 1BH OFH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 15 gt IPCL amp YF4 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC SP command sets 23 111 characters per inch print pitch 100 10937 Rev F Page 79 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC P Set character pitch ASCII ESC P lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 50H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 80 gt lt n gt IPCL amp F1 amp F2 amp F3 amp F4 amp F5 amp R FE amp F7 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC P lt n gt command sets character per inch print pitch to lt n gt The printer resolution limits the exact print pitch The following table lists the exact pitch for various values on lt n gt Resulting lt n gt Resulting Characters Characters per Inch per Inch 1 1 00 16 2 2 00 17 17 33 RAF 3 3 01 18 17 33 4 4 00 19 18 91 5 4 95 20 20 8 amp F5 6 5 94 21 20 8 7 6 93 22 23 11 8 8 00 amp F7 23 23 11 9 9 04 24 23 11 amp A F4 10 9 90 amp VF3 25 23 11 11 10 95 26 26 12 12 23 amp F2 27 26 13 13 00 28 26 14 13 87 29 29 71 15 14 86 amp FE 30 29 71 Table 15 Character Pitch This command disables any right side spacing set by the ESC V command In addition
407. t 22 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 22 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 22 gt information NUL ESC b lt 22 gt 1234567890123 NUL Figure 34 GS1 Databar 14 Stacked Omni Example KA Note Note that the data to be encoded does not include the GS1 format 01 as it is implied You only need to send the 13 digit item number The check digit will be generated by the printer GS1 Databar Limited RSS Limited GS 1 DataBar Limited encodes a 14 digit EAN UCC item identification with an indicator digit of O or 1 in a small symbol that is not intended to be scanned As the indicator can only be 0 or 1 the barcode must start with 0 or 1 or it is invalid Function GS1 Databar Limited ASCII ESC b lt 20 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 20 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 20 gt information NUL 01 12345678901231 ESC b lt 20 gt 1234567890123 NUL Figure 35 GS1 Databar Limited Example Note Note that the data to be encoded does not include the GS1 format 01 as it is implied You only need to send the 13 digit item number The check digit will be generated by the printer Page 146 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes GS1 Databar Expanded RSS Expanded GS 1 DataBar Expanded encodes the EAN UCC item identification plus supplementary element strings such as weight
408. t 27 gt lt 82 gt IPCL amp HV EPOS none Description The ESC R command resets horizontal and vertical tab stops to power up configuration The power up horizontal default is every eight spaces i e 9 17 25 etc The vertical default is every line FF Form feed ASCII FF Hexadecimal OCH Decimal lt 12 gt IPCL amp FF EPOS none Description The FF command performs a form feed to the top of the form Note The form feed command can be disabled Set the form length to zero ESC 4 Set top of form ASCII ESC 4 Hexadecimal 1BH 34H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 52 gt IPCL amp TF EPOS ESC L Description The ESC 4 command sets the top of form to the current position 100 10937 Rev F Page 75 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC C Set form length in lines ASCII ESC G lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 43H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 67 gt lt n gt IPCL amp SL mus AM EPOS ESC C lt n gt Description The ESC C lt n gt command sets the form length to lt n gt lines at the current line spacing If the current page position is greater than the new page length the command also sets the current position as the top of form ESC C NUL Set form length in inches ASCII ESC C NUL lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 43H lt 0 gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 67 gt lt 0 gt lt n gt IPCL amp SI lt m gt lt Mo gt EPOS none Description The ESC C NUL lt n gt command se
409. t 31 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 31 gt information NUL Aztec Rune will encode one 8 bit byte represented by 3 numeric characters representing 0 255 ESC b lt 31 gt 25 NUL Figure 54 Aztec Rune Example Note Many barcode scanners do not support Aztec Rune barcodes Note The intent is that this barcode encodes one 8 bit value 100 10937 Rev F Page 163 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Code One Code One was invented in 1992 and is the earliest public domain matrix barcode It uses a finder pattern of horizontal and vertical bars crossing the middle of the symbol The symbol can encode ASCII data error correction data function characters and binary encoded data Code One is currently used in the health care industry for medicine labels and the recycling industry to encode container content for sorting Function Code One ASCII ESC b lt 32 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 32 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 32 gt information NUL Ah Mee ESC b lt 32 gt 12345678901234 NUL Figure 55 Code One Example Note Setting the Size of the Code One barcode will set the minimum matrix size If the encoded data requires a larger matrix the matrix size will be increased as required The default is 0 which will auto size the symbol Page 164 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Composite Barcodes
410. t Eege ENEE EEN 163 Figure 54 Aztec Rune Examplei il bikja iena ea a a ea deere ak e 163 Figure 55 Code One Example san 164 Figure 56 UPC A Composite Example nn 166 Figure 57 UPC E Composite Example it ii rain a ed gehaen rg 167 Figure 58 EAN 13 Composite Example nn 167 Figure 59 EAN GS1 128 Composite Example nn 168 Figure 60 GS1 Databar 14 Composite Exvample nn 168 Figure 61 GS1 Databar Truncated 14 Composite Example nn 169 Figure 62 GS1 Databar Limited Composite Example ss nee 169 Figure 63 GS1 Databar Expanded Composite Exame 170 Figure 64 GS1 Databar Stacked Composite Example enza 170 Figure 65 GS1 Databar Stacked Omni Composite Example nn 171 Figure 66 GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked Composite Example ss 171 Figure 67 ECC 200 Size OptON Si fb f A a 186 Figure 68 Example of Character Graphics 228 Figure 69 Example Commands for a Sample Receipt sen 229 Figure 70 Sample REGGIO iii hs e NEEN ened 230 Figure 71 Receipt with graphics x si ik i a Ea nee 232 Figure 72 Scalable font cell indexes ANEN 242 Figure 73 Bit mapped font file format 247 Figure 74 UTF 16 encoding example iii siinad kies a a i dincceideeyedawinncsleeeeeens 260 Figure 75 UTF 8 encoding example au ki vedo ee 262 Figure 76 Typical POS SyStemt il est desdetpeerisemmaavdaties Edel 286 Figure 77 Host 10 Prinlerlink a tate eee ie denen ude dete watts 287 Figure 78 Printer Communications Buffer FIOW L nn 288 Figure 79 Par
411. t Mode 49 EPOS Codes 226 EPOS Emulation 62 Error Status Inquire 216 Euro Character Inserting 89 Extended APA Graphics 109 Extended Diagnostics Hex Dump 51 Firmware Configuration 39 Flow control Data Terminal Ready DTR 298 Ready Busy 298 XON XOFF 298 Form Feed 75 77 Form Length Setting Inches 76 Form Length Setting Lines 76 Forming characters 241 Graphic Mode 108 Graphic Data Processing 112 116 117 118 Graphic Mode Reassigning 110 Graphic mode Set Horizontal 113 115 Graphic save 119 Graphics all points addressable APA 230 Character 228 color 112 horizontal 112 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Index Horizontal 230 printing 228 Horizontal Motion Control 69 Horizontal Position Setting 71 Horizontal Tab 69 Horizontal tab Stops Setting 70 71 IEEE 1284 buffer Clearing 211 Indicator Lights 45 Indicators Fault 46 Initialize the Printer 201 Inquire Commands 210 Installing Cables 37 Installing Paper 39 Intercharacter Spacing Setting 81 International Character Set Selecting 87 88 249 252 253 254 255 256 257 262 263 264 265 269 270 271 272 273 274 IPCL Codes 62 Justification Setting 71 LED indicator error 45 paper 45 power 45 Level 0 diagnostics 51 Line feed 69 Line Feed Button 45 Line Feed Performing 72 Line Feed Reverse 77 Line Spacing Enabling 73 Line Spacing Feeding Lines 74 Line Spacing Set at 2 1
412. t is not available in all print modes ESC S lt 1 gt Select subscript ASCII ESC S lt 1 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 53H 01H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 83 gt lt 1 gt IPCL amp SB EPOS none Description The ESC S lt 1 gt command selects subscript The following characters are printed half size on the bottom side of the print line O Note Subscript is not available in all print modes ESC T End superscript or subscript ASCII ESC T Hexadecimal 1BH 54H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 84 gt IPCL amp SE EPOS none Description The ESC T command ends superscript or subscript Page 96 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC G__sCBegin italics ASCII ESC G Hexadecimal 1BH 25H 47H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 37 gt lt 71 gt IPCL amp MI EPOS ESC 4 Description The ESC G command begins italic print mode Note Italics are not available in all print modes ESC H_ End italics ASCII ESC H Hexadecimal 1BH 25H 48H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 37 gt lt 72 gt IPCL amp CI EPOS ESC 5 Description The ESC H command ends italic print mode 100 10937 Rev F Programming Codes Page 97 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Page Mode The Model 9000i supports two operational modes standard and page mode In standard mode as a line of text is received it is buffered and printed when the line feed is received In page mode the printer waits for a complete page a numb
413. t resembles a barcode but uses dots arranged in a hexagonal grid instead of bars Maxicode has been standardized under ISO IEC 16023 or AIM BC10 ISS Maxicode A Maxicode is sometimes referred to as a Bird s Eye Target or ups code It generally appears as a 1 inch square with a bull s eye in the middle surrounded by a pattern of hexagonal dots It can store about 93 characters of information and up to 8 Maxicode symbols can be chained together to convey more data The centered symmetrical bull s eye is useful in automatic symbol location regardless of orientation and it allows Maxicode symbols to be scanned even on a package traveling rapidly Maxicode symbols optionally include a structured carrier message containing key information about a package This information is protected with a strong Reed Solomon error correction code allowing it to be read even if a portion of the symbol is damaged These fields include e A 4 bit indication of the mode in use currently either mode 2 or mode 3 e A national or international postal code MaxiCode supports both numeric postal codes e g a ZIP Code and alphanumeric postal codes 148501200 Transact e A 3 digit country code encoded per ISO 3166 231 for the US e A 3 digit class of service code assigned by the carrier 3 ground e Mode 0 Obsolete mode superseded by modes 2 and 3 However the Model 9000 will use a mode setting of zero to indicate the mode should automa
414. t so that horizontal passes touch as expected The requested horizontal resolution is converted by data scaling Because the vertical dpi of the printer is always greater the resulting APA graphics printed on the Model 9000 Printer are slightly smaller than the same graphic printed on an impact printer All of this is done transparently to the application however loss of resolution may result in some modes If desired the ESC lt m gt command can be used to select the native resolution Note 1 If the Model 9000 Printer is used with programs that convert text to graphics the printer is slower than if the printer is sent ASCII text The Model 9000 Printer is supported by a Windows print driver that allows applications to select supported fonts Note 2 Generally the horizontal graphic commands provide faster print than the APA graphic commands Standard APA Graphics ESC K Print single density graphics 60h x 72v dpi ASCII ESC K lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 4BH lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 75 gt lt Ni gt lt N2 gt IPCL none Description The ESC K ms lt n gt command prints lt n gt 256 lt ns gt bytes of single density graphics 60 dpi ESC L Print half speed double density graphics 120h x 72v dpi ASCII ESC L lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 4CH lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 76 gt sis lt N2 gt IPCL none Description The ESC L lt n gt lt n gt
415. t the output lines from the printer not be shorted or back driven If the signals are not to be used they should be left open Pins 3 4 and 7 of the 9 pin connector are outputs from the printer If any one of these signals is grounded or back driven the other two outputs will be degraded The best time to configure the printer by the host with remote configuration is during system setup or software update Page 310 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix A CRC16 The CRC16 function used in the Model 9000 is as follows const static short crctab CRC lookup table 0x0000 Oxcoci OxC181 0x0140 OxC301 0x03C0 0x0280 Oxc241 OxC601 0x06CO 0x0780 OxC741 0x0500 OxC5C1 OxC481 0x0440 Oxccol OxO0CCO Ox0D80 OxCD41 OxOFOO OxCFC1 OxCE81 0x0E40 Ox0OA00 OxCAC1 OxCB81 Ox0B40 OxC901 0x09C0 0x0880 Oxc841 OxD801 Ox18C0 0x1980 OxD941 0x1B00 OxDBC1 OxDA81 0x1A40 Ox1E00 OxDEC1 OxDF81 Ox1F40 OxDDO1 Ox1DCO Ox1C80 OxDC41 0x1400 OxD4C1 OxD581 0x1540 OxD701 Ox17C0O 0x1680 OxD641 OxD201 0x12C0 0x1380 OxD341 Ox1100 OxDIC1 0xDO81 0x1040 OxF001 0x30C0 0x3180 OxF141 0x3300 OxF3C1 OxF281 0x3240 0x3600 OxF6C1 OxF781 0x3740 OxF501 0x35C0 0x3480 OxF441 Ox3C00 OxFCC1 OxFD81 Ox3D40 OxFFO1 Ox3FCO Ox3E80 OxFE41 OxFAO1 Ox3AC0 0x3B80 OxFB41 0x3900 OxF9C1 OxF881 0x3840 0x2800 OxE8C1 OxE981 0x2940 OxEBO1 Ox2BCO Ox2A80 OxEA41 OxEEO1 Ox2ECO O
416. te into your application TransAct does not recommend that you generate drivers In addition TransAct has created several tools that can be used to generate and maintain graphic images and files for print on the Model 9000 Information about drivers and tools are available on the TransAct web site For additional information contact Technical Support Quick PcOS Reference Chart Description ASCII Hex IPCL Page equivalent Code Low Level paper Motion Line feed LF OAH amp LF 69 Carriage return CR ODH amp CR 69 Horizontal Motion Back space BS 08H amp BS 70 Horizontal tab HT 09H amp HT 69 Set horizontal tab stops ESC D lt ni gt lt n2 gt 1BH 44H none 70 lt ni gt lt 0 gt Set horizontal position ESC n lt n1 gt lt n2 gt 1BH 6EH amp HP lt m1 gt 71 lt m2 gt lt m3 gt Set justification ESC a lt n gt 1BH 61H ae m 71 er Sege Ge n 2 Right n 8 Left No line feed n 9 Center No line feed n 10 Right No line feed Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops ESC R 1BH 52H amp HV 70 Set left right print margins ESC X lt n gt lt n2 gt 1BH 58H none 199 n Left margin n Right margin Select Minimum character Height and ESC P lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 50H none 255 Width in points Select Minimum character Height and ESC p lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 70H none 256 Width in 1 4 points Vertical Motion Perform a fi
417. ter it will be zero padded UN l 2 3 54 5 6 7 879 50 ESC b lt 0 gt 1234567890 NUL Figure 19 Interleaved 2 of 5 Example UPCA UPC A is a fixed length numeric continuous code that employs four element widths The printer supports Universal Product Code Version A E EAN 8 and EAN 13 Version A encodes 11 digits Typically the UPC A format starts with a number system digit five digit manufacturer s code five digit product code and a check digit The printer makes no assumptions about any of the codes except the check digit The printer prints an UPC bar code with the 11 digits sent to it and generates the check digit If fewer than 11 digits are sent the remaining digits will be zeros UPC A may include an EAN 2 or EAN 5 Addenda Function UPCA ASCII ESC b 43 information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H 43 information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 3 gt information NUL 1 723456 78901 gt UPC A with an EAN 2 Addenda 23456 78901 gt l UPC A with an EAN 5 Addenda 12345 VM bi ll Dh ll ESC b lt 3 gt 12345678901 12345 NUL 23456 78901 Figure 20 UPC A Examples ESC b 35 12345678901 12 NUL 100 10937 Rev F Page 137 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide UPC E UPC E is a zero suppression version of UPC To allow the use of UPC barcodes on smaller packages where a full 12 digit barcode may not fit a zero compressed version of U
418. ter driver It is a higher level driver that may or may not be used in the host system The Soft Reset will not reset the operating firmware nor will it do a complete hardware reset It only resets the USB bulk pipes 41 A Printer Driver is not the same as the USB Printing Support Driver The USB Printing Support driver supports the USB interface but does not provide print services The Printer Driver provides a printer specific API on top of the USB Driver 100 10937 Rev F Page 313 Appendix Model 9000 Programmer s Guide USB Class Definitions for Communication Devices CDC USB Class 2 Abstract Control interface The model 9000 supports the minimum CDC protocol requirements for the Abstract Control Model required to support the Microsoft USB Virtual Serial port driver Refer to the Universal Serial Bus Class Definitions for Communication Devices Version 1 1 January 19 1999 for a complete definition of this protocol See http www usb org developers devclass_docs usbcdc1 1 pdf The Model 9000 CDC class interface supports the following Requests and Notifications Requests Code Description SEND_ENCAPSULATED_COMMAND 00h Issues a command in the format of the supported control protocol GET_ENCAPSULATED_RESPONSE Oth Requests a response in the format of the supported control protocol SET LINE CODING 20h Configures DTE rate stop bits parity and number of character bits GET_LINE_CODING 21h Reque
419. ter te 0398 Greek capital letter theta 0423 Cyrillic capital letter u 0399 Greek capital letter iota 0424 Cyrillic capital letter ef 039a Greek capital letter kappa 0425 Cyrillic capital letter ha 039b Greek capital letter lamda 0426 Cyrillic capital letter tse 039c Greek capital letter mu 0427 Cyrillic capital letter che 039d Greek capital letter nu 0428 Cyrillic capital letter sha 039e Greek capital letter xi 0429 Cyrillic capital letter shcha 039f Greek capital letter omicron 042a Cyrillic capital letter hard sign 03a0 Greek capital letter pi 042b Cyrillic capital letter yeru 03a1 Greek capital letter rho 042c Cyrillic capital letter soft sign 03a3 Greek capital letter sigma 042d Cyrillic capital letter e 03a4 Greek capital letter tau 042e Cyrillic capital letter vu 03a5 Greek capital letter upsilon 042f Cyrillic capital letter va 03a6 Greek capital letter phi 0430 Cyrillic small letter a 03a7 Greek capital letter chi 0431 Cyrillic small letter be 03a8 Greek capital letter psi 0432 Cyrillic small letter ve 03a9 Greek capital letter omega 0433 Cyrillic small letter ghe 03aa Greek capital letter iota with dialvtika 0434 Cyrillic small letter de 03ab Greek capital letter upsilon with dialvtika 0435 Cyrillic small letter ie 03ac Greek small letter alpha with tonos 0436 Cyrillic small letter zhe 03ad Greek small letter epsilon with tonos 0437 Cyrillic small letter ze 03ae Greek small letter eta with tonos 0438 Cyrillic small letter i 03af Greek small lett
420. teractions Function Set minimum character height and width in points All ASCII ESC P lt w gt lt h gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 50H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 80 gt Range w 0 4 72 h 4 72 The ESC P command will set the minimum character width or height based on w for the width and h for height where w and h are in points defined as 1 72 of an inch increments If the character width is set to zero the height will be used for the width and proportional spacing will be used NOTE The set pitch command will take precedence unless this command selects 0 for the width Page 252 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Function Set minimum character height and width in 1 4 points All ASCII ESC p lt w gt lt h gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 70H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 112 gt Range w 0 16 255 h 16 255 The ESC p command will set the minimum character width or height based on w for the width and h where w and h are in 1 4 points or 1 288 of an inch increments This approximates setting characters by dot If the character width is set to zero the height will be used for the width and proportional spacing will be used NOTE The set pitch command will take precedence unless this command selects 0 width Function Set Character spacing in points All ASCII ESC lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 49H Decima
421. tes that compose the raster r number of times the raster is to be printed 256x rH rL d1 dn data bytes Range 0 lt m lt 80 0 lt n lt 80 0 lt r lt 65535 0 lt d1 dn lt 255 Results can be unpredictable when very dark and very light sections are Note This command can produce graphics that are difficult to print repeated 100 10937 Rev F Page 115 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Bitmap Graphics File Support The Model 9000 printer supports direct printing of Monochrome 4 bit 16 color 8bit 256 color 24bit True color bitmap files The image may be directly printed or saved temporarily and scaled at 1 to 1 or 2to 1 Printing in Monochrome two color or gray scale is supported based on paper selection Color bitmaps are converted to a grayscale representation of its luminance by adding together 30 of the red value 60 of the green value and 10 of the blue value These weights are predefined in the printer and are close to the industry standard 30 59 and 11 Two color print is based on the luminance with color weighting of the selected paper color Grayscale print is based only on the luminance value image the actual print will be Monochrome two color or grayscale The printer will translate the color image based on its own rules so the resulting image may not be as you intended In addition the amount of data in an 8 or 24 bit color bitmap is extensive The time required to transfe
422. th file system commands Where Scale 0 one to one 1 twice the width 2 Twice the height 3 Twice the height and width ESC FS S command first If the Model 9000 cannot find a bgp command it will search for a omp file If there are two files with the same root name the bgp file will be processed Note The ESC FS P command looks for graphic files defined by the ESC FS S Save Bitmap File Print ASCII ESC FS S lt File Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1CH 53H lt File Name gt lt 0 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 28 gt lt 83 gt gt lt File Name gt lt 0 gt IPCL None EPOS None Description The ESC FS S accepts a file name and saves the previously defined bitmap file in the RAM file system to the Flash file system If the file already exists the existing file will be erased will no longer print the saved image Note This command followed by a zero length file name will flush the stored graphic image Note The ESC FS S command erases the RAM file so the ESC FS p Page 118 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes User Store Graphic Save The Model 9000 Printer maintains a 16K 16384 bytes section of flash memory and up to 192K of extended flash memory to save user information The information can be either macros or user defined characters These groups of data are indexed by name and may be called up at any time after they are stored See the sections on Macr
423. than 12 IPS is not recommended Alt Speed Override From Paper or from Sets the alternate paper speed 1 to 15 IPS High Limit 50 to 70 degrees C Sets the point where the printer will stop Never set this higher than 65 however if you have sensitive paper you may wish to lower this to 55 or 60 Degrees C Default Line Height 6 Sets the default lines per inch 75 8 is the most paper efficient 7 5 or 6 8 may be used if desired Default CPI 10 to 30 CPI Sets the default characters per inch Values from 12 to 17 produce good print depending on the character size 100 10937 Rev F Page 55 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide UTF Encoding ASCII UTF 8 UTF 8 Characters only UTF 16 Auto UTF 16 Big Endian UTF 16 Little Endian UTF 32 Auto UTF 32 Big Endian UTF 32 Little Endian Sets the default Encoding mode Auto modes require that a Unicode byte order mark be sent to the printer so that the correct byte order can be determined Note UTF32 requires optional firmware Code page default Typically 437 or 1252 The default code page used for ASCII encoding NOT USED if UTF encoding is active Default Font 10 13 or 15 out of 24 dots Default character size Barcode scale 1to6 X Default Minimum bar width in dots for barcodes Note the printer will automatically reduce this to attempt to fit a barcode in the print zone If only one dot is u
424. the PJColor program See the next section The other way is to use the Ithaca windows driver and capture the output to a file To generate an image using the windows print driver 1 Generate the graphic image in the program of your choice Use colors consistent with the two colors installed in the printer 2 Make sure the paper size you pick fits the printer 3 inches wide with 0 25 inch margins 3 The Model 9000 print driver should be installed even if the printer is not connected 4 Set up the print driver to print the graphic to a file using whatever resolution is required 5 Print the graphic image to a file 6 Later when you want to print the graphic simply copy the file to the printer with your application 7 You may also copy the graphic to the graphic save buffer and then request the printer to retrieve and print it without re sending the graphic data 100 10937 Rev F Page 231 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Optionally process the color image with the Ithaca color image processor in the PJColor program The program can print the image or generate a printable file love at A FIRST BITE QUICK MART 1234 Rt1 Anytown Ct 203 123 4567 4 3 2003 15 37 STA 2000 OP 00067 TE 021 0035 KLEENEX FAM 004 QIY 1 1 68 J RITZ 001 QTY 1 2 50 D CHIPS 001 QTY 1 1 50 D STORAGE BAG D04 QTY 1 1 50 J SUB TOTAL 8 68 SALES TAX 1 50 TOTAL 10 18 CASH TEND 20 00 CHANGE DUE 9
425. the command returns ACK 4112 after that the command returns NAK lt 11 gt The command allows the application to determine if the printer has been power cycled and needs to be reinitialized The ENQ lt 10 gt command and the INIT signal on the parallel port both cause the printer to return power up status ENQ lt 14 gt Inquire Mechanical error status ASCII ENQ lt 14 gt Hexadecimal 05H OEH Decimal lt 5 gt lt 14 gt Function Error status Response ACK lt 14 gt 06H OEH No mechanical errors NAK lt 14 gt 15H OEH Mechanical error has occurred Use ENQ lt 22 gt to identify the error Note For this status request to function the Buffer Full Only off line option should be selected Page 212 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 15 gt Inquire printer state ASCII IENQI lt 15 gt Hexadecimal 05H 11H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 15 gt Function The ENQ lt 15 gt command returns the current printer state Note ENQ lt 17 gt also returns the current printer state but it should not be used as it conflicts with XON XOFF flow control Response ACK lt 15 gt lt n gt lt r gt lt r gt Where lt 15 gt is the echo of the command ID lt n gt is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF lt I gt bit 0 1 always bit 1 Cover is closed bit 2 Receipt paper is out bit 3 0 bit 4 Printer is waiting in an error mode
426. the em width of the font The default for most fonts is about 3 The Model 9000 using the GB18030 font supplied by TransAct Technologies produces the best characters with a brush size of about 100 Note The default value for the Brush stroke may be set in the POR INI file Page 256 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Function Redefine Legacy Font definitions All ASCII ESC r lt ID gt lt FontID gt lt Horz gt lt Vert gt lt Spacing gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 74H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 116 gt Description The ESC r command will allow the legacy fonts defined in the POR INI file to be dynamically redefined The ID is the legacy font ID ID IthacaMode ID ID Ithaca Mode P Fonts Barcodes OCR Epsoni 0 PcOS1 0 Bar Codet 4 OCR 7 Epson2 1 PcOS2 1 Bar Code2 5 Epson3 2 PcOS3 2 Bar Code3 6 PcOS4 3 Table 30 Legacy font definition ID s The Font ID is the logical font assignment in the POR INI file where 0 99 refer to scalable fonts and 100 199 refer to bitmap fonts The Horz and Vert value are the horizontal and vertical size of the font in 1 8 points Spacing is the absolute spacing in dots If this is O the font definition is used for the spacing Note The default value for the Brush stroke may be set in the POR INI file 100 10937 Rev F Page 257 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide
427. the height 3 Twice the height and width The intent of this command is to allow a bitmap file to be loaded into the Model 9000 and printed scaled up to 2 to 1 Use the ESC FS lt Bitmap file data gt command to load the bitmap image and the ESC FS p to print it Note The temporary buffer is also used for various other commands If the data in the buffer is not a bitmap graphic it won t be printed by this command ESC FS P Print Bitmap File Print ASCII ESC FS P lt Bitmap file data gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1CH 50H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 28 gt lt 80 gt IPCL None EPOS None Description The ESC FS P command accepts Monochrome 16 color 256 color and 24bit color bitmap files and prints them immediately bit for bit with no scaling 100 10937 Rev F Page 117 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide ESC FS P Print Saved Bitmap File Print ASCII ESC FS P lt Scale gt lt File Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1CH 50H lt Scale gt lt File Name gt lt 0 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 28 gt lt 80 gt lt Scale gt lt File Name gt lt 0 gt IPCL None EPOS None Description The ESC FS P command followed by a value that is not B selects a scale retrieves a graphic file named in the File Name field and prints it at the selected scale This graphic file must previously have been defined and saved by the ESC FS command and the ESCJIFSJS command or by writing a bitmap file to the file system wi
428. thod to use on a scan line by scan line basis The print driver can be directed to print to file creating a prn file When creating a prn file it is recommended that the Start End Doc settings be cleared in the Start End Doc tab of the printer properties page After the prn file is created it can be read and sent to the printer by the host application Bit wise RLE In bit wise RLE compression the Most Significant Bit MSB compression of each data byte denotes if the compressed data represents one or zero bits Bits zero through six indicate how many bits are represented as a one or zero A 34 Hex 34H represents 34H bits set to zero A 97H represents 17H bits set to one ESC h lt 1 gt lt 5 gt lt 1 gt lt 34H gt lt 97H gt lt 8fH gt lt 09H gt Byte wise RLE In byte wise RLE compression data is represented in byte Compression pairs The first byte is a count and the second is the graphics data The graphics data byte is repeated the number of times represented by the count byte ESC h lt 1 gt lt 5 gt lt 8 gt lt 09H gt lt ffH gt lt 02H gt lt 55H gt Where lt 09H gt lt ffH gt means repeat TH nine times and lt O2H gt lt 55H gt means repeat 55H two times Difference Compression In difference compression data is represented in byte pairs In compression the first byte is an index into the byte stream as it would exist if sent in an uncompressed format The second byte is the data that is different in th
429. tically be determined from the data supplied In Auto Mode Modes 2 3 or 4 are used Mode 1 is obsolete and not supported by the Model 9000 Mode 2 Formatted data containing a structured carrier message with a 10 digit numeric postal code and 3 digit country and service code US domestic e Mode 3 Formatted data containing a structured Carrier Message with a 6 character alphanumeric postal code and 3 digit country and service code international destinations Mode 4 Unformatted data with Standard Error Correction Mode 5 Unformatted data with Enhanced Error Correction Mode 6 Used for programming hardware devices gt a zb er Det ri ee e ja E AN a XX esto ty ES Figure 46 Maxicode Symbol The Model 9000 prints the Maxicode slightly larger 1 inch square to improve readability Page 156 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes The above Mode 2 symbol is encoding the TransAct Address as follows 148501200231003TransAct Technologies Inc 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca New York Where 14850 1200 is the zip code 231 is the country code and 003 is ground service Maxicode Commands There are two version of the command one is NUL terminated and the other allows a length to be specified Note that the length is a two byte field as the symbol may contain more than 256 characters Function Maxicode ASCII ESC b lt 16 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 16 gt information NUL Dec
430. tin small letter q 0021 exclamation mark 0072 Latin small letter r 0022 quotation mark 0073 Latin small letter s 0023 number sign 0074 Latin small letter t 0024 dollar sign 0075 Latin small letter u 0025 percent sign 0076 Latin small letter v 0026 ampersand 0077 Latin small letter w 0027 apostrophe 0078 Latin small letter x 0028 left parenthesis 0079 Latin small letter y 0029 right parenthesis 007a Latin small letter z 002a asterisk 007b left curly bracket 002b plus sign 007c vertical line 002c comma 007d right curly bracket 002d hyphen minus 007e tilde 002e period 00a0 no break space 002f slash 00a1 inverted exclamation mark 0030 digit zero 00a2 cent sign 0031 digit one 00a3 pound sign 0032 digit two 00a4 currency sign 0033 digit three 00a5 yen sign 0034 digit four 00a6 broken bar 0035 digit five 00a7 section sign 0036 digit six 00a8 diaeresis 0037 digit seven 00a9 copyright sign 0038 digit eight 00aa feminine ordinal indicator 0039 digit nine 00ab left guillemet 003a colon 00ac not sign 003b semicolon Dad soft hyphen 003c less than sign Dia registered trade mark sign 003d equals sign OOaf macron overline 003e greater than sign 00b0 degree sign 003f question mark 00b1 plus minus sign 0040 commercial at 00b2 superscript two 0041 Latin capital letter a 00b3 superscript three 0042 Latin capital letter b 00b4 acute accent 0043 Latin capital letter c 00b5 micro sign 0044 Latin capital letter d 00b6 paragraph sign 0045 Latin capital letter e 0
431. tion QRCode ASCII ESC b lt 26 gt information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 26 gt information NUL Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 26 gt information NUL Function QRCode ASCII ESC b lt 25 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 25 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 25 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d gt lt d gt ESC b lt 26 gt TransAct Technologies Inc 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca New York NUL Figure 50 Data QRCode Example Note The normal Select barcode Width and Select Barcode height commands do not affect QRCode barcodes The rules governing how the barcode is printed do not allow variations in the aspect ratios There are QRCode control commands that will allow some control over how the barcode is printed Note QR Code Model 1 is obsolete only Model 2 is supported Page 160 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Micro QRCode Micro QR Code is a 2D barcode readable by most QR scanners mobile phones and smart phones with a camera The code is similar to QR code although is restricted to 35 characters Numeric only Max 35 characters Alphanumeric Max 21 characters Binary 8 bits Max 15 bytes Kanji Kana Max 9 characters Note The number of characters is also affected by the error correction The above assumes the default level L is used Note Lower case alpha is p
432. to be disabled Itis always on lt n gt is defined as follows Bi on off Hexadecimal 0 1 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll near end sensor disabled On 01H 02H 03H lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Paper roll near end sensor enabled 7 S 00H lt 0 gt Undefined Table 26 Paper Sensor stop printing Commands ESC p 3 Select paper sensor s to output paper end signals ASCII ESC p 3 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 70H 33H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 51 gt lt n gt Range Osns255 Description The ESC p 3 lt n gt command selects the paper sensor that outputs a paper end signal to the parallel interface when a paper end is detected The default setting is when all sensors are enabled lt n gt 15 Itis possible to select multiple sensors to output signals If any of the sensors detect a paper end the paper end signal is output The command is only available with a parallel interface The paper end sensor is an option If the sensor is not equipped the settings of bits 0 and 1 of the command are not effective 100 10937 Rev F Page 203 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Bit onoff Hexadecimal Decimal Function 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll near end sensor disabled On 01H lt 1 gt Paper roll near end sensor enabled 1 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll near end sensor disabled On 02H lt 2 gt Paper roll near end sensor enabled 2 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll en
433. ts the form length to lt n gt inches If the current page position is greater than the new page length the command also sets the current position as the top of form If zero inches are specified the form feed and vertical tab commands are ignored ESC 5 Begin auto line feed ASCII ESC 5 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 35H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 53 gt lt n gt IPCL amp MA Begin IPCL amp CA End EPOS none Description The ESC 5 lt i gt command sets auto line feed mode ESC 5 lt 0 gt command ends auto line feed mode Note The begin or end auto line feed command overrides the configuration setting Page 76 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC Reverse line feed ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 5DH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 93 gt IPCL amp LR EPOS none Description The ESC command performs a reverse line feed at the current line spacing Note The Model 9000 Printer can tolerate no more than 1 2 inch of reverse feed Feed to Black Dot An option for the Model 9000 is a black dot sensor This sensor allows preprinted paper with black index marks to be positioned by a feed to black dot command modified firmware It is not possible to field retrofit a standard Model 9000 with a black dot sensor O Note This is a special order option and requires an additional sensor and Function Feed to Black Dot ASCII ESC VT lt n gt Hexadecimal BH 0BH lt
434. ts to blink Self test mode Continue to hold the Feed button ultill the ERROR LED starts to blink Slower Configuration mode Continue to hold the Feed button until the ERROR LED slows again Release the line feed button and the printer will enter Hex dump mode PLAN MIN SLO Hex dump format The format follows Note that the displayed value will be the input 8 bit value and not the Unicode value 0054 0068 0069 0073 0020 0069 0073 0020 This is 0061 0020 0074 0065 0073 0074 000D 000A a test Several indications of printer and host communication problems can be deduced from hex dump mode If the printer is printing all 3F symbols the parity or the number of bits is wrong If the printer is printing 3F symbols when it should be printing other characters the communications settings are probably incorrect such as the parity baud rate or bit length setting If the printer prints incorrect characters like Hex C1 instead of Hex 41 A it is set for 8 bit data and the host is set for 7 bit In most cases the print problem can be traced to the host and printer being configured differently Hex Dump by command It is possible to enter hex dump by command See page 281 In this mode the printer will process status requests and the displayed value will be the Unicode value processed by the current state of the printer Level 0 Diagnostics Level 0 diagnostics always and only run at power up e g power being applied Thes
435. uccess and B for Failure Detail Detailed status as a binary byte with bit definitions as follows Bit Hex Decimal Function 0 01 1 File Open 1 02 2 File in Write Mode 2 04 4 The Read response is shorter than requested and EOF has been encountered 3 08 8 The file is already open 4 10 16 The file system has no space for the preceding operation Could be out of Flash or out of Buffer space 5 20 32 A write operation has been attempted to a read oniv file 6 40 64 File requested was not found 8 80 128 An error has occurred Other bits mav be set that give additional detail This bit determines the G or B status in the previous byte Table 35 File svstem status bit definitions Function Return File CRC command All ASCII ESC RS G lt Filename gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 47H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 71 gt FileName File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension null terminated Description The ESC RS G command will return the CRC of the specified file Note If the file does not exist a CRC will be reported as 0 and is not valid the last file system status result will be updated Page 272 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Extended Printer Control Function Query File Status All ASCII ESC RS q Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 71H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 113 gt Description The ESC RS q command will r
436. uide Communications USB USB stands for Universal Serial Bus A technical discussion of USB is beyond the scope of this document If you would like more information about USB visit the USB web site at www usb org and http www usb org developers devclass docs Powered USB The Powered USB web site http www poweredusb org provides standards for Powered USB printers and other devices USB Support The Model 9000 printer supports the standard USB Printer class interface See Appendix B This interface standard is supported by most operating systems including Windows and Linux In Windows this interface is supported by the USB Printing Support Driver usbprint svs and will present the printer as USBOO1 USB999 The ID is assigned by Windows and not by the printer In Linux the printer is also supported by a USB Printing Support driver however the exact details can vary based on the Linux implementation The printer will generally be presented as IpO Ip99 again depending on the implementation The Model 9000 fully supports the USB Printer class device including Read Write and Status See www usb org developers devclass docs usbprinti 1 pdf The Model 9000 printer also supports the USB CDC class device Abstract Control Model standard as a USB Serial port This standard is also supported by Windows and uses the usbser sys driver supplied by Microsoft Unlike the Class 7 device this driver will require an inf file to associate the
437. umented here Refer to our Microline Emulation Programmer s Guide 12 03244 for more information Application Development To aid application development several chapters in this manual are designed to help the programmer understand the Model 9000 Printer The next chapter provides a detailed description of each of the commands Subsequent chapters provide explanations of how the printer works including a description of the internal print buffer communications link and interaction between the host computer and printer 15 ESC POS is a registered trademark of the Seiko Epson Corporation Page 62 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Ithaca Control Codes and Commands Programming Codes Throughout this Programmer s Guide charts and tables list commands and features In most cases the charts cross reference the page that describes the command Code summary charts arranged by code and function are provided to help quickly find commands PcOS Printer Control Codes The following section defines the Model 9000 Ithaca PcOS emulation The native Ithaca PcOS emulation provides the most flexibility and control over the printer It is consistent with most previous Ithaca PcOS products and should be used when the printer is placed in a new application One optional feature in the Model 9000 Printer is the ability to print color graphics Due to the complexity of color graphics TransAct provides several drivers to integra
438. urrently using the USB interface there is no interface adapter and only the USB retaining bracket should be removed Install the new adapter a Sliding the new adapter into the interface adapter connector Do not force it It will install easily when aligned correctly b If the new interface is to be USB there is not adapter however the USB retaining bracket should be installed c If the old interface was USB there is an adapter cover that should be installed over the new interface adapter replacing the USB retaining bracket Installing Cables Three cables are required to be connected to the printer 1 Power 2 Communications 3 Cash Drawer Connecting power The Model 9000 Printer is generally supplied with a built in power supply As an option the printer is available without a power supply when Powered USB is used Note When a printer is configured to support the Powered USB interface it is supplied without a power supply The other interface adapters will not function 100 10937 Rev F Page 37 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Connecting Communications Cables The Model 9000 has a number of different communications interfaces Serial The serial interface connector is either a 9 pin or 25 pin mail D shell interface The pin out is shown below 9pin 25 pin Signal Description Pin 2 Pin 3 RX Receive Data Pin 3 Pin 2 TX Transmit Data Pin 4
439. use it embeds in the application a file name that you may wish to change in the future By using the Alias ID the font name may change but the application will remain constant Note This command may be used to load and select a bitmap font If a bitmap font is selected with this command it will define bitmap font 7 and select it Once loaded it may be reselected by selecting font 107 Font Size and Spacing The font typically defines the character size and line spacing The typical font is proportional spaced That is the spacing between characters varies This is not always 100 10937 Rev F Page 249 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide the most desirable mode of operation To give the programmer some additional control over character spacing and line height the Accutherm Supreme provides a width and height override command The following table converts dots to CPI Characters Per Inch points and 1 4 points and is useful in calculating point size settings Dots Characters per Points Va Points 1 203 Inch CPI 1 72 1 288 8 2 84 11 35 9 3 19 12 77 10 3 55 14 19 11 3 90 15 61 12 4 26 17 02 13 4 61 18 44 14 4 97 19 86 15 5 32 21 28 16 5 67 22 70 17 6 03 24 12 18 6 38 25 54 19 6 74 26 96 20 7 09 28 37 21 7 45 29 79 22 7 80 31 21 23 8 16 32 63 24 8 51 34 05 25 8 87 35 47 26 9 22 36 89 27 9 58 38 31 28 9 93 39 72 29 10 29 41 14 41 14 54 42 56 48 17 02 68 10 51 18 09 72 35 68 24 12 96
440. used on IP networks Computers that are connected to IP networks must be configured before they can communicate with other computers on the network DHCP allows a computer to be configured automatically eliminating the need for intervention by a network administrator It also provides a central database for keeping track of computers that have been connected to the network This prevents two computers from accidentally being configured with the same IP address In the absence of DHCP the printer may be manually configured with an IP address A subset of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP printer MIB RFC1213 is supported by the Model 9000 that will allow limited printer monitoring Page 34 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Cash Drawer Interface Description The Model 9000 Printer supports a single cash drawer with status The driver in the printer is capable of supplying 24 V DC at up to 1 5 amps for up to 250 milliseconds The Model 9000 Printer defines cash drawer closed as switch open If the drawer is disconnected it will be viewed by the printer as closed Since the printer does not act on the cash drawer status the application can interpret cash drawer status any way it wants Driver connector type standard Single RJ12 connectors with 24V sink drivers Driver voltage 24 volts Refer to power supply specification Driver current 1 amp maximum with current limit Pulse duration 250 msec
441. user store ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt Ge amp UF 124 Transfer user store to extended user store ESC US t ALL lt 0 gt Ee amp UF 124 Report on user store ESC US q 1BH 1FH 72H amp UQ 125 lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Return a report on user store ESC US 1BH 1FH 72H amp UQ 125 lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Process user macro ESC g lt 0 gt 1BH 67H OOH amp GP 127 Start macro record ESC g lt 1 gt 1BH 67H 01H amp amp GS 127 Stop macro record ESC g lt 2 gt 1BH 67H 02H amp amp GE 127 Stop macro record and save ESC g lt 3 gt i S i 67H amp GW 127 Bar Codes Print bar code ESC b lt n gt NUL 1BH 62H See page 128 128 PDF 417 bar code control ESC EM E lt f gt lt v gt 1BH19H45H l none 184 Set bar code height ESC EM B lt n gt 1BH 19H 42H amp BH 195 n 0 Restore defaults Gg n 1 9 Number of passes 0 11 inch per pass Set bar code width ESC EM W lt n gt 1BH19H57H amp BW lt m gt 195 Set bar code justification HRI print mode ESC EM J lt n gt 1BH 19H amp BJemi gt lt m 195 and print direction sAn e Unicode Initiate Unicode UTF 32BE encoding ESC h 1BH 2BH 68H none 263 Initiate Unicode UTF 32LE encoding ESC 1BH 2BH 6CH none 264 Initiate Unicode UTF 16BE encoding ESC H 1BH 2BH 48H none 263 Initiate Unicode UTF 16LE encoding ESC L 1BH 2BH 4CH none 264 Initiate Unico
442. using a 24 volt DC version and the 24 volt supply meets the requirements of the Model 9000 printer and any cash drawer that is connected to the printer A powered USB interface is a special order option There are several standards for the power interface Make sure that you inform TransAct is aware of what interface you require and that that interface connector is supported by the Model 9000 Ethernet Connect a standard Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connection Take care not to connect an Ethernet cable to the Cash Drawer connector Page 38 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Verify the Firmware Configuration An example receipt is Included in the box your printer shipped in that will show how the printer was configured before it shipped from our Ithaca facility Compare this information to your system requirements Pay attention to the emulation and the communications link If they are wrong the printer may appear inoperative If the configuration is not correct refer to the section on changing the Model 9000 configuration If there are a number of printers to be installed and you want the identical configuration in each you can use the universal configuration program to record the configuration on one printer and replicate it over a group The configuration program is available from Transact technical support Installing Paper It is easy to install paper in the Model 9000 1 Open the paper cove
443. v F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications ESC G USB Green ASCII ESC G lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 7EH 47H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 71 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS None Where lt n gt sets the Mode 0 Disable Non zero enables green mode after n seconds Description The USB Vbus is monitored by the printer This command sets up what the printer will do when Vbus is removed If this value is non zero the printer will enter Green mode after n seconds delay while the print head is heated to a level that will allow normal operation Note 2 Sleep mode also removes the feed motor hold current It is possible that the first line of print may be slightly altered if the paper is moved while in sleep mode Note 1 At low temperatures this delay will include a print head preheat 100 10937 Rev F Page 285 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Communications Protocol and Print Buffers The following figure illustrates the communication flow from host computer to printer and from printer to cash drawer Host to printer link Printer Host computer Printer to cash drawer Cash drawer O Figure 76 Typical POS System For the host to printer communication link the Model 9000 printer supports serial or parallel USB and Ethernet communications The serial parallel USB and Ethernet ports all follow standards developed for the personal
444. versal graphic the Model 9000 ignores the command amp US lt Name gt amp Flag item as a start up universal graphic IPCL Description amp US Name gt amp The amp US lt Name gt amp command flags the referenced item to De processed at startup Only one user character definition and one universal graphic may be flagged to run at startup amp UD lt Name gt amp Delete item from user store IPCL Description amp UFALL amp IPCL Description amp RUQAE IPCL Description amp UT lt n gt IPCL Description Example amp CL IPCL Description Where n Page 238 amp UD lt Name gt amp The amp UD lt Name gt amp command removes an item from user store and frees up space If the item does not exist the Model 9000 ignores the command Flush information from user store amp YUFALLE amp The amp UFALL amp command clears all entries in user store and frees the data space It must have the name ALL in uppercase attached Report on user store amp UQ amp The amp UQ amp command prints a status report The intention of the command is to aid in universal graphic development Redefine User Store Termination Character amp UT lt n gt This command allows the terminator used to signal the end of the name field in User Store commands to be modified The value of lt n gt is used for the terminator The value of n may be from 0 to 255 If amp UT were sent to
445. w GS 1 code 128 Alpha Numeric Numeric 0 9 only 13 digits GS 1 Numeric 0 9 only 13 digits 2D alpha Numeric NUL term 2D alpha Numeric 16bit length See notes 2D alpha Numeric NUL term See notes below 2D alpha Numeric NUL term See GS1 Databar barcode definitions below 19 RSS 14 Truncated R 20 RSS Limited 21 RSS Stacked DI S No HRI will be printed 22 RSS Stacked Omni No HRI will be printed 23 RSS Expanded i 24 RSS Expanded Stacked No HRI will be printed QRCode 2D alpha Numeric 16bit length See notes below QRCode 2D alpha Numeric NUL term See notes below Data Matrix 2D alpha Numeric 16bit length See notes below Data Matrix 2D alpha Numeric NUL term See notes below Aztec 2D alpha Numeric 16bit length See notes below Aztec 2D alpha Numeric NUL term See notes below Aztec Rune 2D Numeric NUL term 3 digits representing 0 255 Code One 2D alpha Numeric NUL term MicroPDF 417 MicroPDF 417 Micro QRCode Micro QRCode TruncatedPDF 417 TruncatedPDF 417 2D alpha Numeric 16bit length 2D alpha Numeric NUL term See notes below 2D alpha Numeric 16bit length See notes below See notes below See notes below See notes below See notes below 2D alpha Numeric NUL term 2D alpha Numeric 16bit length 2D alpha Numeric NUL term Le Dr d Rev F Page 129 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide COMPOSITE Barcodes Com
446. ware ID with the file image ID as a NUL terminated ASCII string Function Return the Firmware CRC and Verification State ASCII ESC Z Hex 1BH 7EH 66H Decimal lt 2 7 gt lt 126 gt lt 102 gt Description Read and return the printer s firmware CRC and backbround verification state as a NUL terminated ASCII string Returns Z lt s gt lt CRCy gt lt CRC gt Where lt s gt 0 2 CRC is being calculated and is not valid yet lt s gt 3 for valid and correct lt s gt 4 for CRC verification has failed and the printer will restart shortly Note There are additional ESC used for test and configuration DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE THEM You can permanently damage the printer with some of these commands 100 10937 Rev F Page 283 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Green and Sleep Power Control The Model 9000 Printer has a remote power control command that instructs it to enter sleep mode When the command is issued the printer enters sleep and consumes less power Unlike pushing the Power button remote sleep mode leaves the communications active All commands except the exit power down command are ignored Green mode is only available in USB mode In Green USB Vbus is monitored and the printer enters a very low power state until Vbus is restored ESC y Remote Power Control ASCII ESC y lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 79H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt n gt IPCL amp YX17 or
447. website www fonts com or by phone in U S amp Canada toll free 1 800 424 8973 directly at 1 781 970 6020 or the United Kingdom Free Phone 0800 371242 direct 44 0 1737 765959 Internal Fonts The Model 9000 is provided by default with a standard WGL4 0 outline based font and several bitmap fonts Optionally the WGL4 0 font may be replaces with a GB18030 stroke based font Additional user defined outline or stroke fonts may be used as required The default font provided with the Model 9000 is called Andale Mono Regular from Monotype This is a fixed pitch font that produces good results when compared to legacy bitmap fonts As another alternative the printer may be ordered with a variable pitch font which will allow variable pitch printing 100 10937 Rev F Page 247 Model 9000 Unicode and Fonts Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Font Storage The Model 9000 supports a Flash file system used to store fonts custom graphic and custom macros A file system interface is provided for this system where the host application may download files In addition TransAct Technologies provides a file loading tool that runs on Windows based systems To allow flexible and easy support for all kinds of fonts fonts are stored in the Model 9000 printer as a standard font file These files are typically not visible to the user however TransAct Technologies provides a support tool that will allow the user to load their own font directly from
448. will select and read a code page encoding file If the file does not exist the current code page will be selected If the code page definition is not complete only the character locations defined by the file will be effected Note This command functions by redefining the code page translation table if Unicode UTF encoding is active all code page selection and modification commands do not functional and have no effect Page 88 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC C ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL Description Insert Euro character ESC C lt n gt 1BH 5BH 43H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 67 gt lt n gt amp EU The ESC C lt n gt command allows an application to replace any character in the currently active character set with the Euro character The character to be replaced is defined by lt n gt For example if the currently active character set is CP 850 multi lingual and OD5H character is to be the Euro character 1BH 5BH 43H OD5H replaces the character at OD5H with the Euro symbol Euro Character Substitution Matrix Name Epson IBM Code Page Insertion Point hex 850 26 850 0xD5 Turkev 857 57 857 OXD5 Win Cyrillic 52 1022 0X88 Win Turkish 51 1021 0X80 Win Greek 50 1020 0X80 Win Hebrew 62 1032 0X80 Win Baltic 68 1034 0X80 100 10937 Table 18 Euro Character Substitution Matrix Note This command function
449. ws all preprocessed status commands to be 100 10937 Rev F Page 281 Communications Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Model 9000 Dynamic Configuration In some cases it is required to dynamically change or temporarily change the printers configuration The following commands are provided to quickly set or temporarily change the way the printer functions Function Set Secondary Paper Color ASCII ESC P lt c gt lt s gt lt r gt lt b gt Hex 1BH 7EH 50H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 80 gt Description This command reconfigures the paper type and secondary paper color This command should only be use when the colors of the installed paper are changed ESC P lt c gt lt s gt lt r gt lt b gt sets the paper type as follows Where lt c gt Paper type lt c gt in Decimal Monochrome lt s gt Speed Override Speed in IPS lt s gt 4 0 default Max value is 56 or 14 IPS If the Speed is set too high for the paper poor print will result lt r gt red energy Typically 12 20 lt b gt Black energy Typically 18 35 in nonvolatile memory The values take effect immediately and will remain until changed by these commands or manual configuration This command should only be used when needed Note These commands change the configuration of the printer that is stored Function Auto Calibrate the Black Dot sensor ASCII ESC A Hex 1BH 7EH 41H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 65 gt Description T
450. x2F80 OxEF41 Ox2D00 OxEDC1 OxEC81 0x2C40 OxE401 0x24C0O 0x2580 OxE541 0x2700 OxE7C1 OxE681 0x2640 0x2200 OxE2C1 OxE381 0x2340 OxE101 Ox21C0 0x2080 OxE041 OxA001 0x60C0 0x6180 OxA141 0x6300 OxA3C1 0xA281 0x6240 0x6600 OxA6C1 OxA781 0x6740 OxA501 0x65C0 0x6480 OxA441 Ox6CO0 OxACC1 OxAD81 Ox6D40 OxAFO1 Ox6FCO Ox6E80 OxAE41 OxAAO1 Ox6ACO Ox6B80 OxAB41 0x6900 OxA9C1 0xA881 0x6840 0x7800 OxB8C1 O0xB981 0x7940 OxBBO1 Ox7BCO 0x7A80 OxBA41 OxBEO1 Ox7ECO Ox7F80 OxBF41 Ox7D0O OxBDC1 OxBC81 Ox7C40 OxB401 0x74C0 0x7580 OxB541 0x7700 OxB7C1 0xB681 0x7640 0x7200 OxB2C1 O0xB381 0x7340 OxB101 0x71C0 0x7080 OxB041 0x5000 0x90C1 0x9181 0x5140 0x9301 0x53C0 0x5280 0x9241 0x9601 0x56C0 0x5780 0x9741 0x5500 0x95C1 0x9481 0x5440 0x9C01 Ox5CCO 0x5D80 Ox9D41 Ox5FOO Ox9FC1 0x9E81 Ox5E40 Ox5A00 Ox9AC1 0x9B81 Ox5B40 0x9901 0x59C0 0x5880 0x9841 0x8801 O0x48C0 0x4980 0x8941 0x4B00 Ox8BC1 0x8A81 Ox4A40 Ox4E00 Ox8EC1 Ox8F81 Ox4F40 Ox8D01 OxADCO 0x4C80 0x8C41 0x4400 Ox84C1 0x8581 0x4540 0x8701 0x47C0 0x4680 0x8641 0x8201 0x42C0 0x4380 0x8341 Ox4100 O0x81C1 0x8081 0x4040 Update a CRC check on the given buffer SE x 4x2 41 unsigned short crcbuf unsigned short crc int len unsigned char buf int i for i 0 i lt len itt cre cre gt gt 8 amp Oxff cretab cre buft amp Oxff
451. xadecimal 1BH 1FH 62H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 98 gt IPCL amp UB lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS none Description The ESC US b lt Name gt lt 0 gt command erases the current macro initializes the macro buffer structure and redirects the following data to the macro buffer It uses the lt Name gt field as a reference If the name already exists in the flash user store the command is ignored The command must be followed by the End name macro record command with the same name If the data that follows is larger than the macro buffer about 16K the macro definition is terminated without saving any data The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 125 100 10937 Rev F Page 121 Programming Codes Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Function End named macro record ASCII ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 65H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 101 gt IPCL amp UG lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS none Description The ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt command ends the macro record operation and saves the macro to flash It uses the lt Name gt field to verify the command end and must match the Begin named macro record command If the name already exists in the flash user store or the macro memory is exceeded the command is valid and the lt Name gt field prints If there is not enough room in the flash us
452. y barcode character translations must be done by the host application Depending on the Unicode mode values from 128 to 255 may be required to be encoded in UTF before they are sent to the printer Note In UTF8 or UTF16 modes all data is assumed to be UTF encoded O Note Any values greater than 255 will be converted into a space 0x20 Page 130 Rev F 100 10937 Model 9000 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Linear Barcodes Code 39 and Code 39 Extended Function Code 39 ASCII ESC b 412 information NUL Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt 1 gt 03H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt 1 gt lt 3 gt ESC b lt 1 gt TransAct NUL Note Case conversion to upper case AU eT ROA NS AGT Figure 12 Code 39 Example Code 39 is an alphanumeric bar code It is a discrete self checking variable length code The printer prints the complete data field The number of characters that can be printed depends on the bar width scaling There are two modes of operation for the Code 39 barcodes The first is in a variable length format In this mode all characters sent to the printer will be printed up to the termination character Only 0 9 A Z period and space may be printed and Characters may be used as escape characters for full 128 character support If illegal characters are passed to the printer they are converted to legal codes For example a would be conve

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Tannoy BaseStation One      Promis User Manual  Proscapes 8608-0408-01 Installation Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file